JP5324072B2 - Slot machine - Google Patents

Abstract

<P>PROBLEM TO BE SOLVED: To provide a game machine capable of normally inspecting the detection conditions of the operation of an operation means for a performance. <P>SOLUTION: In the case of receiving an inspection command for specifying the operation check of a touch panel and checking the operation of the touch panel, a CPU 91a inhibits command reception interruption processing until a touch operation is detected and does not receive a new command during this time. <P>COPYRIGHT: (C)2009,JPO&amp;INPIT

Description

  The present invention relates to a gaming machine such as a pachinko gaming machine or a slot machine capable of performing a predetermined game.

  2. Description of the Related Art In recent years, gaming machines have presentation means with a relatively high control load, such as a liquid crystal display, in addition to presentation means such as sound, lamps, and LEDs as effects related to games. Therefore, in addition to the game control means for controlling the game, an effect control means for controlling the effect means is mounted, and the effect control means controls the operation of the effect means according to the command transmitted from the game control means. Many gaming machines designed to do so have been put into practical use.

  As this type of gaming machine, a touch panel is arranged on the front of the liquid crystal display, and it is possible to select menu display and production of history display by linking the operation with the touch panel and the display content of the liquid crystal display, etc. There has been proposed a gaming machine that includes an operation unit for production in addition to the operation unit used for the progress of the game, and the production control unit controls the production according to the operation of the operation unit for production (for example, Patent Document 1). reference).

  On the other hand, as a gaming machine having production means such as a liquid crystal display, in order to confirm the operation of the production means before shipment, an inspection command is transmitted from the test control means connected to the production control means, and before shipment A game in which an inspection command is transmitted from the game control means in order to inspect the operation of the effect means and to confirm the operation of the effect means after shipment, so that the operation of the effect means can be inspected even after shipment. A machine has been proposed (see, for example, Patent Document 2).

Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2004-73651 JP-A-8-266723

  As in the gaming machine described in Patent Document 2, when performing an operation check for checking whether or not the performance control means operates normally during development or before shipment, the test game control means is performed. In connection with the control means, the inspection commands are sequentially transmitted. However, as in the gaming machine described in Patent Document 1, in the gaming machine in which the production control means controls the production according to the operation of the production operation means. When it is necessary to inspect the operation detection status of the operation means for production, if the next inspection command is erroneously transmitted before the operation is detected, detection of the operation of the operation means for production is awaited. Instead, the next inspection command is received and the operation is shifted to the next operation test, and there is a problem that the inspection of the detection state of the operation of the operation means for production cannot be normally performed.

  The present invention has been made paying attention to such problems, and an object of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine that can normally check the detection status of the operation of the effect operating means.

In order to solve the above-described problem, a slot machine according to claim 1 of the present invention provides:
The game can be started by setting a predetermined number of bets for one game using the gaming value, and fluctuates by rotating a reel on which a plurality of types of symbols that can be distinguished from each other are rotated. A slot machine in which one game is completed by deriving a display result to a displayable variable display device, and a winning can be generated according to the display result of the variable display device,
Game control means (main control unit 41) for controlling a game and transmitting control information (command) based on the control of the game;
Multiple types of production means;
Production control means (sub control unit 91) for controlling production by the plurality of types of production means based on the received control information (command);
Production operation means (touch panel) provided separately from game operation means (start switch 7, stop switches 8L, 8C, 8R, etc.) operated when the player performs operations related to the progress of the game,
With
The game control means (main control unit 41)
Control information generating means for generating the control information (command);
Game control information storage means (normal command transmission buffer) having a plurality of storage areas capable of storing control information (commands) generated by the control information generation means;
Control information transmission means for transmitting control information (command) stored in the game control information storage means (normal command transmission buffer) to the effect control means (sub-control unit 91);
Including
The production control means (sub control unit 91)
When the control information for test (inspection command) of the operation means for production (touch panel) is received, the operation means inspection means for production for performing the inspection of the detection status of the operation of the operation means for production (touch panel);
After receiving the test control information (inspection command) of the production operation means (touch panel), control based on reception of new control information (command) until the operation of the production operation means (touch panel) is detected. Inhibiting control prohibited means during inspection,
Production control information storage means (reception buffer) having a plurality of storage areas capable of storing the received control information (command);
Performing an effect to read control information (commands) stored in the effect control information storage means (reception buffer) in the order in which they are stored, and to perform an effect in accordance with the read control information (command) Control means;
Including
The presentation control information storing unit (receiving buffer) may have a lot of storage space than the storage area where the gaming control information storage unit (normal command transmit buffer) has,
The slot machine is
A stepping motor for rotating the reel by exciting in a predetermined order with respect to a plurality of excitation phases arranged so as to surround a rotor incorporating a permanent magnet;
The game control means includes
Drive control means for performing drive control to excite the excitation phase of the stepping motor in the predetermined order;
A memory for storing data to be read and written by the microcomputer constituting the game control means including data indicating a stop phase which is an excitation phase excited by the stepping motor when the reel is stopped. Data storage means having an area and capable of holding data stored in the storage area even when power supply to the slot machine is stopped,
A setting value that is set by selecting any setting value from a plurality of types of setting values with different ratios for determining whether or not winning is permitted based on an operation of a predetermined setting operation means. Setting means;
Stored data determination means for determining whether or not the data stored in the data storage means is normal;
Disabling means for disabling the progress of the game when the stored data determination means determines that the data stored in the data storage means is not normal;
In a state where the progress of the game is disabled by the disabling means, the progress of the game is performed on the condition that the setting value is newly set by the setting value setting means based on the operation of the setting operation means. The disabling means for canceling the disabled state and allowing the game to proceed,
A setting time initialization means for initializing data stored in the data storage means as a new setting value is set based on an operation of the predetermined setting operation means;
Including
The data storage means stores, in the storage area, data indicating a stop phase that is an excitation phase excited by the stepping motor when the reel stops.
The setting initialization means initializes data excluding at least data indicating the stop phase of the stepping motor among data stored in the data storage means, and does not initialize data indicating the stop phase,
The drive control means is based on data indicating the stop phase of the stepping motor stored in the data storage means when the data storage means is initialized by the setting time initialization means. The drive control of the stepping motor is performed .
According to this feature, in the case where an operation test is performed by connecting the game control means for operation test to the effect control means in order to check whether the effect control means operates normally during development or before shipment. When the production control means receives the test control information for the production operation means, the control based on the reception of the new control information is prohibited until the operation of the production operation means is detected thereafter. If the operation detection status of the production operation means is not inspected, the operation does not shift to the operation based on the reception of new control information.For example, after the production control means receives the test control information of the production operation means, Even when the next test control information is newly transmitted by mistake before the operation of the production operation means is detected, the detection of the operation detection status of the production operation means can be normally performed.
In addition, the production control information storage means has a larger storage area than the storage area of the game control information storage means, and inspects whether the production control means operates normally during development or before shipment. Therefore, when a game control means for operation test is connected to the effect control means and an operation test is performed, even when control information is continuously transmitted from the game control means for operation test, control that can be transmitted at a time The number of information and the transmission interval are not limited according to the number of storage areas of the game control information storage means, that is, the number of storage areas allocated for the number of storage areas that do not overflow assuming normal games. Since a large amount of control information can be continuously transmitted up to the limit of the storage area of the information storage means, the efficiency of the operation test can be effectively increased.
Note that a game machine that performs a predetermined game corresponds to a ball game machine or a slot machine.
Further, the control information may be information indicating a control state of the game control means, or information indicating designation or instruction of effect control.
In addition, the fact that the in-inspection control prohibiting means prohibits the control based on the reception of new control information may not be the reception of new control information itself, or may be received but received new control information. The control based on the above may not be performed.
The slot machine of claim 2 of the present invention is a slot machine according to claim 1,
A predetermined first frame;
A second frame that is openable and closable with respect to the first frame;
An open / close state detection means for detecting an open / close state of the second frame;
With
The game control means includes
Basic processing execution means for performing basic processing for proceeding in stages;
Interrupt processing execution means for interrupting the basic processing and performing interrupt processing at predetermined time intervals;
Control information generating means for generating the control information;
Control information storage means for storing control information generated by the control information generation means;
Control information transmission means for transmitting control information stored in the control information storage means to the effect control means;
Open / closed state detection monitoring means for monitoring the detection state of the open / closed state detection means;
Including
The control information generating means
Game control information generating means for generating game control information according to the progress of the game as control information in the basic processing;
When the opening / closing state detection monitoring unit detects a change in the detection state of the opening / closing state detection unit, an opening / closing state that generates opening / closing state detection information indicating the detection state of the opening / closing state detection unit after the change is generated as the control information Detection information generating means;
Including
The control information storage means includes
Game control information storage means capable of storing a plurality of the game control information;
Open / closed state detection information storing means for storing the open / closed state detection information;
Separately
The control information transmitting means includes
While transmitting the control information stored in the control information storage means in the interruption process to the effect control means,
Even when a plurality of control information is stored in the control information storage means, only one control information is transmitted in one interrupt process without transmitting a plurality of control information in one interrupt process. And
When the opening / closing state detection information is stored in the opening / closing state detection information storage unit, the opening / closing state detection information is given priority regardless of whether or not the game control information is stored in the game control information storage unit. If the opening / closing state detection information is not stored in the opening / closing state detection information storage means and the game control information is stored in the game control information storage means, Send the game control information generated at the earliest stage,
The production control means includes
An opening determination means for determining whether or not the second frame is open based on a detection state of the opening / closing state detection means indicated by the opening / closing state detection information received from the game control means;
An opening notifying means for notifying the opening of the second frame when the opening determining means determines that the second frame is open;
It is characterized by including.
The slot machine of claim 3 of the present invention is a slot machine according to claim 1 or 2,
Special gaming state control means for controlling the gaming state to a special gaming state advantageous to the player until a predetermined ending condition is satisfied when a predetermined special transition condition is satisfied;
Production selection means for selecting the type of production executed in the special gaming state in accordance with an instruction from the player;
A selection effect execution means for executing an effect of the type selected by the effect selection means when being controlled in the special gaming state;
Whether or not a lottery with different winning conditions is performed according to the type of the effect selected by the effect selection means when the special gaming state is controlled, and whether or not a predetermined condition is satisfied based on the result of the lottery Condition establishment determination means for determining whether or not
Whether or not to control the gaming state to a specific gaming state advantageous to a player different from the special gaming state after the special gaming state is ended when it is determined that the condition is established by the condition establishment judging means. A specific gaming state determination means to determine;
Specific game state notifying means for notifying a player that the specific game state is controlled when it is determined by the specific game state determining means to be controlled to the specific game state;
Specific game state control means for controlling the game state to the specific game state after the special game state is ended when it is determined by the specific game state determination means to control to the specific game state;
With
The specific game state notifying means notifies that the game state is controlled to the specific game state in a mode corresponding to the type of the effect selected by the effect selecting means.

The slot machine according to claim 4 of the present invention is a slot machine according to any one of claims 1 to 3
The production operation means includes a touch panel that detects an operation within a predetermined area based on detection states of a plurality of sensors (light receiving devices 56a and 56b), and identifies the operated position.
When the detection time of one of the plurality of sensors (light receiving devices 56a and 56b) exceeds a predetermined time, the production control means (sub control unit 91) exceeds the predetermined time. An abnormality sensor invalidating means for invalidating detection of the sensors (light receiving devices 56a and 56b) is included.
According to this feature, if the detection time of any sensor exceeds a predetermined time, the detection of that sensor is invalidated, so even if some sensors fail, only the failed sensor is invalidated. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the touch panel from becoming unusable even though the player's operation can be detected by a normal sensor.
The anomaly sensor invalidation means may invalidate the sensor after the detection time exceeds the predetermined time, and may not use the invalidated sensor thereafter. The status may be checked and the invalidation may be canceled when the normal status (non-detection status) is confirmed, or the status is invalidated when the normal status is confirmed upon restart. May be canceled.

The slot machine of claim 5 of the present invention is a slot machine according to any one of claims 1-4,
The production control means (sub control unit 91)
An operation effect execution means for executing an operation effect whose contents change in accordance with an operation of the effect operation means (touch panel);
When the operation means for the effect (touch panel) is operated in the operation effect, it is more advantageous when the game is advanced than when the operation means for the effect (touch panel) is not operated in the operation effect. Advantageous effect execution means for executing an advantageous effect (addition of the number of falling role notifications);
It is characterized by including.
According to this feature, when the production operation means is operated, an advantageous production that is advantageous when the game is advanced as compared with when the production operation means is operated is executed. Attempts to obtain an advantageous effect that is advantageous when proceeding, and actively operates the operation means for the effect. Thereby, a player's willingness to operate the operation means for production during operation production can be heightened.

The slot machine of claim 6 of the present invention is a slot machine according to any one of claims 1 to 5
The game control means includes
Game value storage means (credit counter assigned to the RAM 41c) for storing a player's own game value (credit: number of medals owned by the player);
Bet number setting means for setting a bet number using at least the game value (credit) stored in the game value storage means;
A game value return control (credit settlement process) for returning the game value (credit) stored in the game value storage means in response to an operation of a predetermined game value return operation means (settlement switch 10). Game value return control means to perform,
Including
The production execution control means includes:
A sound output control means (sub-control unit 91) that performs control to continuously output a continuous game sound effect (BGM) over one game based on the establishment of a predetermined condition (special role winning, start of continuous production). Sound output control)
In a state in which the sound output control means outputs a continuous game effect sound (BGM) at a normal volume, a predetermined time (30 seconds) has passed without the bet number being set after the game is over. Sometimes, a volume reduction control means (control for mute by the sub-control unit 91) for performing control to lower the volume of the sound effect output from the slot machine
Including
The volume reduction control means is configured to control the game value return control (credit credit) by the game value return control means in a state where the sound output control means outputs a continuous game sound effect (BGM) at the normal volume. The control is also performed to reduce the volume of the sound effect output from the slot machine even when the settlement process is executed.
According to this feature, when a predetermined time elapses without setting the number of bets after the previous game is finished in a state where the continuous game sound effect is output at the normal volume, that is, the previous game In addition to the case where the state in which no operation related to the progress of the game is performed after the completion of the game continues for a predetermined time, the slot for the game value return control is performed according to the operation of the game value return operation means by the player. The sound effect sound output from the machine is reduced. In other words, in the state where the continuous game sound effect is output at the normal volume, the sound effect output from the slot machine by the player's intention even before the predetermined time has elapsed since the end of the previous game. Therefore, even if the game is interrupted, there is no inconvenience to surrounding players.

Slot machine according to claim 7 of the present invention is a slot machine according to any one of claims 1 to 6
The game control means (main control unit 41)
Bet number storage means (BET counter assigned to the RAM 41c) for storing the set bet number;
A bet number return control (betting number reimbursement process) for returning a gaming value corresponding to the bet number stored in the bet number storage means in response to an operation of a predetermined bet number returning operation means (settlement switch 10). Bet number return control means to be performed;
Including
The production execution control means includes:
Sound output control means for performing control (sound output control) to continuously output a continuous game sound effect (BGM) over one game based on the establishment of a predetermined condition (special role winning, start of continuous production) When,
In a state in which the sound output control means outputs a continuous game effect sound (BGM) at a normal volume, a predetermined time (30 seconds) has passed without the bet number being set after the game is over. Sometimes, a volume reduction control means for performing control (silence control) to lower the volume of the sound effect output from the slot machine ,
Including
In the state where the sound output control means outputs a continuous game sound effect (BGM) at the normal sound volume, the volume reduction control means controls the bet number return control (the number of bets) by the bet number return control means. The control is also performed to reduce the volume of the sound effect output from the slot machine even when the settlement process is executed.
According to this feature, when a predetermined time elapses without setting the number of bets after the previous game is finished in a state where the continuous game sound effect is output at the normal volume, that is, the previous game From the slot machine , the bet number return control is performed not only in the case where the operation related to the progress of the game is not performed for a predetermined time after the end of the game, but also according to the operation of the bet number return operation means by the player. The volume of the output sound effect decreases. In other words, in the state where the continuous game sound effect is output at the normal volume, the sound effect output from the slot machine by the player's intention even before the predetermined time has elapsed since the end of the previous game. Therefore, even if the game is interrupted, there is no inconvenience to surrounding players.

In addition, in claims 6 and 7 , the end of the game means that when a display result is derived in all of the variable display areas, or when a prize accompanied with a game value is given, This includes the timing resulting from the end of the game, such as when the provision of the game value has ended.
Further, in claims 6 and 7 , “continuous game sound effects are continuously output beyond one game” means that, for example, sound output is started during the game and then continuously after the game is ended. Playing game sound effects, only after one game is finished and until the next and subsequent games are started, that is, those that are continuously output over multiple games It is not limited, and after one game is finished, at least until the next game is ready to start (until a predetermined number of bets are set), etc. included.
Further, in claims 6 and 7 , the control for lowering the volume of the sound effect output from the slot machine may be control for lowering the volume level of the sound effect output from the slot machine from a normal level. However, it may be controlled to completely mute. Further, the control may be such that the currently output sound effect is stopped and a sound effect having a lower output volume is output.

The slot machine of claim 8 of the present invention is a slot machine according to any one of claims 1 to 7
A game control board (game control board 40) on which the game control means (main control unit 41) is mounted;
A gaming electronic component (inserted medal sensor 31) including at least one of a first electronic component that outputs a signal related to the progress of the game and a second electronic component that receives a signal related to the progress of the game;
The gaming electronic component (inserted medal sensor 31) is detachable by connecting the connectors (board side connector 620a and cable side connector 610a / board side connector 621a and cable side connector 611a / board side connector 622g and cable side connector 612g). ) And the game control board (game control board 40) for electrically connecting the game electronic component (inserted medal sensor 31) and the game control board (game control board 40). Wiring (cables 600a, 601g);
The wiring and connectors (board side connector 621a, cable side connector 611a / board side connector 622g, and cable side connector 612g) are connected to each other, and the gaming electronic component (inserted medal sensor 31) and the game control board (game control board) 40) a relay board (operation part relay board 110) for relaying input / output of signals to / from,
The connection between the connectors on the wiring between the game electronic component (the inserted medal sensor 31) and the game control board (game control board 40) is broken, and the release restriction part related to the connection between the connectors is destroyed. Electronic component connection release restriction means (connector restriction members 500a, 650) that form a connection release restriction state that makes the release impossible unless
With
The electronic component connection release regulating means is
Connector (board side connector 620a and cable side connector 610a / board side connector 621a and cable) of the wiring (cable 600a) between the game control board (game control board 40) and the relay board (operation unit relay board 110) First electronic component connection release restricting means (connector restricting members 500, 650) that disable the connection between the side connectors 611a),
Connection between the wiring board (cable 601g) and the connector (board side connector 622g and cable side connector 612g) between the relay board (operation unit relay board 110) and the game electronic component (inserted medal sensor 31) is performed. A second electronic component connection release restricting means (connector restricting member 650) which makes the release impossible;
It is characterized by including.
According to this feature, not only the wiring connector between the game control board and the relay board, but also the release of the connection between the wiring connector between the relay board and the gaming electronic component is regulated, The release of the connection between all the connectors of the wiring provided between the game electronic component and the game control board is restricted. As a result, it is difficult to perform any illegal act such as replacing any connector with a connector such as an unauthorized driving tool and causing the game control board to input / output an illegal signal related to the progress of the game. game benefits and slot machine you set the available information to easily acquire can state, the slot machine is special pay was set to the state was elected, for example in the gaming store sales at the start or the like in order to obtain the benefits by using the implantation instrument It is possible to effectively prevent illegal business such as providing to customers.
In addition, since the connection release restriction state is formed by the electronic component connection release restriction means, in order to release the connection between the connectors, the release restriction part must be destroyed, and after this, the connection is released again. Since it becomes extremely difficult to form a connection release restriction state and it takes time and effort, it is possible to more effectively suppress the fraud.
One or more relay boards may be connected between one gaming electronic component and the game control board. When a plurality of relay boards are connected, the electronic component connection release restriction Preferably, the means includes third electronic component connection release restriction means that makes it impossible to release connection between the connectors of the wiring between one relay board and another relay board. The release of the connection between all the connectors of the wiring provided between the game electronic component and the game control board is regulated.

  Examples of the present invention will be described below.

  A slot machine according to a first embodiment to which the present invention is applied will be described with reference to the drawings. A slot machine 1 according to the present embodiment is rotatable to a housing 2a having an open front surface and a side end of the housing 2a. The front door 2b is pivotally supported.

  Inside the casing 2a of the slot machine 1 of the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 2, reels 2L, 2C, 2R (hereinafter, left reel, middle reel, right reel) in which a plurality of types of symbols are arranged on the outer periphery are arranged. 1) are arranged side by side in the horizontal direction, and as shown in FIG. 1, a see-through window 3 in which three consecutive symbols arranged on the reels 2L, 2C, 2R are provided on the front door 2b. It is arranged so that it can be seen from.

  As shown in FIG. 3, "red 7 (black 7 in the figure)", "blue 7 (shaded 7 in the figure)", "white 7", "replay" are provided on the outer peripheral portions of the reels 2L, 2C, and 2R, respectively. ”,“ Watermelon ”,“ Red cherry (black cherry in the figure) ”,“ Blue cherry (shaded cherry in the figure) ”,“ Bell ”,“ Orange ”, etc. , 21 are drawn each. The symbols drawn on the outer peripheries of the reels 2L, 2C, and 2R are displayed in the upper, middle, and lower three stages in the see-through window 3, respectively.

  The reels 2L, 2C, and 2R are provided in correspondence with each other and rotated by reel motors 32L, 32C, and 32R (see FIG. 4), so that the symbols of the reels 2L, 2C, and 2R are continuously formed in the see-through window 3. In addition to being displayed while changing, by stopping the rotation of the reels 2L, 2C, and 2R, three consecutive symbols are derived and displayed on the fluoroscopic window 3 as display results.

  A display area 51a of a liquid crystal display 51 (see FIG. 1) is arranged at a position on the front side (player side) of each reel 2L, 2C, 2R of the front door 2b. The liquid crystal display 51 has a normally white liquid crystal panel having transparency in a state where no voltage is applied to the liquid crystal element, and a transmissive region 51b corresponding to the see-through window 3 of the display region 51a. The reels 2L, 2C, and 2R can be visually recognized from the player side through the see-through window 3. Further, a backlight (not shown) for irradiating the display area 51a from behind is provided on the back surface of the display area 51a excluding the transmissive area 51b, and the back surface further has a concealing member for concealing the inside. (Not shown) is provided.

  On the front side (front side in FIG. 1) of the liquid crystal display 51, an instruction (for example, touch operation) from the player to the display surface is detected, and the position (for example, the position where the touch operation is performed) is specified. Light-emitting devices 56a and 56b and light-receiving devices 57a and 57b that constitute a touch panel for the above-described purpose are installed. The light emitting devices 56a and 56b include a plurality of infrared light emitting elements (for example, LEDs). The light receiving devices 57a and 57b include a plurality of infrared light receiving elements (for example, phototransistors).

  The light emitting device 56a and the light receiving device 57a are installed in pairs in the horizontal direction across the display surface of the liquid crystal display 51. The light emitting device 56a and the light receiving device 57a are installed so that infrared rays radiated from the plurality of light emitting elements provided in the light emitting device 56a can be received by the plurality of light receiving elements provided in the light receiving device 57a. Similarly, the light emitting device 56b and the light receiving device 57b are installed in pairs in the vertical direction across the display area of the liquid crystal display 51. The light emitting device 56b and the light receiving device 57b are installed so that infrared rays emitted from the plurality of light emitting elements provided in the light emitting device 56b can be received by the plurality of light receiving elements provided in the light receiving device 57b.

  In the present embodiment, infrared grids are formed along the display surface of the liquid crystal display 51 by emitting infrared rays from the light emitting devices 56a and 56b. When a touch operation is performed on the display surface by the player, the light receiving devices 57a and 57b detect the shielding of infrared rays and output a signal for specifying the position where the detected light receiving element is arranged. To the touch panel controller 99 described later. The touch panel controller 99 can specify the position where the touch operation is performed on the display surface of the liquid crystal display 51 based on signals from the light receiving devices 56a and 56b, and the touch panel is formed by these. Yes.

  The light emitting devices 56 a and 56 b constituting the touch panel are installed on the left side and the lower side of the display surface of the liquid crystal display 51, and the light receiving devices 57 a and 57 b are installed on the right side and the upper side of the display surface of the liquid crystal display 51. The touch panel can detect a touch operation in an area surrounded by the light emitting devices 56a and 56b and the light receiving devices 57a and 57b, and can specify a position where the touch operation is performed.

  On the front door 2b, a medal insertion unit 4 into which medals can be inserted, a medal payout exit 9 from which medals are paid out, and credits (the number of medals stored as a player's own game value) are used for one medal. A single bet switch 5 that is operated when setting the bet number, and using a credit, the maximum bet number (a game in this embodiment) among a specified number of bets determined in accordance with the game state within the range. Regardless of the state, the MAXBET switch 6 operated when setting 3), the medal stored as credit and the medal used for setting the bet amount are settled (the medal used for setting the credit and bet number) Is operated when stopping the rotation of the reels 2L, 2C, and 2R. Stop switch 8L, 8C, 8R, viewing and initialization of game history data relating to the results of games already played, selection switch 56 and decision switch 57 operated when selecting a production mode can be operated by the player Each is provided.

  The front door 2b also displays a credit indicator 11 for displaying the number of medals stored as credits, the number of medals acquired in a big bonus, which will be described later, and an error code indicating the contents when an error occurs. A game auxiliary display 12 and a payout display 13 for displaying the number of medals paid out due to the occurrence of a winning are provided.

  Further, on the front door 2b, a 1BETLED 14 that notifies that the bet number is set by 1 is turned on, a 2BETLED 15 that notifies that the bet number is set by 2 is turned on, and that 3 bets are set. 3BET LED 16 to notify when lit, insertion request LED 17 to notify that a medal can be inserted is lit, start valid LED 18 to notify that the game start operation by the operation of the start switch 7 is effective, wait (previous Waiting state LED 19 for informing that it is in the state of waiting for the start of reel rotation since a certain period of time has not elapsed since the start of the game, during replay informing that it is in the replay game described later An LED 20 is provided.

  Inside the MAXBET switch 6, a BET switch valid LED 21 is lit to notify that the setting operation of the betting number by the operation of the one-sheet BET switch 5, the two-sheet BET switch 5b, and the MAXBET switch 6 is effective (see FIG. 4). In the stop switches 8L, 8C, and 8R, left, middle, and right stop effective LEDs 22L that notify that the reel stop operation by the corresponding stop switches 8L, 8C, and 8R is effective are turned on. , 22C and 22R (see FIG. 4), respectively.

  Inside the front door 2b is a reset switch 23 for detecting a reset operation for releasing an error state described later and a stop state described later by a predetermined key operation, while changing a set value and confirming a set value described later. A set value display 24 for displaying the set value at that time, and a flow path of medals inserted from the medal insertion unit 4 on the side of a hopper tank 34a (see FIG. 2) described later provided in the housing 2a or A medal selector having a insertion medal sensor 31 for detecting a medal that is inserted from the flow path switching solenoid 30 and the medal insertion unit 4 and selectively flows to the hopper tank 34a side to selectively switch to one of the medal payout exits 9 side. The door opening detection switch 25 (refer FIG. 4) which detects the open state of the front door 1b is provided.

  As shown in FIG. 2, a reel sensor 33L capable of detecting the reel reference positions of the reels 2L, 2C, and 2R, the reel motors 32L, 32C, and 32R, and the reels 2L, 2C, and 2R as shown in FIG. , 33C, 33R (see FIG. 4), an external output board 1000 for outputting an external output signal, a hopper tank 34a for storing medals inserted from the medal insertion section 4, and a hopper tank 34a. A hopper unit 34 including a hopper motor 34b for paying out medals from the medal payout opening 9, a payout sensor 32C for detecting medals paid out by driving the hopper motor 34b, and a power supply box 100 are provided.

  On the side of the hopper unit 34, an overflow tank 35 is provided for storing medals overflowing from the hopper tank 34a. Inside the overflow tank 35, a full sensor 35 a made up of a pair of electrically conductive members spaced apart from each other and provided at a height capable of detecting a predetermined amount of stored medals is provided. It is possible to detect that the medal storage amount stored in the inside when it is conductive by contacting through the medal stored in the inside exceeds a predetermined amount, that is, that the overflow tank is full. It has become.

  On the front surface of the power supply box 100 is a stop for selecting whether to enable / disable the stop function that controls the stop state (a state in which the progress of the game is restricted until a reset operation is performed) at the end of a big bonus, which will be described later. Switch 36a, for selecting the validity / invalidity of the automatic settlement function for controlling automatic settlement processing (processing for returning (returning) medals stored as credits regardless of the player's operation) at the end of a big bonus, which will be described later It functions as an automatic settlement switch 36b, a setting key switch 37 for switching to the setting change mode at the time of startup, a reset switch for canceling the error state and the stop state in normal times, and an internal lottery described later in the setting change mode. A reset / setting switch 38 that functions as a setting switch for changing the setting value of the winning probability (race rate) Power switch 39 is operated to ON / OFF the power is provided.

  When a game is played in the slot machine 1 of the present embodiment, first, medals are inserted from the medal insertion unit 4 or a bet number is set using credits. In order to use credits, the single BET switch 5 or the MAXBET switch 6 may be operated. When a predetermined number of bets determined according to the gaming state are set, the pay lines L1 to L6 (see FIG. 1) become effective, and the operation of the start switch 7 is effective, that is, the game can be started. It becomes a state. In this embodiment, three cards are determined as the prescribed number of bets regardless of the gaming state. In addition, when a medal is inserted exceeding the maximum number out of the prescribed number corresponding to the gaming state, the amount is added to the credit.

  The winning line is a line that is set to determine whether the combination of symbols displayed on the perspective windows 3 of the reels 2L, 2C, and 2R is a winning symbol combination. In this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 1, the winning line L1 set over the symbols arranged in the upper stage of each reel 2L, 2C, 2R, and the symbols arranged in the lower stage of each reel 2L, 2C, 2R are straddled. The winning line L2, the lower stage of the reel 2L, the middle stage of the reel 2C, the upper stage of the reel 2R, that is, the winning line L3 set across the symbols lined up to the right, the upper stage of the reel 2L, the middle stage of the reel 2C, The lower line of the reel 2R, that is, the winning line L4 set over the symbols arranged in the lower right direction, the lower line of the reel 2L, the upper stage of the reel 2C, the winning line L5 set over the symbols arranged in the middle of the reel 2R, Six types of winning lines L6 set across the symbols arranged in the upper stage of the reel 2L, the lower stage of the reel 2C, and the middle stage of the reel 2R are defined as winning lines.

  As described above, in this embodiment, the winning lines L1 to L4 set across the symbols positioned on a straight line of the reels 2L, 2C, and 2R are different from the stopping positions of the upper, middle, and lower stages on all reels. And the winning lines L5 and L6 are set across the symbols that are not located on a straight line.

  In the present embodiment, the above-described L1 to L6 are applied as the pay lines. However, even if a pay line that is set across the symbols arranged in the middle stage of each reel 2L, 2C, 2R is added. good. Moreover, although the winning line set over the symbol which is not located on a straight line like L5 and L6 mentioned above is applied, only the winning line set over the symbol located on a straight line is applied. Anyway.

  When the start switch 7 is operated in a state where the game can be started, the reels 2L, 2C, and 2R rotate, and the symbols of the reels 2L, 2C, and 2R continuously vary. When any one of the stop switches 8L, 8C, 8R is operated in this state, the rotation of the corresponding reels 2L, 2C, 2R is stopped, and the display result is derived and displayed on the fluoroscopic window 3.

  Then, when all the reels 2L, 2C, 2R are stopped, one game is completed, and a predetermined symbol combination (hereinafter also referred to as a role) is set on any of the activated pay lines L1 to L6. When the reels 2L, 2C, and 2R are stopped as a display result, a winning occurs, and a predetermined number of medals are given to the player and added to the credit. Further, when the credit reaches the upper limit number (50 in this embodiment), medals are paid out directly from the medal payout opening 9 (see FIG. 1). If a combination of symbols with a medal payout is arranged on a plurality of activated pay lines, the total number of payouts determined for each of the symbol combinations arranged on the activated pay line is totaled. The total number of medals is awarded to the player. However, an upper limit (15 in this embodiment) is set for the number of medals to be awarded in one game, and when the total number of medals exceeds the upper limit, the upper limit number of medals is awarded. It will be. In addition, when a combination of symbols accompanying the transition of the game state is stopped as a display result of each reel 2L, 2C, 2R on any activated pay line L1 to L6, a game corresponding to the combination of symbols Transition to the state.

  FIG. 4 is a block diagram showing a configuration of the slot machine 1. As shown in FIG. 4, the slot machine 1 is provided with a game control board 40, an effect control board 90, and a power supply board 101. The game state is controlled by the game control board 40, and the game state is controlled by the effect control board 90. The production according to the control is controlled, and the power supply board 101 generates the drive power for the electrical components constituting the slot machine 1 and supplies them to each part.

  The power supply board 101 is supplied with AC100V power from the outside, and from this AC100V power supply, a DC voltage necessary for driving electrical components constituting the slot machine 1 is generated, and the game control board 40 and the game control board 40 It is supplied to the production control board 90 connected through the.

  The power board 101 is connected to the hopper motor 34b, the payout sensor 32C, the full sensor 35a, the stop switch 36a, the automatic settlement switch 36b, the setting key switch 37, the reset / setting switch 38, and the power switch 39. Yes.

  On the game control board 40, the one-sheet BET switch 5, the MAXBET switch 6, the start switch 7, the stop switches 8L, 8C, 8R, the settlement switch 10, the reset switch 23, the insertion medal sensor 31, the door opening detection switch 25, The reel sensors 33L, 33C, and 33R are connected, and the payout sensor 32C, the full sensor 35a, the stop switch 36a, the automatic settlement switch 36b, the setting key switch 37, and the reset / setting switch 38 described above via the power supply board 101. Are connected, and the detection signals of these connected switches are inputted.

  Further, the game control board 40 includes the credit display 11, the game auxiliary display 12, the payout display 13, 1 to 3 BET LEDs 14 to 16, the insertion request LED 17, the start valid LED 18, the waiting LED 19, the replaying LED 10, and the BET. The switch effective LED 21, left, middle, and right stop effective LEDs 22L, 22C, and 22R, the set value display 24, the flow path switching solenoid 30, and the reel motors 32L, 32C, and 32R are connected to each other, and are described above via the power supply board 101. The hopper motor 34b is connected, and these electric components are driven based on control of a main control unit 41 (described later) mounted on the game control board 40.

  The game control board 40 is composed of a microcomputer having a CPU 41a, ROM 41b, RAM 41c, and I / O port 41d. The main control unit 41 for controlling the game, random numbers in a predetermined range (0 to 16383 in this embodiment) are used. A random number generation circuit 42 for generating, a sampling circuit 43 for acquiring a random number from the random number generation circuit, and a switch detection circuit 44 for detecting a detection signal input from switches connected to the game control board 40 directly or via the power supply board 101 , A motor driving circuit 45 that controls the driving of the reel motors 32L, 32C, and 32R, a solenoid driving circuit 46 that controls the driving of the flow path switching solenoid 30, and a driving control of various displays and LEDs connected to the game control board 40. The power supply voltage supplied to the LED drive circuit 47 and the slot machine 1 to be monitored is monitored. An interruption detection circuit 48 that outputs a voltage drop signal indicating that to the main control unit 41 when a drop is detected. When the power is turned on or when an initialization command from the CPU 41a is not inputted, a reset signal is sent to the CPU 41a. Reset circuit 49 for giving, disconnection monitoring IC 50 for monitoring the electrical connection state between the game control board 40 and the insertion medal sensor 31 and the electrical connection state between the game control board 40 and the effect control board 90, and others Various devices and circuits are installed.

  The CPU 41a is provided with a plurality of registers (storage areas) for reading and writing data necessary for executing processing. Specifically, A and F registers (flag registers) that mainly store calculation data, B, C, D, E, H, and L registers that store general-purpose data, and data indicating the position of the program being executed PC register to be stored, SP register to store a stack pointer (an address indicating the current position of a stack area to be described later), an R register to store data indicating a memory block of the RAM 41c performing a refresh operation to be described later, and the RAM 41c There are provided IX and IY registers for storing data indicating a reference position when referring to a storage area, and an I register for storing data indicating the position of an interrupt table to be referred to when an interrupt occurs.

  The CPU 41a has an interrupt function (including an interrupt prohibition function) such as a timekeeping function and a timer interrupt, and executes a program (described later) stored in the ROM 41b to perform processing related to the progress of the game. Each part of the control circuit mounted on the control board 40 is controlled directly or indirectly. The ROM 41b stores fixed data such as programs executed by the CPU 41a and various tables. The RAM 41c is used as a work area when the CPU 41a executes a program. The I / O port 41d inputs / outputs a control signal to / from each circuit connected via a signal input / output terminal included in the main control unit 41.

  The main control unit 41 includes a signal input terminal DATA, and detection states of various switches connected to the game control board 40 are input to the input port via the signal input terminal DATA. The input states of these signal input terminals DATA are monitored by the CPU 41a, and the CPU 41a executes a basic process that shifts in stages according to the input states of the signal input terminals DATA, that is, the detection states of various switches.

  In addition, the CPU 41a has an interrupt function as described above, and can execute an interrupt process by interrupting the basic process when an interrupt occurs. In this embodiment, four types of interrupts of interrupts 1 to 4 can be executed. For each interrupt, a counter mode (signal input from a trigger terminal CLK / TRG provided separately from the signal input terminal DATA) is provided. Can be selected and set between an interrupt mode that generates an external interrupt according to the number of times) and a timer mode (an interrupt mode that generates an internal interrupt according to the number of clock inputs of the CPU 41a).

  In the present embodiment, among the interrupts 1 to 4, interrupt 2 is set to the counter mode, interrupt 3 is set to the timer mode, and interrupts 1 and 4 are unused. The trigger terminal CLK / TRG is connected to the above-described power failure detection circuit 48, and the CPU 41a generates an interrupt 2 in response to the input of the voltage drop signal output from the power failure detection circuit 48, and the power failure described later. Interrupt processing (main) is executed. Further, the CPU 41a generates an interrupt 3 every time the number of clock inputs reaches a certain number, that is, every certain time interval (about 0.56 ms in this embodiment), and performs a timer interruption process (main) described later. Run. Moreover, although the interrupts 1 and 4 are set to unused, the interrupts 1 and 4 may generate | occur | produce by noise etc. For this reason, when interrupts 1 and 4 occur, the CPU 41a executes an unused interrupt process that immediately returns to the original process.

  The CPU 41a is set to prohibit other interrupts during execution of interrupt processing based on the occurrence of any one of interrupts 1 to 4, and a plurality of interrupts occurred simultaneously. In this case, interrupts to be executed with priority in the order of interrupts 2, 3, 1, 4 are set. In other words, when interrupt 2 and other interrupts occur simultaneously, interrupt 2 is prioritized and when interrupt 3 and interrupt 1 or 4 occur simultaneously, interrupt 3 is prioritized. To run.

  Further, the CPU 41a temporarily stores the data in use stored in the register in a later-described stack area provided in the RAM 41c at the start of interrupt processing based on the occurrence of any of the interrupts 1 to 4. The data saved in the stack area at the end of the interrupt process is returned to the register.

  As the RAM 41c, a DRAM (Dynamic RAM) is used, and a refresh operation is required to maintain the stored data contents. The CPU 41a is provided with the above-described R (refresh) register for performing this refresh operation. The R register consists of 8 bits, and the lower 7 bits are automatically incremented every time the CPU 41a fetches an instruction from the ROM 41b, and the value is updated every execution time of one instruction. .

  The main control unit 41 is also supplied with backup power even during a power failure, and while the backup power is being supplied, the CPU 41a performs a refresh operation to hold the data stored in the RAM 41c. It is like that.

  Further, the CPU 41a acquires the state of the stop switch 36a and the automatic checkout switch 36b at the time of activation, and sets the enable / disable of the stop function and the enable / disable of the automatic checkout function in a specific register of the CPU 41a. It has become. The states of the stop switch 36a and the automatic checkout switch 36b are acquired only at the time of startup, and the stop / automatic checkout function is enabled / disabled based on the acquired state. Even if the switch 36b is operated, the validity / invalidity of the stoppage and automatic settlement function is not newly set.

  The random number generation circuit 42 is configured by a counter that counts up and updates the value every time a predetermined number of pulses are generated, as will be described later, and the sampling circuit 43 acquires the numerical value counted by the random number generation circuit 42. . The random number generation circuit 42 defines a range of numerical values to be counted for each type of random number. In this embodiment, 0 to 16383 is defined as the range. The CPU 41a sends an instruction to the sampling circuit 43 in accordance with the processing to acquire the numerical value indicated by the random number generation circuit 42 as a random number (this function is hereinafter referred to as a hardware random number function). Random numbers for internal lottery, which will be described later, are not used as they are extracted by the hardware random number function, but are processed and used by software. Details thereof will be described in detail. The CPU 41a also has a function of updating a numerical value of a specific register by the above-described timer interrupt process (main), and acquiring the updated numerical value as a random number (hereinafter, this function is referred to as a software random number function).

  The disconnection monitoring IC 50 monitors the electrical connection state between the game control board 40 and the inserted medal sensor 31 and the electrical connection state between the game control board 40 and the effect control board 90, and these connection states. If one of these is released, a disconnection flag indicating that these connection states have been released is stored in a storage unit such as an EEPROM (not shown) provided in the disconnection monitoring IC 50. . In response to the disconnection flag confirmation request from the CPU 41a, the disconnection monitoring IC 50 returns whether or not the disconnection flag is stored. At this time, the disconnection flag is cleared if it is stored in the storage unit.

  The disconnection monitoring IC 50 is also supplied with backup power in the event of a power failure. For example, unless the power failure state continues for 2 to 3 days, an electrical connection between the game control board 40 and the inserted medal sensor 31 is performed. Monitoring of the connection state and the electrical connection state between the game control board 40 and the effect control board 90 can be continued.

  The CPU 41a transmits various commands to the effect control board 90 via the I / O port 41d. A command transmitted from the game control board 40 to the effect control board 90 is sent in only one direction, and no command is sent from the effect control board 90 to the game control board 40. The transmission line of the command transmitted from the game control board 40 to the effect control board 90 is composed of a strobe (INT) signal line, a data transmission line, and a ground line, and is connected via the effect relay board 80. The game control board 40 and the effect control board 90 are not directly connected.

  The effect control board 90 is connected to the light receiving devices 57a and 57b constituting the touch panel described above, and the detection signals of the connected light receiving devices 57a and 57b are input.

  The production control board 90 is connected with electrical components such as a liquid crystal display 51 (see FIG. 1), production effect LEDs 52, speakers 53 and 54, and reel LEDs 55 arranged on the front door 2b of the slot machine 1. The electrical components are driven based on control by a sub-control unit 91 (described later) mounted on the effect control board 90. The effect control board 90 is connected to the light emitting devices 56a and 56b constituting the touch panel described above, and the light emitting devices 56a and 56b are based on control by a touch panel controller 99 described later mounted on the effect control board 90. To be driven.

  Similar to the main control unit 41, the effect control board 90 includes a microcomputer having a CPU 91a, ROM 91b, RAM 91c, and I / O port 91d. The effect control board 90 includes a sub control unit 91 for effect control and an effect control board 90. A display control circuit 92 that performs display control of the connected liquid crystal display 51, an LED LED circuit 93 that controls driving of the effect LED 52 and the reel LED 55, an audio output circuit 94 that controls audio output from the speakers 53 and 54, and a power source When the power is turned on or when an initialization command from the CPU 91a is not input for a certain period of time, a reset circuit 95 that gives a reset signal to the CPU 91a, a clock device 97 that outputs time information including date information and time information, and power supplied to the slot machine 1 When the voltage is monitored and a voltage drop is detected, a voltage drop signal indicating this A touch panel controller that performs processing for specifying a position touched on the display surface of the liquid crystal display 51 based on signals from the power interruption detection circuit 98 and the light receiving devices 56a and 56b output to the sub-control unit 91. 99, other circuits, etc. are mounted, and the CPU 91a receives various commands for performing an effect in response to a command transmitted from the game control board 40 and output information from the touch panel controller 99. Each part of the control circuit mounted on the control board 90 is controlled directly or indirectly.

  Similar to the CPU 41a of the main control unit 41, the CPU 91a has an interrupt function (including an interrupt prohibition function). An interrupt terminal (not shown) of the sub-control unit 91 is connected to a strobe (INT) signal line that is output when the main control unit 41 transmits a command among command transmission lines. An interrupt is generated based on the input to acquire a command from the main control unit 41 and execute a command reception interrupt process to be stored in the reception buffer. The CPU 91a executes a timer interrupt process (sub) to be described later by generating an interrupt every time the number of clock inputs reaches a certain number, that is, every certain interval.

  The interrupt terminal (not shown) of the CPU 91a is connected to the power interruption detection circuit 98 described above, and the CPU 91a generates an interrupt in response to the input of the voltage drop signal output from the power interruption detection circuit 98. Then, a power interruption interruption process (sub) described later is executed. Also, when an unused interrupt occurs in the CPU 91a, an unused interrupt process for immediately returning to the original process is executed.

  Unlike the CPU 41a, the CPU 91a executes interrupt processing based on interrupts other than the interruption interrupt processing (sub) when an interrupt is generated based on the input of the strobe signal (INT). Even if it is in the middle, interrupt the corresponding process and execute the command reception interrupt process, and execute the command reception interrupt process with the highest priority even if other interrupts other than the power interruption interrupt process (sub) occur at the same time It is supposed to be. Note that interrupts other than interrupts based on the input of the strobe signal (INT) are prohibited during execution of interrupt processes other than the power interruption interrupt process (sub). On the other hand, in the interruption interrupt processing (sub), other interruption processing including command reception interruption processing is prohibited at all, and even if other interruptions occur at the same time, interruption interruption processing (Sub) is executed with the highest priority.

  The sub-control unit 91 is also supplied with backup power at the time of a power failure, and while the backup power is supplied, the CPU 91a performs a refresh operation so that the data stored in the RAM 91c is retained. It has become.

  Next, details of wiring connection states between the game control board 40 and various game electronic components connected to the game control board 40 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 5 is a schematic view showing a wiring connection state between the game control board 40 and the game electronic components connected to the game control board 40.

  On the game control board 40, as described above, the single BET switch 5, the MAXBET switch 6, the start switch 7, the stop switches 8L, 8C, and 8R, the insertion medal sensor 31, the door opening detection switch 25, and the reel motors 32L and 32C. , 32R, reel sensors 33L, 33C, 33R, a hopper motor 34b, a payout sensor 34c, and an effect control board 90 are connected.

  As shown in FIG. 5, among these, one BET switch 5, MAXBET switch 6, start switch 7, stop switches 8L, 8C, 8R, insertion medal sensor 31, reel motors 32L, 32C, 32R, reel sensor 33L, The 33C and 33R, the hopper motor 34b, and the payout sensor 34c are electronic components that input and output signals related to the progress of the game to the game control board 40. The signal related to the progress of the game is, for example, an operation for setting the number of bets to make the game startable, an operation for starting the game, or an operation for deriving the display results of the reels 2L, 2C, and 2R. Such as signals output to the game control board 40 in accordance with the progress of the game, detection of inserted medals, detection of the reference position of the reels, detection of the payout medals, etc., output from the game electronic components in accordance with the progress of the game And a signal input to the game control board 40, a drive signal for driving the reels 2L, 2C, 2R according to the detection of the start operation, and a hopper for paying out medals when a winning occurs. A signal that is output from the game control board 40 in accordance with the progress of the game and that is input to the game electronic component.

  These gaming electronic components are a first electronic component that outputs a signal to the game control board 40 as the game progresses, and a second that receives a signal from the game control board 40 as the game progresses. And electronic components.

  Specifically, the single bet switch 5 and the MAXBET switch 6 that are operated when setting the bet number, and the inserted medal sensor 31 that detects a medal inserted to set the bet number, This is a first electronic component that outputs a BET signal to the game control board 40 based on the detection. Since the main control unit 41 performs the betting number setting process based on the reception of the BET signal, the betting number cannot be set without these electronic components. That is, since the game cannot be started unless the bet number is set, the one-sheet BET switch 5, the MAXBET switch 6, and the inserted medal sensor 31 are electronic components for games necessary for the progress of the game.

  The start switch 7 that detects an operation for starting a game is a first electronic component that outputs a start signal to the game control board 40 based on the detection of the operation. Since the main control unit 41 performs a process for starting the game (reel rotation process or the like) based on the reception of the start signal, the game cannot be started without this electronic component. That is, the start switch 7 is a game electronic component necessary for the progress of the game.

  Stop switches 8L, 8C, and 8R that detect an operation for deriving the display results of the reels 2L, 2C, and 2R are first electronic components that output a stop signal to the game control board 40 based on the detection of the operation. is there. The main control unit 41 performs processing for deriving the display result by stopping the rotation of the corresponding reels 2L, 2C, and 2R based on the reception of the stop signal. The display result of cannot be derived. That is, the stop switches 8L, 8C, and 8R are game electronic components necessary for the progress of the game.

  The reel sensors 33L, 33C, and 33R that detect the rotation of the reels 2L, 2C, and 2R are first electronic components that output a detection signal for the reference position of the reel to the game control board 40. The main control unit 41 does not have this electronic component because it performs processing to stop rotation by grasping the positions of the symbols of the corresponding reels 2L, 2C, and 2R based on reception of the detection signal of the reference position of the reel. In addition, derivation of display results of each reel 2L, 2C, 2R, determination of winning, etc. cannot be performed. That is, the reel sensors 33L, 33C, and 33R are game electronic components necessary for the progress of the game.

  The payout sensor 32 </ b> C that detects a medal to be paid out when a winning is generated is a first electronic component that outputs a medal payout signal to the game control board 40 based on the detection of the medal. The main control unit 41 performs a payout process for paying out the number of medals according to the generated prize based on the reception of the payout medal detection signal. Therefore, the number of medals according to the number of prizes generated without this electronic component. Cannot be paid out. That is, the payout sensor 35 is a game electronic component necessary for the progress of the game.

  The reel motors 32L, 32C, and 32R that rotate the reels 2L, 2C, and 2R are second electronic components to which a drive signal output from the game control board 40 is input. The reel motors 32L, 32C, and 32R rotate the reels 2L, 2C, and 2R based on the input of the drive signal output from the game control board 40 and start the symbol variation display. Even if the reels 2L, 2C, and 2R are not actually rotated based on the above, the main control unit 41 receives the signals from the reel sensors 33L, 33C, and 33R after outputting the reel drive signals. The game can be controlled to proceed as the reel rotates. However, the timing at which signals are input to the game control board 40 from the reel sensors 33L, 33C, 33R is an error unless the reel drive signal is output. In order to measure the output timing of the signal based on the detection of the rotation of the reel, a reel drive signal is required. That is, the reel motors 32L, 32C, and 32R are game electronic components necessary for the progress of the game.

  The hopper motor 34b that drives the hopper tank that pays out medals is a second electronic component that receives a drive signal output from the game control board 40 in response to a winning. The hopper motor 34b performs a medal payout operation based on the input of a drive signal output from the game control board 40, but even if the medal payout operation is not actually performed based on the signal input. The main control unit 41 can control to advance the game on the assumption that a medal has been paid out by inputting a signal from the payout sensor 32C after outputting a drive signal of the hopper motor 34b. However, the timing at which a signal is input from the payout sensor 32C to the game control board 40 is an error unless the drive signal of the hopper motor 34b is output. In order to measure the output timing of the signal based on the detection of this, a drive signal for the hopper motor 34b is required. That is, the hopper motor 34b is a gaming electronic component necessary for the progress of the game.

  The gaming electronic parts and the door opening detection switch 25 are basically electronic parts that are continuously used in common with a plurality of models, and there is no opportunity to remove and replace them from the main body unless a malfunction or the like occurs. Since there are few, it is fixed to the predetermined part of the main body of the slot machine. On the other hand, the game control board 40, the effect control board 90, and the like need to be replaced when changing the model, and are removed from the main body at that time. That is, when the gaming control board 40 is removed, it is necessary to release the connection between the gaming electronic parts and the door opening detection switch 25, so that the gaming electronic parts and door opening detection switch 25 and the gaming control board 40 are relayed. In addition to being connected via the boards, the boards and the boards are connected to the gaming electronic components and the door opening detection switch 25 via cables. The cable and the board are electrically connected by connecting a cable side connector provided at an end of the cable and a board side connector electrically connected to the wiring pattern of the board.

  More specifically, the single BET switch 5, the MAXBET switch 6, the start switch 7, the stop switches 8L, 8C, and 8R, the insertion medal sensor 31, and the door opening detection switch 25 are played via the operation unit relay board 110. The reel motors 32L, 32C, 32R and the reel sensors 33L, 33C, 33R are connected to the game control board 40 via the reel relay board 120, and the hopper motor 34b and the payout sensor 32C are connected to the control board 40 by wiring. The game control board 40 is connected to the game via the power supply board 101, and the effect control board 90 is connected to the game control board 40 via the effect relay board 80.

  The operation unit relay board 110, the reel relay board 120, the power supply board 101, and the effect control board 90 are provided with wiring patterns (not shown) for connecting the game control board 40 and each electronic component. The detection signal output from the component to the game control board 40 or the power or signal supplied (input) from the game control board 40 can be relayed.

  In addition, the various electronic components and the game control board 40 are thus connected via the relay boards 110, 120, 100, and 80 attached to predetermined positions of the main body of the slot machine 1 (the casing 2a in this embodiment). By wiring connection, it becomes easy to collect wiring from the game control board 40 to a plurality of electronic components individually arranged at predetermined positions of the main body of the slot machine 1, and the connector connection portion is always connected to the relay board or game control. Since it is provided on the substrate 40, and the connector connecting portions of the respective electronic components are thereby fixed, it is possible to prevent a connector connecting portion from being searched for during wiring connection work or to make a mistake in the type of wiring to be connected. .

  The game control board 40 and the operation unit relay board 110 are connected via a cable 600a, and the game control board 40 and the reel relay board 120 are connected via a cable 600b, and the game control board 40 and the power supply board 101 are connected to each other. Are connected via a cable 600c, and the effect control board 90 and the effect relay board 80 are connected via a cable 600d.

  The operation unit relay board 110 and the single BET switch 5 are connected via a cable 601a, and the operation unit relay board 110 and the MAXBET switch 6 are connected via a cable 601b, and the operation unit relay board 110 and the start switch 7 are connected to each other. Are connected via a cable 601c, the operation part relay board 110 and the stop switch 8L are connected via a cable 601d, and the operation part relay board 110 and the stop switch 8C are connected via a cable 601e. The board 110 and the stop switch 8R are connected via a cable 601f, the operation part relay board 110 and the insertion medal sensor 31 are connected via a cable 601g, and the operation part relay board 110 and the door open detection switch 25 are cables. It is connected via 601q.

  The reel relay board 120 and the reel motor 32L are connected via a cable 601h, the reel relay board 120 and the reel motor 32C are connected via a cable 601j, and the reel relay board 120 and the reel motor 32R are connected to a cable 601l. Connected through. The reel relay board 120 and the reel sensor 33L are connected via a cable 601i, the reel relay board 120 and the reel sensor 33C are connected via a cable 601k, and the reel relay board 120 and the reel sensor 33L are connected to a cable 601m. Connected through. The power supply board 101 and the hopper motor 34 are connected via a cable 601n, the power supply board 101 and the payout sensor 35 are connected via a cable 601o, and the effect relay board 80 and the effect control board 90 are connected with a cable 601p. Connected through.

  Each of these cables 600a to 600c, 601a to 601o, and 601q is connected to each board by a connector so that the wiring connection with the board can be released. Specifically, cable-side connectors 610a and 611a are provided at both ends of the cable 600a. One cable-side connector 610a is a connector that can be connected to a board-side connector 620a fixed to the game control board 40. The other cable side connector 611a is a connector that can be connected to the board side connector 621a fixed to the operation unit relay board 110. Cable side connectors 610b and 611b are provided at both ends of the cable 600b. One cable side connector 610b is a connector that can be connected to the board side connector 620b fixed to the game control board 40, and the other side. The cable-side connector 611b is a connector that can be connected to the board-side connector 621b fixed to the reel relay board 120. Cable-side connectors 610c and 611c are provided at both ends of the cable 600c. One cable-side connector 610c is a connector that can be connected to a board-side connector 620c fixed to the game control board 40. The cable-side connector 611c is a connector that can be connected to the board-side connector 621c fixed to the power supply board 101. Cable-side connectors 610d and 611d are provided at both ends of the cable 600d. One cable-side connector 610d is a connector that can be connected to a board-side connector 620d fixed to the game control board 40, and the other The cable-side connector 611d is a connector that can be connected to the board-side connector 621d fixed to the effect relay board 80.

  Further, a cable-side connector 612 a that can be connected to a board-side connector 622 a fixed to the operation unit relay board 110 is provided at the other end of the cable 601 a that has one end connected to the BET switch 5. At the other end of the cable 601b whose one end is connected to the MAXBET switch 6, a cable-side connector 612b that can be connected to the board-side connector 622b fixed to the operation unit relay board 110 is provided. At the other end of the cable 601c whose one end is connected to the start switch 7, a cable-side connector 612c that can be connected to the board-side connector 622c fixed to the operation unit relay board 110 is provided. At the other end of the cable 601d, one end of which is connected to the stop switch 8L, a cable side connector 612d that can be connected to the board side connector 622d fixed to the operation unit relay board 110 is provided. At the other end of the cable 601e whose one end is connected to the stop switch 8C, a cable-side connector 612e that can be connected to the board-side connector 622e fixed to the operation unit relay board 110 is provided. At the other end of the cable 601f whose one end is connected to the stop switch 8R, a cable-side connector 612f that can be connected to the board-side connector 622f fixed to the operation unit relay board 110 is provided. A cable-side connector 612g that can be connected to a board-side connector 622g fixed to the operation unit relay board 110 is provided at the other end of the cable 601g that has one end connected to the inserted medal sensor 31. A cable-side connector 612q that can be connected to a board-side connector 622q fixed to the operation unit relay board 110 is provided at the other end of the cable 601q whose one end is connected to the door opening detection switch 25.

  Further, the other end of the cable 601h whose one end is connected to the reel motor 32L and the other end of the cable 601i whose one end is connected to the reel sensor 33L can be connected to the board-side connector 622h fixed to the reel relay board 120. A cable-side connector 612h is provided. One end of the cable 601j connected to the reel motor 32C and the other end of the cable 601k connected to the reel sensor 33C are connected to the board-side connector 622i fixed to the reel relay board 120. A side connector 612i is provided. A cable that can be connected to the board-side connector 622j fixed to the reel relay board 120 at the other end of the cable 601l having one end connected to the reel motor 32R and the other end of the cable 601m having one end connected to the reel sensor 33R. A side connector 612j is provided.

  Further, the other end of the cable 601n whose one end is connected to the hopper motor 34b and the other end of the cable 601o whose one end is connected to the payout sensor 32C can be connected to the board-side connector 622k fixed to the power supply board 101. A cable-side connector 612k is provided.

  In addition, cable-side connectors 612p and 613p are provided at both ends of the cable 601p. One cable-side connector 612p is a connector that can be connected to a board-side connector 622p fixed to the game control board 40. The other cable side connector 613p is a connector that can be connected to the board side connector 623p fixed to the effect control board 90.

  In this embodiment, the wiring is extended from each electronic component without using a connector, but may be connected to the wiring through a connector.

  As described above, each board and each cable includes board-side connectors 620a to 620d, 621a to 621d, 622a to 622k, 622p, 622q, and 623p provided on the board side, and cable-side connectors 610a to 623p provided on the cable side. 610d, 611a to 611d, 612a to 612k, 612p, 612q, and 613p are wired and connected via a pair of connectors (male connector and female connector), and by removing the cable side connector from the board side connector The wiring connection can be released. In particular, the game control board 40, the operation unit relay board 110, the reel relay board 120, the power board 101, and the effect control board 90 are attached to predetermined positions on the casing or front door of the slot machine 1, so that the board side Since the cable side connector can be easily removed from the connector, the game control board 40 and the effect control board 90 can be easily replaced.

  First, the first electronic component will be described in detail. One of the BET switch 5, the MAXBET switch 6, or the connector of a cable provided between the inserted medal sensor 31 and the game control board 40 is driven into a connector. When the BET signal is illegally output from the driving tool to the game control board 40, the bet number is set without performing the main control unit 41 even though the bet number setting operation is not performed. There is a risk of being. When a connector of a driving tool is connected to one of the connectors of a cable provided between the start switch 7 and the game control board 40, and a start signal is illegally output from the driving tool to the game control board 40 There is a possibility that the game is started without performing the game start operation. The connector of the driving tool is connected to one of the connectors of the cable provided between the stop switches 8L, 8C, 8R and the game control board 40, and the stop signal is illegally transmitted from the driving tool to the game control board 40. If output, the rotation of the reel may be stopped without performing a stop operation. The connector of the driving tool is connected to one of the connectors of the cable provided between the reel sensors 33L, 33C, 33R and the game control board 40, and the reel rotation signal is illegal from the driving tool to the game control board 40. Is output to the reels 2L, 2C, and 2R, the result of the display may be derived, and the winning determination may be performed. The connector of the driving tool is connected to one of the connectors of the cable provided between the payout sensor 32C and the game control board 40, and a medal payout signal is illegally output from the driving tool to the game control board 40. There is a possibility that the medals are counted without paying out medals.

  The second electronic component will be described in detail. The game control board 40 is released by disconnecting one of the connectors of the cable provided between the reel motors 32L, 32C, 32R and the game control board 40. When the driving signal output from the game control board 40 can be acquired by the driving tool, the timing at which the driving signal of the reel is output from the game control board 40 can be specified on the driving tool side. There is a possibility that the reel rotation detection signal input to the substrate 40 may be output from the driving tool at an appropriate timing after the reel rotation. In addition, the drive signal output from the game control board 40 after the connection at any of the connectors of the cable provided between the hopper motor 34b and the game control board 40 is released can be obtained by a driving tool or the like. Then, the timing at which the driving signal of the hopper tank is output from the game control board 40 can be specified on the driving instrument side. May be output at an appropriate timing after driving.

  As described above, when a signal output from the first electronic component according to the progress of the game and originally input to the game control board 40 is output from the driving tool, the main control unit 41 receives the signal. The game can be controlled based on the game, and a signal that is output from the game control board 40 according to the progress of the game and is originally input to the second electronic component is input to the driving tool. In this case, on the driving instrument side, the main control unit 41 can specify the output timing of the signal output after driving the reel motor or the hopper motor, and when a new signal is input to the main control board 40 based on this. Since the main control unit 41 can perform control to advance the game based on the reception of the signal, an illegal act such as automatically progressing the game. There is a possibility to be implemented. Therefore, in this embodiment, various measures are taken to prevent illegal acts caused by the connection of the driving tool.

  Further, when the connection at any of the connectors of the cable provided between the door opening detection switch 25 and the game control board 40 is released, the game is notified when the front door 2b is opened. Since the main control unit 41 mounted on the control board cannot be detected and the door opening notification and the door opening signal are not output, the discovery is delayed even if the front door 2b is opened and an illegal act is performed. There is a risk that. Therefore, in this embodiment, measures are taken to make it difficult to release the connection between the connectors provided between the door opening detection switch 25 and the game control board 40.

  These measures will be described in detail later.

  Next, a configuration around the disconnection monitoring IC 50 in the game control board 40 will be described.

  The game control board 40 is supplied with + 5V DC voltage generated by the voltage generation circuit of the power supply board 101. The + 5V DC voltage supplied from the power supply board 101 is supplied to the power supply terminal (VDD) as a drive power supply for the disconnection monitoring IC 50, and also branches on the game control board 40 as shown in FIG. 40 and the operation unit relay board 110 via the cable 600a, the operation unit relay board 110, the operation unit relay board 110 and the insertion medal sensor 31 via the cable 601g, and then folded back by the insertion medal sensor 31, Returning to the game control board 40 via the cable 601g, the operation unit relay board 110, and the cable 600a, and further connecting the game control board 40 and the production relay board 80 to the cable 600d, the production relay board 80, and the production relay board 80 Via the cable 601p for wiring and connecting the effect control board 90, the effect control board 90 is further turned back. Te, cable 601P, directing the relay board 80, so that via the cable 600d to return to the game controller board 40 again, is input as a connection signal to the input terminal disconnection monitoring IC50 (IN).

  For this reason, in this embodiment, the board-side connector 620a of the game control board 40 and the cable-side connector 610a of the cable 600a are connected, and the cable-side connector 611a of the cable 600a and the board-side connector 621a of the operation unit relay board 110 are connected. The connection of the board side connector 622g of the operation unit relay board 110 and the cable side connector 612g of the cable 601g, the connection of the board side connector 620d of the game control board 40 and the cable side connector 610d of the cable 600d, and the cable side connector of the cable 600d 611d and the board-side connector 621d of the production relay board 80, the board-side connector 622p of the production relay board 80 and the cable-side connector 612p of the cable 601p, the cable-side connector 613p of the cable 601p and the production control board The connection signal input to the input terminal (IN) of the disconnection monitoring IC 50 is cut off by releasing any one of the connection to the board-side connector 623p of 0, and thus the disconnection monitoring IC 50 is connected to the game control board. 40 and the inserted medal sensor 31 and the disconnection between the game control board 40 and the effect control board 90 are detected. That is, if the connection between the connectors between the game control board 40 and the inserted medal sensor 31 and the connection between the game control board 40 and the effect control board 90 are released even at one place, the disconnection monitoring IC 50 detects the disconnection. It has come to be.

  In addition, as shown in FIG. 6, the + 5V DC voltage supplied from the power supply board 101 branches on the game control board 40 and is connected to the ground level on the power supply board 101 side. A capacitor C1 is provided. D1 is a diode for preventing backflow. As a result, a DC voltage of +5 V can be stored in the capacitor C1, and when the power supply to the slot machine 1 is cut off, the voltage stored in the capacitor C1 can be supplied as a backup power source for driving the disconnection monitoring IC 50. Thus, the disconnection monitoring IC 50 can detect disconnection between the game control board 40 and the inserted medal sensor 31 and between the game control board 40 and the effect control board 90 regardless of whether it is during energization or during a power failure. It has become.

  The slot machine 1 of this embodiment outputs an external output signal indicating a gaming state, an error occurrence state, and the like.

  As shown in FIG. 7A, these external output signals are output from the game control board 40 under the control of the CPU 41a, and the information providing terminal board of the game store (hall) where the external output board 1000 and the slot machine 1 are installed. 1010 is output to a hall device such as a hall computer.

  From the game control board 40 to the external output board 1000, a medal IN signal indicating the number of medals used for setting the number of bets, a medal OUT signal indicating the number of medals given to the player due to the occurrence of a winning, a gaming state Is an RB signal indicating that a regular bonus is described later, a BB signal indicating that the gaming state is a big bonus described later, a door opening signal indicating that the front door 1b is opened, and a setting change mode described later. A setting change signal indicating transition, a throwing error signal indicating abnormality of the medal selector, and a payout error signal indicating abnormality of the hopper unit 34 are output.

  In this embodiment, there is no challenge time (a gaming state in which the number of sliding pieces on the reel is limited, but winning is allowed for all small roles) or a challenge bonus with a high probability of challenge time. However, in order to make common with the slot machines equipped with these gaming states, in addition to the signal lines for outputting the above signals, the gaming state is a challenge between the gaming control board 40 and the external output board 1000. A signal line for outputting a CT signal indicating that the time is in progress and a CB signal indicating that the gaming state is in the challenge bonus is connected, and a signal line for error output that may be expanded in the future is connected. Has been.

  The external output board 1000 is provided with a relay circuit 1001, a parallel / serial conversion circuit 1002, a terminal for each output signal, and a connector 1003 to be electrically connected to the circuit of the information providing terminal board 1010. ing.

  Of the signals output from the game control board 40, the medal IN signal, medal OUT signal, RB signal, BB signal, (CT signal, CB signal) are directly used as pulse signals via the relay circuit 1001. The information is output to the information providing terminal board 1010.

  On the other hand, a door opening signal, a setting change signal, a closing error signal, a payout error signal, and a (preliminary signal) are security signals that are serial signals that can be individually identified by the parallel / serial conversion circuit 1002. And output to the information providing terminal board 1010.

  The medal IN signal, medal OUT signal, RB signal, BB signal, (CT signal, CB signal) output from the external output board 1000 are output to the hall device via the information providing terminal board 1010. . On the other hand, the security signal output from the external output board 1000 is again converted into a door opening signal, a setting change signal, a closing error signal, a payout error signal, and a spare signal at the information providing terminal board 1010 and output to the hall device. Will be.

  The parallel / serial conversion circuit 1002 converts the door opening signal, setting change signal, input error signal, payout error signal, (preliminary signal) into a serial signal in the data format shown in FIG. Output. The basic format consists of a pulse width of 20 ms and a frame length of 7 bits. The first bit is a start bit indicating the start of data, the last bit is a stop bit indicating the end of data, and D1 to D5 in between are transmission data. Become. The start bit is 1 (on) and the stop bit is 0 (off). D1 is a bit indicating the output state of the door opening signal. If 1 (on), it indicates a door opening signal on (when the front door 1b is open), and if it is 0 (off), the door opening signal off. Indicates. D2 is a bit indicating the output state of the setting change signal. If 1 (on), D2 indicates the setting change signal on (moving to the setting change mode), and 0 (off) indicates the setting change signal off. . D3 is a bit indicating the output state of the insertion error signal. If it is 1 (on), it indicates the insertion error signal on (it is highly likely that the medal selector has been cheated), and 0 (off). Indicates a throw error signal off. D4 is a bit indicating the output state of the payout error signal. If it is 1 (on), it indicates a payout error signal on (there is a high possibility that fraud has been performed on the hopper unit 34), and 0 (off). If there is, a payout error signal off is indicated. D5 is a bit indicating the output state of the spare signal, and is always 0 in this embodiment. For example, if the door opening signal is on and the setting change signal is on, as shown in FIG. 8A, start bits: 1, D1: 1, D2: 1, D3: 0, D4: 0, D5 : 0, stop bit: 0. If the setting change signal changes to OFF after this state, the start bit is 1, D1: 1, D2: 0, D3: 0, D4: 0, D5: 0, and the stop bit is 0. .

  The parallel / serial conversion circuit 1002 changes the output state of the door opening signal, the setting change signal, the closing error signal, the paying error signal, and the (preliminary signal), that is, when any event occurs or the event occurs. When is restored, a frame indicating the changed state is repeatedly transmitted three times.

  As shown in FIG. 8B, an interval of 240 ms is provided between the start bit and the start bit so as not to cause erroneous latching on the receiving side. That is, after the stop bit, a 100 ms blank is left and the start bit of the next frame is transmitted.

  Further, when the output state of the door opening signal, the setting change signal, the closing error signal, the paying error signal, and the (preliminary signal) is changed without completing the three repeated transmissions, FIG. As shown in FIG. 5, a frame indicating the output state after the change is repeatedly transmitted three times from the next frame. At this time, there is no transmission of a new frame in the middle of frame output, or transmission of a new frame without a 100 ms blank after the stop bit. After a 100 ms blank, a new frame is transmitted, so that the reception side can reliably latch the head of the frame.

  Also, when any signal among the door opening signal, setting change signal, closing error signal, payout error signal, and (preliminary signal) changes from the on state to the off state, only the start bit is set to 1. The frame is transmitted three times.

  In the slot machine 1 of this embodiment, the medal payout rate changes according to the set value, and the winning probability of the internal lottery described later is determined according to the set value. Hereinafter, the setting value changing operation will be described.

  In order to change the setting value, it is necessary to turn on the power of the slot machine 1 after the setting key switch 37 is turned on. When the power is turned on with the setting key switch 37 in the ON state, 1 is displayed as the initial value of the setting value on the setting value display 24, and the setting change mode in which the setting value can be changed by operating the reset / setting switch 38 is set. Transition. When the reset / setting switch 38 is operated in the setting change mode, the setting value displayed on the setting value display 24 is updated one by one (when further operation is performed from the setting 6, the setting value is returned to the setting 1). . When the start switch 7 is operated, the set value is confirmed, and the confirmed set value is stored in the RAM 41c of the main control unit 41. Then, when the setting key switch 37 is turned off, the state shifts to a state in which the game can proceed.

  In the slot machine 1 of the present embodiment, when the CPU 41a of the main control unit 41 detects a voltage drop signal, the power interruption interrupt process (main) is executed. In the power interruption interrupt processing (main), the register is saved in a stack of a RAM 41c, which will be described later, and the data for destructive diagnosis (5AH in this embodiment) in which any bit is 1 in the RAM 41c of the main control unit 41, that is, In addition to storing specific data other than 0, the RAM parity adjustment data is calculated so that the RAM parity based on the data stored in all areas of the RAM 41c becomes 0, and stored in the RAM 41c. ing. The RAM parity is a value calculated as an exclusive OR of values stored in each bit of the corresponding area (all areas in this embodiment) of the RAM 41c. Therefore, if the RAM parity based on the data stored in all areas of the RAM 41c is 0, the RAM parity adjustment data is 0, and the RAM parity based on the data stored in all areas of the RAM 41c is 1. In this case, the RAM parity adjustment data is 1.

  The CPU 41a calculates the RAM parity based on the data stored in all areas of the RAM 41c at the time of activation, confirms the value of the destructive diagnosis data, the RAM parity is 0, and the destructive diagnosis On the condition that the data value is also correct, the processing state of the CPU 41a is restored to the state before the power interruption based on the data stored in the RAM 41c, but when the RAM parity is not 0 (in the case of 1) or for destructive diagnosis If the data value is not correct, it is determined that the RAM is abnormal, and a RAM abnormal error code is set in the register to control the RAM abnormal error, thereby disabling the progress of the game. Unlike the other error states, the RAM abnormal error state is not canceled even if the reset switch 23 or the reset / setting switch 38 is operated, and a new set value is set in the setting change mode described above. It will not be released until

  Further, the CPU 41a determines whether or not the bet number set in the internal lottery process described later is a bet number according to the gaming state, and whether or not the set value used for the internal lottery is an appropriate value. judge.

  Even when the set bet number is not the bet number according to the gaming state, or when the set value used for the internal lottery is not an appropriate value, it is determined that the RAM is abnormal and the RAM abnormal error code is set and the RAM is set. The game is controlled to an abnormal error state and the progress of the game is disabled. As described above, unlike the other error states, the RAM abnormal error state is not canceled even if the reset switch 23 or the reset / setting switch 38 is operated, and a new setting is made in the setting change mode described above. It will not be released until a value is set.

  In the slot machine 1 according to the present embodiment, the prescribed number of bets that can be set according to the gaming state is determined as described above, and the prescribed number of bets that are determined according to the gaming state is set. It becomes possible to start the game on the condition. In this embodiment, as will be described later, the game state includes a regular bonus, a normal game state, RT (1) (replay time (1)), and RT (2) (replay time (2)). Even in the state, 3 is defined as the prescribed number of bets. Therefore, regardless of whether the gaming state is a regular bonus, a normal gaming state, RT (1), or RT (2), the game is played when 3 is set as the bet number. It is possible to start. In this embodiment, all the pay lines L1 to L6 are activated when a specified number of bets according to the gaming state are set, and the number of bets regardless of the gaming state. As a result, all winning lines L1 to L6 are activated at the time when 3 is set.

  In the slot machine 1 of this embodiment, when all the reels 2L, 2C, 2R are stopped, the activated pay line (in the present embodiment, all the pay lines are always enabled. The activated winning line is simply referred to as a winning line). When a combination of symbols called a combination is arranged on the winning line, a winning is achieved. The type of winning combination is determined according to the game state, but it can be roughly divided into a small role with payout of medals and a replay that can start the next game without the need to set the number of bets. There are a game combination and a special combination with a transition of the game state. Below, a small role and a re-playing role are collectively called a general role. In order for winning of each combination determined according to the gaming state to occur, it is necessary to win an internal lottery to be described later and set a winning flag of the combination in the RAM 41c.

  Of the winning flags for each of these combinations, the winning flag for the small role and the re-playing role is valid only in the game in which the flag is set, and is invalid in the next game. It is valid until a combination of combinations permitted by the flag is completed, and is invalid in a game having a combination of combinations permitted. In other words, once the special combination winning flag is won, even if the combination of the combinations permitted by the flag cannot be made, the winning flag is not invalidated and is carried over to the next game. It becomes. Of special bonuses, Big Bonus (4) and Big Bonus (5), which will be described later, are always won in the winning game, and are not carried over after the next game.

  FIG. 9 shows a winning combination table. The winning combination table is stored in the ROM 41b of the main control unit 41 in advance, and the combination numbers (0 to 22) assigned in the order in which the lottery is performed corresponding to the combination of combinations and combinations to be selected in the internal drawing. ) Is registered.

  In the slot machine 1, as special roles, a big bonus (1), a big bonus (2), a big bonus (3), a big bonus (4), and a big bonus (5) are red cherry, blue, Cherry, white cherry, and bell are defined as replay (1) and replay (2). In addition, the combination of the roles in the slot machine 1 includes big bonus (1) + red cherry, big bonus (2) + red cherry, big bonus (3) + red cherry, big bonus (1) + blue cherry, big bonus. (2) + Blue Cherry, Big Bonus (3) + Blue Cherry, Big Bonus (1) + White Cherry, Big Bonus (2) + White Cherry, Big Bonus (3) + White Cherry, Bell + Red Cherry, Bell + Blue cherry, bell + white cherry are stipulated. That is, the total number of combinations and combinations of combinations is 23.

  In the slot machine 1 according to the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 9, a role to be selected by lottery depending on whether the gaming state is a normal gaming state, RT (1) or RT (2), or a regular bonus. And combinations of roles are different. In particular, when the gaming state is the normal gaming state, RT (1) or RT (2), whether or not any special role is being carried over (the fact that any special role has been elected to the winning flag of the special role) Depending on whether or not is already set, the combination and combination of combinations that are subject to the lottery vary.

  In this embodiment, a state number corresponding to the gaming state is assigned, and when performing an internal lottery, a state number corresponding to the current gaming state is set, and a lottery object is selected according to the state number and the number of bets. Can be identified. Specifically, when no special combination is carried over in the normal gaming state, “0” is set as the state number, and when no special combination is carried over at RT (1), the state is set. If “1” is set as the number and no special combination is carried over in RT (2), “2” is set as the state number and any special combination is carried over in the normal gaming state. If the status number is set to “3” and any special combination is carried over in RT (2), the status number is set to “4” and the bonus is a regular bonus. Is set to "5" as the state number. As will be described later, since RT (1) ends with the winning of the special role, the special role is not carried over in RT (1).

  As shown in FIG. 9, the gaming state is the normal gaming state, RT (1) or RT (2), and no special role is carried over, that is, the state number is “0”, “1” or “ 2 ”is set, big bonus (1), big bonus (2), big bonus (3), big bonus (4), big bonus (5), big bonus (1) + red cherry, Big Bonus (2) + Red Cherry, Big Bonus (3) + Red Cherry, Big Bonus (1) + Blue Cherry, Big Bonus (2) + Blue Cherry, Big Bonus (3) + Blue Cherry, Big Bonus (1) + White Cherry, Big Bonus (2) + White Cherry, Big Bonus (3) + White Cherry, Replay (1), Replay (2), Red Cherry, Blue Cherry, White Chi Lee, Bell, that is a combination of winning and prize of winning numbers 0 to 19 are subject to internal lottery.

  When the game state is the normal game state or RT (2) and any special role is carried over, that is, when the state number is set to “3” or “4”, the replay ( 1), Replay (2), Red Cherry, Blue Cherry, White Cherry, Bell, that is, a combination of combination numbers 14 to 19 is an object of internal lottery. Further, when the game state is a regular bonus, that is, “5” is set as the state number, bell, bell + red cherry, bell + blue cherry, bell + white cherry, that is, the roles and roles after the role number 19 Are subject to internal lottery.

  The red cherry is awarded when a symbol “red cherry” is derived on any of the winning lines for the left reel in any gaming state, and one medal is paid out. The blue cherry is awarded when the symbol “blue cherry” is derived on any of the winning lines for the left reel in any gaming state, and one medal is paid out. The white cherry is awarded when the symbol “white cherry” is derived on any of the winning lines for the left reel in any gaming state, and one medal is paid out. If the symbols “red cherry”, “blue cherry” or “white cherry” are stopped at the upper or lower stage of the left reel, three winning lines L1, L3, L5 or winning lines L2, L4, L A combination of red cherries, blue cherries or white cherries will be on the winning line, and red cherries, blue cherries or white cherries will be won on the three winning lines, so three medals will be paid out. It becomes.

  The bell is awarded when a combination of “bell-bell-bell” is arranged on any of the winning lines in any gaming state, and 15 medals are paid out.

  Replay (1) is awarded when the combination of “replay-replay-replay” is aligned on any of the winning lines in the normal gaming state, RT (1) and RT (2). (Replay (2) becomes a winning when the combination of “Bell-Replay-Replay” is arranged in any of the winning lines in the normal gaming state, RT (1) and RT (2). Replay (1) or When Replay (2) wins, there is no payout of medals, but the next game can be started without setting the number of bets again, so there are three medals corresponding to the number of bets that need not be set in the next game. This is essentially the same as being paid out.

  The big bonus is a combination of “red 7-red 7-red 7”, “blue 7-blue 7-blue 7”, “white” in any of the winning lines in the normal gaming state, RT (1) and RT (2). When a combination of “7-white 7-white 7”, “bell-replay-bell”, and “replay-replay-bell” is prepared, a prize is awarded. In this embodiment, when the combination of “red 7-red 7-red 7” is complete, the big bonus that is awarded is the big bonus (1), and the combination of “blue 7-blue 7-blue 7” is complete. The Big Bonus (2) will be the Big Bonus (2), and the Big Bonus (3) will be awarded when the combination of "White 7-White 7-White 7" is complete. The big bonus that is awarded when the combination of "" is complete is the big bonus (4), and the big bonus that is awarded when the "replay-replay-bell" combination is complete is the big bonus (5).

  When the big bonus (1) wins, the gaming state shifts to the big bonus (1), and when the big bonus (2) wins, the gaming state shifts to the big bonus (2) and the big bonus (3) wins. When the gaming state shifts to the big bonus (3) and the big bonus (4) wins, the gaming state shifts to the big bonus (4) and when the big bonus (5) wins, the gaming state shifts to the big bonus (5 ). When shifting to the big bonus (1) to (5), the shift to the regular bonus is performed simultaneously with the shift to the big bonus (1) to (5). The regular bonus ends when 12 games are consumed, or when 8 games are won (any kind of combination is possible), whichever comes first. While the game state is in the regular bonus, the regular bonus medium flag is set in the RAM 41c. If the big bonuses (1) to (5) are not finished when the regular bonus is finished, the process proceeds to the regular bonus again and is controlled to the regular bonus repeatedly until the big bonuses (1) to (5) are finished. The That is, during the big bonuses (1) to (5), the regular bonus is always controlled.

  The big bonuses (1) to (3) are terminated when the total number of medals paid out to the player in the big bonuses (1) to (3) exceeds 400. At this time, the regular bonus is ended regardless of whether the regular bonus end condition is satisfied. The big bonus (4) ends when the total number of medals paid out to the player in the big bonus (4) exceeds 300, and the big bonus (5) The process ends when the total number of medals paid out to the player exceeds 100. At this time, the regular bonus is ended regardless of whether the regular bonus end condition is satisfied.

  While the gaming state is the big bonus (1), big bonus (2), big bonus (3), big bonus (4), big bonus (5), the big bonus (1) medium flag, big bonus (2 ) A medium flag, a big bonus (3) medium flag, a big bonus (4) medium flag, and a big bonus (5) medium flag are set in the RAM 41c.

  Hereinafter, the internal lottery of the present embodiment will be described. In the internal lottery, it is determined whether or not the above winning combination is permitted before the display results of all the reels 2L, 2C, and 2R are derived and displayed (actually, when the start switch 7 is detected). To do. In the internal lottery, first, a random number for internal lottery (an integer from 0 to 16383) is acquired as described later. And, for each combination of combinations and combinations determined according to the gaming state and the number of bets, the combination of the random numbers for internal lottery acquired and combinations of combinations and combinations determined according to the gaming state, the number of bets and the set value This is performed according to the number of determination values. In this embodiment, from the number of judgment values of each combination and combination of combinations, a range of determination values for each of the general combination and special combination, and a range of determination values for winning the combination of general combination and special combination. And the winning in the internal lottery is not exclusive, and a general combination and a special combination may be won simultaneously in one game. However, for special roles of different types, the range of determination values to be won in duplicate is not specified, and special types of different types are exclusively drawn.

  Each combination and combination of combinations determined according to the gaming state and the number of bets are referred to in the order of combination numbers registered in the winning combination table shown in FIG.

  The game state is the normal game state, RT (1) or RT (2), and no special role is carried over, that is, the state number is set to “0”, “1” or “2” In this case, with reference to the winning combination table, combinations of the combination of combination numbers 0 to 19, that is, big bonus (1) [number 0], big bonus (2) [number 1], big bonus (3 ) [Role 2], Big Bonus (4) [Role 3], Big Bonus (5) [Role 4], Big Bonus (1) + Red Cherry [Role 5], Big Bonus (2) + Red Cherry [role 6], big bonus (3) red cherry [role 7], big bonus (1) + blue cherry [role 8], big bonus (2) + blue cherry [role 9], big bonus (3) + blue cheri [Position Number 10], Big Bonus (1) + White Cherry [Position Number 11], Big Bonus (2) + White Cherry [Position Number 12], Big Bonus (3) + White Cherry [Position Number 13], Replay ( 1) [Hand number 14], Replay (2) [Hand number 15], Red cherry [Hand number 16], Blue cherry [Hand number 17], White cherry [Hand number 18], Bell [Hand number 19] It is sequentially read out as the target combination of the lottery.

  When the gaming state is the normal gaming state or RT (2) and any special combination is carried over, that is, when the state number is set to “3” or “4”, the winning combination table is displayed. Referring to the roles of role numbers 14 to 19, that is, replay (1) [role number 14], replay (2) [role number 15], red cherry [role number 16], blue cherry [role number 17], white cherry [Position number 18] and bell [Position number 19] are sequentially read out as a target combination for internal lottery.

  When the game state is a regular bonus, that is, “5” is set as the state number, the winning combination table is referred to, and the combination of the combination numbers 19 to 22, that is, bell [port number 19], bell + red cherry [ Role number 20], bell + blue cherry [portion number 21], and bell [portion number 22] are sequentially read out as target roles for internal lottery.

  In the internal lottery, when the number of judgment values determined for the combination or combination of roles and the state number indicating the current gaming state for the internal lottery are sequentially added to the random number for internal lottery, and the result of the addition overflows In addition, it is determined that the combination or combination of combinations is won.

  When a winning combination of any combination or combination is determined, a winning flag corresponding to the combination of winning combination or combination determined is stored in the internal winning flag storage work (iwin_flag) assigned to the RAM 41c. Set. The internal winning flag storage work (iwin_flag) consists of a 2-byte storage area, of which the upper byte is assigned as the special role storing work in which the special role winning flag is set, and the lower byte is general. It is assigned as a general role storage work in which a winning flag for a role is set. Specifically, when any of the roles 0 to 4 (special role) is won, a special role winning flag indicating that the special role is won is set in the special role storing work, and the general role is stored. Clear the winning flag set for the workpiece. In addition, when any of the combination numbers 5 to 13 (special combination + general combination) is won, the special combination winning flag indicating that the special combination is selected is set in the special combination storing work. A winning combination flag indicating that the general combination is won is set in the general combination storing work. If any of the combination numbers 14 to 22 (general combination) is won, a general combination winning flag indicating that the general combination is won is set in the general combination storing work. If no winning combination is selected, only the general winning combination work is cleared.

  The number of determination values of each combination and combination of combinations is read according to the storage address of the number of determination values registered in a role-specific table (not shown) stored in advance in the ROM 41b of the main control unit 41.

  The number of determination values may be 256 or more, and cannot be stored in one byte. Therefore, each determination value number is registered using a storage area of two bytes. In addition, the number of determination values is registered corresponding to the above-described state number and bet number that can specify the gaming state. Even for the same combination or combination of the same combination, the winning probability may vary depending on the gaming state, and the winning probability may differ depending on the number of bets even if the gaming state is the same. Because there is. The number of determination values may be common regardless of the set value, or may be different depending on the set value. If the number of determination values is common regardless of the set value, a common flag is set (value is set to “1”).

  Also, the number of medals to be paid out when winning each winning combination is registered in the role-specific table. However, only the red cherries, blue cherries, white cherries, and bells are eligible for paying out medals when winning a prize. The big bonus (1), big bonus (2), big bonus (3), big bonus (4), big bonus (5) wins are accompanied by a transition of the gaming state and are not eligible for payout of medals. . In replay, there is no payout of medals, but it is not necessary to insert medals for setting the number of bets in the next game (the normal game state or RT (1) to (3)). Or it is the same as paying out 3 cards.

  10 to 12 are diagrams illustrating an example of a relationship between a random number value for internal lottery, the number of determination values of each combination and combination of combinations, and winning. In FIG. 10, when any special combination is carried over in the normal gaming state, RT (1), RT (2), in FIG. 11, any special combination is carried over in the normal gaming state, RT (2). FIG. 12 shows an example when the player is in the regular bonus. 10 to 12 show examples in which the set value is 6.

  For example, as shown in FIG. 10, when no special combination is carried over in the normal gaming state, the big bonus (1), the big bonus (2), the big bonus (3), the big bonus (4), Big Bonus (5), Big Bonus (1) + Red Cherry, Big Bonus (2) + Red Cherry, Big Bonus (3) + Red Cherry, Big Bonus (1) + Blue Cherry, Big Bonus (2) + Blue Cherry Big Bonus (3) + Blue Cherry, Big Bonus (1) + White Cherry, Big Bonus (2) + White Cherry, Big Bonus (3) + White Cherry, Replay (1), Replay (2), Red Cherry, Blue cherries, white cherries, and bells are eligible for internal lottery. Further, in this embodiment, with the set value 6, the number of determination values of each combination when no special combination is carried over in the normal gaming state is 8, 8, 8, 8, 8, 8, 8, 8 , 8, 8, 8, 8, 8, 8, 2236, 1, 300, 300, 300, and 1392 are registered, and the big bonus (1) that is the target of the internal lottery is the number of judgment values. The winning result is obtained when 16376 to 16383, in which the addition result overflows by adding 8, is acquired as a random number for internal lottery.

  Next, the big bonus (2) that is the subject of the internal lottery is obtained by adding 16 which is the sum of the judgment value number 8 of the big bonus (1) and the judgment value number 8 of the big bonus (2). The winning combination is obtained when 16368 to 16375, which will overflow, are acquired as random numbers for internal lottery. Similarly, big bonus (3) is obtained when 16360-16367 is obtained as a random number for internal lottery, and big bonus (4) is obtained when 16352-16359 is obtained as a random number for internal lottery. Bonus (5) is a big bonus when 16344-16351 is acquired as a random number for internal lottery, and Big Bonus (1) + red cherry is a big bonus when 16336-16343 is acquired as a random number for internal lottery. (2) + red cherry is obtained when 16328-16335 is acquired as a random number for internal lottery, and big bonus (3) + red cherry is acquired when 16320-16327 is acquired as a random number for internal lottery. For Big Bonus (1) + Blue Cherry, 1631 to 16319 were acquired as random numbers for internal lottery In the case of big bonus (2) + blue cherry, 16304 to 16311 are acquired as random numbers for internal lottery, and in big bonus (3) + blue cherry, 16296 to 16303 are acquired as random numbers for internal lottery. When the big bonus (1) + white cherry is acquired as a random number for internal lottery 16288-16295, the big bonus (2) + white cherry is obtained as a random number for internal lottery 16280-16287 When acquired, Big Bonus (3) + Blue Cherry is acquired as random numbers for internal lottery 16272-16279, and Replay (1) is acquired as random numbers for internal lottery 14036-16271 When replay (2) is performed, 140140 is acquired as a random number for internal lottery. When 13735-14034 is acquired as a random number for internal lottery, when blue cherry is acquired as a random number for internal lottery, 134335-13434, when white cherry is 13135-13434 for internal lottery When acquired as a random number, the bell is determined to be winning when 11743-13134 are acquired as random numbers for internal lottery. When 0 to 11742 are acquired as random numbers for internal lottery, all combinations are lost.

  The approximate winning probability of each combination and combination of combinations calculated based on the number of determination values is as follows: big bonus (1), big bonus (2), big bonus (3), big bonus (4), big bonus (5), Big Bonus (1) + Red Cherry, Big Bonus (2) + Red Cherry, Big Bonus (3) + Red Cherry, Big Bonus (1) + Blue Cherry, Big Bonus (2) + Blue Cherry, Big Bonus (3) Blue Cherry, Big Bonus (1) + White Cherry, Big Bonus (2) + White Cherry, Big Bonus (3) + White Cherry, Replay (1), Replay (2), Red Cherry, Blue Cherry, 1/2048, 1/2048, 1/2048, 1/2048, 1/2048, 1/2048 for white cherry and bell 1/2048, 1/2048, 1/2048, 1/2048, 1/2048, 1/2048, 1/2048, 1/2048, 1 / 7.33, 1/16384, 1 / 54.6, 1 / 54.6, 1 / 54.6, and 1 / 1.77.

  Also, when no special role is carried over in RT (1), big bonus (1), big bonus (2), big bonus (3), big bonus (4), big bonus (5), Big Bonus (1) + Red Cherry, Big Bonus (2) + Red Cherry, Big Bonus (3) + Red Cherry, Big Bonus (1) + Blue Cherry, Big Bonus (2) + Blue Cherry, Big Bonus (3) + Blue Cherry, Big Bonus (1) + White Cherry, Big Bonus (2) + White Cherry, Big Bonus (3) + White Cherry, Replay (1), Replay (2), Red Cherry, Blue Cherry, White Cherry, The bell is subject to internal lottery, and in this embodiment, when the special value is not carried over at RT (1) at the set value 6 8, 8, 8, 8, 8, 8, 8, 8, 8, 8, 8, 8, 8, 8, 12000, 280, 300, 300, 300, 1392 The approximate winning probabilities for each role are 1/2048, 1/2048, 1/2048, 1/2048, 1/2048, 1/2048, 1/2048, 1/2048, 1/2048. 1/2048, 1/2048, 1/2048, 1/2048, 1/2048, 1 / 1.37, 1/280, 1/300, 1/300, 1/300, 1 / 1.11.77, The winning probabilities for Replay (1) and Replay (2) are both higher than when no special combination is carried over in the normal gaming state.

  Also, when no special role is carried over in RT (2), big bonus (1), big bonus (2), big bonus (3), big bonus (4), big bonus (5), Big Bonus (1) + Red Cherry, Big Bonus (2) + Red Cherry, Big Bonus (3) + Red Cherry, Big Bonus (1) + Blue Cherry, Big Bonus (2) + Blue Cherry, Big Bonus (3) + Blue Cherry, Big Bonus (1) + White Cherry, Big Bonus (2) + White Cherry, Big Bonus (3) + White Cherry, Replay (1), Replay (2), Red Cherry, Blue Cherry, White Cherry, The bell is subject to internal lottery, and in this example, when the special value is not carried over at RT (2) at the set value 6 8, 8, 8, 8, 8, 8, 8, 8, 8, 8, 8, 8, 8, 8, 13880, 20, 300, 300, 300, 1392, respectively, The approximate winning probabilities for each role are 1/2048, 1/2048, 1/2048, 1/2048, 1/2048, 1/2048, 1/2048, 1/2048, 1/2048. 1/2048, 1/2048, 1/2048, 1/2048, 1/2048, 1 / 1.18, 1 / 819.2, 1/300, 1/300, 1/300, 1 / 1.11.77 Thus, the winning probability of replay (1) is further increased as compared to the case where no special combination is carried over in RT (1), but the winning probability of replay (2) is lowered. Still, the winning probability of replay (2) is higher than when no special combination is carried over in the normal gaming state.

  As shown in FIG. 11, when any special combination is carried over in the normal gaming state, replay (1), replay (2), red cherry, blue cherry, white cherry, and bell are subject to internal lottery. In this embodiment, 2236, 1, 324, 324, 324, and 1392 are registered as the number of judgment values for each combination when any special combination is carried over in the normal gaming state at the setting value 6. The approximate winning probabilities for each role are 1 / 7.33, 1/16384, 1 / 50.6, 1 / 50.6, 1 / 50.6, 1 / 1.11.77, If no special role is carried over in the game state, the combination of special roles and special roles including special roles that are subject to internal lottery will be excluded from the internal lottery, special role + red cherry, Compared to the case where the winning probability of red cherry, blue cherry, and white cherry alone is not carried over in the normal gaming state because the winning probability of another role + blue cherry, special role + white cherry is reduced. The other winning probabilities are the same as when no special role is carried over in the normal gaming state.

  In addition, if any special role is carried over in RT (2), Replay (1), Replay (2), Red Cherry, Blue Cherry, White Cherry, and Bell are subject to internal lottery and this implementation In the example, 13600, 280, 324, 324, 324, and 1392 are registered as the number of determination values of each combination when any special combination is carried over in RT (2) at the setting value 6. , The approximate winning probabilities for each role are 1 / 1.20, 1 / 58.51, 1 / 50.6, 1 / 50.6, 1 / 50.6, 1 / 1.11.77, and RT ( 2) If any special role is not carried over, the combination of special roles and special roles including special roles that are the targets of internal lottery will be excluded from the internal lottery, special roles + red cherry, special roles + Blue -The winning probability of red cherry, blue cherry, and white cherry alone is higher than when no special role is carried over in RT (2) because the winning probability of special role + white cherry is reduced. The other winning probabilities are the same as when no special combination is carried over in RT (2).

  As shown in FIG. 12, the regular bonus is subject to bell, red cherry + bell, blue cherry + bell, white cherry + bell, and internal lottery. In this embodiment, each role in the regular bonus is set at a set value of 6. 14750, 324, 324, and 324 are registered as the number of determination values, and the approximate winning probabilities of the respective roles are 1 / 1.11, 1 / 50.6, 1 / 50.6, 1 / In regular bonuses, Bell, Red Cherry + Bell, Blue Cherry + Bell, White Cherry + Bell, which are not subject to internal lottery in the normal gaming state and RT (1), RT (2), are internal lottery. It becomes the object of.

  FIG. 13 is a diagram illustrating a configuration of the reel motors 32L, 32C, and 32R. The reel motors 32L, 32C, and 32R are, for example, hybrid type stepping motors, and include a stator 32b and a rotor 32a facing the stator 32b. The rotor 32a has a large number of gear-shaped salient poles (not shown), and permanent magnets magnetized in the same direction as the rotation shaft are incorporated therein. These reel motors 32L, 32C, and 32R receive a pulse signal output from the motor drive circuit 45 based on the control of the CPU 41a, and each excitation phase φ1 to φ4 of the stator 32b is excited according to a predetermined procedure to generate one pulse. The rotor 32a is rotated by a predetermined angle (one step) every time it is received.

  FIG. 14A is a timing chart showing a control method when starting the reel motors 32L, 32C, 32R. In the figure, φ1 to φ4 indicate each excitation phase, “ON” indicates an excitation state, and “OFF” indicates a demagnetization state. When starting the reel motors 32L, 32C, and 32R, the CPU 41a starts excitation in the rotational direction by a 1-2 phase excitation method, which will be described later, starting from the state where only the stop phase is excited. Specifically, for example, when the stop phase is (φ3), φ1 to φ4 are changed in the order of (φ3, φ4), (φ4), (φ4, φ1). Excited alternately in 2 phase, 1 phase and 2 phase.

  If excitation is started starting from a phase different from the stop phase, the permanent magnet of the rotor 32a is suddenly attracted to the excitation phase, and the reel vibrates at the start of rotation. In the present embodiment, since the excitation is started from the stop phase as a starting point, the reel integrally coupled with the rotor 32a starts smoothly.

  FIG. 14B is a timing chart showing a control method during rotation and stop of the reel motors 32L, 32C, 32R.

  First, during the rotation, that is, until the condition for stopping the reel is satisfied, the reel motor is driven by the 1-2 phase excitation method to rotate the reels 2L, 2C, and 2R. For example, a pulse signal indicating excitation of φ1 to φ4 is turned ON / OFF at the timing shown in FIG. 14B, and (φ4, φ1), (φ1), (φ1,. (φ2), (φ2), (φ2, φ3), (φ3), (φ3, φ4), (φ4), (φ4, φ1)... in this order, 2 phase, 1 phase, 2 phase, 1 phase, 2 The reels 2L, 2C, and 2R are rotated by exciting the φ1 to φ4 alternately for each phase and rotating the rotor 32a.

  Next, when the condition for stopping the rotating reel is satisfied, that is, when the rotor 32a steps out by an overshoot amount described later, an angle at which the symbol (target symbol) selected by the stop operation can be derived and displayed. When the angle position reaches the position (target stop angle position), the process shifts to the reel stop control from the excited state of the two phases. For example, when the condition for stopping the reel is established in the period shown in FIG. 14B as the stop condition establishment step, the process proceeds to stop control after waiting until time Ta when the two phases are excited. .

  The reel stop control is performed in two stages as indicated by T1 and T2 in FIG. The control performed at T1 is called 2-phase excitation stop control, and the control performed at T2 is called 3-phase excitation stop control.

  The two-phase excitation stop control is started from the time Ta when the reel motor is driven by the 1-2 phase excitation method and the state is shifted from the state in which the one phase is excited to the state in which the two phases are excited. In this control, the excited state is held for a predetermined hold time T1. For example, as shown in FIG. 14B, the state in which (φ1, φ2) is excited is held for the hold time T1 from the time when (φ1, φ2) is excited to the state in which (φ1) is excited. To do. As a result, rapid braking is applied to the rotor 32a of each reel motor that has been rotating at a high speed.

  The hold time T1 is determined according to the amount of overshoot that will cause the step-out, and varies depending on the magnitude of the holding torque of the reel motor, the inertia of the rotor 32a, the spring constant, and the like. In the present embodiment, it is assumed that the amount of overshoot is four steps of the stepping motor, and the hold time T1 is set as a time required for the reel motor to drive for three steps. Then, the target stop angle position of the rotor 32a is set three steps ahead from the stage where the two-phase excitation stop control is started in accordance with the hold time T1.

  For this reason, at the time Tb when the hold time T1 elapses, the rotor 32a is in a position immediately before the target stop angle position, and the rotation speed is braked. Therefore, the three-phase excitation stop control is started by switching the excitation pattern at time Tb. That is, φ1 is demagnetized, and the stop phase φ3 corresponding to the target stop angle position and the two brake phases φ2 and φ4 at opposite positions across the stop phase are excited for a predetermined time T2. Thus, the rotor 32a stops at the holding torque stable point of the stop phase φ3, that is, the target stop angle position while obtaining the brakes by the brake phases φ2 and φ4. As a result, the reel integrally coupled with the rotor 32a stops at a target stop position where the target symbol can be derived and displayed without being vibrated accurately.

  After the three-phase excitation stop control is executed during T2, the brake phases φ2 and φ4 are demagnetized, and the motor voltage is changed from H to L while maintaining the excitation state of the stop phase φ3. The reason why the excited state of the stop phase φ3 is maintained even after the rotor 32a is stopped is that the rotor 32a deviates from the holding torque stable point of the stop phase φ3 due to the phase difference between the holding torque and the detent torque or the deviation due to the effect of friction. It is for preventing. As a result, it is possible to prevent the reel from moving finely after being temporarily stopped and the angular position of the rotor 32a when the reel motor is started next time from being shifted from the angular position at the time of stopping.

  As a control method for stopping the reel motor, all-phase excitation stop control, that is, control for stopping the rotor 32a by exciting all excitation phases simultaneously, two-phase excitation stop control, that is, two adjacent Control for stopping the rotor 32a by exciting the excitation phases simultaneously is conventionally known (see, for example, Japanese Patent Laid-Open Nos. 61-240846 and 62-36787).

  In the slot machine 1 of this embodiment, in order to smoothly start the reel as described above, it is necessary to specify the exact stop position of the rotor 32a when the reel motor starts rotating.

  However, when the reel motor stop control is performed using the above-described all-phase excitation stop control, the rotor 32a stops after rotating by the amount of overshoot caused by sudden braking. Since the amount of overshoot is determined based on mechanical elements, it is difficult to accurately determine the stop position of the rotor 32a. Therefore, there is a problem in that the above-described smooth reel start cannot be accurately controlled. .

  When the reel motor stop control is performed using the above-described two-phase excitation stop control, the stop position of the rotor 32a converges to the equilibrium point of the two excitation phases finally excited, and the stop Although it is possible to specify the position accurately, there is a problem that the stop mode of the reel becomes unsightly because the vibration associated with the rotor 32a responding excessively to excitation cannot be suppressed.

  On the other hand, the rotation of the rotor 32a is rapidly performed by the two-phase excitation stop control by performing the stop control of the reel motor by using both the two-phase excitation stop control and the three-phase excitation stop control as in the present embodiment. The brake is guided to the target stop angle position while being braked, and then the three-phase excitation stop control obtains a brake by exciting two brake phases at opposite positions across the stop phase of the target stop angle position. Since the rotor 32a stops at the target stop angle position by excitation, the rotating rotor 32a can be stopped at the target stop angle position without vibrating. Furthermore, since the rotor 32a stops at the target stop angle position, the exact stop position of the rotor 32a is specified, so that the reel can be smoothly rotated at the start of rotation.

  Next, stop control of the reels 2L, 2C, 2R will be described.

  In this embodiment, as a reel stop control method, stop control by a stop control table of a stop control table created from table creation data registered in advance in the ROM 41b (hereinafter also referred to as a table method), timing of a stop operation Each searchable position is searched, and the following three methods are adopted: stop control based on the search result (hereinafter also referred to as the control method) and stop control based on both the table method and the control method (hereinafter also referred to as the table + control method). As a result of the internal lottery, stop control is performed by one of the methods according to the reel stop status.

  Which of these three methods is used for stop control is determined in advance. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 15, when the result of the internal lottery is a loss, after the game starts, a stop operation that is first performed with all reels still rotating (hereinafter also referred to as a first stop). Any one reel has already stopped and two reels are rotating, that is, the second stop operation (hereinafter also referred to as second stop), any two reels are stopped and one reel In the state of rotating, that is, in any stop operation of the third stop operation (hereinafter also referred to as third stop), stop control is performed by the table method.

  The results of the internal lottery are Replay (1), Replay (2), Bell, Big Bonus (1) + Replay (1), Big Bonus (1) + Replay (2), Big Bonus (2) + Replay (1), In the case of big bonus (2) + replay (2), big bonus (3) + replay (1), big bonus (3) + replay (2), big bonus (4), big bonus (5) In the first stop, stop control is performed by the table method, and in the second stop and the third stop, stop control is performed by the control method.

  Internal lottery results are red cherry, blue cherry, white cherry, bell + red cherry, bell + blue cherry, bell + white cherry, big bonus (1), big bonus (1) + red cherry, big bonus (1) + Blue Cherry, Big Bonus (1) + White Cherry, Big Bonus (1) + Bell, Big Bonus (2), Big Bonus (2) + Red Cherry, Big Bonus (2) + Blue Cherry, Big Bonus (2) + White Cherry, Big Bonus (2) + Bell, Big Bonus (3), Big Bonus (3) + Red Cherry, Big Bonus (3) + Blue Cherry, Big Bonus (3) + White Cherry, Big Bonus (3) + In the case of a bell, the table + control method is used for any stop operation of the first stop, the second stop, and the third stop. Please is carried out.

  Table creation data for creating a stop control table used when performing stop control by the table method and the table + control method is registered in advance in the ROM 41b and is selected by referring to the table index stored in the ROM 41b. Is done.

  For the table index, the start address of the area where the data for table creation is stored from the reference address (table_index) when referring to the table index, according to the setting state of the winning flag by internal lottery (hereinafter referred to as the internal winning state) The difference up to the address where the index data indicating is stored is registered. As a result, a difference corresponding to the winning combination is acquired, and the corresponding index data can be acquired by adding the difference to the reference address (table_index).

  In this embodiment, stop control tables created from individual table creation data are not used for all the results of the internal lottery. Specifically, for lost, bell, big bonus (4), and big bonus (5), individual table creation data is prepared in advance, but for other combinations and combinations of combinations, Five types of common table creation data that are commonly used for combination of combinations are prepared in advance, and the table index includes individual tables for each of lose, bell, big bonus (4), and big bonus (5). Index data indicating the top address of the area where the creation data is stored is stored, and index data indicating the top address of the area where the five types of common table creation data (1) to (5) are stored. Each is stored.

  Common table creation data is red cherry, bell + red cherry, big bonus (1), big bonus (1) + red cherry, big bonus (1) + blue cherry, big bonus (1) + white cherry, big bonus (1) + Common table creation data used in common for Bell (1), Blue Cherry, Bell + Blue Cherry, Big Bonus (2), Big Bonus (2) + Red Cherry, Big Bonus (2) + Blue Cherry , Big Bonus (2) + White Cherry, Big Bonus (2) + Common Table Creation Data (2) Commonly Used for Bell, White Cherry, Bell + White Cherry, Big Bonus (3), Big Bonus (3) + Red Cherry, Big Bonus (3) + Blue Cherry, Big Bonus (3) + White Cherry, Big Bona (3) + common table creation data (3), replay (1), big bonus (1) + replay (1), big bonus (2) + replay (1), big bonus (3) ) + Replay (1) common table creation data (4), replay (2), big bonus (1) + replay (2), big bonus (2) + replay (2), big bonus ( 3) Consists of common table creation data (5) used in common for + replay (2).

  The table creation data includes a stop control table indicating the number of sliding frames according to the stop operation position, and an address of the stop control table to be referred to according to the reel stop status.

  The stop control table referred to according to the stop status of the reel is the first stop, the second stop, only the left reel is stopped, only the middle reel is stopped, only the right reel is stopped, There may be differences depending on whether the left and middle reels are stopped, the left and right reels are stopped, the middle and right reels are stopped, or one of the reels is stopped. In this case, the address of the stop control table to be referred to is registered for each rotating reel for each situation, and the start address of the table creation data is the same. On the basis of this, it is possible to specify the address of the stop control table to be referred to according to each situation. And to be able to identify the stop control tables required in accordance with the situation. Even when the reel stop status and the stopped position of the stopped reel are different, when the same stop control table is applied, the same address may be registered as the address of the stop control table. In such a case, the same stop control table is referred to.

  The stop control table is data that can specify the number of sliding frames for each timing when the stop operation is performed. In the present embodiment, as described above, stepping motors that make one turn at a cycle of 168 steps (0 to 167) are used for the reel motors 32L, 32C, and 32R. That is, when the reel motors 32L, 32C, and 32R are driven for 168 steps, the reels 2L, 2C, and 2R make one round. Then, 21 areas (frames) divided every 16 steps (the number of steps that one symbol moves) are defined for one reel, and these areas are areas 0 to 20 from the reel reference position. A number is assigned. On the other hand, the number of symbols arranged on one reel is 21, and symbol numbers 0 to 20 from the reel reference position are assigned to symbols on each reel, so symbols 0 to 20 are assigned to each reel. , Area numbers 0 to 20 are assigned in order. In the stop control table, the number of sliding symbols for each area number is compressed and stored according to a predetermined rule, and the number of sliding symbols for each area number can be acquired by expanding the stop control table. Yes.

  As described above, the stop control table created by referring to the table index and the table creation data corresponds to the area number, and the area corresponding to each area number is the stop reference position (in this embodiment, the perspective window 3). Sliding frame when an operation of the stop switches 8L, 8C, 8R is detected at a timing (a timing in which the number of steps from the reel reference position is included in the range of the number of steps of each region number). It is a table with each number set.

  In the table creation data corresponding to the loss, the stop position where any combination of the combinations is not aligned on the winning line is stopped within the drawing range of a maximum of 4 frames, and at the chance (from the table creation data applied at the time of the loss Stored is a stop control table determined so that stop positions constituting a combination of stop positions that do not stop in the specified stop control table do not stop.

  The table creation data corresponding to the bell stores a stop control table determined so that the stop position where the combination of the bells is aligned with any of the pay lines L1 to L4 is drawn and stopped within a drawing range of a maximum of four frames. ing.

  In the data for table creation corresponding to the big bonus (4), it is determined that the stop position where the combination of the big bonus (4) is aligned with any of the winning lines L5 and L6 is drawn and stopped within the drawing range of a maximum of four frames. Stored stop control table is stored.

  In the table creation data corresponding to the big bonus (5), it is determined that the stop position where the combination of the big bonus (5) is aligned with any of the pay lines L5 and L6 is drawn and stopped within the drawing range of a maximum of four frames. Stored stop control table is stored.

  In the common table creation data (1), the stop position where the combination of red cherries and the combination of big bonus (1) are aligned with any one of the winning lines L1 to L4 is drawn in the drawing range of a maximum of four frames and stopped. Stored is a stop control table in which stop positions constituting the chance eyes are determined to be stoppable.

  In particular, among the stop control tables specified from the common table creation data (1), in the stop control table applied to the left reel while all the reels are rotating, as shown in FIG. For the region numbers 1 to 7 in which “red cherry” can be drawn into the winning lines L1 to L4 within the drawing range of 4 frames, the number of sliding symbols for drawing “red cherry” into the winning lines L1 to L4 is determined. In addition, the number of sliding frames for drawing “Red 7” into the winning lines L1 to L4 is determined for the area numbers 12 to 18 where “Red 7” can be drawn into the winning lines L1 to L4 in the drawing range of up to 4 frames. ing. In this embodiment, in the left reel, “red cherry” can be drawn into the winning lines L1 to L4 with a drawing range of up to four frames, and “red 7” can be drawn into the winning lines L1 to L4 with a drawing range of up to four frames. Since the range that can be drawn into L4 does not overlap, there is no range in which both symbols can be drawn in common. In addition, with respect to the range in which neither “Red 7” nor “Red Cherry” can be drawn into the winning lines L1 to L4 in the drawing range of up to 4 frames, chances are assigned in the drawing range of up to 4 frames. The number of sliding symbols for drawing in the stop position constituting the chance eye is determined with respect to the area number in which the stop position can be drawn.

  In the common table creation data (2), the stop position where the combination of blue cherry and the combination of big bonus (2) is aligned with any of the winning lines L1 to L4 is drawn in the drawing range of a maximum of four frames and stopped. Stored is a stop control table in which stop positions constituting the chance eyes are determined to be stoppable.

  In particular, in the stop control table specified from the common table creation data (2), all the reels are rotating and the stop control table applied to the left reel has a maximum of 4 frames. In the range, the number of sliding frames for drawing “blue cherry” into the winning lines L1 to L4 is determined for the area numbers 0 and 15 to 20 in which “blue cherry” can be drawn into the winning lines L1 to L4. In addition, the number of sliding frames for drawing “Blue 7” into the winning lines L1 to L4 is determined for the area numbers 5 to 11 where “Blue 7” can be drawn into the winning lines L1 to L4 in the drawing range of up to 4 frames. ing. In this embodiment, in the left reel, “blue cherry” can be drawn into the winning lines L1 to L4 with a drawing range of up to 4 frames, and “blue 7” can be drawn into the winning lines L1 to L4 with a drawing range of up to 4 frames. Since the range that can be drawn into L4 does not overlap, there is no range in which both symbols can be drawn in common. In addition, with regard to the range in which neither “Blue 7” nor “Blue Cherry” can be drawn into the winning lines L1 to L4 in the drawing range of up to 4 frames, chances are assigned in the drawing range of up to 4 frames. The number of sliding symbols for drawing in the stop position constituting the chance eye is determined with respect to the area number in which the stop position can be drawn.

  In the common table creation data (3), the stop position where the combination of the white cherry and the combination of the big bonus (3) are aligned with any one of the pay lines L1 to L4 is drawn in the drawing range of a maximum of four frames and stopped. Stored is a stop control table in which stop positions constituting the chance eyes are determined to be stoppable.

  In particular, in the stop control table specified from the common table creation data (3), the stop control table applied to the left reel in a state where all the reels are rotating, the maximum of four frames are drawn. In the range, the number of sliding frames for drawing “white cherry” into the winning lines L1 to L4 is determined for the area numbers 8 to 14 in which “white cherry” can be drawn into the winning lines L1 to L4. Also, a sliding piece that draws “White 7” into the winning lines L1 to L4 for the area numbers 0 to 4, 19, and 20 in which “White 7” can be drawn into the winning lines L1 to L4 in the drawing range of up to 4 frames. A number is defined. In this embodiment, in the left reel, “white cherry” can be drawn into the winning lines L1 to L4 with a drawing range of up to 4 frames, and “white 7” can be drawn into the winning lines L1 to L4 with a drawing range of up to 4 frames. Since the range that can be drawn into L4 does not overlap, there is no range in which both symbols can be drawn in common. In addition, with respect to the range in which neither “White 7” nor “White Cherry” can be drawn into the winning lines L1 to L4 in the drawing range of up to 4 frames, chances are assigned in the drawing range of up to 4 frames. The number of sliding symbols for drawing in the stop position constituting the chance eye is determined with respect to the area number in which the stop position can be drawn.

  In the common table creation data (4), a stop control table is set so that the stop position where the combination of the replay (1) is aligned with any one of the winning lines L1 to L4 is drawn and stopped within a drawing range of a maximum of four frames. Is stored.

  In the common table creation data (5), a stop control table is set so that the stop position where the combination of the replay (2) is aligned with any one of the winning lines L1 to L4 is drawn and stopped within a drawing range of a maximum of four frames. Is stored.

  Since the stop control table is used only for the first stop when the bell is elected, only the stop control table for the first stop is stored in the table creation data corresponding to the bell. The address of the stop control table to be referred to and the stop control table used after the second stop are not stored. Similarly, when replay (1), big bonus (1) + replay (1), big bonus (2) + replay (1), big bonus (3) + replay (1) are won, replay (2), big bonus (1) + Replay (2), Big Bonus (2) + Replay (2), Big Bonus (3) + Replay (2), Big Bonus (4), Big Bonus (5) Even when the stop control table is used only for the first stop, common table creation data (4) corresponding to them, common table creation data (5), table creation data corresponding to big bonus (4) In the table creation data corresponding to the big bonus (5), only the stop control table for the first stop is stored, and the stop control to be referred to after the second stop is stored. Stop control table used for address or the second and subsequent stop of the table is not stored.

  Here, the content of stop control according to the stop control method will be described.

  First, when the CPU 41a performs stop control by the table method, as shown in FIG. 16, when the reel starts rotating, or when the reel stops and the reel that is still rotating still remains, Refer to the table index before the reel stop operation becomes valid, and if there is a reel that has been stopped as a result of the internal lottery for an unstopped reel, the table creation data corresponding to the stop position of that reel Select the stop control table.

  Then, the selected stop control table is expanded and stored in the virtual sliding top table (see FIG. 20) assigned to the RAM 41c for each reel.

  As shown in FIG. 20, in the virtual sliding top table, for each reel, the area corresponding to each area number corresponds to the stop reference position (in this embodiment, the lower symbol area in the perspective window 3). ) (The number of steps from the reel reference position is included in the range of the number of steps of each area number), and the number of sliding frames when the operation of the stop switches 8L, 8C, 8R is detected is stored. The number of sliding symbols developed from the stop control table is stored in correspondence with the corresponding area number of the corresponding reel.

  Next, when the CPU 41a performs stop control by the control method, as shown in FIG. 17, the reel stop operation becomes effective when the reel stops and the reel that is still rotating still remains. As a result of the internal lottery for reels that have not been stopped in the previous stage, based on the stop position of the reels that have already been stopped, the abnormal winning (for the role not won in the internal lottery) is determined for each stop position and the stop prohibited position (stopped) In the case of an abnormal winning (a winning position other than the winning role) or a duplicated winning position is determined for an unstopped reel, and if it is an abnormal winning or a stop prohibited position, a stop prohibited position flag is set. To do.

  Next, for each stop operation position, a stop position corresponding to the result of the internal lottery (a stop position where the winning combination is aligned on the winning line) is searched.

  Specifically, for each stop operation position, the stop position according to the number of sliding symbols of 0 to 4 is set in the order corresponding to the combination (bell, big bonus (4), big bonus (5). In the order of 4, 0, 3, 1, 2, replay (1), replay (2), the number of sliding frames is specified in the order of 0, 1, 2, 3, 4) Is determined to be a stop position where the winning combination is aligned on the winning line, and if it is determined that the winning combination is the stopping position aligned on the winning line, a stop prohibition position flag is further set for the stop position. It is determined whether or not a stop prohibition position flag is set. If the stop prohibition position flag is not set, the stop position is acquired, and the number of sliding frames at the acquired stop position corresponds to the corresponding reel in the virtual sliding frame table. Stored in the area number of the stop operation position.

  Even if it is determined that the winning combination is a stop position on the winning line, if the stop prohibition position flag is set for the stop position, the next stop position is determined. In addition, even if the stop positions of all the sliding symbols are determined, there is no stop position where the winning combination is aligned on the winning line, or even if there is a stopping position where the winning combination is aligned on the winning line, the stop prohibited position flag is set. If it is set, the number of sliding symbols at the last determined stop position is stored in the corresponding reel of the virtual sliding symbol table and the area number of the corresponding stop operation position. That is, in the case of bell, big bonus (4), and big bonus (5), the number of sliding frames is 4, and in the case of replay (1) and replay (2), 0 is stored. In addition, when the stop prohibition position flag is set for the stop position determined last, the number of slip frames that is acquired retroactively to the stop position for which the stop prohibition position flag is not set and becomes the acquired stop position Is stored in the area number of the corresponding stop operation position of the corresponding reel in the virtual sliding top table. In this embodiment, as will be described later, the symbols “bell” and “replay” are arranged at intervals of 4 frames or less on all reels, and the reels are pulled in and stopped within the range of 0 to 5 frames. The combination of Bell, Big Bonus (4), Big Bonus (5), Replay (1) or Replay (2) can be aligned on the winning line, so the winning combination will always stop on the winning line The number of sliding frames as the position is stored.

  After the number of sliding symbols is stored for all the area numbers of the rotating reels in the virtual sliding frame table, the stop operation is validated, and in this state, among the stop switches 8L, 8C, 8R, the rotating reels When any of the corresponding operations is detected effectively, the area number of the stop operation position is identified based on the number of steps from the reel reference position at the time when the stop operation is detected, and the reel of which the stop operation is detected With reference to the virtual sliding top table, the number of sliding tops corresponding to the area number of the specified stop operation position is acquired. Based on the acquired number of sliding symbols, control is performed to stop the rotation of the reels 2L, 2C, 2R corresponding to the operated stop switches 8L, 8C, 8R.

  Next, when the CPU 41a performs stop control by the table + control method, as shown in FIG. 18, when the rotation of the reel is started or the reel is stopped, the reel that is still rotating still remains. Sometimes, the table index is referred to in the stage before the reel stop operation becomes valid, and the stop corresponding to the stop position of the stopped reel is determined from the table creation data corresponding to the result of the internal lottery for the unstopped reel. Select a control table.

  Then, the selected stop control table is expanded to acquire the number of sliding frames for each stop operation position, and the acquired number of sliding frames is stored in the corresponding area number of the corresponding reel in the virtual sliding frame table.

  Next, as a result of the internal lottery for the unstopped reels, an abnormal winning (a role not won in the internal lottery) is determined for each stop position based on the stop position of the stopped reel, and a stop prohibited position (when stopped) Then, an abnormal winning (a winning position other than the winning combination) or a duplicated winning position is determined for an unstopped reel, and if it is an abnormal winning or a stop prohibited position, a stop prohibited position flag is set.

  In particular, in the present embodiment, it is possible to align a plurality of winning combinations on the winning line in the stop control table specified from the common table creation data.

  For this reason, if some of the winning combinations for the final stopped reel are on the winning line as a result of the other stopped reels, the winning combination that has not been won on that winning line A stop prohibition position flag is set for the position. In addition, even in the first stop or the second stop, a stop position where an abnormal winning or a double winning cannot be avoided in an unstopped reel (for example, although one hand can be avoided, the other hand is aligned) The stop prohibition position flag is set for.

  Next, for each stop operation position, the stop position is searched for each stop operation position based on the stop position of the reel that has been stopped as a result of the internal lottery.

  Specifically, for each stop operation position, stop positions according to the number of sliding frames of 0 to 4 are set in an order determined according to the number of sliding frames stored in the virtual sliding frame table (in this embodiment, FIG. For example, if the number of sliding frames stored in the virtual sliding frame table is 0, the number of sliding frames is 0, the number of sliding frames is 3, the number of sliding frames is 1, and the number of sliding frames is 2. The priority of the specified stop position is compared with the priority of the stop position based on the number of sliding frames developed from the stop control table stored in the virtual sliding frame table. To do.

  Then, as a result of the comparison, it is determined whether or not the priority of the stop position specified for each number of sliding frames is higher than the priority of the stopping position based on the number of sliding frames stored in the virtual sliding frame table. As shown in FIG. 19B, the priority of the stop position is higher in the stop position where the stop prohibition position flag is not set than in the stop position where the stop prohibition position flag is set. The stop position where the winning combination is aligned with any of the winning lines L1 to L4 has a higher priority than the stop position where the combination is not aligned with any of the winning lines L1 to L4, and the winning combination is a special role + small role In this case, it is determined that the stop position where the special combination is aligned with any of the winning lines L1 to L4 is higher in priority than the stop position where the small combination is aligned with any of the winning lines L1 to L4. Further, in the first stop and the second stop, if the winning combination is a special combination + small combination, if there is a stop position where both of the selected special combination and small combination are on any of the winning lines L1 to L4 Unless the stop prohibition position flag is set, the stop position is determined as having higher priority than the stop position where the special combination or small combination is aligned with any of the winning lines L1 to L4. In addition, when the winning combination is a plurality of small combinations with different payouts, a small combination with relatively higher payout than a stop position where a relatively small payout is aligned with any of the winning lines L1 to L4. It is determined that the stop position aligned with any of the lines L1 to L4 has a higher priority. Further, if the winning combination is a stop position where the winning combination is aligned with any of the winning lines L1 to L6, the winning combination is one of the winning lines L1 to L4 rather than the stop position where the winning combination is aligned with any of the winning lines L5, L6. It is determined that the aligned stop positions have higher priority. When determining the priority of the stop position, as shown in FIG. 19B, a priority table in which the priorities of the types of stop positions are set is provided, and either stop is referred to by referring to the priority table. Whether or not the position priority is high may be determined, or according to a predetermined priority (priority shown in FIG. 19B), a stop position with a high priority is a stop with a low priority. A program in which it is determined that the priority is higher than the position (for example, whether or not both stop positions are stop positions where the winning combinations are aligned, one is a stop position where the winning combinations are not aligned, and the other is If it is a stop position where the winning combination is aligned, the stop position where the winning combination is aligned is determined to have a higher priority, so that it is determined which stop position has a higher priority. Anyway.

  If it is determined that the priority of the stop position specified by the number of sliding frames is higher than the priority of the stopping position based on the number of sliding frames stored in the virtual sliding frame table, The number of sliding frames stored in the area number of the corresponding stop operation position of the corresponding reel is updated to the number of sliding frames that become the stop position searched by the number of sliding frames.

  In addition, even when compared with the stop positions of all the sliding frame numbers, the priority of the stopping positions searched for by the number of sliding frames is more than the priority of the stopping position based on the number of sliding frames stored in the virtual sliding frame table. If it is not determined that the number is high, the number of sliding symbols stored in the virtual sliding frame table is not updated, and the number of sliding symbols developed from the stop control table is maintained.

  For example, a case where only the big bonus (1) is won and all reels are still rotating will be described as an example. As shown in FIG. 21, the stop operation positions of the area numbers 0 and 8 to 20 of the left reel No stop prohibition flag is set for the stop position based on the number of sliding symbols developed from the stop control table, and the stop positions higher than the priority of these stop positions are specified according to the number of sliding symbols. Since there is no position, the number of sliding symbols developed from the stop control table and stored in the virtual sliding symbol table is maintained. For the stop operation positions of the region numbers 1 to 7, a stop prohibition position flag is set for the stop position (region numbers 5 and 7) based on the number of sliding symbols developed from the stop control table. That is, there is a stop position that is higher than the priority of the stop position specified from these stop operation positions, so that the sliding top that is determined to have the highest priority at the earliest stage in the order shown in FIG. The number of sliding frames in the virtual sliding frame table is updated to a number (the number of sliding frames is 3 for the stop operation positions of the region numbers 5 and 7 and the number of sliding frames is 0 for the stop operation positions of the region numbers 1 to 4 and 6).

  Then, after the comparison of the priority of the number of sliding frames is completed for all the area numbers of the rotating reels in the virtual sliding frame table, the stop operation is validated, and in this state, of the stop switches 8L, 8C, 8R When any operation corresponding to the rotating reel is detected effectively, the stop operation position area number is identified based on the number of steps from the reel reference position when the stop operation is detected, and the stop operation is performed. The number of sliding symbols corresponding to the area number of the specified stop operation position is acquired by referring to the virtual sliding symbol table of the reel where the is detected. Based on the acquired number of sliding symbols, control is performed to stop the rotation of the reels 2L, 2C, 2R corresponding to the operated stop switches 8L, 8C, 8R.

  In this embodiment, stop control is performed by a stop control method, a table method and a table + control method corresponding to one internal lottery result in one game state and the stop state of a reel (and the stop position of a stopped reel). The stop control table to be referred to when performing, the search order of the stop position when performing stop control with the control method, and the order of determining the priority of the stop position when performing stop control with the table + control method are uniquely determined. The number of sliding frames stored in the virtual sliding frame table is also unique with respect to one internal lottery result in one gaming state and the reel stop status (and the stop position of the stopped reel). For this reason, when all of the gaming state, the internal lottery result, and the reel stop status (and the stop position of the stopped reel) are the same, the reel stop control is performed based on the same control pattern. It becomes.

  In this embodiment, no matter which stop control is applied, the number of sliding frames is always in the range of 0 to 4, so that the reel can be stopped by drawing a maximum of 4 frames after detecting the stop operation. Is possible. That is, the symbol stop position can be designated from a range of up to five frames including the stop operation position at which the stop operation is detected. In addition, since it is necessary to move one frame to move the reel for one symbol, it is possible to stop the reel by pulling in a maximum of four symbols after detecting the stop operation. The symbol stop position can be designated from a range of up to five symbols including the operation position.

  Therefore, if any winning combination is won, regardless of the stop control method, the maximum number of winning combinations will be drawn within the range of 4 frames, and the number of sliding frames that will be pulled in so that there is no winning combination. Is stored in the virtual sliding top table and the reel stop control is performed. On the other hand, if none of the roles is won, the number of sliding tops that do not have any of the roles is stored in the virtual sliding top table and the reel The stop control is performed. As a result, when the stop operation is performed, if the symbols of the winning combination can be stopped on the winning line in the drawing range of up to 4 frames, the control is performed to align them and stop. The symbol of the winning combination will be controlled to be stopped in a drawing range of a maximum of 4 frames.

  If none of the winning combinations have been won, that is, in the case of a loss, at the time of the 1st to 3rd stop, none of the winning combinations will be on the winning line using the table creation data corresponding to the loss. The number of sliding frames without stopping the eyes is stored in the virtual sliding frame table. As a result, when a stop operation is performed, stop control is performed so that none of the winning combinations are aligned with the winning line and the chances are not stopped.

  If any of Replay (1), Big Bonus (1) + Replay (1), Big Bonus (2) + Replay (1), Big Bonus (3) + Replay (1) is won, At the time of one stop, the number of sliding frames that draws the symbols constituting the combination of replay (1) to any one of the winning lines L1 to L4 within the drawing range of 4 frames using the common data creation table (4) It is stored in the virtual sliding piece table, and reel stop control is performed. In addition, at the time of the second and third stops, the stop position where the replay (1) is aligned and stopped at the maximum 4 frames drawing range from the stop position of the stopped reels to the pay lines L1 to L4 is set for each stop operation position. The number of sliding symbols that are searched and become the stop positions for stopping the replay (1) together is stored in the virtual sliding frame table for each stop operation position. As a result, when the stop operation is performed, if the combination of the replay (1) can be stopped in the pay lines L1 to L4 within the drawing range of a maximum of 4 frames, the control is performed to stop the same. It will be.

  If any of Replay (2), Big Bonus (1) + Replay (2), Big Bonus (2) + Replay (2), Big Bonus (3) + Replay (2) is won At the time of one stop, the number of sliding frames that draws the symbols constituting the combination of replay (2) to any one of the winning lines L1 to L4 within the drawing range of 4 frames using the common data creation table (5) It is stored in the virtual sliding top table. Further, at the time of the second and third stops, the stop position where the replay (2) is aligned and stopped from the stop position of the stopped reels to the pay lines L1 to L4 within the maximum four-frame drawing range is set for each stop operation position. The number of sliding symbols, which are searched and become stop positions for stopping the replay (2) together, is stored in the virtual sliding symbol table for each stop operation position. As a result, when the stop operation is performed, if the combination of the replay (2) can be stopped in the pay lines L1 to L4 within a maximum of four frames, the control is performed to stop the same. It will be.

  When the red cherry is won, at the time of the first to third stops, the common data creation table (1) is used to configure the combination of the red cherry and the big bonus (1). The number of sliding symbols that draws the symbol to any of the winning lines L1 to L4 within the range of 4 frames and the number of sliding symbols that draws the chance are stored in the virtual sliding frame table, and then a prize other than red cherry ( With regard to the stop operation position in which the number of sliding tops that become stop-prohibited positions that cannot avoid the big bonus (1)) or double winning is stored, the number of sliding tops that become stop positions other than the stop-prohibited positions is updated. Specifically, at the time of the first stop and the second stop, depending on the stop operation position of the third stop reel, the stop that stores the number of sliding symbols that becomes a stop position that makes it impossible to avoid winnings other than red cherry or double winning The number of sliding symbols at the operation position is updated to the number of sliding symbols at the stop position where it is possible to avoid winnings other than red cherries and double winnings, and the number of sliding symbols at other stop operation positions is maintained. In addition, at the time of the third stop, the number of sliding symbols at the stop operation position in which the number of sliding symbols as the stopping position where it is impossible to avoid winnings other than red cherries or overlapping winnings is stored is the winning or overlapping other than red cherry The number of sliding symbols at the stop position where the winning can be avoided is updated, and the number of sliding symbols at other stop operation positions is maintained. Thereby, when the stop operation is performed, if the combination of red cherries can be stopped in the pay lines L1 to L4 within the maximum four-frame drawing range, the control is performed to stop the same and win. For the combination of the big bonus (1) that has not been performed, control is performed so that the combination is stopped within the drawing range of a maximum of 4 frames.

  When the blue cherry is won, at the time of the first to third stops, the common data creation table (2) is used to constitute the combination of the blue cherry and the big bonus (2). The number of sliding symbols that draws the symbol to any of the winning lines L1 to L4 within the range of 4 frames and the number of sliding symbols that draws the chance are stored in the virtual sliding frame table, and then a prize other than Blue Cherry ( With regard to the stop operation position in which the number of sliding tops that become stop-prohibited positions that cannot avoid the big bonus (2)) or double winning is stored, the number of sliding tops that become stop positions other than the stop-prohibited positions is updated. As a result, when the stop operation is performed, if the combination of blue cherries can be stopped in the pay lines L1 to L4 within a maximum of four frames in the drawing range, the control is performed so that the winning combination is stopped. The combination of the big bonus (2) that has not been performed is controlled to be stopped in a pull-in range of a maximum of 4 frames.

  When the white cherry is won, at the time of the first to third stops, the common data creation table (3) is used to configure the combination of the symbols constituting the white cherry and the big bonus (3). The number of sliding symbols that draws the symbol to any one of the winning lines L1 to L4 within the drawing range of 4 frames and the number of sliding symbols that draws the chance are stored in the virtual sliding frame table, and then the winning of a role other than white cherry ( With regard to the stop operation position in which the number of sliding tops that become stop-prohibited positions that cannot avoid the big bonus (3)) or double winning is stored, the number of sliding tops that become stop positions other than the stop-prohibited positions is updated. Thus, when the stop operation is performed, if the combination of white cherries can be stopped in the pay lines L1 to L4 within the drawing range of a maximum of 4 frames, the control is performed to stop the same and the winning line is selected. The combination of the big bonus (3) that has not been performed is controlled to be stopped in a drawing range of a maximum of 4 frames.

  When the bell is won, at the time of the first stop, any of the winning lines L1 to L4 within the drawing range of 4 frames for the symbols constituting the bell combination using the data creation table corresponding to the bell The number of sliding frames to be drawn to the maximum is stored in the virtual sliding frame table. In addition, at the time of the second and third stops, a stop position for stopping by aligning the bells within the maximum four-frame drawing range from the stop position of the stopped reel to the pay lines L1 to L4 is searched for each stop operation position, The number of sliding symbols as stop positions at which the bells are aligned and stopped is stored in the virtual sliding symbol table for each stop operation position. Thus, when the stop operation is performed, if the combination of the bells can be stopped on the pay lines L1 to L4 within the drawing range of a maximum of 4 frames, the control is performed so as to stop them together. .

  When Bell + Red Cherry is elected, during the first to third stops, the combination of the red cherry and the big bonus (1) using the common data creation table (1) and The symbols that make up the red cherry after the number of sliding symbols that draws the maximum number of symbols in the winning lines L1 to L4 within the drawing range of 4 frames is stored in the virtual sliding frame table. Out of the stop operation positions for drawing in the winning lines L1 to L4, the number of sliding symbols at the stop operation position where the bell having a larger payout number than the red cherries can be drawn into the winning lines L1 to L4, and the symbols constituting the red cherries are the winning lines L1. The number of sliding symbols at the stop operation position that is not pulled into L4 is updated to the number of sliding symbols that pulls the bell into the winning lines L1 to L4. The stop operation position in which the number of sliding symbols that become the stop-prohibited position that cannot avoid the double winning (Big Bonus (1)) or the double winning is stored is updated to the number of sliding symbols that become the stop positions other than the stop-prohibited position. The In addition, the number of sliding symbols at other stop operation positions is maintained. Thus, when the stop operation is performed, if the combination of the bells can be stopped in the pay lines L1 to L4 within the drawing range of a maximum of 4 frames, the control is performed so as to stop the wins. If you cannot pull the combination of bells into the L1-L4 with a maximum draw range of 4 frames, if you can stop the combination of red cherries in the draw line L1-L4 with a draw range of up to 4 frames, Control to stop them in alignment is performed. That is, in such a case, priority is given to the control of aligning the bells with a larger number of payouts than the red cherries in the pay lines L1 to L4, and the red cherries can be won only when the bells cannot be drawn. In this embodiment, as will be described later, since the symbols constituting the bell are arranged so as to be within the pull-in range for all reels, the combination of bells is always set when Bell + Red Cherry is won. The winning lines L1 to L4 are aligned.

  When Bell + Blue Cherry is elected, during the first to third stops, the combination of symbols and big bonus (2) constituting the combination of blue cherry using the common data creation table (2) and The symbols that make up the blue cherry after the number of sliding symbols that draws the maximum number of winning symbols L1 to L4 within the drawing range of 4 frames is stored in the virtual sliding frame table. Out of the stop operation positions for drawing in the winning lines L1 to L4, the number of sliding symbols at the stop operation position where the bell with a larger number of payouts than the blue cherries can be drawn into the winning lines L1 to L4, and the symbols constituting the blue cherries are the winning lines L1 The number of sliding symbols at the stop operation position that is not pulled into L4 is updated to the number of sliding symbols that pulls the bell into the winning lines L1 to L4. The stop operation position in which the number of sliding symbols that become the stop prohibition position that cannot avoid the double winning (big bonus (2)) or the double winning is stored is updated to the number of sliding symbols that become the stop position other than the stop prohibition position. The In addition, the number of sliding symbols at other stop operation positions is maintained. Thus, when the stop operation is performed, if the combination of the bells can be stopped in the pay lines L1 to L4 within the drawing range of a maximum of 4 frames, the control is performed so as to stop the wins. If you cannot pull the combination of bells into the L1-L4 with a maximum draw range of 4 frames, if you can stop the combination of blue cherries in the draw line L1-L4 with a draw range of up to 4 frames, Control to stop them in alignment is performed. That is, in such a case, priority is given to the control for aligning the bells with a larger number of payouts than the blue cherries in the pay lines L1 to L4, and the blue cherries can be won only when the bells cannot be drawn. In this embodiment, as will be described later, since the symbols constituting the bell are arranged so as to be within the pull-in range for all reels, a combination of bells is always used when a bell + blue cherry is won. The winning lines L1 to L4 are aligned.

  When Bell + White Cherry is elected, during the first to third stops, the combination of symbols and big bonus (3) constituting the combination of white cherry using the common data creation table (3) and The symbols constituting the white cherry are stored in the virtual sliding piece table after the number of sliding symbols that draws the maximum number of the symbols constituting the number of sliding symbols to draw the chance into the winning lines L1 to L4 within the drawing range of 4 frames is stored. Out of the stop operation positions for drawing in the winning lines L1 to L4, the number of sliding symbols at the stop operation position where the bell with a larger number of payouts than the white cherries can be drawn into the winning lines L1 to L4, and the symbols constituting the white cherries are the winning lines L1. The number of sliding symbols at the stop operation position that is not pulled into L4 is updated to the number of sliding symbols that pulls the bell into the winning lines L1 to L4. The stop operation position in which the number of sliding symbols that become the stop-prohibited position that cannot avoid the double winning (Big Bonus (3)) or the double winning is stored is updated to the number of sliding symbols that become the stop positions other than the stop-prohibited position. The In addition, the number of sliding symbols at other stop operation positions is maintained. Thus, when the stop operation is performed, if the combination of the bells can be stopped in the pay lines L1 to L4 within the drawing range of a maximum of 4 frames, the control is performed so as to stop the wins. If the combination of bells cannot be pulled into L1-L4 with a maximum draw range of 4 frames, and if the combination of white cherries can be stopped on the winning lines L1-L4 with a draw range of maximum 4 frames, Control to stop them in alignment is performed. That is, in such a case, priority is given to the control for aligning the bells with a larger number of payouts than the white cherries in the pay lines L1 to L4, and the white cherries can be won only when the bells cannot be drawn. In this embodiment, as will be described later, since the symbols constituting the bell are arranged so as to be within the pull-in range for all reels, a combination of bells is always used when a bell + white cherry is won. The winning lines L1 to L4 are aligned.

  When the big bonus (1) is won, at the time of the first to third stops, the combination of the red cherry and the big bonus (1) using the common data creation table (1) Big bonus (1) after the number of sliding symbols that draws the symbols that make up the winning symbol into any of the winning lines L1 to L4 within the drawing range of 4 frames and the number of sliding symbols that draws the chance are stored in the virtual sliding frame table For the stop operation position in which the number of sliding symbols as a stop prohibition position in which a winning of a role other than (red cherry) or double winning cannot be avoided is stored, the number of sliding symbols as a stop position other than the stop prohibition position is updated. Specifically, at the time of the first stop and the second stop, depending on the stop operation position of the third stop reel, the number of sliding symbols as a stop position where it is impossible to avoid winnings other than the big bonus (1) or overlapping winnings is stored. The number of sliding symbols at the stopped operation position is updated to the number of sliding symbols at the stopping position that can avoid winnings other than the big bonus (1) and double winnings, and the number of sliding symbols at other stopping operation positions is maintained. Is done. Further, at the time of the third stop, the number of sliding symbols at the stop operation position in which the number of sliding symbols as the stopping position where it is impossible to avoid winnings or duplicate winnings other than the big bonus (1) is stored as the big bonus (1 ), The number of sliding symbols at the stop position where the winning position and the double winning can be avoided are updated, and the number of sliding symbols at the other stop operation positions is maintained. Thereby, when the stop operation is performed, if the combination of the big bonus (1) can be stopped in the pay lines L1 to L4 within the maximum four-frame drawing range, the control is performed to stop the same. However, the combination of red cherries that have not been won will be controlled to be stopped in a drawing range of up to 4 frames.

  When the big bonus (1) + red cherry is won, at the time of the first to third stops, the symbols and the big bonus (1) constituting the combination of red cherries using the common data creation table (1) ) Is stored in the virtual sliding frame table after the number of sliding frames that draws the maximum number of symbols constituting the combination in the winning line L1 to L4 within the drawing range of 4 frames and the number of sliding frames that pulls in the chance eye are stored in the virtual sliding frame table (1) For the stop operation position in which the number of sliding tops that become stop-prohibited positions that cannot avoid winnings (abnormal winnings) or double winnings other than red cherry is stored, the sliding tops that become stop positions other than the stop-prohibited positions Updated to number. Specifically, at the time of the first stop and the second stop, depending on the stop operation position of the third stop reel, a sliding piece that becomes a stop position that makes it impossible to avoid winnings or duplicate winnings other than Big Bonus (1) and Red Cherry The number of sliding symbols at the stop operation position in which the number is stored is updated to the number of sliding symbols as a stop position that can avoid winnings and duplicate winnings other than Big Bonus (1) and Red Cherry, and other stopping operation positions The number of sliding frames is maintained. In addition, at the time of the third stop, the number of sliding symbols at the stop operation position in which the number of sliding symbols as the stopping position where it is impossible to avoid winnings or duplicate winnings other than the big bonus (1) and red cherry is stored is the big It is updated to the number of sliding symbols at the stop position where it is possible to avoid winnings other than the bonus (1) and red cherry and double winnings, and the number of sliding symbols at other stop operation positions is maintained. Thereby, when the stop operation is performed, if the combination of the big bonus (1) can be stopped in the pay lines L1 to L4 within the maximum four-frame drawing range, the control is performed to stop the same. If the combination of red cherries can be stopped on the pay lines L1 to L4 within a maximum of 4 frames, control is performed to align and stop them.

  When the big bonus (1) + blue cherry is won, at the time of the first to third stops, the symbols and the big bonus (1) constituting the combination of red cherries using the common data creation table (1) ) Is stored in the virtual sliding frame table after the number of sliding frames that draws the maximum number of symbols constituting the combination in the winning line L1 to L4 within the drawing range of 4 frames and the number of sliding frames that pulls in the chance eye are stored in the virtual sliding frame table Among the stop operation positions where the symbols constituting (1) cannot be drawn into the winning lines L1 to L4, the number of sliding symbols at the stop operation position where the blue cherry does not become the stop position aligned with the winning lines L1 to L4 is the blue cherry winning It is updated to the number of sliding frames that will be the stop positions aligned with the lines L1 to L4, and a prize other than Big Bonus (1) and Blue Cherry (Red Cherry) The stop operation position in which the number of sliding tops that are unavoidable stop prohibited positions is stored is updated to the number of sliding tops that are stop positions other than the stop prohibited position, and the number of sliding tops at other stop operation positions is maintained. . Thereby, when the stop operation is performed, if the combination of the big bonus (1) can be stopped in the pay lines L1 to L4 within the maximum four-frame drawing range, the control is performed to stop the same. If the combination of Big Bonus (1) cannot be drawn into the winning lines L1 to L4 with a drawing range of up to 4 frames, the blue cherry combination is aligned to the winning lines L1 to L4 with a drawing range of up to 4 frames. If they can be stopped, the control is performed to align them and stop, and the combination of red cherries that have not been won is controlled to be stopped in a drawing range of a maximum of 4 frames. That is, in such a case, priority is given to the control for aligning the big bonus (1) with the winning lines L1 to L4 over the blue cherry, and the blue cherry can be won only when the big bonus (1) cannot be drawn. It becomes possible.

  When the big bonus (1) + white cherry is won, at the time of the first to third stops, the symbols and the big bonus (1) constituting the combination of red cherries using the common data creation table (1) ) Is stored in the virtual sliding frame table after the number of sliding frames that draws the maximum number of symbols constituting the combination in the winning line L1 to L4 within the drawing range of 4 frames and the number of sliding frames that pulls in the chance eye are stored in the virtual sliding frame table Among the stop operation positions where the symbols constituting (1) cannot be drawn into the winning lines L1 to L4, the number of sliding symbols at the stop operation position where the white cherry is not aligned with the winning lines L1 to L4 is the white cherry winning Updated to the number of sliding frames that will be the stop positions aligned with the lines L1 to L4, winnings other than the big bonus (1) and white cherry (red cherry) and double winnings The stop operation position in which the number of sliding tops that are unavoidable stop prohibited positions is stored is updated to the number of sliding tops that are stop positions other than the stop prohibited position, and the number of sliding tops at other stop operation positions is maintained. . Thereby, when the stop operation is performed, if the combination of the big bonus (1) can be stopped in the pay lines L1 to L4 within the maximum four-frame drawing range, the control is performed to stop the same. If the combination of Big Bonus (1) cannot be drawn into the winning lines L1 to L4 with a drawing range of up to 4 frames, the combination of white cherries is aligned to the winning lines L1 to L4 with a drawing range of up to 4 frames. If they can be stopped, the control is performed to align them and stop, and the combination of red cherries that have not been won is controlled to be stopped in a drawing range of a maximum of 4 frames. That is, in such a case, priority is given to the control for aligning the big bonus (1) with the winning lines L1 to L4 over the white cherry, and the white cherry can be won only when the big bonus (1) cannot be drawn. It becomes possible.

  When Big Bonus (1) + Bell is elected, during the first to third stops, the symbols and big bonus (1) constituting the combination of red cherries using the common data creation table (1) The first stop after the number of sliding symbols that draw the maximum number of winning symbols L1 to L4 and the number of sliding symbols that pull chances in the drawing range of 4 frames is stored in the virtual sliding frame table At the time of the second stop, among the stop operation positions where the symbols constituting the big bonus (1) cannot be drawn into the pay lines L1 to L4, the stop operation positions where the bell is not the stop position aligned with the pay lines L1 to L4. The number of sliding symbols is updated to the number of sliding symbols at which the bell is aligned with the winning lines L1 to L4, and the symbols constituting the big bonus (1) are changed to the winning lines L1 to L4. Out of the stop operation positions where the bell does not become the stop position where the bell is aligned with the pay lines L1 to L4, the stop position where both the symbols constituting the big bonus (1) and the bell are aligned with the pay lines L1 to L4 is a range of up to 4 frames. If it is the stop operation position that can be withdrawn, the symbols and bells that make up the big bonus (1) are both updated to the number of sliding symbols that are the stop positions aligned with the pay lines L1 to L4. Further, at the time of the third stop, when a bell is aligned on any of the winning lines L1 to L4 of the first stop and the second stop reel, a stop operation position for drawing a symbol other than the bell on the winning line. The number of sliding frames is updated to the number of sliding frames that draws the bell on the winning line. In addition, the stop operation position in which the number of sliding symbols that become the stop prohibition position in which a winning other than the big bonus (1) and the bell (red cherry) or the double winning can not be avoided is stored is a stop position other than the stop prohibition position. Updated to the number of sliding frames. In addition, the number of sliding symbols at other stop operation positions is maintained. Thereby, when the stop operation is performed, if the combination of the big bonus (1) can be stopped in the pay lines L1 to L4 within the maximum four-frame drawing range, the control is performed to stop the same. If the combination of Big Bonus (1) cannot be drawn into the winning lines L1 to L4 with a drawing range of up to 4 frames, the combination of bells is stopped with a drawing range of up to 4 frames on the winning lines L1 to L4. If they can be controlled, control is performed to align them and stop, and a combination of red cherries that have not been won is controlled to be stopped in a pull-in range of a maximum of 4 frames. That is, in such a case, control for aligning the big bonus (1) to the pay lines L1 to L4 is prioritized over the bell, and it is possible to win the bell only when the big bonus (1) cannot be drawn. Become. In addition, in the first stop and the second stop, it is a stop position where only the combination of the big bonus (1) with the number of sliding frames before the update is aligned, and both the combination of the big bonus (1) and the combination of the bell are within the pull-in range. If there is a stop position that can be aligned (except for the prohibition position), the stop position is updated and the stop control is performed.

  When the big bonus (2) is won, during the first to third stops, the combination of the blue cherry and the big bonus (2) using the common data creation table (2) Big bonus (2) after the number of sliding symbols that draws the maximum number of symbols constituting the symbol into any of the winning lines L1 to L4 within the drawing range of 4 frames and the number of sliding symbols that draws chance chances are stored in the virtual sliding frame table The stop operation position that stores the number of sliding tops that are prohibited positions that cannot be avoided (blue cherry) and double winnings is updated to the number of sliding tops that become stop positions other than the stop prohibited position. The number of sliding frames at the stop operation position other than is maintained. Thereby, when the stop operation is performed, if the combination of the big bonus (1) can be stopped in the pay lines L1 to L4 within the maximum four-frame drawing range, the control is performed to stop the same. However, the combination of red cherries that have not been won will be controlled to be stopped in a drawing range of up to 4 frames.

  When the big bonus (2) + red cherry is won, at the time of the first to third stops, the symbols and the big bonus (2) constituting the combination of blue cherries using the common data creation table (2) ) Is stored in the virtual sliding frame table after the number of sliding frames that draws the maximum number of symbols constituting the combination in the winning line L1 to L4 within the drawing range of 4 frames and the number of sliding frames that pulls in the chance eye are stored in the virtual sliding frame table Among the stop operation positions where the symbols constituting (2) cannot be drawn into the winning lines L1 to L4, the red cherry wins the number of sliding symbols at the stop operation positions where the red cherries are not aligned with the winning lines L1 to L4. Updated to the number of sliding frames at the stop positions aligned with lines L1 to L4, winnings other than Big Bonus (2) and Red Cherry (Blue Cherry) and double winnings The stop operation position in which the number of sliding tops that are unavoidable stop prohibited positions is stored is updated to the number of sliding tops that are stop positions other than the stop prohibited position, and the number of sliding tops at other stop operation positions is maintained. . Thus, when the stop operation is performed, if the combination of the big bonus (2) can be stopped in the pay lines L1 to L4 within the drawing range of a maximum of 4 frames, the control is performed to stop them evenly. If the combination of big bonus (2) cannot be drawn into the winning lines L1 to L4 with a drawing range of up to 4 frames, the combination of red cherries is aligned to the winning lines L1 to L4 with a drawing range of up to 4 frames. If it can be stopped, control is performed to align and stop, and the combination of blue cherries that have not been won is controlled to be stopped in a drawing range of a maximum of 4 frames. That is, in such a case, priority is given to the control for aligning the big bonus (2) with the pay lines L1 to L4 over the red cherry, and the red cherry can be won only when the big bonus (2) cannot be drawn. It becomes possible.

  When the big bonus (2) + blue cherry is won, at the time of the first to third stops, the symbols and the big bonus (2) constituting the combination of blue cherries using the common data creation table (2) ) Is stored in the virtual sliding frame table after the number of sliding frames that draws the maximum number of symbols constituting the combination in the winning line L1 to L4 within the drawing range of 4 frames and the number of sliding frames that pulls in the chance eye are stored in the virtual sliding frame table (2) For the stop operation position in which the number of sliding tops that become stop-prohibited positions in which a winning other than the blue cherry (abnormal winning) or double winnings cannot be avoided is stored, the sliding top that becomes a stop position other than the stop-prohibited position The number of sliding symbols at other stop operation positions is maintained. Reel stop control is performed. Thus, when the stop operation is performed, if the combination of the big bonus (2) can be stopped in the pay lines L1 to L4 within the drawing range of a maximum of 4 frames, the control is performed to stop them evenly. If the combination of blue cherries can be stopped on the winning lines L1 to L4 within a maximum of 4 frames, control is performed to stop them together.

  When the big bonus (2) + white cherry is won, at the time of the first to third stops, the symbols and the big bonus (2) constituting the combination of blue cherries using the common data creation table (2) ) Is stored in the virtual sliding frame table after the number of sliding frames that draws the maximum number of symbols constituting the combination in the winning line L1 to L4 within the drawing range of 4 frames and the number of sliding frames that pulls in the chance eye are stored in the virtual sliding frame table Among the stop operation positions where the symbols constituting (2) cannot be drawn into the pay lines L1 to L4, the white cherry wins the number of sliding symbols at the stop operation positions where the white cherries do not become the stop positions aligned with the pay lines L1 to L4. It is updated to the number of sliding frames that are the stop positions aligned with the lines L1 to L4, and a prize other than the big bonus (2) and white cherry (red cherry) or double prize The stop operation position in which the number of sliding tops that are unavoidable stop prohibited positions is stored is updated to the number of sliding tops that are stop positions other than the stop prohibited position, and the number of sliding tops at other stop operation positions is maintained. . Thus, when the stop operation is performed, if the combination of the big bonus (2) can be stopped in the pay lines L1 to L4 within the drawing range of a maximum of 4 frames, the control is performed to stop them evenly. If the combination of Big Bonus (2) cannot be drawn into the winning lines L1 to L4 with a drawing range of up to 4 frames, the combination of white cherries is aligned to the winning lines L1 to L4 with a drawing range of up to 4 frames. If it can be stopped, control is performed to align and stop, and the combination of blue cherries that have not been won is controlled to be stopped in a drawing range of a maximum of 4 frames. That is, in such a case, priority is given to the control for aligning the big bonus (2) with the pay lines L1 to L4 over the white cherry, and the white cherry can be won only when the big bonus (2) cannot be drawn. It becomes possible.

  When the big bonus (2) + Bell is won, the symbols and big bonus (2) constituting the combination of blue cherries using the common data creation table (2) during the first to third stops The first stop after the number of sliding symbols that draw the maximum number of winning symbols L1 to L4 and the number of sliding symbols that pull chances in the drawing range of 4 frames is stored in the virtual sliding frame table At the time of the second stop, among the stop operation positions where the symbols constituting the big bonus (2) cannot be drawn into the pay lines L1 to L4, the stop operation position where the bell is not the stop position aligned with the pay lines L1 to L4. The number of sliding symbols is updated to the number of sliding symbols at which the bell is aligned with the winning lines L1 to L4, and the symbols constituting the big bonus (2) are changed to the winning lines L1 to L4. Out of the stop operation positions where the bell does not become the stop position aligned with the winning lines L1 to L4, the stop position where both the symbols constituting the big bonus (2) and the bell align with the winning lines L1 to L4 are in a range of up to 4 frames. If it is the stop operation position that can be withdrawn, the symbols and bells that make up the big bonus (2) are both updated to the number of sliding symbols that are the stop positions aligned with the pay lines L1 to L4. Further, at the time of the third stop, when a bell is aligned on any of the winning lines L1 to L4 of the first stop and the second stop reel, a stop operation position for drawing a symbol other than the bell on the winning line. The number of sliding frames is updated to the number of sliding frames that draws the bell on the winning line. In addition, the stop operation position in which the number of sliding symbols that is a stop prohibition position where a winning other than the big bonus (2) and the bell (blue cherry) or double winnings cannot be avoided is stored is a stop position other than the stop prohibition position. Updated to the number of sliding frames. In addition, the number of sliding symbols at other stop operation positions is maintained. Thus, when the stop operation is performed, if the combination of the big bonus (2) can be stopped in the pay lines L1 to L4 within the drawing range of a maximum of 4 frames, the control is performed to stop them evenly. If the combination of Big Bonus (2) cannot be drawn into the winning lines L1 to L4 with a drawing range of up to 4 frames, the combination of bells is stopped with the drawing range of up to 4 frames on the winning lines L1 to L4. If it is possible to perform the control, the control is performed so as to stop all the same, and the combination of blue cherries that are not selected is controlled to be stopped in a drawing range of a maximum of four frames. That is, in such a case, priority is given to the control for aligning the big bonus (2) with the winning lines L1 to L4 over the bell, and it is possible to win the bell only when the big bonus (2) cannot be drawn. Become. In addition, in the first stop and the second stop, it is a stop position where only the combination of the big bonus (2) with the number of sliding frames before the update is aligned, and both the combination of the big bonus (2) and the combination of the bell are within the pull-in range. If there is a stop position that can be aligned (except for the prohibition position), the stop position is updated and the stop control is performed.

  When the big bonus (3) is won, at the time of the first to third stops, the combination of symbols and the big bonus (3) constituting the combination of white cherries using the common data creation table (3) Big bonus (3) after the number of sliding symbols that draws the symbols that make up the winning line into the winning lines L1 to L4 within the drawing range of 4 frames and the number of sliding symbols that draws the chance are stored in the virtual sliding frame table The stop operation position that stores the number of sliding tops that are prohibited positions that cannot be avoided, such as winning prizes (white cherries) and duplicate winnings, is updated to the number of sliding tops that are stopping positions other than the prohibited positions. The number of sliding frames at the stop operation position other than is maintained. Thereby, when the stop operation is performed, if the combination of the big bonus (3) can be stopped in the pay lines L1 to L4 within the drawing range of a maximum of 4 frames, the control is performed to stop the same. However, the combination of white cherries that have not been won is controlled to be stopped in a drawing range of a maximum of 4 frames.

  When the big bonus (3) + red cherry is won, at the time of the first to third stops, the symbols and the big bonus (3 that constitute the combination of white cherry using the common data creation table (3) ) Is stored in the virtual sliding frame table after the number of sliding frames that draws the maximum number of symbols constituting the combination in the winning line L1 to L4 within the drawing range of 4 frames and the number of sliding frames that pulls in the chance eye are stored in the virtual sliding frame table Among the stop operation positions where the symbols constituting (3) cannot be drawn into the winning lines L1 to L4, the red cherry wins the number of sliding symbols at the stop operation positions where the red cherries are not aligned with the winning lines L1 to L4. Updated to the number of sliding frames at the stop positions aligned with the lines L1 to L4, winnings other than the big bonus (3) and red cherry (white cherry) and double winnings The stop operation position in which the number of sliding tops that are unavoidable stop prohibited positions is stored is updated to the number of sliding tops that are stop positions other than the stop prohibited position, and the number of sliding tops at other stop operation positions is maintained. . Thereby, when the stop operation is performed, if the combination of the big bonus (3) can be stopped in the pay lines L1 to L4 within the drawing range of a maximum of 4 frames, the control is performed to stop the same. If the big bonus (3) combination cannot be drawn into the winning lines L1 to L4 with a drawing range of up to 4 frames, the red cherry combination is aligned to the winning lines L1 to L4 with a drawing range of up to 4 frames. If it can be stopped, control is performed to align and stop them, and the combination of white cherries that have not been won is controlled to be stopped in a drawing range of a maximum of 4 frames. That is, in such a case, priority is given to the control for aligning the big bonus (3) with the pay lines L1 to L4 over the red cherry, and the red cherry can be won only when the big bonus (3) cannot be drawn. It becomes possible.

  When the big bonus (3) + blue cherry is won, at the time of the first to third stops, the symbols and the big bonus (3 that constitute the combination of white cherry using the common data creation table (3) ) Is stored in the virtual sliding frame table after the number of sliding frames that draws the maximum number of symbols constituting the combination in the winning line L1 to L4 within the drawing range of 4 frames and the number of sliding frames that pulls in the chance eye are stored in the virtual sliding frame table Among the stop operation positions where the symbols constituting (3) cannot be drawn into the winning lines L1 to L4, the number of sliding symbols at the stop operation position where the blue cherry does not become the stop position aligned with the winning lines L1 to L4 is blue cherry. Updated to the number of sliding frames that will be the stop positions aligned with the lines L1 to L4, winnings other than the big bonus (3) and blue cherry (white cherry) and double winnings The stop operation position in which the number of sliding tops that are unavoidable stop prohibited positions is stored is updated to the number of sliding tops that are stop positions other than the stop prohibited position, and the number of sliding tops at other stop operation positions is maintained. . Thereby, when the stop operation is performed, if the combination of the big bonus (3) can be stopped in the pay lines L1 to L4 within the drawing range of a maximum of 4 frames, the control is performed to stop the same. If the combination of Big Bonus (3) cannot be drawn into the winning lines L1 to L4 with a drawing range of up to 4 frames, the blue cherry combination is aligned with the winning lines L1 to L4 with a drawing range of up to 4 frames. If it can be stopped, control is performed to align and stop them, and the combination of white cherries that have not been won is controlled to be stopped in a drawing range of a maximum of 4 frames. That is, in such a case, priority is given to the control for aligning the big bonus (3) with the winning lines L1 to L4 over the blue cherry, and the blue cherry can be won only when the big bonus (3) cannot be drawn. It becomes possible.

  When the big bonus (3) + white cherry is won, at the time of the first to third stops, the symbols and the big bonus (3 that constitute the combination of white cherry using the common data creation table (3) ) Is stored in the virtual sliding frame table after the number of sliding frames that draws the maximum number of symbols constituting the combination in the winning line L1 to L4 within the drawing range of 4 frames and the number of sliding frames that pulls in the chance eye are stored in the virtual sliding frame table (3) For the stop operation position in which the number of sliding tops serving as stop-prohibited positions in which a winning other than a white cherry (abnormal winning) or a double winning cannot be avoided is stored, the sliding tops serving as stop positions other than the stop-prohibiting positions The number of sliding symbols at other stop operation positions is maintained. Thereby, when the stop operation is performed, if the combination of the big bonus (3) can be stopped in the pay lines L1 to L4 within the drawing range of a maximum of 4 frames, the control is performed to stop the same. If a combination of white cherries can be stopped in the pay lines L1 to L4 within a maximum of four frames, control is performed to stop them together.

  When Big Bonus (3) + Bell is elected, symbols and Big Bonus (3) constituting the combination of white cherries using the common data creation table (3) during the first to third stops The first stop after the number of sliding symbols that draw the maximum number of winning symbols L1 to L4 and the number of sliding symbols that pull chances in the drawing range of 4 frames is stored in the virtual sliding frame table At the time of the second stop, among the stop operation positions where the symbols constituting the big bonus (3) cannot be drawn into the pay lines L1 to L4, the stop operation positions where the bell is not the stop position aligned with the pay lines L1 to L4. The number of sliding symbols is updated to the number of sliding symbols at which the bell is aligned with the winning lines L1 to L4, and the symbols constituting the big bonus (3) are changed to the winning lines L1 to L4. Out of the stop operation positions where the bell does not become the stop position aligned with the winning lines L1 to L4, the stop position where both the symbols constituting the big bonus (3) and the bell are aligned with the winning lines L1 to L4 is a range of up to 4 frames. If the stop operation position can be retracted, the symbol and the bell constituting the big bonus (3) are both updated to the number of sliding symbols as the stop positions aligned with the pay lines L1 to L4. Further, at the time of the third stop, when a bell is aligned on any of the winning lines L1 to L4 of the first stop and the second stop reel, a stop operation position for drawing a symbol other than the bell on the winning line. The number of sliding frames is updated to the number of sliding frames that draws the bell on the winning line. In addition, the stop operation position in which the number of sliding symbols that become the stop prohibition position that cannot avoid the big bonus (3) and the winning combination other than the bell (white cherry) or the double winning is stored is a stop position other than the stop prohibition position. Updated to the number of sliding frames. In addition, the number of sliding symbols at other stop operation positions is maintained. Thereby, when the stop operation is performed, if the combination of the big bonus (3) can be stopped in the pay lines L1 to L4 within the drawing range of a maximum of 4 frames, the control is performed to stop the same. If the combination of Big Bonus (3) cannot be drawn into the winning lines L1 to L4 with a maximum draw range of 4 frames, the combination of bells is stopped with a draw range of up to 4 frames on the winning lines L1 to L4. If they can be controlled, control is performed to align them and stop, and the combination of white cherries that have not been won is controlled to be stopped in a drawing range of a maximum of 4 frames. That is, in such a case, priority is given to the control for aligning the big bonus (3) with the winning lines L1 to L4 over the bell, and it is possible to win the bell only when the big bonus (3) cannot be drawn. Become. In addition, in the first stop and the second stop, it is a stop position where only the combination of the big bonus (3) with the number of sliding frames before the update is aligned, and both the combination of the big bonus (3) and the combination of the bell are within the pull-in range. If there is a stop position that can be aligned (except for the prohibition position), the stop position is updated and the stop control is performed.

  When the big bonus (4) is won, at the time of the first stop, four symbols constituting the combination of the big bonus (4) using the data creation table corresponding to the big bonus (4) The number of sliding symbols that are drawn to the winning line L5 or L6 to the maximum in the drawing range is stored in the virtual sliding frame table. Further, at the time of the second and third stops, the stop position where the big bonus (4) is aligned and stopped at the maximum 4 frames drawing range from the stop position of the stopped reel to the pay lines L5 and L6 is set for each stop operation position. Thus, the number of sliding symbols that are the stopping positions at which the big bonus (4) is aligned and stopped is stored in the virtual sliding symbol table for each stop operation position. Thus, when the stop operation is performed, if the combination of the big bonus (4) can be stopped in the pay lines L5 and L6 within a maximum of 4 frames, the control is performed to stop the same. Will be.

  When the big bonus (5) is won, at the time of the first stop, four symbols constituting the combination of the big bonus (5) using the data creation table corresponding to the big bonus (5) are displayed. Is stored in the virtual sliding top table in the drawing range. Further, at the time of the second and third stops, the stop position at which the big bonus (5) is aligned and stopped in the maximum 4 frames drawing range from the stop position of the stopped reel to the pay lines L5 and L6 is set for each stop operation position. Thus, the number of sliding symbols that are the stopping positions at which the big bonus (5) is stopped in alignment is stored in the virtual sliding symbol table for each stop operation position. Thereby, when the stop operation is performed, if the combination of the big bonus (5) can be stopped in the pay lines L5 and L6 within the maximum 4 frames drawing range, the control is performed to stop the same. Will be.

  As described above, in the present embodiment, for the combinations other than the big bonus (4) and the big bonus (5), the winning lines L1 to L4 set across the symbols positioned on the straight line of the reels 2L, 2C, and 2R are used. In contrast, the big bonus (4) and big bonus (5) are controlled so as to be aligned, but the stop positions of the upper, middle, and lower stages are different in all reels, and the symbols are not on a straight line. The winning lines L5 and L6 are aligned.

  Further, in this embodiment, when the result of the internal lottery is a big bonus (1) or a red cherry, a big bonus (2) or a blue cherry, a big bonus (3) + a white cherry, the respective constituent symbols. Is drawn into the winning lines L1 to L4 with a maximum draw range of 4 frames, and for the stop operation position where the winning role cannot be drawn, the number of slide frames withdrawn in the range of maximum 4 frames is virtually slipped for each stop operation position Stop positions other than the stop-prohibited positions are stored in the stop operation positions where the number of sliding tops that are the stop-prohibited positions that cannot be avoided after winning positions other than the winning combination (abnormal winnings) or duplicate winnings are stored. The number of sliding symbols at the other stop operation positions is maintained, so that the number of sliding symbols is maintained according to the result of the internal lottery. If the stop operation at the stop operation position of the stop position other than the inhibition position is made, the display result is the same. In particular, in this embodiment, as the number of sliding symbols in the data for creating the common table, the number of sliding symbols that draws the chance is determined for the stop operation position where both of the big bonuses and the corresponding cherry combination cannot be drawn. Therefore, it is possible to derive a common chance by performing the control as described above.

  For red cherries, blue cherries, and white cherries, only the cherries of the color corresponding to the upper or lower tier of the left reel will stop and wins. If “7” of any color or “Cherry” of the corresponding color does not stop on the winning line, the big bonus (1) to (3) The same number of sliding frames as when the corresponding big bonus is won is applied. In addition, when “7” that does not correspond to the color of the winning cherry on the left reel winning lines L1 to L4 stops when any of the cherries is won, the big bonus ( The same number of sliding symbols as in the case where the big bonus corresponding to the winning cherry among 1) to (3) is won is applied. For this reason, when one of the cherries is won and missed, the same stop position as when the big bonus corresponding to the won cherry is missed is stopped at a high rate.

  Here, as shown in FIG. 2, the “bell” and “replay” are arranged within 5 symbols, that is, within an interval of 4 frames, for all of the reels 2L, 2C, and 2R. It can be stopped at any position within the range. That is, when the winning flags of bell, replay (1), replay (2), big bonus (4), and big bonus (5) are set, the player operates the stop switches 8L, 8C, and 8R. Regardless, the winning combination can always be won.

  Also, only one red cherry, blue cherry, and white cherry are placed on the left reel, so red cherry, blue cherry, and white cherry are on the winning line. On the other hand, the combination of red cherry, blue cherry, and white cherry cannot be aligned unless the left reel is stopped at a timing that is within the pull-in range of four frames. Therefore, when a red cherry is won, the combination of red cherries can be placed on one of the winning lines only when the left reel is stopped at the timing of area numbers 1 to 7, When the left reel is stopped at a timing other than the above, that is, at the timings of area numbers 0 and 8 to 20, the combination of red cherries will not be aligned on any winning line and will be missed. In addition, when winning the blue cherry, it is possible to make a combination of blue cherries on any one of the winning lines only when the stop operation of the left reel is performed at the timing of the area numbers 0, 15-20, When the left reel is stopped at other timings, that is, at the timings of region numbers 1 to 14, the combination of blue cherries will not be aligned on any winning line and will be missed. In addition, when winning the white cherry, it is possible to make a combination of white cherries on any of the winning lines only when the stop operation of the left reel is performed at the timing of the area numbers 8 to 14, otherwise In other words, when the left reel is stopped at the timings of the area numbers 0 to 7 and 15 to 20, the combination of white cherries is not aligned on any winning line and is missed.

  Further, in this embodiment, the display mode (area numbers 5, 6, 7, 7, 8, 9) in which the “red cherry” symbol stops on any winning line of the left reel, and the “blue cherry” symbol is displayed. Display mode (area numbers 19/20/0, 0 / 1.2) that stops on any winning line on the left reel, and display that the “white cherry” symbol stops on any winning line on the left reel Aspects (region numbers 12, 13, 14, 14, 15, 16) are arranged in excess of 4 frames, which are the maximum pull-in ranges.

  For this reason, when a stop operation is performed at a stop operation position (region numbers 1 to 7) at which a maximum of 4 frames of “red cherry” symbols can be drawn and stopped on any winning line, “blue cherry” is displayed. You can draw a maximum of 4 frames of “design” and “white cherry” designs and stop them on any winning line, or you can draw a maximum of 4 frames of “blue cherry” symbols and stop them on any winning line When the stop operation is performed at the stop operation position (area numbers 0, 15 to 20), the “red cherry” symbol and the “white cherry” symbol may be drawn up to a maximum of four frames and stopped on any winning line. When a stop operation is performed at a stop operation position (region numbers 8 to 14) where a “white cherry” symbol can be drawn on a maximum of four frames and stopped on any winning line, It is stopped on any of the winning line Lee "pattern and the" blue cherry "symbol up to 4 frames pulled in also, so that can not be. In other words, the “blue cherry” symbol and the “white cherry” symbol do not stop on the winning line regardless of the timing at which the “red cherry” symbol can be drawn onto the winning line. The “Red Cherry” design and the “White Cherry” design do not stop on the winning line regardless of the timing at which the “Cherry” design can be pulled into the winning line. The red cherry pattern and the blue cherry pattern do not stop on the winning line regardless of the timing at which the stop operation is performed on the winning line. Since the “Blue Cherry” design and the “White Cherry” design are each arranged, the “Red Cherry” design, the “Blue Cherry” design, and the “White Cherry” design can be aimed at the same time. So that the stop operation position does not exist.

  In addition, there is an area that pulls the “Red Cherry”, “Blue Cherry”, or “White Cherry” symbol on any of the winning lines in any of the areas on the left reel. , There is no area where it is possible to avoid drawing the “blue cherry” symbol or the “white cherry” symbol on the winning line. In other words, there is no stop operation position that does not stop the “red cherry” symbol, “blue cherry” symbol, or “white cherry” symbol on the winning line. ”And“ White Cherry ”symbols cannot be stopped on the winning line.

  In addition, for “Red 7”, “Blue 7”, and “White 7”, only one reel is arranged for each of the reels 2L, 2C, and 2R. Therefore, the big bonus (1) and the big bonus (2) If the stop operation is not performed within the draw range of 4 frames on the winning line where the combination of big bonus (3) can be arranged, the combination of big bonus (1), big bonus (2) and big bonus (3) should be aligned. I can't. Therefore, when winning the big bonus (1), big bonus (2), big bonus (3), if the left reel is stopped at a timing other than the 4-frame pull-in range, the big bonus (1), big bonus The combination of (2) and big bonus (3) will not be on any winning line and will be missed.

  In the present embodiment, the display mode (region numbers 16, 17, 18, 18, 19, 20) where the “red 7” symbol stops on any winning line of the left reel, and the “blue 7” symbol Display mode (area numbers 9, 10, 11, 11, 12, 13) that stops on any winning line on the left reel, and display that “white 7” symbol stops on any winning line on the left reel Aspects (area numbers 2, 3, 4, 4, 5, 6) are arranged in excess of 4 frames, which are the maximum pull-in ranges.

  For this reason, when a stop operation is performed at a stop operation position (region numbers 12 to 18) where the “red 7” symbol can be drawn on up to four frames and stopped on any winning line, “blue 7” is displayed. You can draw a maximum of 4 frames of the “seven” and “white 7” symbols and stop them on any winning line, or you can draw a maximum of 4 frames of the “blue 7” symbols and stop them on any winning line When a stop operation is performed at the stop operation position (region numbers 5 to 11), the “red 7” symbol and the “white 7” symbol can be drawn up to 4 frames and stopped on any winning line. When a stop operation is performed at a stop operation position (area number 0 to 4, 19 to 20) where a maximum of 4 frames of “White 7” symbol can be drawn and stopped on any winning line, ”And“ Blue 7 ”symbols up to 4 frames Also be stopped on any of the winning line crowded come, so that can not be. That is, the “Blue 7” symbol and the “White 7” symbol do not stop on the winning line regardless of the timing at which the “Red 7” symbol can be drawn on the winning line. The “Red 7” symbol and the “White 7” symbol do not stop on the winning line regardless of the timing at which the “7” symbol can be drawn on the winning line. “Red 7” and “Blue 7” symbols and “Red 7” symbols and “Positions 7” and “Blue 7” symbols will not stop on the winning line regardless of the timing at which the stop operation is performed. Since the “blue 7” symbol and the “white 7” symbol are arranged, there is no stop operation position that can aim at the “red 7” symbol, the “blue 7” symbol, and the “white 7” symbol at the same time.

  Further, in this embodiment, the display mode (area numbers 5, 6, 7, 7, 8, 9) in which the “red cherry” symbol stops on any winning line of the left reel and the “red 7” symbol on the left Display mode that stops on any winning line of the reel (area numbers 16, 17, 18, 18, 19, 20), Display mode that the “blue cherry” symbol stops on any winning line of the left reel ( Area number 19 · 20 · 0, 0 · 1 · 2) and “Blue 7” symbols stop on one of the winning lines on the left reel (region numbers 9 · 10 · 11, 11 · 12 · 13) , The display mode (region numbers 12, 13, 14, 14, 15, 16) where the “white cherry” symbol stops on any winning line of the left reel and the winning of which one of the “white 7” symbols is left reel Display mode that stops on the line (area number 2, 3, 4, 4, 6) That is, the “7” symbol of the same color as the display mode in which any color “cherry” symbol stops on any winning line on the left reel stops on any winning line on the left reel Each display mode is arranged to exceed 4 frames which is the maximum drawing range.

  For this reason, when a stop operation is performed at a stop operation position (region numbers 1 to 7) at which a maximum of four frames of “red cherry” symbols can be drawn and stopped on any winning line, “red 7 ”Stop operation position that allows drawing up to 4 frames at maximum and stopping it on any winning line, and drawing“ Red 7 ”on up to 4 frames and stopping on any winning line ( When the stop operation is performed in the area numbers 12 to 18), the “red cherry” symbol cannot be drawn and stopped on any winning line by a maximum of four frames. When a stop operation is performed at a stop operation position (area number 0, 15 to 20) where a maximum of 4 frames can be drawn and stopped on any winning line, a maximum of 4 frames of “Blue 7” symbol is displayed. Withdrawal At a stop operation position (region numbers 5 to 11) that cannot be stopped on any of the winning lines, and can draw up to 4 frames of the “Blue 7” symbol and stop on any of the winning lines. When a stop operation is performed, the “Blue Cherry” symbol cannot be drawn on any winning line by up to four frames, and the “White Cherry” symbol cannot be When a stop operation is performed at a stop operation position (region numbers 8 to 14) that can be stopped on any of the winning lines, a maximum of 4 frames of “White 7” symbol is drawn and placed on any of the winning lines Stop operation is performed at a stop operation position (area number 0 to 4, 19 to 20) that cannot be stopped, and can draw up to 4 frames of “White 7” symbol and stop it on any winning line. I If, so that it can not be stopped on any pay line draws up to four frames "white cherry" symbol.

  That is, the “7” symbol of the same color will not stop on the winning line regardless of the timing at which the “cherry” symbol of any color can be drawn on the winning line. “Red 7” in a position where the “Cherry” symbol of the same color will not stop on the winning line no matter what timing within the range where the “7” symbol of the same color can be drawn on the winning line Since the “Blue 7” symbol, “White 7” symbol, “Red Cherry” symbol, “Blue Cherry” symbol, and “White Cherry” symbol are arranged, the same color “Cherry” symbol and “7” There will be no stop operation position where the symbol can be aimed at the same time.

  In this embodiment, after the rotation of the reels 2L, 2C, and 2R is started, the CPU 41a continues the rotation of the reels for which the stop operation has not been detected until the operation of the stop switches 8L, 8C, and 8R is detected. On the condition that the operation of the stop switches 8L, 8C, and 8R is detected, control is performed to stop the display result on the corresponding reel. Even if the reel rotation temporarily stops due to the occurrence of a reel rotation error, the stop operation is still detected until the operation of the stop switches 8L, 8C, and 8R is detected after the reel rotation is restarted. Control is performed to stop the display result of the corresponding reels on the condition that the rotation of the reels that have not been continued is continued and the operation of the stop switches 8L, 8C, and 8R is detected.

  In this embodiment, control is performed to stop the display result on the corresponding reel on condition that the operation of the stop switches 8L, 8C, and 8R is detected. However, the rotation of the reel is started. When a predetermined automatic stop time has elapsed, even if the reel stop operation is not performed, it is assumed that the stop operation has been performed, and automatic stop control is performed to automatically stop each reel. May be. In this case, since the reels are stopped without the player's operation, it is preferable to derive a display result that does not constitute any combination even if any combination is won.

  In this embodiment, after the big bonus (1) and the big bonus (2) are finished, the CPU 41a has the same lottery probability for the special role and the small role as in the normal gaming state, but the replay (1) and the replay (2). Replays where the winning probabilities are both higher than in the normal gaming state, and the medal payout rate per game (winning probability of the target role x total number of payouts / number of bets required for one game) exceeds 1. Control to time (1) (RT (1)). While the gaming state is at RT (1), the flag during RT (1) is set in the RAM 41c. Then, RT (1) does not win any special role, does not win replay (2), and wins the specified number of games (in this embodiment, 50 games, big after the end of big bonus (1)). Reach (20) if the bonus (2) is reached, or win any special role before reaching the specified number of games, or replay (2) wins, RT (2) described later It is supposed to end by moving to.

  In addition, when the replay (2) wins in the normal gaming state or in the state where no special role is won in RT (1), the special role (if any special role is not carried over) and the small role The lottery probability is the same as the normal gaming state, but the winning probability of replay (1) is higher than that of the normal gaming state and RT (1), and the winning probability of replay (2) is higher than that of the normal gaming state. The replay time (2) (RT (2)) is controlled such that the payout rate of medals per game is higher than that of RT (1). While the gaming state is at RT (2), the flag during RT (2) is set in the RAM 41c. Then, RT (2) does not win any special roles, reaches any of the specified number of games (200 games in this embodiment) without winning any of the cherries, or before reaching the specified number of games. It ends with either winning a special role or winning one of the cherries. Also, if any special role is won during RT (2), RT (2) will not end even if any cherry wins, and the specified number of games will be reached. The RT (2) will not end until the winning special role wins. Also, during RT (2), any of the cherries and special roles will be won at the same time, and even if the winning cherries win, RT (2) will not end and the number of games will be reached or won. The RT (2) does not end until the special role is won.

  The payout rate of medals per game in the normal gaming state is 0.62 according to the lottery probability in FIG. 10, and approximately 1.14 medals decrease per game, but red cherry, blue Cherries and white cherries cannot simultaneously aim for the symbols that make up these roles, and the actual appearance rate is 1/3, so the actual payout rate per game in the normal gaming state is 0.58, and the number of medals decreases by about 1.26 per game.

  The substantial payout rate of medals per game in RT (1) is 1.19, and medals increase by about 0.58 per game. The actual payout rate of medals per game in RT (2) is 1.29, and the number of medals increases by about 0.88 per game. RT (2) ends when winning a cherry, so when a cherry win is avoided in order to continue RT (2), the actual payout rate per game is 1 .27, and the number of medals will increase by about 0.82 per game.

  Thus, the substantial payout rate of medals per game is such that RT (2)> RT (1)> normal game state is established.

  In this embodiment, if any cherry wins during RT (2), if no special role has been won, RT even before reaching the specified number of games from the start of RT (1) (2) will end, but each of the “Red Cherry”, “Blue Cherry” and “White Cherry” symbols on the left reel will be red reel, blue cherry and white cherry. Since only one each is placed, a combination of red cherry, blue cherry, and white cherry will be available unless a stop operation is performed within the draw range of 4 frames on the winning line where red cherry, blue cherry, and white cherry can be combined. In addition, even if the symbols that make up the special combination on the left reel stop on any of the winning lines, Symbol constructing the combined are spaced four or more intervals, for stopping operation position is not retracted the configuration pattern is present, can be avoided that the combination of the special role are aligned. As a result, if any cherry or special role is elected by performing a stop operation with an operation procedure that avoids the combination of red cherry, blue cherry, white cherry, or special role, either It is possible to avoid the end of RT (2) due to the winning of a cherry or special role.

  However, the “Red Cherry”, “Blue Cherry”, and “White Cherry” symbols of the left reel that make up the red cherry, blue cherry, and white cherry cannot be intentionally stopped on the winning line. 2) If one of the cherries is won, it is impossible to intentionally remove the cherry if the type is not known, and the winning cherries will be missed with a probability of 2/3. If the winning cherries win with a probability of 1/3 and no special role is won, RT (2) will end.

  The CPU 41a determines whether or not the overflow tank 35 is full based on the detection state of the full sensor 35a. If it is determined that the overflow tank 35 is full, the reset operation (reset switch 23 or reset / setting switch 38) is determined. It is controlled to a full error state that disables the progress of the game until the operation is performed.

  22 and 23 are timing charts relating to the control of the full tank error state by the CPU 41a.

  In the figure, reel rotation indicates a state in which the reels 2L, 2C, and 2R are rotating, and medal payout indicates a state in which a medal payout operation is performed by driving the hopper motor 34b in response to winning of a small role. The replay game flag indicates the setting status of the replay game flag that is set in the RAM 41c from when the replay is won until the reels 2L, 2C, and 2R are all stopped in the next game. , Indicates the detection state of the full sensor 35a, the inserted medal sensor signal indicates the detection state of the inserted medal by the inserted medal sensor 31, and the full flag indicates the detection status of the full sensor 35a (the detection flag indicating the detection state of the full sensor 35a). Is set in the RAM 41c when it is determined that the overflow tank is full. It indicates the setting status of full Tanfuragu error indicates the occurrence of full Tan'era accompanying that full state is determined. In the figure, the game start is the timing when the start switch 7 is operated and the game is started, and the game control end is the timing when the medal payout ends when the medal payout is accompanied. When there is no payout, it is the timing when all the reels 2L, 2C, 2R are stopped.

  The CPU 41a monitors the output state of the detection signal output from the full sensor 35a in the switch input determination process performed every 2.24 ms in the timer interrupt process. In the switch input determination process, when input determination of other switches (start switch 7, stop switches 8L, 8C, 8R, etc.) is performed, the state is switched from the off state to the on state, and continuously (for a certain period of time) The number of times assigned for each switch type) On the condition that the switch is determined to be ON, the ON state of the switch is determined and the detection flag of the switch is set in the RAM 41c. As for 35a, as shown in FIG. 22 (b), the on state of the full sensor 35a is determined only by switching from the off state to the on state, and the detection flag of the sensor is set in the RAM 41c. Yes. This is because the full sensor 35a is driven at a higher voltage than the other switches, and even if noise or the like occurs, there is little voltage fluctuation and erroneous detection is less likely to occur. In this way, in the switch input determination process, the on state of the full sensor 35a is determined only by the detection signal of the full sensor 35a changing from off to on, and the duration from when the full sensor 35a changes from off to on. Therefore, it is possible to simplify the control related to the determination of the detection state of the full sensor 35a.

  The CPU 41a determines whether or not the state is full based on the detection state (the presence or absence of a detection flag) of the full tank sensor 35a only once per game at the timing when the insertion of medals is first detected after the game control is finished. If the full tank sensor 35a is in the on state, it is determined that the tank is full, and a full tank flag indicating the full tank state is set in the RAM 41c. Note that in the next game in which the re-game player wins, the insertion of medals is not permitted until the end of the game, so the insertion of medals is not detected effectively, and the re-game player wins the prize. In the next game, the determination of whether or not the tank is full is omitted, and even if the full tank sensor 35a is detected, it is not determined that the tank is full, and the full tank flag is not set. In the present embodiment, the inserted medal sensor 31 is detected even when the insertion of medals is not permitted. However, even if the insertion of medals is detected during the replay game, it is effective. It is not determined that a medal has been inserted, and in this case also, the determination of whether or not the tank is full is omitted. Further, in this embodiment, even when the medal can be inserted after the game control is finished, the bet number is set using the credit, and even when the game starts without the medal being inserted, Even in such a case, the determination of whether or not the tank is full is omitted, and even if the full tank sensor 35a is detected, it is not determined that the tank is full, and the full tank flag is set. It never happens.

  Further, the CPU 41a determines whether or not the full tank flag is set at the timing before the medal of the next game can be inserted after the game control is finished, that is, whether or not the full tank flag is determined. Is set, the progress of the game is disabled, and a full error state is controlled until a reset operation is performed. Note that the CPU 41a determines whether or not the replay game in-process flag is set in the RAM 41c before determining whether or not the full tank flag is set after the game control is finished, that is, whether or not the game is a replay game. If it is a replay game, the determination of whether or not the full tank flag is set is omitted. In such a case, the full tank error state is entered even if the full tank flag is set. If the replay game ends without being controlled and is not a replay game, the full tank flag is determined at the timing before the medal of the next game can be inserted, and the full tank error state is controlled.

  For example, as shown in FIG. 22 (a), at the time when the insertion of a medal is detected for the first time after the end of the game control, it is determined whether or not it is full based on the detection state of the full tank sensor 35a. If the tongue sensor 35a is on, it is determined that the tank is full, and a full tank flag is set in the RAM 41c. After that, if the re-game player has not won a prize in the game, after the control of the game is finished, the full-game error state is controlled at a timing before the medal of the next game can be inserted. On the other hand, when the re-gamer wins in the game and the replay game flag is set (not shown), the full game error state is not controlled after the game ends, and the next game (replay game) After the completion of, the full-error error state is controlled at a timing before the medal of the next game (or the next game if the next game is also a replay game) can be inserted. That is, in the game next to the game in which the re-game player wins, the full tank error state is not controlled.

  Also, as shown in FIG. 23, in the game next to the game won by the re-gamer, the insertion of medals is not permitted and the insertion of medals is not detected effectively. Even if the full tank sensor 35a is detected in the state, it is not determined that the tank is full, and the full tank flag is not set. Then, after the control of the game is finished, when the re-player is not won in the game and the medal can be inserted, it is determined that the medal is inserted for the first time when the medal is detected, and the game is full. If the tongue flag is set in the RAM 41c and the re-game player has not won a prize in the game, it is controlled to a full tank error state at the timing before the medal of the next game can be inserted after the end of the control of the game.

  Although not particularly illustrated, even if the medal can be inserted after the game control is finished, if the bet number is set using credits and the game starts without the medal being inserted, No charging is detected, and even if the full sensor 35a is detected in such a state, it is not determined that the tank is full, and the full flag is not set. Then, after the control of the game is finished, the medal can be inserted, and when the insertion of the medal is first detected, it is determined that the tank is full, and the full flag is set in the RAM 41c. In other words, a game is played by setting the number of bets using credits, and if no medal is inserted during that time, a full tank error state is not determined until the next game where a medal is inserted. There is no control.

  Next, a modified example of the control in the full tank error state will be described based on the timing charts shown in FIGS.

  In the figure, the medal insertion flag indicates a setting state of the medal insertion flag set in the RAM 41c from the detection of the medal insertion to the time when the medal insertion is permitted after the next game after the end of the game control.

  The CPU 41a determines whether or not it is full based on the detection state of the full tank sensor 35a only once per game at the timing before the medal insertion of the next game is permitted after the end of the game control. Note that the CPU 41a determines whether or not the next game is a replay game based on the replay game flag before determining whether or not the tank is full. It is determined whether or not the medal insertion flag is set, that is, whether or not a medal is inserted in the previous game, and only when it is determined that the medal insertion flag is set, whether or not the state is full Is supposed to do. For this reason, when the re-gamer wins in the previous game and no medals need to be inserted in the game (when the game is a replay game), or the bet number is set using credits in the previous game, When the game starts without being inserted, even if the full sensor 35a is detected, the determination as to whether or not it is full is omitted, and the full state is not determined.

  In addition, when the CPU 41a determines that the game is full, the game progress is disabled at a timing before the next game medal can be inserted, and is controlled to the full error state until a reset operation is performed. . Note that the CPU 41a determines whether or not the next game is a replay game before determining whether or not the game is full after the game control is finished. The determination is omitted, and in such a case, even if the full sensor 35a is detected, the full tank error state is not controlled. On the other hand, if it is not a replay game, it is determined whether or not medals have been inserted in the previous game, and if no medals have been inserted in the previous game, determination of whether or not the tank is full is omitted. In such a case, even if the full sensor 35a is detected, the full tank error state is not controlled, and if a medal is inserted in the previous game, the game control after the next game is over and the next It is determined whether or not the game medal of the game is full at a timing before the game can be inserted, and the full tank error state is controlled.

  For example, as shown in FIG. 24, it is determined whether or not the next game is a replay game at the timing before the medal of the next game can be inserted after the game control ends, and the next game is a replay game. If not, it is further determined whether or not a medal has been inserted in the previous game, and if a medal has been inserted in the previous game, it is determined whether or not the full state is detected based on the detection state of the full tank sensor 35a. When it is determined that the full tank state is reached, the full tank error state is controlled at a timing before the next game medal can be inserted.

  In addition, as shown in FIG. 25, after the game control is finished, when the medal insertion flag is not set, that is, when the number of bets is set using credits in the previous game, and the game starts without inserting medals. In this state, it is not determined whether or not the full tank state is reached. Even if the full tank sensor 35a detects the full tank state in this state, it is controlled to the full tank error state after the game control of the game is finished. There is nothing. Then, after the control of the game in which medals are inserted after the next game (except for the replay game), it is determined that the state is full, and the full tank error state is controlled before the medal can be inserted.

  In addition, as shown in FIG. 26, when the next game is a replay game after the game control is completed, that is, when the re-game player wins in the previous game and it is not necessary to insert medals in the game, It is not determined whether or not the vehicle is in the tan state, and even if the full tank sensor 35a detects the full tank state in such a state, the full tank error state is not controlled after the game control of the game is finished. Then, after the control of the game in which medals are inserted after the next game (except for the replay game), it is determined that the state is full, and the full tank error state is controlled before the medal can be inserted.

  Next, initialization of the RAM 41c of the main control unit 41 will be described. The storage area of the RAM 41c of the main control unit 41 is divided into an important work, a general work, a special work, a set value work, a stop phase work, a non-saved work, an unused area, and a stack area.

  The important work is a work that stores data that is inconvenient to be initialized at the end of the big bonus, such as various display devices and LED display data, input / output data of the I / O port 41d, and a game time counter. The general work is a work in which data that can be initialized at the end of the big bonus, such as a stop control table, a stop symbol, the number of medals paid out, and the total number of medals paid out in the big bonus, are stored. The special work is a work that stores data to be initialized only before the start of setting, such as data for transmitting a command to the effect control board 90 and various software random numbers. The set value work is a work in which a set value used when performing a lottery in the internal lottery process is stored. After initializing 0 before setting is started (before shifting to the setting change mode), 1 is stored. The set value that is corrected and newly set at the end of the setting (when the setting change mode is ended) is stored. The stop phase work is a work in which data indicating the stop phase of the reel motors 32L, 32C, 32R is stored, and data indicating the stop phase is stored when the reel motors 32L, 32C, 32R are stopped. The Rukoto. The unsaved work is a work that holds the state of various switches, and a value is always set regardless of whether or not the data in the RAM 41c is destroyed at the time of activation. The unused area is an unused area in the storage area of the RAM 41c, and is initialized if any one of a plurality of initialization conditions described later is satisfied. The stack area is an area in which data saved from the register of the CPU 41a is stored, and the unused stack area is satisfied by any one of a plurality of initialization conditions to be described later, like the unused area. However, the used stack area is not initialized because the program continues.

  In this embodiment, the CPU 41a of the main control unit 41 is activated when both the setting key switch 37 and the reset / setting switch 38 are ON, when a RAM error occurs, and only the setting key switch 37 is ON. When starting up, at the end of the big bonus, at the time of starting up with both the setting key switch 37 and the reset / setting switch 38 being OFF, when the data in the RAM 41c is not destroyed, the initialization consists of six at the end of one game. When the condition is satisfied, five types of initializations in different regions to be initialized are performed according to each initialization condition.

  Initialization 0 is performed when the setting key switch 37 and the reset / setting switch 38 are both ON at the time of start-up, and initialization is performed before the transition to the setting change mode or when a RAM abnormality error occurs. In initialization 0, all areas (including the unused area and the unused stack area) of the storage area of the RAM 41c other than the used stack area are initialized. Initialization 1 is an initialization performed only when the setting key switch 37 is in an ON state at the time of start-up and shifts to the setting change mode. In the initialization 1, in the storage area of the RAM 41c, All areas (including the unused area and the unused stack area) other than the in-use stack area and the stop phase work are initialized. Initialization 2 is initialization performed at the end of the big bonus. In initialization 2, the general work, the unused area, and the unused stack area are initialized in the storage area of the RAM 41c. Initialization 3 is an initialization performed when both the setting key switch 37 and the reset / setting switch 38 are in an OFF state at the time of activation, and the data in the RAM 41c is not destroyed. The stored work, unused area, and unused stack area are initialized. Initialization 4 is initialization performed at the end of one game. In initialization 4, an unused area and an unused stack area in the storage area of the RAM 41c are initialized.

  As described above, in order to start the reel smoothly, it is necessary to specify the exact stop position of the rotor 32a at the start of the rotation of the reel motor. If the data in the RAM 41c including the data indicating the stop phase is initialized, it is impossible to specify the exact stop position of the rotor 32a after changing the setting. When the reel motor is first rotated, The permanent magnet of the rotor 32a is attracted to the excitation phase, and the reel vibrates at the start of rotation.

  On the other hand, in the present embodiment, only the setting key switch 37 is in an ON state at the time of startup, and the RAM 41c is initialized when shifting to the setting change mode, but the stationary phase work is not initialized. Thus, even in the gaming state after the setting change, data indicating the stop phase of the reel motors 32L, 32C, 32R stored in the stop phase work is maintained. For this reason, even when the reel motors 32L, 32C, and 32R are first rotated after the setting is changed, it is possible to specify the exact stop position of these rotors 32a. It becomes possible to start rotation smoothly.

  In addition, both the setting key switch 37 and the reset / setting switch 38 are in an ON state at the time of starting, and the RAM 41c including the stop phase work can be initialized when shifting to the setting change mode. Therefore, it is possible to select whether or not to initialize the stationary phase work according to the operation method when shifting to the setting change mode at the time of activation.

  Next, commands that the CPU 41a transmits to the effect control board 90 will be described.

  In the present embodiment, the CPU 41a of the main control unit 41 makes a BET command, an internal winning command, a reel rotation start command, a reel stop command, a winning determination command, a payout start command, a payout end command, a gaming state to the effect control board 90. A plurality of types of commands including a command, a standby command, a stop command, an error command, an initialization command, a setting end command, a power-on command, an operation detection command, and a door command are transmitted.

  The BET command is a command that can specify the number of medals inserted, that is, the number of medals used to set the bet number. When a medal is inserted, the one-BET switch 5 or the MAX BET switch 6 is operated to set the bet number. Sent when

  The internal winning command is a command that can specify the winning status of the internal winning flag and the type of the internal winning flag that has been established, and is transmitted when the start switch 7 is operated to start the game.

  The reel rotation start command is a command for notifying the start of reel rotation, and is transmitted when rotation of the reels 2L, 2C, and 2R is started.

  The reel stop command is a command that can specify whether the reel to be stopped is the left reel, the middle reel, or the right reel, the area number of the corresponding reel stop operation position, and the area number of the corresponding reel stop position. And is transmitted every time stop control of each reel is performed.

  The winning determination command is a command that can specify the presence / absence of winning, the type of winning, and the number of medals to be paid out at the time of winning, and is transmitted after all the reels are stopped and the winning determination is performed.

  The payout start command is a command for notifying the start of payout of medals, and is transmitted when the payout of medals is started by paying out a prize or credit (including medals used for setting the number of bets). The payout end command is a command for notifying the end of payout of medals, and is transmitted when the payout of medals by winning and winning a credit is completed.

  The game state command is a game state of the next game (whether it is a normal game state, during RT (1), during RT (2), during a big bonus, during a regular bonus, Etc.) and RT (1) (2) are commands that can specify the number of remaining games, and are transmitted at the end of the game.

  The standby command is a command indicating a transition to the standby state, and after one game is over, a credit (which was used for setting the bet number) is set when the transition to the standby state is made after a predetermined time without setting the bet number. (Including medals) is sent out after the medal payout is completed and the payout end command is sent.

  The stop command is a command indicating the occurrence or release of the stop state, and after the end of the BB, the stop command indicating the occurrence of the stop state is transmitted when the ending effect waiting time has elapsed, and the reset operation is performed. When the stop state is released, a stop command indicating the release of the stop state is transmitted.

  An error command is a command that indicates the occurrence or release of an error state. When an error is determined and controlled to the error state, an error command that indicates the occurrence of the error state is sent, and a reset operation is performed to release the error state. At that time, an error command indicating the cancellation of the error state is transmitted.

  The initialization command is a command indicating that the gaming state has been initialized and the start of the setting change mode, and is transmitted when the RAM 41c is initialized and shifts to the setting change mode.

  The setting end command is a command indicating the end of the setting change mode, and is transmitted when the setting ends, that is, when the setting change mode ends.

  The power-on command is a command that indicates whether or not one of the special roles has been won at power-on, and if it can be restored to the state before the power interruption at startup, it returns to the state before the power interruption. Sent when.

  The operation detection command indicates that an operation of any one of the BET switch 5, the MAXBET switch 6, the start switch 7, the stop switches 8L, 8C, and 8R, and the checkout switch 10 is detected, and the type of the operated switch. This command is sent when any one of these switches is detected. In addition, the operation detection command is in a state in which these switches are invalidated in the progress of the game (for example, when the credit is 0 or a specified number of bets are set, the single BET switch 5 or the MAX BET switch The operation of No. 6 is invalidated, the start switch 7 is invalidated because the number of bets is less than the specified number, and the stop switches 8L, 8C, 8R are invalidated because the reel is not changing Regardless of whether or not the checkout switch 6 is disabled because the credit is 0, etc.), it is transmitted when the operation of these switches is detected. Even if these switches are operated without any relation to the progress of the game, it is detected that the operation of the switch is detected, and an operation detection indicating the type of the detected switch So that the command is sent.

  The door command is a command indicating the detection state of the door opening detection switch 25, that is, ON (open state) / OFF (closed state). Sent before the setting can be started), and when the detection state of the door opening detection switch 25 changes (ON to OFF, OFF to ON).

  Of these commands, commands other than the door command are generated in a startup process and a game process described later, temporarily stored in a normal command transmission buffer provided in a special work in the RAM 41c, and in the timer interrupt process (main) described above. Sent.

  The normal command transmission buffer is provided with an area capable of storing a maximum of 16 commands so that a plurality of commands can be accumulated. In addition, addresses (0 to 15) are assigned to the storage areas for the respective commands. Further, in the normal command transmission buffer, a transmission pointer indicating an address of an area where a command to be transmitted next is stored and a storage pointer indicating an address of an area where the command is to be stored next are set. The transmission pointer is incremented by 1 every time an unsent command stored in the normal command transmission buffer is transmitted, and the storage pointer is incremented by 1 when storing the command. The address indicated by the transmission pointer and the address of the storage pointer have the same number when all the commands are transmitted and when all areas of the normal command transmission buffer are full due to untransmitted commands. If an unsent command is stored, the unsent flag is set. Therefore, if the address indicated by the send pointer and the address of the stored pointer are the same number, the unsent flag is set. If the untransmitted flag is not set, it is indicated that the normal command transmission buffer is full of untransmitted commands, and that the untransmitted command is empty.

  The door command is stored in a door command transmission buffer provided in a special work in the RAM 41c in the door monitoring process in the timer interrupt process (main) described above, and is transmitted in the timer interrupt process (main) described above.

  The door command transmission buffer is provided separately from the normal command transmission buffer, and an area in which only one door command can be stored is allocated. The door command transmission buffer stores a door command indicating the detection state of the door opening detection switch 25 at the time of power-on or at the end of one game, and after the change of the detection state of the door opening detection switch 25. Stored is a door command indicating the detected state. Further, the door command stored in the door command transmission buffer is not cleared even after the door command is transmitted, and is then overwritten by the newly stored door command. When the power is turned on or one game is finished, the door command transmission request 1 for requesting transmission of the door command stored in the door command transmission buffer is set, and the door command transmission request 1 is set or the door is opened. When the detection state of the detection switch 25 changes, the door command transmission request 2 is set. When this door command transmission request 2 is set, the door stored in the door command transmission buffer is set. Command transmission is instructed.

  In this embodiment, the CPU 41a generates an interrupt 3 at an interval of 0.56 ms, and executes a timer interrupt process when the interrupt 3 occurs, so that the timer interrupt process is executed every 0.56 ms. It becomes. In the timer interrupt process, timer interrupts 1 to 4 are repeatedly performed, and processes unique to these timer interrupts 1 to 4 are performed at intervals of 2.24 ms. Since the command transmission process for transmitting the command stored in the normal command transmission buffer and the door command stored in the door command transmission buffer is executed by the timer interrupt 2, the command transmission process is also 2.24 ms. It will be executed at intervals of.

  On the other hand, the CPU 91a of the sub control unit 91 obtains a command buffered in a reception buffer, which will be described later, in a timer interrupt process (sub) in which the command is executed at intervals of 1.12 ms. For this reason, every time the CPU 41a executes a timer interrupt process, that is, when a command transmission process is performed at an interval of 0.56 ms, there is a possibility that the sub-control unit 91 cannot receive the command normally.

  However, in the present embodiment, as described above, the CPU 41a executes the command transmission process at a rate of once every four timer interrupt processes, that is, at an interval of 2.24 ms. By transmitting only one of the command stored in the trust buffer and the door command stored in the door command transmission buffer, even when a plurality of commands are transmitted continuously, an interval of at least 2.24 ms is set. As a result, the sub-control unit 91 side can reliably acquire these continuously transmitted commands.

  In this embodiment, a command other than a door command is generated according to the progress of the game in the activation process or the game process, and stored in the normal command transmission buffer. On the other hand, in the door command, when the door command transmission request 1 for requesting transmission of the door command stored in the door command transmission buffer is set in the activation process or the game process, or the detection state of the door opening detection switch 25 changes. In this case, it is stored in the door command transmission buffer.

  When an untransmitted command stored in the normal command transmission buffer or an untransmitted door command stored in the door command transmission buffer is detected in the command transmission processing in the timer interrupt 2, a delay time is set, When the set delay time has elapsed, an untransmitted command stored in the normal command transmission buffer or an untransmitted door command stored in the door command transmission buffer is transmitted.

  Specifically, in the command transmission process, when an untransmitted command stored in the normal command transmission buffer or an untransmitted door command stored in the door command transmission buffer is detected, a range of 0 to 17 is set. A random number for delay is acquired and set in a delay counter provided in a special work in the RAM 41c.

  At this time, in the command transmission process in which the delay counter value is set and the command transmission process executed in the timer interrupt 2 thereafter, the delay counter value is decremented by 1 and when the delay counter value becomes 0, An untransmitted command stored in the normal command transmission buffer or an untransmitted door command stored in the door command transmission buffer is transmitted.

  That is, the command detected in the command transmission process is a time corresponding to a multiple of the command transmission process execution interval (2.24 ms). Specifically, the command transmission process is performed by subtracting 1 from the delay counter value acquired at that time. Is transmitted after the elapse of time (2.24 ms) {0 to 35.84 ms because the delay counter value is 0 to 17}.

  In the present embodiment, an area where a plurality of commands can be stored is provided in the normal command transmission buffer, and a command stored in the normal command transmission buffer or a door command stored in the door command transmission buffer is provided. It is possible to store a newly generated command in an empty area of the normal command transmission buffer without waiting for transmission. That is, a plurality of commands can be stored in the normal command transmission buffer. For this reason, it can be avoided that the progress of the game is stopped due to the delay of the command transmission. This is not the case when the normal command transmission buffer is full of untransmitted commands.

  In the command storage process, when a plurality of commands are stored in the normal command transmission buffer, these commands are stored in the order of generation. In the command transmission process, the commands are transmitted in the order stored in the normal command transmission buffer. It is like that. That is, commands stored in the normal command transmission buffer are transmitted in the order in which they are generated. Note that the power-on command and the initialization command are transmitted with the highest priority. Before the power-on command or the initialization command is stored in the normal command transmission buffer, other commands (hereinafter referred to as “command”) are transmitted. , Commands other than the door command, power-on command, and initialization command are called normal commands) (in the case of an initialization command, the stored data in the normal command transmission buffer is also cleared before that. Therefore, even if the normal command is not already stored, the power-on command or the initialization command is transmitted with priority. When a normal command is stored in the normal command transmission buffer and a door command transmission is requested (when the door command transmission request 2 is set), in principle, the normal command transmission buffer. The door command stored in the door command transmission buffer is transmitted with priority over the command stored in. Note that when the command stored in the normal command transmission buffer is a power-on command or an initialization command, or when the normal command transmission buffer stored in the normal command transmission buffer is waiting (delayed), the door command However, this is not the case when a request for transmission is requested, and the power-on command, initialization command, or normal command waiting to be transmitted is given priority, and the power-on command, initialization command, or normal command waiting to be transmitted After being sent, send a door command. If an untransmitted normal command remains in the normal command transmission buffer after transmitting a normal command waiting for transmission, the door command stored in the door command transmission buffer is transmitted with priority.

  In the slot machine 1 of the present embodiment, the number of symbols arranged on the reels 2L, 2C, and 2R is 21, and the rotation speed is 750 ms and the rotation is 1 rotation (80 rotations per minute). The time required for each reel 2L, 2C, 2R to move one symbol is 35.7 ms (= 750/21 ms).

  Further, in order to prevent an effect that assists the presentation on the effect control board 90 side, when the CPU 41a transmits a command to the effect control board 90, the maximum delay time is set. It is necessary to set a time longer than the time required for the reels 2L, 2C, 2R to move one symbol. That is, in this embodiment, it is necessary to set a time of 35.7 ms or more as the maximum delay time.

  On the other hand, in order to prevent a sense of discomfort caused by a large gap between the effect by the sub-control unit 91 mounted on the effect control board 90 and the control by the main control unit 41, the maximum delay time in the command transmission process It is preferable to make the value as short as possible. That is, in the case of the present embodiment, it is preferable that the maximum value of the delay time is set to 35.7 ms or more and as close as possible to 35.7 ms. In the present embodiment, as described above, the delay time in the command transmission process can be set only for a time corresponding to a multiple of the execution interval (2.24 ms) of the command transmission process. Since the minimum value among the values of 35.7 ms or more is 2.24 ms × 16 = 35.84 ms, the optimum maximum delay time is 35.84 ms in the slot machine 1 of the present embodiment.

  For this reason, it is sufficient to set 17 as the upper limit value of the delay counter, and in this way, the maximum value of the delay time is set to a minimum in order to prevent an effect that assists in pushing in this embodiment. It can be set to the minimum value among the values greater than or equal to the required maximum delay time.

  The CPU 41a monitors the detection state of the door opening detection switch 25 about every 100 ms. Specifically, in any of the timer interrupts 1 to 4 of the timer interrupt process (main), that is, in the port input process performed every 0.56 ms, an input state (door) in which the detection signal from the door open detection switch 25 is converted to a positive logic. Open detection switch 25ON = 1, 0 is acquired when the door is closed, and the timer interrupt process (main) timer interrupt 2 is performed, that is, in the door monitoring process performed every 2.24 ms, in the port input process described above The acquired state of the detection signal of the door opening detection switch 25 (the input state that has been the same for two consecutive times) continues to be logically ORed for about 100 ms (45 times of door monitoring processing), and the door opening detection switch is used using the result. 25 detection states are determined. If the calculation result is 1 when about 100 ms elapses, that is, if the door opening detection switch 25 is turned ON (opened) even once during that time, it is determined that the door opening detection switch 25 is ON. If the calculation result is 0, that is, if the door opening detection switch 25 is not turned ON (opened) even once during that time, it is determined that the door opening detection switch 25 is OFF. If the result of this determination matches the detection state of the door opening detection switch 25 indicated by the door command stored in the door command transmission buffer, it is determined that there is no change in the detection state of the door opening detection switch 25. Otherwise, it is determined that the detection state of the door open detection switch 25 has changed, the door command stored in the door command transmission buffer is updated to a door command indicating the detection state after the change, and the door command transmission request 2 Is set to command transmission of the door command. Further, when the CPU 41a determines that the detection state of the door opening detection switch 25 has changed, the CPU 41a also updates the output state of the door opening signal to the external output board 1000 in addition to the door command transmission command.

  Further, the CPU 41a sets the door command transmission request 1 in the activation process or the game process when the power is turned on or at the end of one game, and requests the transmission of the door command stored in the door command transmission buffer. On the other hand, in the door monitoring process, it is determined whether or not the door command transmission request 1 is set. If the door command transmission request 1 is set, it is determined that there is a door command transmission request and the door command transmission is performed. Request 2 is set to command transmission of the door command stored in the door command transmission buffer. In addition, when the door command transmission request 1 is set, the CPU 41a updates the output state of the door opening signal to the external output board 1000 in addition to the door command transmission command.

  As described above, the output state of the door opening signal to the external output board 1000 is updated by linking to the door command transmission command.

  In the present embodiment, the door command is given priority over the normal command as described above, and the door command is transmitted after a delay time determined at random has passed as in the case of other commands. On the other hand, since the maximum command delay time is 35.84 ms, when transmission of a door command is requested in a state where the normal command is stored in the normal command transmission buffer, after the door command is transmitted, Further, it takes about 72 ms until the normal command stored in the normal command transmission buffer is transmitted. However, the monitoring interval of the door open detection switch 25 is further stored in the normal command transmission buffer after transmitting the door command. If the detected state of the door opening detection switch 25 is continuously changed if it is shorter than about 72 ms required for transmitting the normal command being stored, the normal command transmission buffer is stored while the change continues. The normal command sending buffer will not be sent, so the normal command sending buffer will overflow. There is a possibility become. For this reason, in this embodiment, the monitoring interval of the door opening detection switch 25 is about longer than about 72 ms required for transmitting the normal command stored in the normal command transmission buffer after transmitting the door command. Even if the detection state of the door opening detection switch 25 is continuously changed, the normal command is transmitted after the door command is transmitted until the next door command is transmitted. At least one normal command stored in the transmission buffer can be transmitted, so that the normal command transmission buffer does not overflow.

  Next, the control of the effect performed by the sub control unit 91 based on a command transmitted from the CPU 41a to the effect control board 90 will be described.

  The CPU 91a of the sub-control unit 91 executes a command reception interrupt process when a strobe signal indicating command transmission from the CPU 41a is input. In the command reception process, the command acquired from the command transmission line is stored in the reception buffer provided in the RAM 91c.

  The receiving buffer is provided with an area capable of storing a maximum of 128 commands so that a plurality of commands can be accumulated. In addition, addresses (0 to 127) are assigned to the storage areas for the respective commands. Further, a read pointer indicating an address of an area where a command to be read next is stored and a storage pointer indicating an address of an area where the command is to be stored next are set in the reception buffer. The read pointer is incremented by 1 each time an unprocessed command stored in the reception buffer is read, and the store pointer is incremented by 1 when storing the received command. Is read, and the address indicated by the read pointer and the address of the storage pointer are the same number when all areas of the reception buffer are filled up by an unprocessed command. If an unprocessed command is stored, an unprocessed flag is set. Therefore, if the address indicated by the read pointer and the address of the storage pointer are the same number, the unprocessed flag is set. In this case, it is indicated that the reception buffer is full of unprocessed commands, and if the unprocessed flag is not set, it is indicated that the unprocessed command is empty.

  In the timer interrupt process (sub), the CPU 91a determines whether or not an unprocessed command is stored in the reception buffer. If an unprocessed command is stored, the CPU 91a receives it at the earliest stage. Various effect devices such as a liquid crystal display 51, effect effect LEDs 52, speakers 53 and 54, and reel LEDs 55 are referred to based on the control contents registered in the control pattern table with reference to the control pattern table stored in the ROM 91b based on the command. Control.

  In this embodiment, the time interval (1.12 ms) at which the CPU 91a performs the timer interrupt process (sub) is shorter than the time interval (2.24 ms) at which the CPU 41a transmits a command. If an operation associated with the game is being performed, an unprocessed command stored in the reception buffer is interrupted by the timer until the next command is received even if the command is continuously transmitted from the CPU 41a. It is read by the process (sub), and a plurality of unprocessed commands are not accumulated in the reception buffer. When a command transmitted from the CPU 41a is received, a timer interrupt process (sub) performed first after that is received. The received command is read and processing corresponding to the command is performed.

  In the control pattern table, the display pattern of the liquid crystal display 51 corresponding to the type of command, the lighting mode of the lighting effect LED 52, the output mode of the speakers 53 and 54, the lighting mode of the reel LED, etc. The control patterns of these effect devices are registered, and when the CPU 91a receives a command, the CPU 91a receives among the control patterns registered corresponding to the effect patterns set in the RAM 91c in the game of the control pattern table. The control device corresponding to the type of the command is referred to, and the rendering device is controlled based on the control pattern. Thereby, the production according to the production pattern and the progress of the game is executed.

  If the CPU 91a receives a new command during execution of an effect triggered by the reception of a certain command, the CPU 91a stops the effect based on the control pattern being executed, and performs control corresponding to the newly received command. An effect based on the pattern is executed. In other words, even if the production is not finished to the end, when a new command is received, the production that was being executed is canceled and a new command is received unless the received new command is not a command that triggers a new production. An effect based on the command is executed.

  When the internal winning command is received, the effect pattern is selected at a selection rate corresponding to the result of the internal lottery indicated by the internal winning command, and is set in the RAM 91c. The selection rate of the effect pattern is registered in the effect table stored in the ROM 91b. When the CPU 91a receives the internal winning command, the CPU 91a is registered in the effect table according to the result of the internal lottery indicated by the internal winning command. The selected selection pattern is selected from a plurality of types of production patterns according to the selection rate, and the selected production pattern is set in the RAM 91c as the production pattern of the game.

  The control pattern table contains specific controls that are referred to when a specific command (standby command, stop command, error command, initialization command, setting end command, power-on command indicating that special role is elected, etc.) is received. When the pattern is stored and the CPU 91a receives these specific commands, the CPU 91a refers to the specific control pattern corresponding to the command regardless of the effect pattern set in the game, and The effect device is controlled based on the above.

  When a standby command is received, a demo pattern for executing a demonstration effect (demonstration effect) is referred to as a control pattern. In addition, when continuous effects and additional effects to be described later are being executed, the results of these effects are the results indicating the winning of the bonus, and when the final effects to be described later are executed in the setting operation of the betting number of the next game, When the final production is being executed, or when the production during the bonus accompanying the big bonus is being executed, execution of the demonstration production is prohibited. However, the demo pattern is not referred to as the control pattern, and the demonstration effect is not executed.

  When a stop command indicating the occurrence of a stop state is received, a stop notification pattern for notifying that the stop state is in effect is referred to as a control pattern. When a stop command indicating release of the stop state is received, the above-described demo pattern is referred to as a control pattern. That is, when the stop state is released, the demonstration effect is executed.

  When an error command indicating the occurrence of an error state is received, an error notification pattern for notifying the fact of the error state and its type is referred to as a control pattern. When an error command indicating the cancellation of the error state is received, the control pattern that was being executed when the error occurred is referred to. That is, the production at the time of error occurrence is executed from the beginning.

  When the initialization command is received, a setting notification pattern for notifying that the setting is being changed is referred to. When the setting end command is received, the demo pattern described above is referred to as a control pattern. In other words, when an initialization command is received, a notification during setting change is executed, and when a setting end command is received thereafter, a demonstration effect is executed.

  When a power-on command indicating that a special role is won is received, a special role notification pattern for notifying that the special role has been won is referred to. That is, when a power-on command indicating that the special role is won is received, a notification effect for notifying that the special role is won is executed. Note that the notification effect for notifying the winning of the special combination is once executed until it receives a winning determination command indicating that the special combination has won.

  When the CPU 91a of the sub-control unit 91 detects the voltage drop signal output from the power interruption detection circuit 98 and when the V blank interrupt signal from the display control circuit 92 is not input for a certain period, the display control circuit 92 If the completion interrupt signal corresponding to the command is not input for a certain period of time despite the command for, the power interruption processing (sub) similar to the power interruption processing (main) is executed. . In the power interruption interrupt process (sub), the register is saved in a stack of a RAM 41c, which will be described later, and data for destructive diagnosis (5AH in this embodiment) in which any bit becomes 1 in the RAM 91c of the sub control unit 91, that is, In addition to storing specific data other than 0, RAM parity adjustment data is calculated so that the RAM parity based on the data stored in all areas of the RAM 91c becomes 0, and stored in the RAM 91c. ing. Thereafter, the CPU 91a shifts to a loop process in which no processing is performed. However, when the V blank interrupt signal from the display control circuit 92 is not input for a certain period of time, or even though the display control circuit 92 is instructed. In the case of the power interruption interruption process performed when the completion interruption signal corresponding to the instruction is not input for a certain period, the drive voltage is not lowered, and then the reset circuit 95 When the reset signal is output from the CPU 91a, the CPU 91a is restarted.

  The CPU 91a calculates the RAM parity based on the data stored in all areas of the RAM 91c at the time of startup (restart), confirms the value of the destructive diagnosis data, and the RAM parity is 0. On the condition that the value of the data for destruction diagnosis is also correct, the effect state before power interruption (specifically, the state when the last command was received before power interruption) is restored based on the data stored in the RAM 91c. It is like that. Specifically, the control pattern executed last is referred to and control based on the control pattern is executed. As a result, an effect based on the control pattern executed before power interruption is executed from the beginning. Further, when the RAM parity calculated based on the data stored in all areas of the RAM 91c at the time of startup is not 0 (in the case of 1) or the value of the destructive diagnosis data is not correct, it is determined that the RAM is abnormal. All areas of the RAM 91c are initialized.

  Thus, in this embodiment, not only when the CPU 91a detects the voltage drop signal, but also when the V blank interrupt signal from the display control circuit 92 described later is not input for a certain period, The power interruption interrupt process (sub) is executed even when the completion interrupt signal corresponding to the instruction is not input for a certain period of time despite the instruction, that is, when the display control circuit 92 hangs up for some reason. After that, the CPU 91a is restarted. As the CPU 91a is restarted, the display control circuit 92 is initialized so that the control of the CPU 91a is resumed from the state before the display control circuit 92 is hung up.

  In addition, the CPU 91a receives an initialization command or a power-on command before actually starting the production regardless of whether or not the production state before power interruption can be restored based on the data stored in the RAM 91c at the time of activation. Wait until either is received. When the initialization command is received in this state, the data in the RAM 91c is cleared. In addition, when a power-on command indicating that the special role is elected is received in this state, a notice effect indicating that the special role is elected is executed, and when a power-on command indicating that the special role is not elected is received, If it is possible to return to the performance state before the power interruption, the demonstration is performed. Also, in the state of waiting for receiving the initialization command or the power-on command, the execution of the timer interrupt process that executes the presentation based on the reception of the command is not permitted, and even when other commands are received, An effect based on the command is not performed, and no effect is performed until the initialization command or the power-on command is received after the startup and the execution of the timer interrupt process is permitted.

  On the other hand, if the V blank interrupt signal from the display control circuit 92 described later is not input for a certain period of time, the CPU 91a outputs a completion interrupt signal corresponding to the command, even though it instructs the display control circuit 92. When no input is made for a certain period, that is, when the display control circuit 92 hangs up for some reason, a restart flag is set in the RAM 91c before the power interruption processing (sub) is executed, By determining whether or not there is a restart flag, it is possible to distinguish whether it is a start-up due to power-on or a restart due to a hang-up of the display control circuit 92.

  If the CPU 91a determines that the display control circuit 92 is restarted due to a hang-up, and if the CPU 91a can return to the effect state before the restart, the CPU 91a does not wait for the reception of the initialization command or the power-on command. It is designed to return to the production state before startup. For this reason, although the CPU 91a is not activated by turning on the power but restarted by the hang-up of the display control circuit 92, the initialization command and the power-on command cannot be received, and the production is not performed. Can be prevented.

  Based on the reception of the door command, the CPU 91a issues a door opening notification indicating that the front door 2b is opened. Specifically, when the CPU 91a receives a door command, if no new door command is received after 100 ms, the detection state of the door opening detection switch 25 indicated by the received door command is a fixed detection state. If the definite detection state is ON (door open), the door open notification is performed. In the door opening notification, the effect effect LED 52 blinks, the door opening notification screen is displayed on the liquid crystal display 51, and an error warning sound is output. After that, the door command is received, and even if 100 ms elapses, the door command is not received and the detection state indicated by the door command becomes the definite detection state. If the definite detection state is OFF (door closed), the door is opened. Stops the notification and returns to the original performance.

  In addition, when a door command is newly received within 100 ms after the last door command is received, the detection state of the door opening detection switch 25 indicated by the previously received command is not set as the definite detection state. If no door command is received even after 100 ms after receiving a new door command, the detection state of the door opening detection switch 25 indicated by the last received door command is set as the detection state, and the determination detection state is If it is ON (door open), the door open notification is performed, and if the definite detection state is OFF (door closed), the door open notification is stopped.

  For this reason, even if a door command indicating that the door opening detection switch 25 is ON (door opening) is received in a state where the door opening notification is not performed, the door opening detection switch 25 is turned OFF (door closing) within 100 ms. When the door command is received, the door opening notification is not performed, and even when the door command indicating that the door opening detection switch 25 is OFF (door closed) is received in the state where the door opening notification is being performed, 100 ms thereafter. If the door command indicating ON of the door opening detection switch 25 (door opening) is received within, the door opening notification is not stopped.

  In addition, when a door command is received continuously within an interval of 100 ms, such as when a new door command is received within 100 ms after receiving a door command and then a new door command is received within 100 ms thereafter. In the meantime, the state of the door opening notification is maintained (if the door opening notification is not performed, the door opening notification is not started, and if the door opening notification is performed, it is continued) After the last received door command, the door opening notification state is determined based on the detection state determined when 100 ms elapses, the door opening notification has been performed so far, and the determined detection state is ON (door opening) If the detected state is OFF (door closed), the door opening notification is stopped while the door is open until then. Knowledge is not performed, and if the finalized detection state is OFF (door closed), door opening notification is not performed, the determined detection state if the ON (open door), and starts a door opening notification.

  Thus, in this embodiment, the CPU 41a of the main control unit 41 only transmits a door command indicating the detection state of the door opening detection switch 25, and the front door 2b is opened from the detection state of the door opening detection switch 25. The CPU 91a of the sub-control unit 91 determines whether or not the front door 2b is opened based on the detection state of the door opening detection switch 25 indicated by the door command received from the CPU 41a. The door opening notification is performed based on the determination result.

  The CPU 91a and the touch panel controller 99 are connected so that data can be transmitted and received by serial communication.

  The CPU 91a instructs the touch panel controller 99 to perform a hardware reset at the time of startup, initializes the touch panel controller 99, analyzes the status report transmitted from the touch panel controller 99 upon completion of the initialization, and has no abnormality. System on command is transmitted to activate the touch panel controller 99 system. Accordingly, the touch panel controller 99 shifts to a state in which a touch operation can be detected.

  Further, when the response to the command transmitted to the touch panel controller 99 is not returned even after a certain period of time other than at the time of activation, the CPU 91a commands a hardware reset in the same manner as at the time of activation and the system of the touch panel controller 99. Is supposed to be restarted.

  The touch panel controller 99 determines that the corresponding beam coordinate is a defective beam when any of the beams from the light emitting devices 56a and 56b is blocked continuously for 60 seconds based on the signals from the light receiving devices 57a and 57b. Thereafter, the detection of the touch operation at the beam coordinates determined as the defective beam is invalidated, and the detection of the touch operation is performed only with the validated beam. After that, when the shielding state from the light emitting devices 56a and 56b is released, the detection of the touch operation at the invalidated beam coordinates is enabled again.

  As described above, the touch panel controller 99 determines that the beam is defective when any of the beams from the light emitting devices 57a and 57b is blocked for 60 seconds continuously, and invalidates the corresponding beam coordinates. If the light receiving devices 57a, 57b and the light emitting devices 56a, 56b are damaged, if a solid object is attached, or if a defective beam is generated due to the object being placed, only the defective beam is invalidated, Since the touch operation can be detected by an effective beam, the touch panel can function normally even if a defective beam is generated.

  In this embodiment, the invalid beam coordinates determined to be a defective beam are validated when the shielding state from the light emitting devices 56a and 56b is released, and are automatically restored. However, for example, the touch panel controller 99 may be restored upon a hardware reset or the like.

  Further, the CPU 91a transmits a defective beam analysis request command every second. When the touch panel controller 99 receives the defective beam analysis request command, the touch panel controller 99 returns a report indicating the shielded beam and the shielding time among the beams from the light emitting devices 56a and 56b. Then, when the report returned from the touch panel controller 99 indicates that there are two or more continuous beams that have been shielded for 10 seconds or longer, the CPU 91a indicates to the liquid crystal display 51 that "Please remove things. "Is displayed, and a notification is made to prompt removal of an object on the touch panel.

  Thus, when there are two or more continuous beams that are shielded for a certain period of time among the beams from the light emitting devices 56a and 56b, that is, when there is a possibility that an object is located on the touch panel, Since the notification for prompting the removal is performed, a defective beam due to the presence of these objects can be detected and eliminated at an early stage.

  In addition, since the notification that prompts the removal of the object is performed at an earlier stage than the time until the beam coordinates associated with the defective beam are invalidated, the cause of the defective beam can be removed before the beam coordinates are invalidated. It becomes possible.

  When the CPU 91a returns a report indicating that there are no two or more continuous beams that have been shielded for 10 seconds or more after performing a notification that prompts the removal of the object, that is, the object is When a defective beam is removed by removal or when a certain time (30 seconds) has elapsed, that is, when an object is left on or when the light receiving devices 57a and 57b and the light emitting devices 56a and 56b are damaged. Stops the notification.

  When the internal winning command is received, the CPU 91a stores the winning status of the internal winning flag specified from the internal winning command and the type of the internal winning flag established in the RAM 91c, and then receives and updates the internal winning command. Hold until When the reel stop command is received, the stop reel specified from the reel stop command, the area number of the stop operation position of the corresponding reel, and the area number of the stop position of the corresponding reel are stored in the RAM 91c, and then the reel rotation start command Is held, that is, until the rotation of the reel in the next game is started, and erased as the rotation starts. When a winning determination command is received, the presence / absence of a winning specified from the winning determination command, the type of winning, and the number of medals paid out at the time of winning are stored in the RAM 91c until the winning determination command is received and updated. Hold. When the gaming state command is received, the gaming state of the next game specified from the gaming state command (the normal gaming state, the RT (1), the RT (2), the big bonus, Whether the game is in regular bonus, etc.) and the remaining number of games of RT (1) are stored in the RAM 91c, and held until the next game state command is received and updated.

  When the CPU 91a receives a standby command from the main control unit 41, that is, when an operation for advancing the game is not performed continuously for a certain time after the end of one game, and the number of credits or bets When the settlement operation is performed, a predetermined demonstration image is displayed on the liquid crystal display 51 to perform the demonstration effect described above. In addition, when a continuous effect or an additional effect, which will be described later, is executed, when a confirmed effect is executed by setting the number of bets, when a confirmed effect is already executed, when a big bonus effect is executed Is a standby command from the main control unit 41 when a standby command is received from the main control unit 41 without a continuous operation for a certain period of time or when a credit or bet amount is settled. Even if it is received, the demonstration performance is not performed. In addition, in a state where a continuous effect, an additional effect, and a big bonus effect, which will be described later, are being performed, a game sound effect (BGM) is output even after the game ends while the effect continues. When the standby command is received in such a state, the demonstration effect is not performed, but the control is performed so that the volume is minimized (silence), and then the bet number setting operation is performed as the game progresses, and the BET When a command is received, the volume that is being muted is restored to the original level.

  When the CPU 91a receives an error command indicating the occurrence of an error from the main control unit 41, that is, when any error occurs on the main control unit 41 side, the CPU 91a displays an error notification screen indicating the occurrence of the error on the liquid crystal display 51. Thus, the occurrence of an error is notified to the outside. The error notification effect is continuously executed until an error command indicating the cancellation of the error is received from the main control unit 41. The error notification is terminated by receiving the error command indicating the error cancellation, and is executed when an error occurs. It returns to the production state that it had been.

  When a predetermined time (60 seconds in this embodiment) has elapsed after the reel rotation has started, that is, after acquiring the reel rotation start command, the CPU 91a does not acquire a reel stop command for all the reels for a predetermined time ( In this embodiment, when 60 seconds) elapses, a promotion notification that prompts a stop operation of the reel is performed. In addition, particularly in a state where a continuous effect, an additional effect, or a big bonus effect is performed, in addition to the promotion notification when a predetermined time (60 seconds in this embodiment) has elapsed after the reel starts rotating, Control is performed to minimize (mute) the volume of the game sound effect, and thereafter, when a reel stop command is received for all reels, the volume being muted is returned to the original level.

  As an effect performed by the CPU 91a of the present embodiment, particularly as an effect performed on the liquid crystal display 51, RT (1) executed when the gaming state is at RT (1), RT (2), or a big bonus, respectively. Production, RT (2) production or big bonus production, continuous execution over multiple games, and continuous production and additional production that lead to the production result indicating whether or not the bonus has been won, and the normal gaming state Or, in RT (1) and RT (2), when either a general role or a special role is elected, an effect (small role notification effect, replay notification effect) indicating that the general character is elected There is also a single production including.

  In addition, the CPU 91a performs an effect indicating that any bonus is won or an effect indicating that any bonus is won during the RT (2) effect, except during the RT (2) effect described above. Later, when the RT (2) effect is finished, when the number of bets for the next game is initially set (when a medal is inserted, or when one BET switch 5 or MAXBET switch 6 is operated, That is, when the BET command is received for the first time, a confirmation screen indicating the confirmation of the bonus is displayed on the liquid crystal display 51, and a confirmed effect for notifying the player that the winning of the bonus has been confirmed is executed. The final production is continuously performed until the winning bonus is won (until a winning command indicating the winning bonus is received), and the winning bonus is won (winning the winning bonus) Is received).

  Next, the RT (2) production will be described. The RT (2) production is based on the case where the falling role (red cherry, blue cherry, white cherry) is won during RT (2) (internal winning indicating the winning of the falling role). In the case of receiving a flag), a falling combination winning notification for notifying that the falling combination has been won, and a falling combination type notification for notifying the type of the winning combination (type of the falling combination specified from the internal winning flag) are included. .

  The falling role type notification indicates that the red cherry was elected, the blue cherry was elected, the white cherry was elected, and the color indicating the winning (red, blue cherry if the red cherry was elected) Is notified that the winning combination is blue, and the white cherry is notified that the white cherry is won.

  Note that the fallen role type notification is not limited as long as the player can recognize the type of the fallen role, and the type of the fallen role itself, or the combination of symbols, the symbols that differ depending on the type of fallen role, It may be notified by displaying an image or the like suggesting the type on the liquid crystal display 51, or by turning on a corresponding LED, outputting a corresponding sound, or the like. Furthermore, a symbol that is an index of a different symbol depending on the type of the falling role (such as a symbol that is located near the constituent symbol of the falling role and stands out from the constituent symbol of the falling role), an image that suggests the index symbol, etc. You may make it alert | report.

  The CPU 91a makes a big changeover notice lottery to determine whether or not to perform a fallen combination type notification when a fallen combination that will end RT (2) by winning in RT (2) is won. When bonus (1) (2) is executed during RT (1) (2) and this winning combination lottery is won, the falling combination notification count is determined and the determined falling combination notification count is stored in the RAM 91c. Set. In addition, when the winning combination lottery is won while the number of falling combination notifications remains in the RAM 91c, the newly determined number of falling combination notifications is added to the number of falling combination notifications remaining in the RAM 91c. Then, in the state where any special combination is not won in RT (2), when any cherry wins (when an internal winning command indicating winning of any cherry is received), the number of falling combination notifications Is determined, and if the falling combination notification count remains, the falling combination type notification corresponding to the winning cherry is executed. In other words, when a red cherry is won, a falling role type notification that informs red that indicates the red cherry is won is executed, and when blue cherry is won, a falling role type that notifies the blue that indicates that the blue cherry is won is notified. The notification is executed, and when the white cherry is won, the falling role type notification for notifying the white indicating the winning of the white cherry is executed. In addition, when any special combination is won in RT (2), when any cherry is won, the number of falling combination notification is decremented by one every time the falling combination type notification is executed once. Therefore, when any of the cherries wins within the range in which the falling combination notification count remains, the falling combination type notification is executed. In RT (2), when any special role is not elected, when any cherry is elected, if there is no remaining falling role notification count, one of the falling roles is elected. The falling combination notification for notifying is performed.

  In this embodiment, if any cherry wins in a state where no special role is won in RT (2), RT (2) even before reaching the specified number of games from the start of RT (2). 2) will be completed, but as described above, the “Red Cherry”, “Blue Cherry” and “White Cherry” symbols on the left reel that make up Red Cherry, Blue Cherry and White Cherry are intentionally won. Since it cannot be stopped on the line, when any cherry is elected in the state where no special role is elected in RT (2), it is not possible to intentionally remove the cherry if the type is not known It is impossible and you will miss the winning cherries with a probability of 2/3, but the winning cherries will win with a probability of 1/3 and RT (2) will end. And will.

  On the other hand, when no special combination is won in RT (2), when any of the cherries wins, if the falling role type notification is executed, the player is suggested by the notified color. Depending on the selected color, it is possible to recognize which combination of red cherry, blue cherry, and white cherry was won, and the “red cherry” on the left reel that constitutes red cherry, blue cherry, and white cherry It is possible to specify a stop operation position where the symbol, the “blue cherry” symbol, and the “white cherry” symbol are not intentionally stopped on the winning line.

  For this reason, in the state where no special combination is won in RT (2), if any cherry is selected, the player intentionally wins by executing the fallen combination type notification. By missing the cherry, it is possible to avoid the end of RT (2) accompanying the winning of the cherry.

  In addition, as described above, there is no stop operation position in which the similar color cherry and the “7” symbol can be aimed at the same time on the left reel, so the player aims at the “7” symbol of the color suggested by the fall type notification. By performing the reel stop operation, the winning color cherry does not win and the end of RT (2) can be avoided. That is, in the falling role type notification, in addition to notifying the type of the falling role won by the suggested color, the position serving as an index when avoiding winning of the falling role is also notified. .

  When the winning combination lottery in the big bonuses (1) and (2) is won, the CPU 91a executes a notification number lottery for selecting the falling combination notification number in the range of 1 to 4 times, and the winning combination notification is made. The number of times is set in the RAM 91c or, if already set in the RAM 91c, is added to the number of times.

  In the notification number lottery in the big bonuses (1) and (2), as shown in FIG. 27 (a), the ratio of selecting 1 to 4 times is the big bonus for executing the notification number lottery. (1) (Big Bonus transferred with the combination of “Red 7-Red 7-Red 7”) or Big Bonus (2) (Big Bonus transferred with the combination of “Blue 7-Blue 7-Blue 7”) In the notification number lottery executed when winning the falling combination notification lottery in the big bonus (1), the number of falling combination notifications is 1 time: 20%, 2 times: 20%, 3 times: 40%, 4 times: The ratio is selected at a rate of 20%, the average number of times is 2.6 times, and the number of notifications executed when the winning combination lottery in the big bonus (2) is won. In the lottery, the number of falls notice is 1 time: 50 , 2: 30%, 3: 15%, 4 times: being adapted to be selected at a rate of 5%, the average number is 1.75 times. That is, in the notification frequency lottery executed when the winning combination lottery is won in the big bonus (1), a relatively large number of notifications is executed when the falling bonus notification lottery is won in the big bonus (2). In the notification number lottery executed when the winning combination lottery is selected in the big bonus (2) and the winning combination lottery is selected in a big bonus (2), the number of notifications is relatively small. ) Is selected at a higher rate than the notification frequency lottery executed when the falling combination notification lottery is won. For this reason, a person who wins the falling role notification lottery with the big bonus (1) can expect to acquire more falling role notification times than the case where the big bonus (2) wins the falling role notification lottery. Yes.

  The CPU 91a, as a big bonus effect corresponding to the big bonus (1) (2), at the time of winning the big bonus (1) or the big bonus (2) among the effect modes of the BB effect modes A to C (big bonus) The big bonus effect of the effect mode selected by the player is executed when the winning determination command indicating the winning of (1) or big bonus (2) is received. Specifically, when the big bonus (1) or the big bonus (2) is won, the BB effect modes A to C are periodically displayed in order on the liquid crystal display 51, and betting is performed at the timing when the desired BB effect mode is displayed. By performing a number setting operation (receiving a BET command), the BB effect mode displayed at that time is set. The BB effect mode is not limited to this, and the player may be able to select the BB effect mode by operating the selection switch 55 and the decision switch 56.

  In addition, as shown in FIG. 27 (b), the CPU 91a executes the falling role notification lottery with different triggers according to the BB effect mode, and the winning probability at that time also applies different probabilities according to the BB effect mode. In addition, the notification that the winning combination lottery has been won is also made according to the BB effect mode.

  Specifically, when the BB effect mode A is selected, when the bell wins during the big bonus (1) or the big bonus (2) (when the winning determination command indicating the bell winning is received), The notice lottery is executed, and the winning probability at that time is about 4.4%. In addition, if the winning combination lottery is won, the fact that the winning combination lottery has been won is announced with a probability of 1/2 of the winning game (when receiving the winning determination command indicating the winning of a bell). If the big bonus is not notified before the end of the big bonus, the fact that the falling combination notification lottery is won is notified at the end of the big bonus (when a gaming state command indicating the end of the big bonus is received).

  When the BB effect mode B is selected, the falling combination notification lottery is executed when the player loses during the big bonus (1) or the big bonus (2) (when the internal winning command indicating the loss is received) In this case, the winning probability is 100%. In addition, when the winning combination lottery lottery is won, the fact that the winning combination lottery lottery is won immediately is notified.

  When the BB effect mode C is selected, when any cherry is won during the big bonus (1) or the big bonus (2) (when an internal winning command indicating winning of any cherry is received) ), The winning combination notification lottery is executed, and the winning probability at that time is about 68%. If the winning combination lottery is won, the fact that the winning combination lottery is won is notified at the end of the big bonus (when a gaming state command indicating the end of the big bonus is received).

  Note that, regardless of the BB effect modes A to C, the substantial probability of winning the falling combination notification lottery in each game in the big bonus (1) or the big bonus (2) (BB effect mode A: Bell winning probability ( Winning probability) x Winning probability of falling role announcement lottery, BB production mode B: Loss probability, BB production mode C: (Red cherry win probability + blue cherry win probability + white cherry win probability) / 3) is almost the same Probability (about 4%).

  When the winning combination lottery in the big bonus (1) (2) is won, the CPU 91a executes the mini game at the end of the big bonus (1) (2).

  The mini game is a game in which a player obtains a score by operating the touch panel according to the content displayed on the liquid crystal display 51, and the CPU 91a receives the score obtained in the mini game at the end of the mini game. It is determined whether or not the score is 1 or more. If the score is 1 or more, 2 is added to the number of falling combination notifications set in the RAM 91c. It is determined whether or not the score is a second score lower than the score. If the score is equal to or greater than the second score, 1 is added to the number of falling combination notifications set in the RAM 91c, and the score is less than the second score. For example, the number of falling combination notifications is not added.

  The CPU 91a also gives a mini-game score when the mini-game is finished without any touch panel operation in the mini-game or when the mini-game is canceled by setting the bet amount before the mini-game is finished. The number of falling combination notifications is not added as in the case of less than the second score.

  As described above, in this embodiment, when the touch panel is operated in the mini game, it is possible to avoid the end of RT (2) when the falling combination is notified, that is, when the falling combination is won according to the result. The number of falling combination notifications is given, but if the touch panel is not operated at all in the mini game or if the mini game is canceled before the mini game ends, the number of falling combination notifications is not given. It has become.

  Further, the CPU 91a is configured to execute the falling combination notification lottery even in a state where no special combination is won in RT (1) (2). As shown in FIG. 27 (b), in the state where no special combination is won during RT (1) (2), a fallen combination is made in the case of a loss (when an internal winning command indicating a loss is received). The notification lottery is executed, and the winning probability at that time is 5% at RT (1) and 20% at RT (2). Further, in this case, if the winning combination lottery lottery is won, the fact that the winning combination lottery lottery is won is notified at that time. And even if the winning combination for lottery notification is won in RT (1) and (2), the lottery for notifying the falling combination is executed in the range of 1 to 4 times. Or if it is already set in the RAM 91c, it is added to the number of times.

  In the notification frequency lottery executed in RT (1) (2), as shown in FIG. 27 (a), 1 to 4 times are selected at a rate of 25%.

  If any special combination and any cherry are elected at the same time when no special combination is carried over during RT (2), the CPU 91a falls if the number of falling combination notifications remains. The role type notification is executed. At this time, the number of falling combination notifications is not subtracted, the number of falling combination notifications at that time is newly stored as the number of temporary notifications, and the number of temporary notifications is subtracted once. If the number of falling combination notifications does not remain, a falling combination winning notification is executed. At this time, if the falling combination wins, at the time when the betting number setting operation of the next game is performed, the fact that the special combination has been won is notified, and the continuation of RT (2) is notified.

  In addition, when any of the special roles is carried over and the winning of the special role is not notified, any of the cherries wins, and the CPU 91a has the number of falling role notifications or the number of provisional notifications remaining. If so, the fall type combination notification is executed. At this time, the number of falling combination notifications is not subtracted. If the number of provisional notifications is already stored, the number of provisional notifications is subtracted once, and if the number of provisional notifications is not stored, the number of falling combinations notification is temporarily calculated. The number of notifications is newly stored, and the number of provisional notifications is subtracted once. If neither the number of falling combination notifications nor the number of provisional notifications remains, the falling combination winning notification is executed. At this time, if the falling combination wins, at the time when the betting number setting operation of the next game is performed, the fact that the special combination has been won is notified, and the continuation of RT (2) is notified.

  Whether the number of falling combination notifications or the number of provisional notifications remains when the CPU 91a wins any of the cherries in a state where any special combination is carried over and the special combination is notified Regardless of whether or not, the fall type combination notification is executed.

  In the present embodiment, RT (2) will not end even if any cherry wins in the state where any special role is won in RT (2), so either one in RT (2) After winning the special role of, red cherries, blue cherries and white cherries win more medals, but as mentioned above, the red reel, blue cherries and white cherries Since the “Red Cherry”, “Blue Cherry”, and “White Cherry” designs cannot be intentionally stopped on the winning line, even if Red Cherry, Blue Cherry, or White Cherry wins, these Red Cherry, It is impossible to deliberately win a blue cherry or a white cherry. If you win these roles, you can win with a 1/3 chance, but with a 2/3 chance. Resulting in spilled.

  On the other hand, if any special role is elected in RT (2) and if the special role is announced, one of red cherry, blue cherry, and white cherry is won. At this time, when the falling combination type notification is executed, it is possible to recognize the winning combination, and it is possible to win all the red cherries, blue cherries, and white cherries that have been won.

  As described above, in this embodiment, if any special role is not won in RT (2), when any cherry is won, RT (2) is won by winning the winning cherry. However, if any special role wins at RT (2), RT (2) will not end even if any of the cherries wins. Therefore, by winning the special combination in RT (2), it is possible to obtain more medals than before the special combination is won.

  In addition, in the state where any special combination is elected in RT (2) and that fact is notified, when any cherry is elected, the fall type combination notification is executed. It is possible to win a prize without missing the cherries. In the state where the special role is elected but not notified, the control is performed in the same manner as the state where the special role is not elected, that is, when any cherry is elected, If the number of notifications (temporary notification number) remains, the falling combination type notification is executed, and if the number of falling combination notifications (temporary notification number) does not remain, the falling combination winning notification is executed, so RT (2 ), The player can always have a sense of expectation for winning the special role even if the special role is not notified.

  In RT (2), when a special role and one of the cherries are elected at the same time without any special role being carried over, or when a special role is being won and either special role is being carried over If any of the cherries wins without being notified, and if the winning cherries wins, the winning of the special role will be notified in response to the betting number setting operation of the next game, and RT (2) Therefore, an unexpectedness can be given to the player who thought that RT (2) was finished.

  When the number of remaining games of RT (2) (the number of games until reaching the specified number of games and the number of remaining games of RT (2) indicated by the gaming state command) becomes 3 games, the CPU 91a determines that RT ( During the period until the end of 2) the continuous production is always executed over 3 games and the remaining number of games of RT (2) (the number of remaining games of RT (2) indicated by the gaming state command) becomes 6 games, When no winning combination is received (when a winning judgment command indicating a loss is received), a continuous production lottery is executed to determine whether or not to perform a continuous production, and 3 is also awarded when the continuous production lottery is won. Perform continuous production throughout the game.

  In the continuous performance, a winning pattern for finally informing the winning of the bonus and a loss pattern for informing that the bonus has not been won in the special role are determined. The CPU 91a determines the RT (2). When the number of remaining games is three games, if any special role is won at that time, a continuous production based on the winning pattern is always executed, and no special role is won Always performs a continuous production based on the loss pattern.

  On the other hand, in the continuous effect lottery, as shown in FIG. 28, even when one of the special roles is won, the loss pattern may be determined, and when one of the special roles is won. In the case where the lost pattern is determined in the continuous effect lottery, the continuous effect is executed based on the lost pattern that finally notifies the loss.

  Specifically, in the continuous effect lottery, when the big bonuses (1) to (3) are won, the winning pattern is determined with a probability of 5%, and the loss pattern is determined with a probability of 20%. If no special role is won, the loss pattern is determined with a probability of 20%, and the winning pattern is not determined.

  Then, the CPU 91a determines a winning pattern in the continuous effect lottery when one of the big bonuses (1) to (3) is won, executes a continuous effect based on the determined winning pattern, and plays a special role. The background selection lottery for selecting the background of the display screen in the RT (2) effect is performed by notifying the winning, and the background of the display screen in the RT (2) effect is selected in the background selection lottery. The background is changed.

  The background of the display screen in the RT (2) effect consists of three types, day, evening and night, and the background of the RT (2) effect always starts from noon. In the background selection lottery, if the big bonus (1) is won, the background is selected at the ratio of day: 50%, evening: 30%, night: 20%, and the big bonus (2) is won. If the background is selected, the background is selected at a ratio of 70% for the day, 20% for the evening, and 10% for the evening. If the big bonus (3) is selected, the day is 85% and the evening is 10%. %, Night: Select the background at a rate of 5%.

  In this way, in the background selection lottery, the evening and night are selected at a higher rate when the big bonus (2) is won than when the big bonus (3) is won, and the big bonus (1) If you are elected, the evening and night will be selected at a higher rate. For this reason, when the background is changed to evening or night, it is possible to expect the winning of the big bonus (1) which is more advantageous for the player. On the other hand, even when the big bonus (1) is won, the day is selected for 50% and the background may not be changed. Therefore, even if the background does not change, it can be expected that the big bonus (1) will be won. It has become.

  Next, continuous production will be described.

  All the continuous effects are performed by displaying a predetermined image on the liquid crystal display 51. In addition, the production for each individual game in the continuous production starts when the start switch 7 is operated (when the internal winning command is received), and when all the rotations of the reels 2L, 2C, 2R are stopped (all Is finished when a reel stop command is received for the reels. There are two types of performance results for each game other than the final game: player side attacks and player side damage, and final game results are two types of player wins and losses. However, there are many types of production processes.

  As described above, the continuous production is started when the number of remaining games of RT (2) (the number of remaining games of RT (2) indicated by the gaming state command) becomes three games or when the continuous production lottery is won. The In the continuous production of the winning pattern, when all the rotations of the reels 2L, 2C, and 2R are stopped in the game (final game) in which the continuous production ends (when the reel stop command is received for all the reels). The fact that the bonus is won (player win) is definitely notified.

  Further, in the continuous production of the loss pattern, the result of the loss (losing the player) is notified as a result of the continuous production, that is, no special role is won. In addition, when a lost pattern is won in spite of being won for any special role in the continuous production lottery, the loss is intentionally notified, but the remaining RT (2) If no bonus is won in any of the three games and a continuous production based on the loss pattern is started, any bonus will be won between the start and the end of the continuous production. If the bonus won by the end does not win, the player will be informed of the content that is different from the situation at the end of RT (2) if the continuous production ends and the result of the loss is informed. It will end up.

  For this reason, in the continuous production of the loss pattern started in the remaining three games of RT (2), it is determined whether or not any special role is won after the production starts at the start of the final game. If you have not won any special role after the start, you will be notified of the result of the loss at the end of the game, and if you win any special role after the continuous production has started, The result of the production will be replaced and the fact that the special role has been won will be clearly announced, or the additional game will be executed in the next game without replacement, and it will be confirmed that the special role has been won by this additional production. Will be informed.

  In addition, the CPU 91a also wins red cherries, blue cherries, and white cherries that may be won at the same time as the special role even in the normal gaming state or RT (1) (internal winning indicating the winning of any cherry). When the command is received), a continuous effect lottery for determining whether or not to execute the continuous effect is executed, and the continuous effect is executed over three games even when the continuous effect lottery is won. In the continuous effect lottery executed in the normal gaming state, execution of the continuous effect is determined with a higher probability than the continuous effect lottery executed in RT (1). The continuous production is executed at a higher frequency than during RT (1).

  The CPU 91a is executed regardless of whether or not the special combination is won as the one-time production described above in the normal gaming state, RT (1) and RT (2), but when the special combination is won The chance effect that indicates the possibility of winning the special role is executed by executing with a higher probability than when not winning the special role. The chance effect is executed when an effect pattern for chance effect is selected in an effect pattern selection process executed when an internal winning command is received. In the effect pattern selection process, the effect pattern for chance effect is selected with a higher probability in the normal gaming state than in RT (1) and RT (2), and in the normal gaming state, RT The chance effect is executed more frequently than during (1) and during RT (2).

  In addition, when the replay (1) or the special role is elected as the one-off effect in the normal gaming state, RT (1) and RT (2), the CPU 91a determines whether the replay (1) or the special role is selected. A replay notification effect indicating that the player has been selected is executed. The replay notification effect is basically executed when the replay (1) is won, and when the replay notification effect is executed, the replay (1) is won, but is executed when the special role is won. Since the replay (1) will not win, the replay notification effect will be executed, and the replay (1) will not win, suggesting that the special role is won. The replay notification effect is executed by selecting an effect pattern for the replay notification effect in the effect pattern selection process executed when the internal winning command is received. In the effect pattern selection process, when the replay (1) is won during RT (1) and RT (2), the replay notification effect is performed with a lower probability than when the replay (1) is won in the normal gaming state. The production pattern is selected.

  In addition, the CPU 91a receives a small role or a special role as a single effect during a normal gaming state, during RT (1), during RT (2), and during a big bonus (4) or big bonus (5) notification period described later. The small role notification effect indicating that either the small role or the special role is elected is executed. The small role announcement effect is basically executed when the small role is elected, and when the small role notification effect is executed, the small role will be won if the announced small role is not missed. However, if it is executed at the time of winning the special role, the small role will not win, so the small role notification effect is executed, and the winning of the special role is suggested by the fact that the small role does not win. The small role notification effect is executed by selecting an effect pattern for the small role notification effect in the effect pattern selection process executed when the internal winning command is received. The small role announcement production includes the first small role announcement production and the second small role announcement production. In the production pattern selection process, the special game is won in the normal gaming state, RT (1), RT (2). When the small role is elected alone in a state where the first small role announcement effect is not selected, a higher pattern than the second small role notification effect effect pattern is selected, and the normal gaming state, Big bonus (4) when a special role is elected during RT (1), when a special role is elected while a special role is elected, when a special role is elected at the same time as a special role Alternatively, when a small role is elected during the announcement period described later of the big bonus (5), the production pattern for the second small role announcement production is selected at a higher rate than the production pattern for the first small role announcement. It has become.

  In the present embodiment, the CPU 91a uses random numbers acquired from the same random number counter when performing the falling role notification lottery, the notification count lottery, the continuous effect lottery, the background selection lottery, and the effect pattern selection process. . That is, lottery is performed using random numbers acquired from the same random number counter for a plurality of types of lottery, and there is no need to provide a random number counter for each of these types of lottery. In the present embodiment, lottery is performed using random numbers acquired from the same random number counter for all these lotteries, but random numbers acquired from the same random number counter are used for all lotteries. Even if it is not used, the above effect can be obtained if random numbers acquired from the same random number counter are used for at least a plurality of types of lottery.

  Next, a bonus effect that is executed when the big bonus (4) or the big bonus (5) is won will be described.

  When the big bonus (4) or the big bonus (5) wins, the CPU 91a does not perform the effect indicating the big bonus winning as when the big bonus (1) to (3) wins. Continue playing the game state.

  Furthermore, the combination of the big bonus (4) and the big bonus (5) is smaller than a conspicuous symbol such as “7”, and the number arranged on each reel is “bell” and “replay”. It is composed of two or more kinds of symbols, making it difficult to understand that the winning line is aligned. Furthermore, the bonuses other than the big bonus (4) and the big bonus (5) are controlled so as to be aligned with the winning lines L1 to L4 arranged in a straight line across the reels 2L, 2C, and 2R. Regarding (4) and Big Bonus (5), the stopping positions of the upper, middle and lower stages are different in all reels, and are aligned with the winning lines L5 and L6 set across the symbols which are not located on a straight line. Therefore, it is more difficult to understand that the combination of the big bonus (4) and the big bonus (5) is aligned with the winning line.

  Then, as shown in FIG. 29, when the big bonus (4) or big bonus (5) wins and the game state shifts to the big bonus (4) or big bonus (5), the winning announcement is made in the notice period of up to three games. By performing the lottery and winning the prize announcement lottery, a bonus notification effect for notifying that the game has shifted to the big bonus (4) or the big bonus (5) is performed. If the winning lottery is not won during the notice period, the bonus notice effect is forcibly performed at the end of the three games.

  In addition, as described above, when the small role is elected alone in a state other than the notification period and when the special role is not elected, the first small role notification effect is higher than the second small role notification effect. On the other hand, when a small role is elected in the notification period, the second small role notification effect is executed at a higher rate than the first small role notification effect. The second small role notification effect that is executed in a state other than the notification period and in a state where the special role is not won is executed at a high frequency.

  After the bonus announcement effect, the first bonus effect is executed until the total payout number in the big bonus exceeds 100, which is the end condition of the big bonus (5), and the total payout number in the big bonus is 100. The first bonus effect ends with the game exceeding. In the case of the big bonus (5), the bonus effect is also terminated at the same time as the end of the big bonus (5), whereas in the case of the big bonus (4), any one until the end of the next game is reached. (The timing for setting the number of bets, start operation, or stop operation is determined by lottery), and the total number of payouts in the big bonus becomes the end condition of the big bonus (4) 300 The second bonus effect is executed until the number exceeds the number, and the second bonus effect ends with the game in which the total number of payouts in the big bonus exceeds 300, and the bonus effect ends with the end of the big bonus (4) To do.

  In this embodiment, the main control unit 41 performs a betting number settlement operation when a certain amount of time (30 seconds) has elapsed without a betting number setting operation being performed after the game ends, and a credit settlement operation is performed. When it comes to send a wait command.

  On the other hand, when the CPU 91a of the sub-control unit 91 continuously outputs the game sound effect by the continuous effect or the bonus effect, when the standby command is received, the game effect being output at the normal volume (MAX). Control to mute the sound (silence control) is performed.

  For this reason, as shown in FIG. 30 (a), in the state in which the game sound effects are continuously output by the continuous effect or the bonus effect, the game progress operation is not performed after the end of the game, and for a certain time (30 seconds). ) Elapses, control (silence control) is performed to lower the game sound effect being output at the normal volume (MAX).

  Further, as shown in FIG. 30 (b), in a state in which game sound effects are continuously output by a continuous effect or a bonus effect, even before a certain time (30 seconds) has elapsed since the game ended. When a credit settlement operation is performed, control (mute control) is performed to reduce the game sound effect being output at the normal volume (MAX) without waiting for a certain period of time.

  In addition, the main control unit 41 is configured not to transmit a standby command regardless of the time that has elapsed since the end of the game in the state where the number of bets is set.

  For this reason, as shown in FIG. 31 (a), in a state in which game sound effects are continuously output by continuous effects and bonus effects, the number of bets before a certain time (30 seconds) elapses after the game ends. Is set, the game sound effects are not muted even after a certain period of time has elapsed after the game ends, and after that, the betting amount is settled and the game sound effects are Silence control is performed.

  In addition, as shown in FIG. 31 (b), in a state in which game sound effects are continuously output by a continuous effect or a bonus effect, the bet number is increased before a predetermined time (30 seconds) elapses after the game ends. Even if the set amount is set and before a certain period of time has elapsed since the game ended, when the betting amount is settled and a standby command is transmitted, the normal volume (MAX) is not waited for the certain period of time to elapse. Control to mute the game sound effect being output (silence control) is performed.

  The CPU 91a returns the game sound effect to the normal sound volume (MAX) when the bet number is set after the mute control is performed, that is, when the BET command is received after receiving the standby command. Yes.

  In addition, in a state where the bet number has already been set, the main control unit 41 does not transmit a standby command even when a certain time (30 seconds) has elapsed since the end of the game. For this reason, the CPU 91a does not perform a demonstration effect even if a certain amount of time has passed since the game ends if the number of bets has already been set and the player is willing to start the game. ing.

  Further, in a state where the bet number has already been set, the main control unit 41 does not transmit a standby command even when a certain time (30 seconds) has elapsed since the end of the game. Even when the sound effects are continuously output, the CPU 91a is in a state in which the player is willing to start the game, and thus does not perform control to mute the game sound effects.

  The effect control board 90 of the present embodiment can perform an operation test of each part mounted on the effect control board 90 by connecting a command simulator (test game control board) before shipment.

  In the operation test, an inspection command specifying a component to be operated by the command simulator and its operation mode is transmitted.

  The slot machine 1 of this embodiment is equipped with LED, lamp, cold-cathode tube and other electrical components, a speaker, a liquid crystal display 51, and a touch panel controlled by the sub-control unit 91. An output port and its output port It is possible to inspect the operation of the designated part by designating the part corresponding to 1 and its operation mode by the inspection command. The inspection command is composed of 2 bytes. The output port is designated by the first byte, and the component to be operated and the operation mode are designated by the second byte.

  In the inspection command that inspects the operation of the lighting component, you can specify lighting and extinguishing as the operation mode, and if the lighting component can turn on multiple colors, you can also specify the lighting color It is.

  In the inspection command to inspect the operation of the speaker, as the operation mode, the output from both left and right only, the type of sound to be output, and the ROM check of the sound ROM (ROM that stores sound data output from the speaker) Can be specified.

  In the inspection command for inspecting the operation of the liquid crystal display 51, the operation mode includes color bar display, red display, green display, blue display, white display, black display, electrostatic test screen display, CGROM (liquid crystal display 51 ROM check of image data (CG data to be displayed on CG), display area check of liquid crystal display 51, display of image data A to D stored in CGROM, and check of VRAM. Is possible.

  In the inspection command for inspecting the operation of the touch panel, it is possible to specify a defective beam check of the touch panel and an operation check of the touch panel as operation modes. When a touch panel defect check is designated, the voice ROM and CGROM ROM checks are also designated at the same time.

  As another inspection command, there is an inspection command for confirming the backup of the bonus medium effect. In this inspection command, the display of the bonus medium screen, the operation of the electrical components in the bonus, and the BGM output in the bonus are designated.

  In one inspection command, it is possible to specify only one output port, components corresponding to the output port, and operation modes, and when different components of the output port are operated simultaneously and inspected, Send inspection commands with specified ports continuously. For this reason, it is necessary to transmit 40 inspection commands continuously even if only the test for operating all the electrical parts is performed, and the operation of parts other than the electrical parts is also tested at the same time. In some cases, it is necessary to continuously transmit a maximum of 128 inspection commands according to the combination.

  In the command simulator, an inspection command for designating the operation of a plurality of electrical components, an inspection command for designating the operation of electrical components, an inspection command for designating the operation of the speaker, and an inspection command for designating the operation of the liquid crystal display 51 The inspection command for designating the operation of the speaker and the inspection command for designating the operation of the liquid crystal display 51 can be transmitted simultaneously, but the liquid crystal display 51 different from the inspection command for designating the operation of the liquid crystal display 51 can be transmitted. It is not possible to simultaneously transmit operation commands that specify operations that cannot be performed simultaneously, such as inspection commands that specify the operation of the liquid crystal display 51 and inspection commands that specify the operation of the touch panel. It has become.

  As described above, if an operation associated with a normal game is performed, an unprocessed command stored in the reception buffer receives the next command even when commands are continuously transmitted from the CPU 41a. Since it is read out by the timer interrupt processing (sub) until then, a plurality of unprocessed commands are not stored in the reception buffer, but in the operation test by the command simulator, a maximum of 128 inspection commands are transmitted continuously. Therefore, an area capable of storing 128 commands is provided in the reception buffer of the RAM 91c.

  The CPU 91a determines whether or not an unprocessed command is stored in the reception buffer in the timer interrupt process (sub), and if an unprocessed command is stored, it is received from the reception buffer at the earliest stage. The command is read, and it is determined whether or not the read command is an inspection command. As a result, when the read command is an inspection command, the component specified by the inspection command and its operation mode are specified, and the specified component is operated in the specified operation mode. As a result, the operation status based on the inspection command transmitted from the command simulator can be confirmed from the outside.

  When the CPU 91a receives the inspection command for inspecting the operation of the electrical component, the CPU 91a specifies the electrical component specified by the inspection command and its operation mode such as lighting, extinction, and lighting color, and the corresponding electrical component is specified. It operates in the mode of operation.

  When the CPU 91a receives an inspection command for inspecting the operation of the speaker, the operation mode designated by the inspection command such as output from both the left only, the right only from both the left and right, the type of sound to be output, and the ROM check of the audio ROM And the speaker is operated in the designated operation mode. In particular, when the ROM check of the voice ROM is designated, the confirmation data stored in the voice ROM is compared with the stored data stored in the ROM 91b, and the result of whether or not they match is determined. It is displayed on the liquid crystal display 51.

  When the CPU 91a receives an inspection command for inspecting the operation of the liquid crystal display 51, the CPU 91a displays a color bar, red display, green display, blue display, white display, black display, electrostatic test screen display, The operation mode specified by the inspection command such as the ROM check of the CGROM, the display area check of the liquid crystal display 51, the display of the image data A to D stored in the CGROM, and the check of the VRAM is specified, and the liquid crystal display 51 is specified. Operate in a manner. In particular, when the ROM check of the CGROM is designated, the confirmation data stored in the CGROM is compared with the stored data stored in the ROM 91b as in the case of the ROM check of the audio ROM. The result of whether or not to do so is displayed on the liquid crystal display 51. When the display area check of the liquid crystal display 51 is designated, an image showing the displayable area is displayed on the liquid crystal display 51. When the VRAM check is designated, the VRAM is expanded in the memory area and an image for VRAM check is displayed on the liquid crystal display 51.

  When the CPU 91a receives an inspection command for inspecting the operation of the touch panel 51, the CPU 91a specifies an operation mode designated by the inspection command, such as a check for a defective beam on the touch panel, an operation check on the touch panel, and the touch panel and the liquid crystal display 51. Operate in the specified operation mode. In particular, when a check for a defective beam on the touch panel is designated, a defective beam analysis request command is transmitted to the touch panel controller 99, and whether there is a beam that is blocked for 60 seconds or more based on the returned report. If there is a beam that is shielded for 60 seconds or longer, a red line is displayed on the liquid crystal display 51 in correspondence with the shielded beam. In addition, when the check of the defective beam of the touch panel is designated, the voice ROM and the CGROM are also checked. In addition, there are two types of touch panel operation checks. When operation check 1 is specified, the touch panel is fully activated, a ticker “Please touch” is displayed on the liquid crystal display 51, and a touch operation is detected. The reception of a new command is prohibited until it is done. When the operation check 2 is designated, the entire touch panel is enabled, and a 64 divided screen is displayed on the liquid crystal display 51, and the color of the frame where the touch operation is detected is changed. Also in this case, reception of a new command is prohibited until a touch operation is detected.

  In addition, when the CPU 91a receives an inspection command for inspecting the backup of the bonus medium effect, the CPU 91a specifies the component and the operation mode specified by the inspection command, and the operation mode in which the liquid crystal display 51, the speaker, and the electrical component are specified Operate with.

  As described above, the CPU 91a identifies the component specified by the inspection command and its operation mode based on the reception of the inspection command, and operates the specified component in the specified operation mode. The operation status based on the inspection command sent from can be confirmed from the outside.

  Next, an example of an inspection situation using a command simulator will be described. In this example, a CGROM check, an audio ROM check, a liquid crystal display 51 check, a VRAM check, a speaker check, a touch panel check, and a bonus medium effect backup check are sequentially performed.

  First, when the first button operation is performed, the command simulator transmits an inspection command designating a defective beam check, a CGROM check, and an audio ROM check on the touch panel. As a result, when the CPU 91a receives the inspection command, it checks the defective beam of the touch panel, the ROM check of the CGROM, and the ROM check of the audio ROM sequentially, and displays the result on the liquid crystal display 51.

  After confirming the touch beam failure beam check and CGROM and voice ROM check results, when the second button operation is performed, an inspection command for designating the display of the color bar is transmitted, and the CPU 91a displays the color bar on the liquid crystal display. Display on the instrument 51.

  The command simulator sequentially transmits inspection commands for specifying the display of the image data A to D stored in the CGROM at intervals of 1 second after 3 seconds have passed since the inspection command for specifying the display of the color bar is transmitted, and the CPU 91a. Each time the inspection command is received, the display on the liquid crystal display 51 is updated to the designated image data. Further, the command simulator transmits an inspection command designating VRAM checking at intervals of 1 second, and the CPU 91a expands the VRAM and displays an image for VRAM checking on the liquid crystal display 51 each time the inspection command is received.

  Next, when the third button operation is performed, the command simulator transmits an inspection command for designating the output of the inspection sound from the left speaker, and the CPU 91a outputs the inspection sound from the left speaker. When the button operation is performed for the fourth time, the command simulator transmits an inspection command for designating the output of the inspection sound from the right speaker, and the CPU 91a outputs the inspection sound from the right speaker. When the fifth button operation is performed, the command simulator transmits an inspection command for designating the output of the inspection sound from the left and right speakers, and the CPU 91a outputs the inspection sound from the left and right speakers.

  Next, when the sixth button operation is performed, the command simulator transmits an inspection command for designating the touch panel check, and the CPU 91a validates the entire touch panel and displays a ticker message “Please touch” on the liquid crystal display 51. . When a touch operation is detected, “OK” is displayed. At this time, after receiving the inspection command, the CPU 91a prohibits reception of the command until a touch operation is detected.

  Next, when the button operation is performed for the seventh time, the command simulator transmits an inspection command for designating a backup check of the bonus medium effect, and the CPU 91a causes the liquid crystal display 51 to display a bonus medium screen, and the bonus BGM from the speaker. Is output, and the electric decoration part is operated in the operation mode in the bonus.

  In this state, when the power is temporarily shut off and then turned on again, the bonus medium effect is normally determined depending on whether or not the operation mode of the liquid crystal display 51, the speaker, and the electrical component has returned to the bonus mode. It can be confirmed whether or not it is backed up.

  Next, when the eighth button operation is performed, the command simulator transmits an initialization command, the CPU 91a initializes the data in the RAM 91c, and the operation test by the series of command simulators is completed.

  As described above, in this embodiment, after the CPU 91a receives the inspection command designating the touch panel check, the reception of the command is prohibited until the touch operation is detected, and before the touch operation is detected. Even if a button operation of the command simulator is performed and a subsequent inspection command is transmitted, the inspection command is not received, and the touch panel check may not be completed normally and the process may proceed to the next operation test. Absent.

  Next, various control contents executed by the CPU 41a of the main control unit 41 in the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS.

  When a reset signal is input from the reset circuit 49, the CPU 41a performs a startup process shown in the flowchart of FIG. Since the reset signal is a signal output when the power is turned on and when the operation of the main control unit 41 is stagnant, the activation process is performed when the CPU 41a is activated when the power is turned on and when the CPU 41a is activated due to a malfunction. This is a process to be performed.

  In the start-up process, first, the built-in device and peripheral IC (excluding disconnection monitoring IC 50), interrupt mode, stack pointer, etc. are initialized (Sa1), then the voltage drop signal detection data is acquired from the input port, and the voltage drop It is determined whether or not a signal is input, that is, whether or not the voltage is stable (Sa2), and when a voltage drop signal is input, other than whether or not a voltage drop signal is input Shifts to a loop process that does not perform any process.

  If it is determined in step Sa2 that the voltage drop signal is not input, the values of the I register and IY register are initialized (Sa3), and the states of the stop switch 36 and the automatic settlement switch 29 are acquired. Validity / invalidity of the stop function and automatic settlement function is set in a specific register of the CPU 41a (Sa4). By the initialization of the I register and the IY register, the address of the interrupt table to be referred to when an interrupt occurs is set in the I register, and the reference address for referring to the storage area of the RAM 41c is set in the IY register. . These values are fixed values and are always initialized at startup.

  Next, access to the RAM 41c is permitted (Sa5), and it is determined whether or not the setting key switch 37 is in an ON state (Sa6). If the setting key switch 37 is not in the ON state at step Sa6, the storage state of the disconnection flag is acquired from the disconnection monitoring IC 50 (Sa7), and it is determined whether the disconnection flag is stored (Sa8). If the electrical connection state between the game control board 40 and the inserted medal sensor 31 and the electrical connection state between the game control board 40 and the effect control board 90 are not released during a power failure, the disconnection flag is If the disconnection flag is stored, the state of electrical connection between the game control board 40 and the inserted medal sensor 31 or the game control board 40 and the effect control board 90 is not stored. Therefore, the error code indicating the disconnection abnormality is set in the register (Sa9), and all the storage areas of the RAM 41c except the stack area in use are stored. After executing initialization 0 (Sa10), the door set in the RAM 41c when commanding the transmission of the door command stored in the door command transmission buffer Command transmission request 2 is cleared and door command transmission request 1 for requesting transmission of a door command stored in the door command transmission buffer is set in RAM 41c (Sa11), interrupt is permitted (Sa12), The process proceeds to error processing shown in FIG.

  If the disconnection flag is not stored in step Sa8, the RAM parity of all storage areas (including the unused area and the unused stack area) of the RAM 41c is calculated (Sa13), and whether the RAM parity is 0 or not. Is determined (Sa14). If the power interruption interrupt processing (main) is normally performed, the RAM parity should be 0. If the RAM parity is not 0 in the step of Sa13, the data stored in the RAM 41c is not normal. Therefore, an error code indicating RAM abnormality is set in the register (Sa15), and after executing initialization 0 that initializes all the storage areas of the storage area of the RAM 41c except the used stack area (Sa10), the door The command transmission request 2 is cleared, the door command transmission request 1 is set (Sa11), the interruption is permitted (Sa12), and the process proceeds to the error processing shown in FIG.

  If the RAM parity is 0 in step Sa14, it is further determined whether or not the destructive diagnosis data is normal (Sa16). If power interruption interrupt processing (main) is performed normally, the data for destruction diagnosis should be set. If the data for destruction diagnosis is not normal in step Sa16 (data for destruction diagnosis is power interruption) Since the data in the RAM 41c is not normal even in cases other than 5A (H) stored at the time, an error code indicating RAM abnormality is set in the register (Sa15), and the used stack area in the storage area of the RAM 41c After executing initialization 0 that initializes all storage areas except for (Sa10), the door command transmission request 2 set in the RAM 41c is cleared and the door command transmission request 1 is set in the RAM 41c (Sa11). The interrupt is permitted (Sa12), and the process proceeds to the error process shown in FIG. When interrupt is permitted in step Sa12, the timer interrupt process is periodically executed. Accordingly, the door command is sub-controlled based on the door command transmission request 1 set in step Sa11. Transmitted to the unit 91.

  In the error processing, as shown in FIG. 33, the current display state of the game auxiliary display 12 is saved in the stack (Sb1), and the error code stored in the register is displayed on the game auxiliary display 12 (Sb2). .

  Next, the error code stored in the register is checked, and it is determined whether or not the error code is an error code indicating a disconnection error, a RAM error, or an abnormal winning error (Sb3). If the error code indicates an abnormal error or abnormal winning error, the process proceeds to a loop process in which neither process is performed.

  If it is determined in step Sb3 that the error code is not an error other than a disconnection error, a RAM error, and an abnormal winning error, it is determined whether an operation of the reset / setting switch 38 is detected. (Sb4) If the operation of the reset / setting switch 38 is not detected, it is further determined whether or not the operation of the reset switch 23 is detected (Sb5). If the operation of the reset switch 23 is not detected, Return to step Sb4. That is, the game waits in a state where the progress of the game is impossible until the operation of the reset / setting switch 38 or the reset switch 23 is detected.

  When the operation of the reset / setting switch 38 is detected in the step Sb4 or when the operation of the reset switch 23 is detected in the step Sb5, the error code stored in the register is cleared (Sb6 ), The display state of the game auxiliary display 12 is returned to the display state saved in the stack in step Sb1 (Sb7), and the process returns to the original process.

  As described above, in the error processing, if the error processing is other than the disconnection abnormality error, the RAM abnormality error, and the abnormal winning error, the error state can be canceled by operating the reset / setting switch 38 or the reset switch 23. However, if the error process is due to a disconnection error, a RAM error, or an abnormal winning error, the error state is canceled even if the reset / setting switch 38 or the reset switch 23 is operated, and the original state is restored. Never return.

  Returning to FIG. 32, if it is determined in step Sa16 that the destructive diagnosis data is normal, the data in the RAM 41c is normal, so the non-saved work, the unused area and the unused stack area in the RAM 41c are initialized. After performing initialization 3 (Sa17), the destruction diagnosis data is cleared (Sa18), and the value of the door monitoring timer for measuring the detection interval of the detection state of the door opening detection switch 25 and the command transmission delay time are counted. The delay counter value and the detection history of the detection signal from the door opening detection switch 25 are cleared (Sa19), the door command transmission request 2 is cleared, and the door command transmission request 1 is set (Sa20). Next, it is determined whether any special role is won in the state before the power interruption (Sa21). If any special role is elected in the state before the power interruption, Set power-on command to indicate winning (proceed to steps Sa22 and Sa19, and if no special role has been won in the state before power interruption, set power-on command to indicate non-winning special role (Sa23), the process proceeds to step Sa24.

  In step Sa24, each register is restored to the state before the power interruption, that is, the state stored in the stack, the interrupt is permitted (Sa25), and the process executed last before the power interruption is returned. When interrupt is permitted in step Sa25, the timer interrupt process is periodically executed. Accordingly, the power-on command set in step Sa17 or Sa18 is sent to the sub-control unit 91. Thereafter, the door command is transmitted to the sub-control unit 91 based on the door command transmission request 1 set in step Sa20.

  If the setting key switch 37 is in the ON state in step Sa6, it is determined whether or not the reset / setting switch 38 is in the ON state (Sa26). If the reset / setting switch 38 is in the ON state in the step of Sa26, after executing initialization 0 that initializes all the storage areas in the storage area of the RAM 41c except the used stack area (Sa27), then Sa29 Go to step. On the other hand, if the reset / setting switch 38 is OFF in the step of Sa26, after executing the initialization 1 for initializing all the storage areas of the storage area of the RAM 41c except the stop phase work and the stack area in use. (Sa28), the process proceeds to step Sa29.

  In step Sa29, the door command transmission request 2 is cleared and the door command transmission request 1 is set. Then, the process proceeds to step Sa30, and the value stored in the set value work (0 at this time) is corrected to 1. To do. Next, after setting the initialization command (Sa31), the interrupt is permitted (Sa32), and the setting change process shown in FIG. 34, ie, the setting change mode is entered (Sa33). When the interrupt is permitted in the step of Sa32, the timer interrupt process is periodically executed, and accordingly, the initialization command set in the step of Sa31 is transmitted to the sub-control unit 91, Thereafter, the door command is transmitted to the sub-control unit 91 based on the door command transmission request 1 set in step Sa29. After the setting change process in step Sa33 is completed, a setting end command is set (Sa34), and the process proceeds to the game process. The setting end command set in the step of Sa34 is transmitted to the sub-control unit 91 in the subsequent timer interrupt process.

  In the setting change process, as shown in FIG. 34, the setting value stored in the setting value work of the RAM 41c (the value of the setting value work is corrected to 1 before shifting to the setting changing process. Is read out (Sc1).

  Thereafter, the operation waits for detection of the operation of the reset / setting switch 38 and the start switch 7 (Sc2, Sc3). When the operation of the reset / setting switch 38 is detected in the step of Sc2, the setting value read in the step of Sc1. 1 is added (Sc4), and it is determined whether or not the set value after addition is 7, that is, whether or not the settable range is exceeded (Sc5). If the set value after addition is not 7, After returning to the detection waiting state for the operation of the reset / setting switch 38 and the start switch 7 in the steps Sc2 and Sc3 again, if the setting value after addition is 7 in the step Sc5, the setting value is corrected to 1 (Sc6). ), The process returns to the detection waiting state for the operation of the reset / setting switch 38 and the start switch 7 in the steps Sc2 and Sc3.

  When the operation of the start switch 7 is detected in the step of Sc3, the changed set value selected at that time is stored in the set value work of the RAM 41c and the set value is confirmed (Sc7). Wait until the setting key switch 37 is turned off (Sc8). If it is determined in step Sc8 that the setting key switch 37 is OFF, the process returns to the flowchart of FIG. 32 and the process proceeds to game processing.

  As described above, in the starting process, when the setting key switch 37 is not in the ON state, it is determined whether or not a disconnection flag is stored. If the disconnection flag is stored, the process proceeds to an error process. Further, it is determined whether or not the data stored in the RAM 41c is normal by determining whether or not the RAM parity is 0 and whether or not the data for destructive diagnosis is normal, and the data in the RAM 41c is normal. If not, the process proceeds to error processing. In the error processing due to the disconnection error error or the RAM error error, the error code indicating the disconnection error error or the RAM error error is displayed on the game auxiliary display 12 and then initialized so that it cannot return to the state before the power interruption. To initialize the RAM 41c and shift to a loop process in which no process is performed, so that the progress of the game is disabled. If the data in the RAM 41c is not normal, the interrupt is not permitted. Therefore, once the process proceeds to error processing due to a disconnection error or RAM error, the setting key switch 37 is activated and the interrupt is interrupted. Until interruption is permitted, the interruption interruption process (main) is not performed even if the interruption occurs. That is, the RAM adjustment data is not calculated and stored so that the RAM parity is newly set to 0 in the power interruption interrupt process (main), and the destruction diagnosis data is not newly set. Even if the CPU 41a is restarted, the game cannot be restarted even if the CPU 41a is restarted, except when the setting key switch 37 is started in the ON state.

  Once the process proceeds to error processing due to disconnection error or RAM error, the setting key switch 37 is activated and all the areas except the used stack area of the RAM 41c are initialized, and then the setting change process is performed. Until the setting value is newly selected and set by operating the reset / setting switch 38, the game cannot be progressed. In other words, in the state where the error processing due to the RAM abnormality error is started, the state in which the game cannot be progressed is canceled and the game is resumed on the condition that a new set value is selected and set by operating the reset / setting switch 38. It becomes possible to make it.

  In addition, when the setting key switch 37 is activated with only the ON state, initialization 1 for initializing all the storage areas of the storage area of the RAM 41c except the stop phase work and the used stack area is executed. After that, when the setting key mode 37 and the reset / setting switch 38 are both activated while the mode is changed to the setting change mode, all of the storage areas of the RAM 41c except the stack area in use are stored. After the initialization 0 for initializing the storage area is executed, the mode changes to the setting change mode, and only the setting key switch 37 is activated or the setting key switch 37 and the reset / setting are reset. Whether to initialize with both of the switches 38 being turned on, leaving data indicating the stop phase of the reel motors 32L, 32C, 32R depending on whether the switch 38 is activated. Or initialization including, it is possible to select a.

  In addition, regardless of whether or not to return to the state before power interruption after startup, by setting the door command transmission request 1, the door command is immediately transmitted after the power-on command or initialization command is transmitted. 91 is transmitted.

  FIG. 35 is a flowchart showing the control contents of the game process executed by the CPU 41a.

  In the game process, a BET process (Sd1), an internal lottery process (Sd2), a reel rotation process (Sd3), a winning determination process (Sd4), a payout process (Sd5), and a game end process (Sd6) are sequentially executed. When the end-time process ends, the process returns to the BET process again.

  In the BET process in the step of Sd1, the process waits in a state where the bet number can be set, sets a predetermined number of bets according to the gaming state, and executes a process of determining the bet number when the start switch 7 is operated. To do.

  In the internal lottery process in step Sd2, a random number for internal lottery is extracted simultaneously with the start of the game by the detection of the start switch 7 in step Sd1, and the winning of each above-described combination is permitted based on the extracted random number value. Process to determine whether or not. In this internal lottery process, a winning flag is set in the RAM 41c based on the respective lottery results.

  In the reel rotation process in the step of Sd3, the process of rotating each reel 2L, 2C, 2R and the operation of the corresponding reel 2L, 2C, 2R in response to the operation of the stop switch 8L, 8C, 8R detected by the player are detected. A process for stopping the rotation is executed.

  In the winning determination process in the step Sd4, when it is determined in the step Sd3 that the rotation of all the reels 2L, 2C, and 2R is stopped, the winning is determined according to the display result derived for each reel 2L, 2C, and 2R. A process of determining whether or not it has occurred is executed.

  In the payout process in step Sd5, when it is determined that a prize is generated in step Sd4, processing such as addition of credits and payout of medals is performed based on the number of payouts according to the win.

  In the game end process in the step of Sd6, a process of setting a gaming state in preparation for the next game is executed. Further, in the game end process, an RT process for performing control related to RT is also performed. At the end of the game end process, the door command transmission request 1 is set in the RAM 41c to request transmission of the door command.

  36 and 37 are flowcharts showing the control content of the BET process executed by the CPU 41a in the step Sd1.

  In the BET process, first, the value of the BET counter in which the value of the betting number is stored in the RAM 41c is cleared (Se1), and a prescribed number (3 regardless of the gaming state in this embodiment) is set in the RAM 41c. Then, based on whether or not the replay game flag indicating that it is a replay game is set in the RAM 41c, it is determined whether or not the game is a replay game (Se3).

  If it is determined in step Se3 that the game is a replay game, the value of the BET counter is incremented by 1 (Se4), the specified number of bets set in the RAM 41c is referred to, and the value of the BET counter is It is determined whether or not the number is a prescribed number (Se5), and if the value of the BET counter is not the prescribed number, the process returns to the step of Se4. The RAM 41c is set (Se6), and the process proceeds to Se10.

  If it is determined in step Se3 that the game is not a replay game, it is determined whether or not the full tank flag is set in the RAM 41c, that is, whether or not the full state of the overflow tank 35 has been determined before the previous game. If the full tank flag is set, an error code indicating a full tank error is set in the register (Se8), and the process proceeds to the error process shown in FIG.

  If the full flag is not set in the step of Se7, the setting before waiting for input is performed (Se9), and the process proceeds to the step of Se10. In the setting before waiting for insertion, the insertion disable flag set in the RAM 41c is cleared, the detection of the single BET switch 5, the MAXBET switch 6, the start switch 7, and the settlement switch 10 is enabled, and the insertion of a medal is detected. When this is done, the first insertion flag indicating that the medal is the first inserted medal after the previous game control is finished is set in the RAM 41c.

  In the step of Se10, it is determined whether or not a medal can be inserted based on whether or not the insertion prohibition flag is set in the RAM 41c. If it is determined in step Se10 that the medal can be inserted, the flow path switching solenoid 30 is turned on, and the medal can be inserted using the medal flow path as a path on the hopper tank side. (Se11), the process proceeds to step Se13, and if it is determined that the medal cannot be inserted, the flow path switching solenoid 30 is set to the off state, and the medal flow path is the path on the medal payout exit 9 side. As a result, the insertion of a new medal is prohibited (Se12), and the process proceeds to Step Se13.

  In step Se13, it is determined whether or not the inserted medal sensor 31 has detected passage of the inserted medal. If the passage of the inserted medal is not detected in the step of Se13, the process proceeds to the step of Se24. If the passage of the inserted medal is detected, the insertion of the medal is performed based on whether or not the insertion impossible flag is set in the RAM 41c. It is determined whether or not it is possible to enter a medal (Se14). If the medal cannot be inserted, the process proceeds to Step Se24.

  If the medal can be inserted in the step of Se14, it is determined whether or not the first insertion flag is set in the RAM 41c based on whether or not the first insertion flag is set in the RAM 41c (Se15). If it is not the first input after the end of the game control, the process proceeds to step Se19. If the first input is after the end of the game control, the first input flag is cleared (Se16), and whether or not the full sensor 35a is detected is determined. Determine (Se17). If the full tank sensor 35a is not detected in step Se17, the process proceeds to step Se19. If the full sensor 35a is detected, a full tank flag indicating the full tank state of the overflow tank 35 is set in the RAM 41c (Se18). The process proceeds to Se19.

  In step Se19, the specified number of bets set in the RAM 41c is referred to determine whether the value of the BET counter is a specified number. If the value of the BET counter is not the specified number, the value of the BET counter is changed. 1 is added (Se20), and the process returns to the step of Se10.

  If the value of the BET counter is a prescribed number in the step of Se19, 1 is added to the value of the credit counter in which the credit value is stored in the RAM 41c (Se21), and whether or not the value of the credit counter is 50 which is the upper limit value. If the value of the credit counter is not 50, the process returns to the step of Se10. If the value of the credit counter is 50, the insertion impossible flag is set in the RAM 41c (Se23), and the process returns to the step of Se10. .

  In step Se24, it is determined whether an operation of the start switch 7 is detected. If the operation of the start switch 7 is not detected in the step of Se24, the process proceeds to the step of Se28, and if the operation of the start switch 7 is detected, the specified number of bets set in the RAM 41c is referred to and the BET counter It is determined whether or not the value is a specified number (Se25).

  If the value of the BET counter is not a specified number in the step of Se25, the process returns to the step of Se10, and if the value of the BET counter is a specified number, the input impossible flag is set in the RAM 41c and the flow path switching solenoid 30 is turned off. The state is set, the medal flow path is set as a path on the medal payout exit 9 side, the insertion of a new medal is prohibited (Se26), and the setting at the start of the game is performed (Se27). In the setting at the start of the game, detection of operations of the single BET switch 5, the MAXBET switch 6, the start switch 7, and the checkout switch 10 is invalidated. Then, after the step of Se27, the BET process is terminated and the process returns to the flowchart of FIG. Along with this, setting of bets based on the insertion of medals, detection of the operation of the single BET switch 5 and the MAXBET switch 6 is prohibited, and the adjustment of credits based on the detection of the operation of the adjustment switch 10 is prohibited. It becomes.

  In step Se28, it is determined whether or not an operation of the single BET switch 5 has been detected. If the operation of the single BET switch 5 is not detected in the step of Se28, the process proceeds to the step of Se33, and if the operation of the single BET switch 5 is detected, the prescribed number of bets set in the RAM 41c is referred. Then, it is determined whether or not the value of the BET counter is a specified number (Se29). If the value of the BET counter is a specified number in the step of Se29, the process returns to the step of Se10. If the value of the BET counter is not the specified number, it is determined whether or not the value of the credit counter is 0 (Se30). If the counter value is 0, the process returns to step Se10. If the value of the credit counter is not 0 in the step of Se30, 1 is subtracted from the value of the credit counter (Se31), 1 is added to the value of the BET counter (Se32), and the process returns to the step of Se10.

  In step Se33, it is determined whether or not an operation of the MAXBET switch 6 is detected. If the operation of the MAXBET switch 6 is not detected in the step of Se33, the process proceeds to the step of Se38, and if the operation of the MAXBET switch 6 is detected, the specified number of bets set in the RAM 41c is referred to, and the BET counter It is determined whether or not the value is a specified number (Se34). If the value of the BET counter is the specified number in the step of Se34, the process returns to the step of Se10. If the value of the BET counter is not the specified number, it is determined whether the value of the credit counter is 0 (Se35), If the counter value is 0, the process returns to step Se10. If the value of the credit counter is not 0 in the step of Se35, 1 is subtracted from the value of the credit counter (Se36), 1 is added to the value of the BET counter (Se37), and the process returns to the step of Se34.

  In the step of Se38, it is determined whether or not the operation of the settlement switch 10 is detected. If the operation of the settlement switch 10 is not detected in the step of Se38, the process returns to the step of Se10. If the operation of the settlement switch 10 is detected, the operation is based on whether or not the replay game flag is set in the RAM 41c. It is determined whether or not the game is a replay game (Se39), and if the game is a replay game, the process returns to step Se10. If the game is not a replay game in the step of Se39, it is determined whether or not the value of the BET counter is 0 (Se40). If the value of the BET counter is 0, the process proceeds to the step of Se36, and the value of the BET counter is 0. Otherwise, a bet amount settlement flag indicating that the already set bet amount is to be settled is set in the RAM 41c (Se41), and the process proceeds to Step Se42. In the step of Se42, the hopper motor 34 is driven to pay out medals corresponding to the value stored in the credit counter or the BET counter, that is, medals stored as credits or medals used for setting the number of wagers. Checkout process is performed to control the return. Then, after the settlement process in the step of Se42, the input impossible flag set in the RAM 41c is cleared (Se43), and the process returns to the step of Se10.

  FIG. 38 is a flowchart showing the control contents of the internal lottery process executed by the CPU 41a in step Sd2.

  In the internal lottery process of this embodiment, first, a prescribed number that is a predetermined number of medals inserted according to the game state of the game is read (Sg1), and the process proceeds to step Sg2. The prescribed number is 3 in any gaming state.

  In step Sg2, it is determined whether or not the number of inserted medals, that is, the value of the BET counter matches the specified number read in step Sg1, and if the number of inserted medals matches the specified number, step Sg3 If the number of medals inserted does not match the specified number, the process proceeds to step Sg4.

  In step Sg3, it is determined whether or not the set value stored in the set value work of the RAM 41c is in the range of 1 to 6, that is, whether or not the set value stored in the set value work is an appropriate value. If the set value is in the range of 1-6, the process proceeds to step Sg5, and if not, the process proceeds to step Sg4.

  In the step of Sg4, since it is determined that the data stored in the RAM 41c is not normal, an error code indicating RAM abnormality is stored in the register, and the process proceeds to error processing shown in FIG.

  In step Sg5, random number acquisition processing for acquiring a random number used in the game is performed, and the process proceeds to step Sg6. In the random number acquisition process, a sampling command is output to the sampling circuit 43, the random number generated by the random number generation circuit 42 is latched, and the latched random number value is input from the I / O port 41d and extracted. A predetermined logical operation is performed on the extracted random number, and the result is obtained as a random number.

  In the step of Sg6, the state number (any of 0 to 5) is stored in the RAM 41c according to the game state of the game, and the process proceeds to the step of Sg7. In the step of Sg7, according to the gaming state indicated by the state number and the number of inserted medals (value of the BET counter), the first combination number to be drawn is stored in the RAM 41c, and the process proceeds to the step of Sg8. In the step of Sg7, when the state number is 0-2, that is, when no special combination is carried over in the normal gaming state, RT (1), RT (2), the first combination number to be drawn Is set to 0 (big bonus (1)) and the state number is either 3 or 4, that is, if any special role is carried over in the normal gaming state, RT (2) 14 (replay (1)) is set as the lot number subject to lottery, and when the state number is 5, that is, in the case of a regular bonus, 16 (red cherry) is initially set as the lot number subject to lottery. To do.

  In the step of Sg8, it is confirmed whether or not the state number is 5, that is, whether or not the regular bonus is being performed. If the state number is 5, that is, if the regular bonus is being performed, the process proceeds to the step of Sg10. . If the state number is not 5, the process proceeds to step Sg9.

  In the step of Sg9, it is confirmed whether or not the role number as the lottery target is 20, that is, whether or not the lottery for all the lottery targets in the gaming state other than the regular bonus has been completed. If YES, go to step Sg11. If not 20, the process proceeds to step Sg10.

  In the step of Sg10, it is confirmed whether or not the role number as a lottery target is 23, that is, whether or not the lottery for all the lottery targets in the regular bonus has been completed. Advances to step Sg11. If not 23, the process proceeds to step Sg12.

  In step Sg11, the general combination storing work in which the general combination winning flag is stored in the RAM 41c is cleared, the internal lottery process is terminated, and the process returns to the flowchart shown in FIG.

  In the step of Sg12, it is checked whether or not the common flag registered in the role-specific table is 1 in association with the processing target number, and if it is 1, the process proceeds to the step of Sg13. Advances to step Sg14.

  In step Sg13, the address of the storage area for the number of determination values in the ROM 41b registered in the role-specific table in association with the role number to be processed is read. Then, the number of judgment values stored at this address is acquired, and the process proceeds to step Sg15.

  In the step of Sg14, first, the setting value stored in the RAM 41c is read, and further, the number of determination values of the ROM 41b registered in the role-specific table is associated with the processing target number and the read setting value. Read the address of the area. Then, the number of judgment values stored at this address is acquired, and the process proceeds to step Sg15.

  In the step of Sg15, the number of determination values acquired in the step of Sg13 or Sg14 is added to the random number value for internal lottery, and the result of the addition is set as a new random number value. It is determined whether an overflow has occurred when added to the random number value. The occurrence of an overflow indicates that the winning combination corresponding to the processing target winning number has been won. If an overflow occurs, the process proceeds to step Sg18. If no overflow occurs, the process proceeds to step Sg17.

  In step Sg17, 1 is added to the role number to be processed, and the process returns to step Sg8.

  In the step of Sg18, it is confirmed whether or not the combination number is 0 to 13, that is, a combination number indicating a special combination or a combination including a special combination. If the combination number is 0 to 13, the step of Sg19 is performed. If the combination number is not 0 to 13, the process proceeds to step Sg20.

  In the step of Sg19, a special combination winning flag corresponding to the combination number to be processed is set in the special combination storing work in which the special combination winning flag is stored in the RAM 41c. In the Sg20 step, the general combination storing work of the RAM 41c is set. In addition, the winning flag of the general combination corresponding to the processing target combination number is set, the internal lottery process is terminated, and the process returns to the flowchart shown in FIG. Note that, in the step of Sg20, when the combination number is 0-4, the general combination is not won, so in this case, the general combination storing work in the RAM 41c is cleared.

  FIG. 39 is a flowchart showing the control contents of the reel rotation process executed by the CPU 41a in step Sd3.

  In the reel rotation process, first, it is determined whether or not a wait time (about 4.1 seconds in this embodiment) has elapsed since the reel rotation start time of the previous game (Si1), and the wait time must have elapsed. For example, it waits until the wait time elapses.

  If the wait time has elapsed in the Si1 step, a new wait time is set (Si2).

  Next, the setting at the start of the rotation of the reel motor is performed, and the rotation of the reel is started (Si3). Then, a sliding frame number setting process for setting the number of sliding frames of the virtual sliding frame table for each rotating reel is performed (Si4), and a setting at the time of completion of stop preparation is performed (Si5). As a result, the stop operation can be validated, and then the stop operation becomes valid when a constant-speed rotation of the reel is detected in the processing at the time of passing through the origin of a timer interrupt process described later.

  Next, it is determined whether or not an operation of any one of the stop switches 8L, 8C and 8R is detected (Si6). If no operation of any stop switch is detected, a reel rotation error (over a certain period of time). Then, it is determined whether or not an error determined when the reel reference position is not detected by the reel sensor 33 (Si7). If no reel rotation error has occurred, an insertion error (medal insertion) is further performed. Whether or not a medal insertion was detected during a period other than the permitted period, and whether or not a payout error (medal payout was detected during a period other than the permitted period) It is determined whether or not an error has occurred (Si8, Si9), and any error occurs in steps Si7 to Si9. If it is not determined, the flow returns to step Si6.

  Further, when it is determined that a loading error has occurred in the Si8 step, or when a dispensing error is determined in the Si9 step, an error code indicating a loading / dispensing error during reel rotation is set in the register (Si10 ), And shifts to the error processing shown in FIG. 33 (Si11). When the error is released, the process returns to the Si6 step again.

  If it is determined in step Si7 that a reel rotation error has occurred, an error code indicating a reel rotation error is set in the register (Si12), and the process proceeds to error processing shown in FIG. 33 (Si13). Along with this, the rotation of the reels is also temporarily stopped. When the error is released, the process returns to the Si3 step again and the reel rotation is resumed.

  If any stop switch operation is detected in step Si6, the number of steps from the reel reference position at that time (the number of steps to be the stop operation position) in the reel motor corresponding to the stop switch is calculated. After obtaining and setting the workpiece corresponding to the stop reel (Si14), the process waits until the rotation of the reel corresponding to the stop operation stops (Si15).

  When the rotation of the reels corresponding to the stop operation stops, it is determined whether or not all the reels have stopped (Si16). If all the reels have not stopped, the process returns to the Si4 step, and all the reels are If it has stopped, the reel rotation process is terminated and the process returns to the flowchart of FIG.

  As described above, in the reel rotation processing, after the rotation of the reels 2L, 2C, and 2R is started, the rotation of the reels for which the stop operation has not been detected is continued until the operation of the stop switches 8L, 8C, and 8R is detected. Then, on the condition that the operation of the stop switches 8L, 8C, and 8R is detected, control is performed to stop the display result on the corresponding reel. Even if the reel rotation temporarily stops due to the occurrence of a reel rotation error, the stop operation is still detected until the operation of the stop switches 8L, 8C, and 8R is detected after the reel rotation is restarted. Control is performed to stop the display result of the corresponding reels on the condition that the rotation of the reels that have not been continued is continued and the operation of the stop switches 8L, 8C, and 8R is detected.

  FIG. 40 is a flowchart showing the control contents of the sliding frame number setting process executed by the CPU 41a in the step of Si4.

  First, in the sliding frame number setting process, it is determined whether or not it is the first stop in the step of Si101, that is, whether or not all the reels are rotating, and if it is the first stop, the process proceeds to the step of Si103. If not, the process proceeds to step Si102.

  In step S102, whether stop control is performed by control based on the result of the internal lottery, that is, the result of the internal lottery is replay (1), replay (2), bell, big bonus (1) to (3 ) + Replay (1), any of big bonuses (1) to (3) + replay (2), big bonus (4), big bonus (5), and control control If the stop control is not performed by the control, the process proceeds to step Si103. If the stop control is performed by the control control, the process proceeds to step Si106.

  In step Si103, the table index is referred to, the stop control table corresponding to the result of the internal lottery and the stop position of the stopped reel is selected, the selected stop control table is expanded, and the number of sliding frames is displayed in the virtual sliding frame table. After performing the stop control table expansion process for storing the process, the process proceeds to step Si104.

  In the step of Si104, whether stop control is performed by table + control control based on the result of internal lottery, that is, the result of internal lottery is any cherry, bell + any cherry, big bonus (1), big Bonus (1) + any cherry, big bonus (2), big bonus (2) + any cherry, big bonus (3), big bonus (3) + any cherry, big bonus (1) ~ It is determined whether or not any of (3) + bell, and when stop control is not performed by table + control control, the sliding frame number setting process is terminated as it is, and the process returns to the flowchart of FIG. When stop control is performed by control, the process proceeds to step Si105.

  In step S105, for each stop operation position, a search is made for a stop position according to the number of sliding frames, and the priority of the searched stop position and the priority of the stopping position based on the number of sliding frames stored in the virtual sliding frame table If the priority of the searched stop position is higher, after performing the sliding frame number updating process for updating the sliding frame number of the virtual sliding frame table, the sliding frame number setting process is terminated, Returning to the flowchart of FIG.

  In the step of Si106, for each stop operation position, the stop position where the winning combination is aligned on the winning line is searched from the stop positions based on the number of sliding frames of 0 to 4, and the number of sliding frames that become the stop position obtained by the search is virtually slipped. After performing the stop position search process stored in the frame table, the sliding frame number setting process is terminated, and the process returns to the flowchart of FIG.

  FIG. 41 is a flowchart showing the control contents of the sliding frame number update process executed by the CPU 41a in the step of Si105.

  First, in the sliding frame number update process, a reel to be processed is set in the step of Si201. That is, among the rotating reels, a reel that has not been processed yet is set as a target reel, and the process proceeds to step Si202.

  In the step of Si202, whether or not an abnormal winning occurs when the stop position pointer indicating the stop position to be processed is set to 0 and the process proceeds to the step of Si203 to reach the stop position to be processed. The virtual winning determination is performed, and the process proceeds to step Si204 to determine whether or not the abnormal winning is determined as a result of the virtual winning determination.

  If it is not an abnormal winning in the step of Si204, the process proceeds to the step of Si205, and further prohibition position determination is performed to determine whether or not the stop prohibition position is reached, and the process proceeds to step of Si206. It is determined whether or not.

  If it is not the stop prohibition position in the step of Si206, the process proceeds to the step of Si208, and if it is determined that the abnormal winning is obtained in the step of Si204, or if it is determined that the stop prohibition position is determined in the step of Si206, the step of Si207 Then, after setting a stop prohibition position flag indicating a stop prohibition position corresponding to the stop position indicated by the stop position pointer, the process proceeds to step Si208.

  In the step of Si208, the stop position pointer is advanced by 1 and the process proceeds to the step of Si209 to determine whether or not the stop position pointer is 21. If the stop position pointer is not 22, the process returns to the step of Si203 to stop the stop position pointer. If the pointer is 21, that is, it is determined that the determination for all the area numbers has been completed, the process proceeds to step Si210.

  In the step of Si210, the stop operation position pointer indicating the stop operation position to be processed is set to 0, and the process proceeds to the step of Si211 so that the corresponding reel (reel set as the target reel) in the virtual sliding frame number table is reached. ) To obtain one slip frame number in the order (see FIG. 19A) corresponding to the number of slide frames stored corresponding to the corresponding stop operation position (region number indicated by the stop operation position pointer). It progresses to the step of Si212.

  In step Si212, a stop position based on the number of sliding frames acquired in Si211 is acquired, and the process proceeds to step Si213 to determine whether the acquired stop position is a stop prohibition position, that is, whether a stop prohibition position flag is set. To do.

  If it is determined at the Si 213 step that the stop is prohibited, the process returns to the Si 211 step. If it is determined that the position is not the stop prohibited position, the process proceeds to the Si 214 step.

  In the step of Si214, the sliding symbols stored corresponding to the corresponding stop operation position (area number indicated by the stop operation position pointer) of the corresponding reel (reel set as the target reel) in the virtual sliding frame number table. The priority of the stop position based on the number and the priority of the stop position acquired in the step of Si212 are compared based on the relationship shown in FIG. 19B, and the process proceeds to the step of Si215.

  In the Si215 step, is the priority of the stop position acquired in the Si212 step as the comparison result in the Si214 step higher than the stop position priority based on the number of sliding frames stored in the virtual sliding frame number table? If it is not higher than the priority of the stop position based on the number of sliding frames stored in the virtual sliding frame number table (including the case where the priority is the same), the process proceeds to step Si217, and the virtual sliding frame number table If it is higher than the priority of the stop position based on the number of sliding frames stored in, the process proceeds to step Si216.

  In the step of Si216, the sliding symbols stored corresponding to the corresponding stop operation position (area number indicated by the stop operation position pointer) of the corresponding reel (reel set as the target reel) in the virtual sliding frame number table. The number is updated to the number of sliding frames at the stop position determined to have higher priority than that, and the process proceeds to step Si218.

  In the step of Si217, it is determined whether or not the stop positions have been compared for all the sliding pieces of 0 to 4, and if the comparison of the stopping positions has been completed for all of the sliding pieces of 0 to 4, the step of Si218 is completed. Proceed to the step, and if the comparison of the stop positions has not been completed for all the sliding frames from 0 to 4, the process returns to the step of Si211.

  In the step of Si218, the stop operation position pointer is advanced by 1 and the process proceeds to the step of Si219 to determine whether or not the stop operation position pointer is 22. If the stop operation position pointer is not 21, the process returns to the step of Si211. If the stop operation position pointer is 21, that is, if it is determined that all the region numbers 0 to 20 have been determined, the process proceeds to step Si220.

  In the step of Si220, it is determined whether or not there is an unprocessed rotating reel. If there is an unprocessed rotating reel, the process returns to the step of Si201, and if there is no unprocessed rotating reel, the number of sliding frames is updated. To return to the flowchart shown in FIG.

  FIG. 42 is a flowchart showing the control contents of the stop position search process executed by the CPU 41a in the step of Si106.

  First, in the stop position search process, a reel to be processed is set in step Si301. That is, among the rotating reels, a reel that has not yet been processed is set as a target reel, and the process proceeds to step Si302.

  In the step of Si302, a stop position pointer indicating a stop position to be processed is set to 0, and whether or not an abnormal winning occurs when the process proceeds to the step of Si303 and reaches the stop position to be processed. The virtual winning determination is performed, and the process proceeds to step S304 to determine whether the result of the virtual winning determination is an abnormal winning.

  If it is not an abnormal winning in the step of Si304, the process proceeds to the step of Si305, and further prohibition position determination is performed to determine whether or not the stop prohibition position is reached. It is determined whether or not.

  If it is not the stop prohibition position in the step of Si306, the process proceeds to the step of Si308, and if it is determined that the abnormal winning is obtained in the step of Si304, or if it is determined that the stop prohibition position is set in the step of Si306, the step of Si307 is performed. Then, after setting a stop prohibition position flag indicating a stop prohibition position corresponding to the stop position indicated by the stop position pointer, the process proceeds to step Si308.

  In the step of Si308, the stop position pointer is advanced by 1 and the process proceeds to the step of Si309 to determine whether or not the stop position pointer is 21, and if the stop position pointer is not 21, the process returns to the step of Si303 to stop. If it is determined that the pointer is 21, that is, the determination for all the area numbers has been completed, the process proceeds to step S310.

  In the step of Si310, the stop operation position pointer indicating the stop operation position to be processed is set to 0, and the process proceeds to the step of Si311 and the order corresponding to the winning combination (bell, big bonus (4), big bonus ( In the case of 5), the number of sliding frames is 4, 0, 3, 1, 2 in the order, replay (1), in the case of replay (2), the number of sliding frames is 0, 1, 2, 3, 4 The number of sliding frames is acquired in the order of () and the process proceeds to step S312.

  In step Si312, the stop position based on the number of sliding frames acquired in Si311 is acquired, and the process proceeds to step Si313 to determine whether the acquired stop position is a stop prohibition position, that is, whether a stop prohibition position flag is set. To do.

  If it is determined in the Si 313 step that the position is the stop prohibited position, the process returns to the Si 311 step. If it is determined that the position is not the stop prohibited position, the process proceeds to the Si 314 step.

  In the step of Si314, it is determined whether or not the winning combination is aligned on the winning line when the acquired stop position is reached. If the winning combination is not aligned on the winning line, the process proceeds to the step of Si315, and the winning line is selected on the winning line. If it is determined that the combination is complete, the process proceeds to step Si316.

  In the step of Si315, it is determined whether or not the stop positions are compared for all the sliding frame numbers from 0 to 4, and if the comparison of the stopping positions is completed for all the sliding frame numbers from 0 to 4, the process of Si316 is completed. Proceed to the step, and if the comparison of the stop positions is not completed for all the sliding frames from 0 to 4, the process returns to the Si311 step.

  In the step of Si316, last in the step of Si312 corresponding to the corresponding stop operation position (area number indicated by the stop operation position pointer) of the corresponding reel (reel set as the target reel) in the virtual sliding frame number table. The acquired number of sliding frames at the stop position is stored, and the process proceeds to step Si317. In addition, when the number of sliding symbols that become the stop position acquired last is the stop prohibiting position, the number of sliding symbols that are not the stopping prohibition position among the number of sliding symbols that become the stopping position acquired before that is stored. .

  In the Si317 step, the stop operation position pointer is advanced by 1 and the process proceeds to the Si318 step to determine whether or not the stop operation position pointer is 21, and if the stop operation position pointer is not 21, the process returns to the Si311 step. If the stop operation position pointer is 21, that is, if it is determined that all the region numbers 0 to 20 have been determined, the process proceeds to step Si319.

  In step S319, it is determined whether there is an unprocessed rotating reel. If there is an unprocessed rotating reel, the process returns to step Si301. If there is no unprocessed rotating reel, the number of sliding frames is updated. To return to the flowchart shown in FIG.

  FIG. 43 is a flowchart showing the control content of the RT process executed by the CPU 41a in the game end process of Sd6.

  In the RT process, first, it is determined whether or not RT (1) is in the RAM 41c based on whether or not the RT (1) flag is set (Sj1). Proceed to step. If RT (1) is in the step of Sj1, 1 is subtracted from the value of the RT game number counter assigned to the RAM 41c to store the number of remaining RT games (Sj2), and the remaining number of RT games is 0. That is, it is determined whether or not the value of the RT game number counter is 0 (Sj3). If the number of remaining RT games is not 0 in step Sj3, the process proceeds to step Sj4, and it is determined whether or not any special role has been won. If any special role has not been won, the process proceeds to step Sj7. . When the number of remaining RT games is 0 in the step Sj3 and when any special combination is won in the step Sj4, the RT (1) flag set in the RAM 41c is cleared (Sj5). The remaining number of RT games is cleared (Sj6), RT (1) is terminated, and the process proceeds to step Sj7.

  In step Sj7, it is determined whether or not RT (2) is in progress based on whether or not the RT (2) flag is set in the RAM 41c. If not in RT (2), the process proceeds to step Sj15. If RT (2) is in step Sj7, the RT game number counter value is decremented by 1 (Sj8), and it is determined whether the remaining RT game number is 0, that is, whether the RT game number counter value is 0. (Sj9). If the number of remaining RT games is not 0 in step Sj9, the process proceeds to step Sj10 to determine whether or not any special role has been won. If any special role has not been won, the process proceeds to step Sj11. . In the step of Sj11, it is determined whether or not any fallen combination has won, and if any fallen combination has won, the process proceeds to the step of Sj12, and if any fallen combination has not won, the step of Sj15 Proceed to In step Sj12, it is determined whether or not any special combination is won. If any special combination is selected, the process proceeds to step Sj15. If the number of remaining RT games is 0 in the step Sj9, if any special combination wins in the step Sj10, any fallen combination wins in the step Sj11, and any in the step Sj12 If the special role is not won, the RT (2) medium flag set in the RAM 41c is cleared (Sj13), the remaining RT game number is cleared (Sj14), and RT (2) is terminated. Proceed to step Sj15.

  In step Sj15, it is determined whether or not replay (2) has won. If replay (2) has not won, the process proceeds to step Sj21. If replay (2) has won, any special It is determined whether or not the winning combination is won (Sj16). If any special combination is won in step Sj16, the process proceeds to step Sj21. If any special combination is not selected, the process proceeds to step Sj17. In step Sj17, it is determined whether or not RT (1) is in progress based on whether or not the RT (1) flag is set in the RAM 41c. If not in RT (1), the process proceeds to step Sj19. If it is (1), the RT (1) flag is cleared (Sj18), and the process proceeds to Sj19. In step Sj19, the RT game number counter is set to 200, the flag in RT (2) is set in the RAM 41c (Sj20), the game state is shifted to RT (2), and then the process proceeds to step Sj21.

  In step Sj21, it is determined whether or not the game is an end game of big bonus (1). If it is not an end game of big bonus (1), the process proceeds to step Sj24, and if it is an end game of big bonus (1), The RT game number counter is set to 50 (Sj22), the RT (1) in-progress flag is set to the RAM 41c (Sj23), the game state is shifted to RT (1), and then the process proceeds to step Sj24.

  In the step of Sj24, it is determined whether or not the big bonus (2) end game, and if it is not the big bonus (2) end game, the RT process is ended and the process returns to the original process, and the big bonus (2) If the game is an end game, the RT game number counter is set to 20 (Sj25), the RT (1) flag is set to the RAM 41c (Sj26), the game state is shifted to RT (1), and the RT process is performed. To return to the original process.

  44 and 45 are flowcharts showing the control contents of the timer interrupt process (main) executed by the CPU 41a in response to the occurrence of the interrupt 3, that is, interrupting the start process or the game process at intervals of 0.56 ms. .

  In the timer interruption process, first, interruption is prohibited (Sk1). That is, the execution of another interrupt process during the execution of the timer interrupt process is prohibited. Then, after saving the register in use to the stack area (Sk2), port input processing for inputting detection data of various switches from the input port is performed (Sk3).

  Next, the branch counter for identifying the timer interrupt to be executed in the timer interrupt process is advanced by 1 from the four types of timer interrupts 1 to 4 (Sk4). In the step of Sk4, 1 is added when the branch counter value is 0 to 2, and is updated to 0 when the counter value is 3. That is, the branch counter value loops in the order of 0 → 1 → 2 → 3 → 0... Each time the timer interrupt process is executed.

  Next, the branch counter value is referenced to determine whether it is 2 or 3, that is, timer interrupt 3 or timer interrupt 4 (Sk5). If it is not timer interrupt 3 or timer interrupt 4, that is, timer interrupt In the case of 1 or timer interrupt 2, it is checked whether the reel motors 32L, 32C, 32R are started or whether they are rotating at a constant speed, and whether the reel motors 32L, 32C, 32R are started or are rotating at a constant speed. For example, the motor phase signal output process for outputting the phase signal data changed in the motor step process of Sk9 described later and the phase signal data changed in the final stop process of Sk25 described later is executed (Sk6).

  Next, referring to the branch counter value, it is determined whether or not it is 1, that is, timer interrupt 2 (Sk7). If it is not timer interrupt 2, that is, timer interrupt 1, reel motor Reel starting process (Sk8) for controlling the step time interval when starting 32L, 32C, 32R, motor step process (Sk9) for changing phase signal data of the reel motors 32L, 32C, 32R, reel motors 32L, 32C After the stop of 32R, the motor phase signal standby process (Sk10) for changing the phase signal to one-phase excitation after a certain time has been sequentially executed, and then the register saved in the stack area at Sk2 is restored (Sk21). The interrupt prohibited in the step is permitted (Sk22), and the process returns to the state before the interrupt.

  Further, in the case of timer interrupt 2 in the step of Sk7, LED dynamic display processing (Sk11) for dynamically lighting various indicators, and output processing of control signals and the like for outputting data such as lighting signals of various LEDs to the output port (Sk12), random number update process for updating various software random numbers (Sk13), time counter update process for updating various time counters (Sk14), monitoring of the detection state of the door opening detection switch 25, door command transmission request, transmission command The door monitoring process (Sk15) for performing the process, the command transmission process (Sk16) for transmitting the command stored in the normal command transmission buffer or the door command transmission buffer to the sub-control unit 91, and updating the external output signal After executing the external output signal update process (Sk17) sequentially, Returning the registers saved in the stack area Te (SK21), allow interruption prohibited at step Sk1 (SK22), return to the process before the interrupt process.

  If it is timer interrupt 3 or timer interrupt 4 in the step of Sk5, it is further determined by referring to the counter value for branching whether it is 3, that is, timer interrupt 4 (Sk18). If it is not interrupt 4, that is, if it is timer interrupt 3, the passing of the origin of the rotating reels 2L, 2C, 2R (pass of the reel reference position) is checked, and the occurrence of a reel rotation error is detected and stopped. Check if the preparation is complete (whether the stop preparation completion code is set). If the stop preparation is complete and the motor is rotating at a constant speed, operate the stop switch corresponding to the rotating reel. Passing origin process (Sk19) to be validated, switch input determination process (Sk20) for determining whether or not these various switches satisfy the detection condition based on detection signals from various switches After sequentially executed, restores the registers saved in the stack area in Sk2 (SK21), allow interruption prohibited at step Sk1 (SK22), return to the process before the interrupt process.

  If the timer interrupt is 4 in the step of Sk18, when the stop operation position is stored in the work of the stop reel in accordance with detection of the stop switches 8L, 8C, 8R or automatic stop control, the work of the stop reel The stop switch position is determined from the stop operation position stored in, and the stop switch process (Sk23) for calculating the number of steps after which the stop should be performed, and the number of steps until the stop calculated by the stop switch process is counted to stop After the stop process (Sk24) for starting the brake by the two-phase excitation when it is time to start, the final stop process (Sk25) for the three-phase excitation after a certain time from the start of the brake in the stop process is sequentially executed, and then in Sk2. Restore the registers saved in the stack area (Sk21), and enable the interrupts that were prohibited in the Sk1 step ( k22), returns to the interrupt before processing.

  FIG. 46 is a flowchart showing the control content of the stop switch process executed by the CPU 41a in the timer interrupt 4 of the timer interrupt process described above.

  In the stop switch process, first, for all reels in the order of left, middle, and right, whether or not a stop operation position is set for the work on the corresponding reel, that is, a stop operation has been detected or stopped by automatic stop. (Sk101, Sk102). If no stop operation has been detected for all reels, or if no stop has been instructed, the stop switch process is terminated and the process returns to the flowchart of FIG.

  In addition, if any stop operation of the reel is detected in the step of Sk101 or if the stop of the reel is instructed, the process proceeds to the step of Sk103.

  In the step of Sk103, the virtual sliding frame table corresponding to the reel is referred to, and the region number serving as the stop position is specified from the region number including the step number of the stop operation position set for the work corresponding to the stop reel. Then, the process proceeds to step Sk104, the number of steps required from the current reel reference position to the stop position specified in step Sk103 is calculated, and after setting the calculated number of steps, the stop switch process is terminated. Returning to the flowchart of FIG.

  FIG. 47 is a flowchart showing the control contents of the door monitoring process executed by the CPU 41a in the timer interrupt 2 of the timer interrupt process described above.

  In the door monitoring process, first, a history of the input state of the door opening detection switch 25 (a value obtained by continuing to logically OR the determination state of the positive detection signal of the door opening detection switch 25 acquired in the port input process for about 100 ms). The door sensor history is updated (Sk201). That is, a logical sum of the positive detection signal detection state of the door opening detection switch 25 and the door sensor history is taken as a new door sensor history.

  Next, it is determined whether or not the door monitoring timer value is 0, that is, whether or not about 100 ms has elapsed since the previous monitoring (Sk202). If the door monitoring timer value is not 0, the door monitoring timer value is set. 1 is subtracted (Sk203), the door monitoring process is terminated, and the process returns to the flowchart of FIG.

  If the value of the door monitoring timer is 0 in the step of Sk202, whether the door command transmission request 2 is set, that is, in order to give priority to the transmission of the power-on command or the initialization command at the time of activation, It is determined whether or not the transmission is waiting (Sk204). If the door command transmission request 2 is set, the door monitoring process is terminated and the process returns to the flowchart of FIG. In step S204, it is determined whether or not the door command transmission request 2 is set. When the door command transmission request 2 is set, the door monitoring process is terminated, whereby the value of the door command transmission buffer is set. While not waiting for transmission by the power-on command or initialization command, the value of the door command transmission buffer, that is, the door command indicating the detection state of the first door opening detection switch 25 after activation is overwritten. Not to be.

  If the door command transmission request 2 is not set in the step of Sk204, 44 is set as the value of the door monitoring timer (Sk205), and a new time measurement of 100 ms is started. After the door sensor history is acquired in the register and the door sensor history in the RAM 41c is cleared (Sk206), the door open detection switch 25 indicated by the door sensor history acquired in the register and the door stored in the door command transmission buffer are stored. The detection state of the door opening detection switch 25 indicated by the command is compared, and it is determined whether or not there is a change in the detection state of the door opening detection switch 25 (Sk207).

  If there is no change in the detection state of the door opening detection switch 25 in the step of Sk207, whether or not the door command transmission request 1 is set, that is, whether or not the door command transmission is requested with the activation of the CPU 41a or the end of the game. If the door command transmission request 1 is not set, the door monitoring process is terminated and the process returns to the flowchart of FIG.

  When there is a change in the detection state of the door opening detection switch 25 in the step of Sk207, or when the door command transmission request 1 is set in the step of Sk208, the door command transmission request is cleared and the door command transmission request 2 is set (Sk209), and the door command based on the door sensor history (detected state of the door open detection switch 25 after the change) acquired in the register is stored in the door command transmission buffer (Sk210), so that the door after the change After commanding the command transmission, the door monitoring process is terminated and the process returns to the flowchart of FIG.

  FIG. 48 is a flowchart showing the control contents of the command transmission process executed by the CPU 41a in the timer interrupt 2 of the timer interrupt process described above.

  In the command transmission process, first, it is determined whether or not transmission delay of the power-on command or initialization command is in progress (Sk301), and if transmission delay of the power-on command or initialization command is in progress, the process proceeds to Step Sk308, If it is not during the transmission delay of the input command or the initialization command, it is determined whether or not an untransmitted power-on command or initialization command is stored in the normal command transmission buffer (Sk302).

  If an untransmitted power-on command or initialization command is stored in the normal command transmission buffer in step Sk302, the process proceeds to step Sk307, where an untransmitted power-on command or initialization command is used for normal command transmission. If it is not stored in the buffer, it is determined whether or not the transmission of the normal command is being delayed (Sk303).

  If the transmission of the normal command is delayed in the step of Sk303, the process proceeds to the step of Sk308. If the transmission of the normal command is not delayed, it is determined whether or not the transmission of the door command is delayed (Sk304). If it is delayed, the process proceeds to step Sk308. If the door command transmission is not delayed, it is determined whether the door command transmission request 2 is set, that is, whether door command transmission is instructed (Sk305). .

  If the door command transmission request 2 is not set in the step of Sk305, it is determined whether or not an untransmitted normal command is stored in the normal command transmission buffer (Sk306), and the untransmitted normal command is a normal command. If it is stored in the transmission buffer, the process proceeds to step Sk307. If an untransmitted normal command is not stored in the normal command transmission buffer, the command transmission process is terminated, and the flowchart shown in FIG. Return to.

  In step Sk307, a command delay random value (0 to 17) is acquired, stored in the delay counter, and the process proceeds to step Sk308.

  In step Sk308, after 1 is subtracted from the delay counter value, the process proceeds to step Sk309, where it is determined whether the delay counter value is 0. If the delay counter value is not 0, the command transmission process is terminated. Returning to the flowchart shown in FIG.

  If the delay counter value is 0 in the step of Sk309, it is determined whether or not the door command is transmitted (S310). If the door command is transmitted, the door command transmission request 2 is cleared and the door command is transmitted. The trust buffer address is set (Sk311), and the process proceeds to the step of Sk315. After the door command transmission request 2 is set, the door command transmission request 2 is not cleared until it is set in the door monitoring process and immediately before the door command associated with the setting of the door command transmission request 2 is transmitted. While waiting for door command transmission by the power-on command or initialization command, the value of the door command transmission buffer, that is, the door command indicating the detection state of the first door opening detection switch 25 after being activated may be overwritten. Absent.

  If it is not at the time of sending a door command in the step of Sk310, it is determined whether or not a power-on command or initialization command is sent (Sk312). If it is at the time of sending a power-on command or initialization command, a normal command is sent. The address where the power-on command or initialization command of the trusted buffer is stored is set (Sk313), and the process proceeds to Step Sk315.

  If it is not at the time of sending the power-on command or the initialization command at the step of Sk312, that is, at the time of sending the normal command, the address indicated by the transmission pointer of the normal command transmission buffer is set (Sk314), and the step of Sk315 is set. move on.

  In the step of Sk315, the command stored in the address set in the steps of Sk311, Sk313, Sk314 is read out and transmitted to the sub-control unit 91, the command transmission process is terminated, and the flowchart shown in FIG. Return.

  FIG. 49 shows a power interruption interrupt process (main) executed by the CPU 41a in response to the occurrence of the interrupt 2, that is, when a voltage drop signal from the power interruption detection circuit 48 is input, interrupting the execution process or the game process. It is a flowchart which shows the control content of.

  In the power interruption interruption process (main), first, interruption is prohibited (Sm1). That is, other interrupt processing is prohibited from being executed at the start of the power interruption interrupt processing (main). Next, all registers that may be in use are saved in the stack area (Sm2). Note that the values of the I register and IY register described above are used, but are not saved here because the same fixed value is always set with the initialization at the time of startup.

  Next, the detection data of the voltage drop signal is acquired from the input port, and it is determined whether or not the voltage drop signal is input (Sm3). At this time, if the voltage drop signal is not inputted, the register saved in the stack area in Sm2 is restored (Sm4), the interrupt prohibited in the step of Sm1 is permitted (Sm5), and the process before the interrupt is performed. Return.

  If a voltage drop signal is input in step Sm3, destruction diagnosis data (5A (H) in this embodiment) is set (Sm6), and all output ports are initialized (Sm7). . Next, RAM parity adjustment data is calculated and set so that the exclusive OR of all storage areas (including unused areas and unused stack areas) of the RAM 41c becomes 0 (Sm8), and access to the RAM 41c is performed. It is prohibited (Sm9).

  Then, except for the determination of whether or not the voltage drop signal is input (Sm10, where Sm10 is the same process as Sm3), a loop process in which no process is performed is entered. That is, when the voltage decreases as it is, the operation is stopped internally. Therefore, the CPU 41a reliably stops operation when the power is interrupted. Further, in this loop processing, when the voltage recovers and the voltage drop signal is not input, the above-described startup processing is executed, and if the RAM parity is 0 and the destructive diagnosis data is normal, the original processing is performed. It will return to.

  In this embodiment, after the access to the RAM 41c is prohibited, the output state of the voltage drop signal is monitored, and when the voltage drop signal is not input, it is determined that the voltage is restored, and the process proceeds to the startup process. However, no processing is performed in the loop processing, and the voltage is recovered while the loop processing is being performed, and the process proceeds to the start-up processing based on the input of the reset signal from the reset circuit 49. You may make it do.

  Next, a startup process (sub) executed by the CPU 91a of the sub control unit 91 mounted on the effect control board 90 will be described based on the flowchart of FIG.

  When a reset signal is input from the reset circuit 95 to the sub control unit 91, the CPU 91a performs a start-up process (sub) shown in FIG. Since the reset signal is a signal output when the power is turned on and when the operation of the sub-control unit 91 is stagnant, the activation process (sub) is performed when the CPU 91a is activated when the power is turned on and when the CPU 91a malfunctions or is displayed. This process is performed at the time of restart due to a malfunction of the control circuit 92.

  In the startup process (sub), the built-in device, peripheral IC, interrupt mode, stack pointer, etc. are initialized (Sr1), the display control circuit 92 is initialized (Sr2), and access to the RAM 91c is permitted (Sr3). . Then, the RAM parity of all the storage areas of the RAM 91c is calculated (Sr4), and it is determined whether or not the RAM parity is 0 (Sr5).

  If the data in the RAM 91c is normal, the RAM parity should be 0. If the RAM parity is 0 in the step Sr5, the data stored in the RAM 91c is normal, so the process proceeds to the step Sr6. The production state before power interruption is restored. In step Sr6, the control pattern that was last executed before power interruption is set, and then the process proceeds to step Sr7.

  If the RAM parity is not 0 in step Sr5, the data stored in the RAM 91c is not normal. Therefore, the RAM 91c is initialized (Sr15) and the standby pattern is set as the control pattern (Sr16). Proceed to step.

  In step Sr7, it is determined whether or not the restart flag is set in the RAM 91c, that is, whether or not the restart is due to a malfunction of the display control circuit 92. If the restart flag is set, the step of Sr is performed. If the restart flag is not set, that is, if the power-up is activated, the process proceeds to step Sr8, only the command reception interrupt process is permitted, and the process proceeds to step Sr9.

  In step Sr9, it is determined whether an initialization command has been received. If an initialization command has not been received, the process proceeds to step Sr10, in which it is determined whether a power-on command has been received. When the initialization command is received, the RAM 91c is initialized (Sr17), the setting notification pattern is set as a control pattern (Sr18), and the process proceeds to step Sr13.

  In step Sr10, if the power-on command is not received, the process returns to step Sr9 again. If the power-on command is received, the process proceeds to step Sr11.

  In step Sr11, based on the power-on command received in step Sr10, it is determined whether or not a special role is elected in the state before power interruption (Sr15), and the special role is elected in the state before power interruption. If the special role notification pattern for notifying the winning of the special role is set as a control pattern (Sr12), the liquid crystal display 51, the effect effect LED 52, the speakers 53 and 54, the reels are set according to the set control pattern. An effect control process for controlling various effect devices such as the LED 55 is executed (Sr13), all interruptions are permitted (Sr14), and the process proceeds to a loop process.

  Further, in the step Sr11, when the special role is not elected in the state before the power interruption, the liquid crystal display according to the control pattern set in the step Sr6, that is, the control pattern set before the power interruption. 51, an effect control process for controlling various effect devices such as effect effect LED 52, speakers 53 and 54, and reel LED 55 is executed (Sr13), all interruptions are permitted (Sr14), and the process proceeds to a loop process. That is, as the timer interrupt process is permitted at this time, various effects based on the reception of the command can be executed.

  FIG. 51 is a flowchart showing the control contents of the timer interrupt process (sub) executed by the CPU 91a at intervals of 1.12 ms based on the count of the internal clock.

  In the timer interrupt process (sub), first, it is determined whether or not the touch panel operation check is in progress based on whether or not the detection wait flag indicating that the touch panel operation check is in progress is set in the RAM 91c (Ss1). If the touch panel operation check is not in progress, the process proceeds to step Ss6.

  If the operation of the touch panel is being checked in step Ss1, it is determined whether or not a touch operation has been detected (Ss2). If no touch operation has been detected, the process proceeds to step Ss16, and if a touch operation has been detected. After the result of the touch panel operation check is displayed on the liquid crystal display 51 (Ss3), the detection waiting flag is cleared, and the command reception interrupt process prohibited during the touch panel operation check is permitted, and the step of Ss6 Proceed to

  In step Ss6, it is determined whether or not the command is stored in the reception buffer, that is, whether or not the command is received from the main control unit 41. If the command is not stored in the reception buffer, the process proceeds to step Ss16. If the command is stored in the reception buffer, the command is acquired from the reception buffer (Ss7), and the process proceeds to step Ss8.

  In step Ss8, it is determined whether or not the acquired command is an inspection command. If it is not an inspection command, the process proceeds to step Ss13. If it is an inspection command, it is further an inspection command that specifies an operation check of the touch panel. Is determined (Ss9).

  If it is not an inspection command that designates an operation check of the touch panel in step Ss9, the process proceeds to step Ss12, and if it is an inspection command that designates an operation check of the touch panel, prohibition of command reception interrupt processing is set (Ss10). Then, a detection waiting flag indicating that the touch panel operation is being checked is set in the RAM 91c (Ss11), and the process proceeds to step Ss12.

  In the step of Ss12, the part specified by the acquired inspection command and the operation mode to be specified are specified, the operation test process for operating the corresponding part in the specified operation mode is performed, and the process proceeds to the step of Ss16.

  In the step of Ss13, when the acquired command is an internal winning command, the effect table stored in the ROM 91b is referred to, and an effect pattern is selected at a selection rate according to the result of the internal lottery indicated by the internal winning command, An effect pattern selection process for setting the selected effect pattern in the RAM 91c as the effect pattern of the game is executed, and the process proceeds to step Ss14.

  In the step of Ss14, the control pattern table stored in the ROM 91b is referred to, and the effect pattern set in the RAM 91c and the control pattern registered corresponding to the acquired command are read and set in the RAM 91c. The process is executed, and the process proceeds to step Ss15.

  In the step of Ss15, an effect control process for controlling various effect devices such as the effect LED 52, the speakers 53 and 54, and the reel LED is executed according to the control pattern set in the step of Ss14, and the process proceeds to the step of Ss16.

  In step Ss16, touch panel processing for analyzing the detection status of the touch panel based on the data acquired from the touch panel controller 99 is performed. Then, the process proceeds to step Ss17, and processing for updating various counter values is performed. The process (sub) is completed.

  As described above, in the timer interrupt process (sub), when an inspection command specifying a touch panel operation check is received and the touch panel operation check is performed, the touch operation is detected in the command reception interrupt process. In the meantime, new commands are not received, and even if a new command is sent during this time, until a touch operation is detected and the operation check is completed No new command is received, and processing based on the command is not performed. In addition, after receiving an inspection command specifying a touch panel operation check and before a touch operation is detected, not only command reception interrupt processing is prohibited, but also reading of commands stored in the reception buffer. Even if a command has already been received and the received command is stored in the reception buffer, the reception buffer is not detected until the touch operation is detected and the operation check is completed. The processing based on the command stored in is also not performed.

  In this embodiment, it is difficult to connect the driving tool by restricting the release of the connector connection between the game control board 40 and the game electronic component. Specifically, the connector connection between the game control board 40 and the inserted medal sensor 31, that is, the connection between the board side connector 620a of the game control board 40 and the cable side connector 610a of the cable 600a, the cable side connector 611a of the cable 600a. And the connection between the board-side connector 621a of the operation unit relay board 110 and the connection between the board-side connector 622g of the operation part relay board 110 and the cable-side connector 612g of the cable 601g are restricted from being released from each other. The connection between the board side connector 620a and the cable side connector 610a is restricted by the connector restricting member 500a, the connection between the cable side connector 611a and the board side connector 621a, and the connection between the board side connector 622g and the cable side connector 612g. The release of the connection is regulated by the connector regulating member 650.

  Further, by restricting the release of the connector connection between the game control board 40 and the door opening detection switch 25, it is difficult to release the connection between the game control board 40 and the door opening detection switch 25. Specifically, the connector connection between the game control board 40 and the door opening detection switch 25, that is, the connection between the board side connector 620a of the game control board 40 and the cable side connector 610a of the cable 600a, the cable side connector of the cable 600a. The connection between the connectors 611a and 621a of the operation unit relay board 110 and the connection of the board side connector 622q of the operation unit relay board 110 and the cable side connector 612q of the cable 601q is restricted. . The connection between the board side connector 620a and the cable side connector 610a is restricted by the connector restricting member 500a, the connection between the cable side connector 611a and the board side connector 621a, and the connection between the board side connector 622q and the cable side connector 612q. The release of the connection is regulated by the connector regulating member 650.

  Further, by restricting the release of the connector connection between the game control board 40 and the effect control board 90, it is difficult to release the connection between the game control board 40 and the effect control board 90. Specifically, the connector connection between the game control board 40 and the effect control board 90, that is, the connection between the board side connector 620d of the game control board 40 and the cable side connector 610d of the cable 600d, the cable side connector 611d of the cable 600d. And the board side connector 621d of the production relay board 80, the board side connector 622p of the production relay board 80 and the cable side connector 612p of the cable 601p, the cable side connector 613p of the cable 601p and the board side of the production control board 90 The connection with the connector 623p is restricted from releasing the connection between these connectors. The connection between the board-side connector 620d and the cable-side connector 610d is restricted by the connector restricting member 500b, the connection between the cable-side connector 611d and the board-side connector 621d, and the connection between the board-side connector 622d and the cable-side connector 612d. Connection and connection between the cable-side connector 613p and the board-side connector 623p are restricted by a connector restricting member (not shown).

  These connector restricting members are configured to be able to restrict the removal of the cable side connector from the board side connectors connected to each other, and the connection release restricting state that makes the release impossible unless the release restricting part related to the connection with the connector is destroyed. As long as it is configured to leave a trace when the connection release restriction state is released, its form is arbitrary and can be variously changed.

  Specifically, for example, it may be a cover body that is formed separately from the board-side connector and the cable-side connector and that can be attached and removed in a connected state to restrict the connector from being removed. Alternatively, it may be a locking portion that is provided on at least one of the board-side connector and the cable-side connector and that cannot be detached from each other when the connectors are connected to each other, or the board-side connector is mounted. In a restricting portion or the like that is provided in a substrate storage case or the like that can store a substrate to be connected, and that forms a connection release restriction state that restricts connector removal when the substrate is stored in the substrate storage case and sealed. It may be an adhesive or the like that bonds the connectors connected to each other.

  Next, the detailed structure of the board case 200 for housing the game control board 40 and the connector restricting members 500a and 500b will be described.

  52 and 53 are exploded perspective views showing the substrate case 200 and the attachment base 250 for attaching the substrate case 200 to the housing 1b which forms the main body of the slot machine 1 and the connector restricting members 500a and 500b. FIG. 55 is a perspective view showing a state in which the substrate case 200 is assembled to the mounting base 250, and FIG. 55 is an enlarged perspective view of the main part of the mounting side member 510 and the connector cover 520 constituting the connector regulating members 500a and 500b. 56 (a) is a cross-sectional view taken along the line AA in FIG. 55, FIGS. 56 (b) and 56 (c) are cross-sectional views taken along the line BB in FIG. 55, and FIG. FIG. 58 is a perspective view showing a state where the connector cover is attached to the attachment side member 510, and FIG. 58 (a) is a sectional view taken along the line CC of FIG. 57, and FIG. Is a D-D sectional view of FIG. 57.

  As shown in FIGS. 52 and 53, the board case 200 includes a lower case 201 as a case main body that covers the back side of the game control board 40, and an upper case 203 that covers the mounting surface side of the game control board 40. And assembled so as to sandwich the game control board 40. The mounting surface of the game control board 40 is connected to electronic elements such as a CPU 41a, ROM 41b, and RAM 41c, and a cable-side connector provided at one end of a cable from another board, although not shown in detail. Many board-side connectors 620a to 620d are mounted.

  The lower case 201 is made of a transparent synthetic resin, and is formed in a rectangular parallelepiped shape whose upper surface is opened by a bottom plate 201a formed in a substantially rectangular shape and side walls formed so as to surround the periphery of the bottom plate.

  The two short side walls 201c of the lower case 201 are provided with two sealing pieces 211 and 211 protruding outward, and the other short side wall 201d has two pairs of locking portions. 210 protrudes outward. Further, locking pieces 511 of attachment side members 510 and 510 described later engage with both long side ends from the side wall 201c and both long side ends from the side wall 201d on the back surface of the bottom plate 201a of the lower case 201. Engaging grooves 212 are respectively formed.

  The upper case 203 is made of a transparent synthetic resin, and as shown in FIGS. 52 and 53, the lower surface is open, the center of the upper surface bulges, and the convex portions are formed with step portions 203a and 203b on both short sides. It is shaped like a box. The lower surface of the upper case 203 has the same shape as the lower case 201, and a space for accommodating the game control board 40 is formed inside by assembling the lower case 201 and the upper case 203 together.

  On the side wall 203c on one short side of the upper case 203, sealing pieces 231 and 231 are disposed outwardly at locations corresponding to the sealing pieces 211 and 211 provided on the side wall 201c on one short side of the lower case 201, respectively. The four sealing pieces 232 are provided to protrude outwardly at equal intervals between the sealing pieces 231 and 231. The other short side wall 203d of the upper case 203 is engaged with the pair of locking portions 210 at locations corresponding to the two pairs of locking portions 210 provided on the other short side wall of the lower case 201, respectively. Engaging engaging portions 230 are provided. Further, on the other short side wall 203d of the upper case 203, a locking piece 235 that engages with locking holes 251a and 251a of the mounting base 250, which will be described later, at a position outward from the engaging portion 230. 235 is provided.

  In addition, recesses 203e and 203f are formed in the step portions 203a and 203b on both short sides of the upper case 203, respectively, and a game housed in the substrate case 200 is formed on the bottom surface of the recess 203e of the step portion 203a. An insertion hole 234b through which the board-side connector 620d can be inserted is formed at a position corresponding to the board-side connector 620d of the control board 40, and the game control accommodated in the board case 200 is formed on the bottom surface of the recess 203f of the stepped part 203b. An insertion hole 234a through which the board-side connector 620a can be inserted is formed at a position corresponding to the board-side connector 620a of the board 40.

  The mounting base 250 is a member for fixing the substrate case 200 to the housing 1 b that forms the main body of the slot machine 1. The mounting base 250 is made of synthetic resin, and, as shown in FIGS. 52 and 50, a bottom plate 250 a formed in a substantially rectangular shape larger than the bottom plate 201 a of the lower case 201, and two of the peripheral edges of the upper plate The side walls 250b and 250c formed on the long edges are formed in a rectangular parallelepiped shape whose upper surface is open. Screw holes 252 are formed at a plurality of locations on the bottom plate 250a of the mounting base 250, and a side wall 250d having a notch 250e at the center is formed on one short side of the bottom plate 250a. Are provided with a pair of guides 254, 254 from the notch 250e of the side wall 250d toward the center. Guide grooves 254a and 254a into which engaging portions 257 and 257 formed at both ends of a fixing member 255 described later are fitted are formed on the opposing surfaces of the guides 254 and 254, respectively.

  The fixing member 255 is made of synthetic resin, and four fixing holes 256 are formed on the upper surface, and locking portions 257 and 257 are formed at both ends. The fixing member 255 is attached to the attachment base 250 by fitting the locking portions 257 and 257 into the guide grooves 254a and 254a formed in the guides 254 and 254 of the attachment base 250, respectively.

  On the short side of the mounting base 250 on which the side wall 250d is formed, a locking column 253 having an inward locking claw 253a at the tip is provided upright from the bottom plate 250a, and on the opposite short side. Engagement holes 251 and 251 in which engagement holes 251 a and 251 a into which the engagement parts 230 of the upper case 203 are inserted are connected to the bottom plate 250 a are provided upright at both ends.

  As shown in FIGS. 52 and 53, the connector regulating member 500a is attached to the board case 200 and the cable side attached to the board side connector 620a and attached to the board side member 510. A connector cover 520 that covers a part of the connector 610a, the attachment side member 510 is attached to the board case 200, and the connector cover 520 is attached, so that the cable side connector 610a from the board side connector 620a is attached. Removal is regulated. The connector restricting member 500b has substantially the same configuration as the connector restricting member 500a, and is attached to the attachment side member 510 attached to the board case 200, the attachment side member 510, and connected to the board side connector 620d. A connector cover 520 that covers a part of the cable-side connector 610d. The cable-side connector from the board-side connector 620d is attached by attaching the attachment-side member 510 to the board case 200 and attaching the connector cover 520. The removal of 610d is restricted.

  The attachment-side member 510 is made of a transparent synthetic resin, and is formed into a shape that conforms to the surface shape of the lower case 201 and the upper case 203 constituting the substrate case 200, as shown in FIGS. Specifically, the attachment side member 510 is attached to the short side where the engaging portion 230 of the upper case 203 is provided, and the shape thereof is the step portion 203b in the upper case 203 when attached to the board case 200. A cylindrical locking hole portion 513 having a notch 512 for releasing the cable side connector 610a (cable side connector 610d) and a locking hole 513a on the inner side thereof, in contact with the bottom surface of the concave portion 203f (the concave portion 203e of the stepped portion 203a). Upper pieces 510c and 510c that contact upper surfaces of both end portions of the step portion 203b (step portion 203a) in the upper case 203 are extended through standing pieces 510b and 510b that stand up from both ends of the base piece 510a formed with The locking portions 257 and 257 extend inward via the side pieces 510d and 510d depending from both ends of the upper pieces 510c and 510c. When mounting on the substrate case 200, the opposing surfaces of the base piece 510a and the upper pieces 510c, 510c of the attachment side member 510 to the substrate case 200 are the upper surfaces of the step portion 203b (step portion 203a) in the upper case 203. And the bottom surface of the recess 203f (the recess 203e).

  As shown in FIG. 55, a locking groove 514 is provided on the inner surface of the locking hole 513 in the locking hole 513 at a position opposed to the center from the lower end of the locking hole 513a. Yes. The locking groove 514 has a substantially L shape including a shallow groove portion 514a having a shallow depth from the lower end of the locking hole 513a and a deep groove portion 514b deeper than the shallow groove portion 514a, and the shallow groove portion 514a of the opposing locking grooves 514 and 514. 514a and deep groove portions 514b and 514b are formed at positions facing each other across the center. That is, the locking grooves 514 and 514 are formed symmetrically with respect to the center.

  The connector cover 520 is made of a transparent synthetic resin. As shown in FIGS. 52 and 53, when the connector cover 520 is attached to the attachment side member 510 attached to the board case 200, the board side connector 620a (board side connector 620d). ) Is connected to the cable-side connector 610a (cable-side connector 610d) and is formed in a substantially U-shaped covering section 521, and one side surface 521a of the side surface in the longitudinal direction of the covering section 521 is formed. A locking cylinder 522 having substantially the same diameter as the inner periphery of the locking hole 513a of the locking hole 513 in the attachment side member 510 is provided via the connection piece 522a.

  The lower end of one side surface 521a of the covering portion 521 contacts the upper surface of the base piece 510a when attached to the attachment-side member 510, and ribs 521b and 521b are provided on the back surface of the side surface 521a. The lower surface of 521b is also in contact with the upper surface of the base piece 510a.

  As shown in FIG. 55, the locking cylinder 522 has an outward locking claw 523a formed at the tip at a position opposed to the center of the locking cylinder 522, and provided with engaging portions 523 and 523 that can be elastically deformed inward. It has been. The engaging portions 523 and 523 are attached with the engaging claws 523a and 523a in a state where the connector cover 520 is connected to the board side connector 620a (board side connector 620d) and the cable side connector 610a (cable side connector 610d). When attached to the side member 510, it is provided at a position to engage with the shallow groove portions 514a and 514a of the locking grooves 514 and 514 formed in the locking hole 513a.

  Next, the state of attachment of the connector restriction members 500a and 500b to the board case 200 and the state of attachment of the board case 200 to the housing will be described.

  First, the game control board 40 is accommodated in the lower case 201 and the upper case 203 constituting the board case 200 to be in a sealed state. In order to seal the lower case 201 and the upper case 203, the engaging portions 230 of the corresponding upper case 203 are engaged with the two pairs of locking portions 210 of the lower case 201, respectively, One of the sealing pieces 211 of the case 201 and the corresponding sealing piece 231 of the upper case 203 are fixed with a one-way screw.

  As is well known, a one-way screw can be screwed by rotation in one direction, but cannot be rotated even if it is rotated in the other direction, that is, the screw cannot be loosened. It is a screw. For this reason, when one sealing piece 211 of the lower case 201 and the corresponding sealing piece 231 of the upper case 203 are fixed with a one-way screw, either the sealing piece 211 or the sealing piece 231 is broken. Without this, these sticking cannot be released.

  Then, by fixing the sealing piece 211 and the sealing piece 231, the longitudinal movement of the upper case 203 with respect to the lower case 201 is restricted, and as a result, the upper case 203 is engaged with the locking portion 210 of the lower case 201. The release of the engagement of the joint portion 230 is also restricted, and the upper case 201 and the lower case 203 are integrated with the game control board 40 accommodated therein, and the sealing piece 211 and the sealing piece 231 are broken. Otherwise, it will not be possible to open.

  Next, the attachment side members 510 and 510 constituting the connector restricting members 500a and 500b are attached to the board case 200 in which the game control board 40 is sealed. The attachment-side member 510 is elastically deformed on both side pieces 510d and 510d outward and attached to the step 203b (step 203a) of the upper case 203. Then, by releasing the elastic deformation, the engaging pieces 511 and 511 are attached by engaging with the engaging grooves 212 and 212 on the back surface of the lower case 201. At this time, the base piece 510a and the upper pieces 510c and 510c of the attachment-side member 510 are in contact with the upper surface of the step 203b (step 203a) and the bottom of the recess 203f (depression 203e) of the upper case 203, respectively. The notch 512 provided in the upper case 203 coincides with the insertion hole 234a (insertion hole 234b provided in the recess 203e) provided in the recess 203f of the upper case 203, and these notch 512 and insertion hole 234a (insertion hole 234b). The board-side connector 620a (board-side connector 620d) of the game control board 40 accommodated in the board case 200 is exposed from the inside of the board case 200 to the outside.

  Next, the mounting screw 259 is screwed into the housing side wall through the screw hole 252 of the mounting base 250 to fix the mounting base 250 to the housing, and the locking portions 257 and 257 of the fixing member 255 are fixed. The fixing member 255 is mounted on the mounting base 250 by fitting into the guide grooves 254 a and 254 a of the mounting base 250.

  Next, the board case 200 to which the attachment side member 510 is attached is assembled to the attachment base 250. Specifically, after inserting the locking pieces 235 and 235 protruding to one end side of the substrate case 200 into the locking holes 251a and 251a of the locking hole portions 251 and 251 of the mounting base 250, respectively, as shown in FIG. The substrate case 200 is accommodated between the side walls 250b and 250c of the mounting base 250, and the upper surface of the other end side step portion 203a of the substrate case 200 is locked by the locking claw 253a of the locking column 253, thereby fixing the substrate case 200. Temporarily fix to the mounting base 250. In this state, the four sealing pieces 232 provided at one end of the upper case 203 and the fixing holes 256 of the fixing member 255 attached to the mounting base 250 are in corresponding positions, and in this state, any of the sealing pieces The sealing piece 232 and the fixing member 255 are fixed by screwing the aforementioned one-way screw into the corresponding fixing hole 256 from above the H.232.

  Then, by fixing the sealing piece 232 and the fixing member 255, the movement of the end of the substrate case 200 on the sealing piece 232 side in the removal direction from the mounting base 250 is restricted, and the locking post 253 Since the horizontal movement of the substrate case 200 toward the sealing piece 232 side is also restricted, the engagement pieces 235 and 235 protruding to one end of the substrate case 200 cannot be removed from the engagement holes 251a and 251a of the mounting base 250. It becomes possible. Further, in this state, the screw holes 252 of the bottom plate 250a of the mounting base 250 are all covered with the substrate case 200, and access to the mounting screws 259 is impossible, and the mounting base 250 cannot be removed from the housing. Become. In this way, the substrate case 200 to which the attachment-side member 510 is attached is fixed to the housing via the attachment base 250, and the substrate case 200 is attached to the housing unless the sealing piece 232 or the fixing member 255 is broken. It will be in the state which cannot be removed from. At this time, since the lower case 201 constituting the board case 200 is sandwiched between the upper case 203 and the mounting base 250, the board case 200 is fixed to the housing via the mounting base 250. If the stopper 232 or the fixing member 255 is not broken, it is impossible to remove the upper case from the lower case 201 and take out the game control board 40.

  When the board case 200 to which the attachment side member 510 is attached is fixed to the attachment base 250 (housing) so as not to be detached, as shown in FIG. 58 (a), the side piece 510d of the attachment side member 510 is provided. 510d abuts against the inner surfaces of the side walls 250b, 250c of the mounting base 250 and is held between them so that deformation of the both side pieces 510d, 510d of the mounting side member 510 outward is restricted. It becomes impossible to remove from 200.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 54, with respect to the board side connectors 620a and 620b of the game control board 40 exposed through the insertion holes 234a and 234b of the board case 200 and the notches 512 of the base piece 510a in the attachment side member 510. 57, after connecting the cable side connector 610a of the cable 600a and the cable side connector 610d of the cable 600d, respectively, with the board side connector 620a and the cable side connector 610a, and the board side connector 620d and the cable side connector 610d being connected. As shown in FIG. 5, the cover portion 521 of the connector cover 520 covers the upper side of the cable side connector 610a and the cable side connector 610d, and the engagement tube 522 of the connector cover 520 is engaged with the engagement hole portion 513 in the attachment side member 510. Fits into the hole 513a Make. As a result, the engaging portions 523 and 523 of the locking cylinder 522 abut against the inner periphery of the locking hole 513a and elastically deform inward. At this time, when the engaging portions 523 and 523 are positioned so as to cover the cable-side connector 610a and the cable-side connector 610d with the covering portion 521, the engaging portions 523 and 523 are naturally formed in the locking grooves 514 and 514 formed on the inner surface of the locking hole 513a. Positioning in the shallow groove portions 514a, 514a, the locking cylinder 522 is further fitted, and the locking claws 523a, 523a at the tips of the engagement portions 523, 523 are in the shallow groove portions 514a, 514a of the locking grooves 514, 514. By reaching, as shown in FIG. 56 (a), the inward elastic deformation of the engaging portions 523 and 523 is released, and the locking claws 523a and 523a are engaged with the shallow groove portions 514a and 514a, respectively. The upward movement of the locking cylinder 522 is restricted, and the side surface 521a of the covering portion 521, the side surface of the board side connector 620a and the cable side connector 610a, the base The side surfaces of the side connector 620d and the cable side connector 610d come into contact with each other and the rotation of the locking cylinder 522 with respect to the locking hole 513 is restricted, so that the mounting side member 510 and the connector cover 520 are connected and integrated. The connector restricting member 500a thus formed is formed. In this state, since the engaging portions 523 and 523 are covered with the locking hole portion 513, it is impossible to elastically deform the engaging portions 523 and 523 inward from the outside, and the connector cover 520 or the attachment side member Unless 510 is broken, the connector cover 520 cannot be removed from the attachment side member 510.

  Further, when the connector cover 520 is attached to the attachment side member 510 so as not to be removed, a part of the upper surface of the cable side connector 610a and the cable side connector 610d is covered by the covering portion 521 as shown in FIGS. And the movement of the cable side connector 610a and the cable side connector 610d in the pulling direction from the board side connector 620d is restricted, and the cable side connector 610a and the board side connector 620a of the cable side connector 610d The removal from the side connector 620d is regulated.

  In this way, with the attachment side member 510 attached to the board case 200, the board case 200 is fixed to the housing, and then the cable side connector 610a and the cable side connector 610d are connected to the board side connector 620a and the board side connector 620d. In this state, the board-side connector 620a and the board-side connector 620d are attached to the attachment-side member 510 so as to partially cover the board-side connector 620d from above, so that the cable-side connector 610a and the board-side connector 620a of the cable-side connector 610d The board-side connector 620d cannot be removed.

  Next, the situation when the connection between the cable side connector 610a and the board side connector 620a and the connection between the cable side connector 610d and the board side connector 620d are released will be described.

  To release the connection between the cable-side connector 610a and the board-side connector 620a and the connection between the cable-side connector 610d and the board-side connector 620d, the attachment-side member 510 or the connector cover 520 is broken and the connector cover 520 is attached to the attachment-side member. 510, or the sealing piece 232 or the fixing member 255 of the board case 200 is broken, and the board case 200 is detached from the mounting base 250, and the mounting side member 510 with the connector cover 520 attached is removed. It is necessary to remove from 200.

  For example, when it is necessary to remove the cable-side connector 610a or the cable-side connector 610d from the board-side connector 620a or the board-side connector 620d due to a failure of the cables 600a, 600d, etc., it is removed by the former method, When replacing the entire case 200, the latter method may be removed.

  First, when replacing the cable 600a (cable 600d), when it is necessary to remove the cable-side connector 610a (cable-side connector 610d) from the board-side connector 620a, the connector constituting the connector regulating member 500a (connector regulating member 500b) The method of removing the cover 520 from the attachment-side member 510 will be described. First, the connecting piece 522a that connects the cover portion 521 of the connector cover 520 and the locking cylinder 522 is broken with a tool such as a nipper. As a result, the covering portion 521 is separated and the locking cylinder 522 can be rotated with respect to the locking hole portion 513. In this state, by rotating the locking cylinder 522 counterclockwise when viewed from above, the engaging portions 523 and 523 move from the shallow groove portions 514a and 514a of the locking grooves 514 and 514 to the positions of the deep groove portions 514b and 514b. As shown in FIG. 56 (a), from the state where the locking claws 523a, 523a are engaged with the shallow groove portions 514a, 514a, as shown in FIG. 56 (b), the locking claws 523a, 523a The shallow groove portions 514a and 514a are disengaged. As a result, the locking cylinder 522 can be moved upward. As shown in FIG. 56 (c), when the locking cylinder 522 is pulled upward, the locking claws 523a and 523a are engaged with the deep grooves 514b and 514b. However, in this state, since the engaging portions 523 and 523 are exposed, the engaging portions 523 and 523 can be elastically deformed inward, and the engaging claws 523a can be elastically deformed inwardly. 523a and the deep groove portions 514b and 514b are disengaged, and the locking cylinder 522 can be detached from the attachment side member 510, whereby the connector cover 520 is completely separated from the attachment side member 510, and the connector cover 520 Since the restriction of the movement in the pulling direction of the cable side connector 610a (cable side connector 610d) by the cable is also released, the cable side connector 610a (cable side Connector 610d) and it is possible to release the connection between the board-side connector 620a (substrate side connector 620d).

  When the connector cover 520 is removed from the attachment-side member 510, the covering portion 521 and the locking cylinder 522 are broken, and once broken, the original state is not restored. Therefore, the cable-side connector 610a (cable-side connector 610d) and the board The trace which canceled connection with the side connector 620a (board | substrate side connector 620d) will remain.

  Next, when it is necessary to remove the cable-side connector 610a and the cable-side connector 610d from the board-side connector 620a and the board-side connector 620d when replacing the board case 200, the attachment-side member 510 and the connector cover 520 together with the board case 200 The method of removing from the board will be described. First, the sealing piece 232 of the substrate case 200 fixed to the fixing member 255 is broken with a tool such as a nipper. As a result, the end of the substrate case 200 on the side of the sealing piece 232 can be moved away from the mounting base 250, so that the locking claw 253 a of the locking column 253 and the stepped portion 203 e of the substrate case 200 Release the engagement. Accordingly, the horizontal movement toward the sealing piece 232 is also possible, so that the locking pieces 235 and 235 of the board case 200 are removed from the locking holes 251a and 251a of the mounting base 250. Thereby, the board case 200 is detached from the attachment base 250, and the side pieces 510d and 510d of the attachment side member 510 can be deformed outwardly, without removing the connector cover 520 from the attachment side member 510. The attachment-side member 510 can be removed from the board case 200. With this, the attachment-side member 510 is removed from the board case 200 in a state of being integrated with the connector cover 520, whereby the cable-side connector 610a and the cable by the connector cover 520 are removed. Since the restriction of the movement in the pulling direction of the side connector 610d is also released, the connection between the cable side connector 610a and the cable side connector 610d and the board side connector 620a and the board side connector 620d can be released.

  In order to remove the attachment side member 510 from the substrate case 200 also by this method, the sealing piece 232 of the substrate case 200 fixed to the fixing member 255 needs to be broken. Therefore, there remains a trace that the connection between the cable side connector 610a and the board side connector 620a and the connection between the cable side connector 610d and the board side connector 620d are released.

  Further, according to this method, the sealing piece 232 of the board case 200 is broken and remains on the fixing member 255, but the attachment side member 510 can be removed from the board case 200 without removing the connector cover 520 from the attachment side member 510. Therefore, by attaching the attachment side member 510 with the connector cover 520 assembled to the new board case 200 in which the game control board 40 is accommodated for replacement, the cable side connector 610a and the board side in the new board case 200 are attached. The connection side with the connector 620a and the release of the connection between the cable side connector 610d and the board side connector 620d are disabled, and a new fixing member 255 is mounted on the mounting base 250 and the connector cover 520 is assembled. A new board case 200 to which the member 510 is attached is attached. By attaching the fixing member 255 and the sealing piece 232 to the base 250, the attachment side member 510 cannot be removed again, and the connection between the cable side connector 610a and the board side connector 620a, the cable When the connection between the side connector 610d and the board side connector 620d is released, the trace can be left. That is, in such a case, the attachment side member 510 and the connector cover 520 can be reused.

  In this embodiment, the engaging pieces 511 and 511 of the attachment side member 510 are elastically deformed outward and engaged with the engaging grooves 514 and 514 formed on the back surface of the substrate case 200. When the attachment side member 510 is attached to the substrate case 200 and the substrate case 200 to which the attachment side member 510 is attached is fixed to the attachment base 250 (housing) so as not to be detached, the attachment side member 510 side Since the pieces 510d and 510d abut against the inner surfaces of the side walls 250b and 250c of the mounting base 250 and are held between the pieces, the deformation of the both side pieces 510d and 510d of the mounting side member 510 is restricted outward. For example, a part of the attachment side member is screwed on the back surface of the substrate case 200 or a removable locking pin. And fixing the board case 200 to the housing (mounting base) in a non-removable manner, the screws and locking pins are concealed, and the board case 200 is attached to the housing, The attachment side member may be controlled to be removed from the substrate case 200. After the attachment case is fixed to the housing with the attachment member attached to the substrate case 200, the attachment member is the substrate. Any configuration may be adopted as long as it cannot be removed from the case 200.

  Next, a method for fixing the lower case 201 and the upper case 203, the substrate case 200 and the mounting base 250 will be described in detail.

  59 is a perspective view showing an attachment state of a covering member that covers the sealing piece 232 that seals the substrate case 200 to the attachment base 250, and FIG. 60 (b) is an EE sectional view of FIG. 60 (a), and FIG. 60 (c) is an FF sectional view of FIG. 60 (a).

  As shown in FIGS. 59 and 60A, the sealing piece 232 includes a thin connection piece 232a and a sealing portion 232b connected to the side wall 203c of the upper case 203 via the connection piece 232a. Yes. As shown in FIG. 60 (c), a reinforcing piece 232c perpendicular to the connecting piece 232a is formed at a substantially central portion of the connecting piece 232a. Further, the lateral width of the reinforcing piece 232c is that of a covering member 236 described later. The hanging pieces 236b and 236b are formed to have substantially the same width as the separation width.

  As shown in FIGS. 60A and 60B, a recessed portion 232d is formed on the upper surface side of the sealing portion 232b, and the opening of the recessed portion 232d is formed on the inner surface of the recessed portion 232d facing in the horizontal direction in the drawing. Guide grooves 232e and 232e that widen toward the surface are formed, and locking holes 232f and 232f are formed in the back of the guide grooves 232e and 232e, respectively. A fixing hole 232g is formed at the bottom of the recess 232d.

  The sealing piece 231 has the same configuration as the sealing piece 232, and includes a thin connection piece 231a and a sealing portion 231b connected to the side wall 203c of the upper case 203 via the connection piece 231a. A reinforcing piece 231c that is orthogonal to the connecting piece 231a is formed at a substantially central portion of the connecting piece 231a. Further, the lateral width of the reinforcing piece 231c is substantially equal to the separation width of hanging pieces 236b and 236b of a covering member 236 described later. The same width is formed.

  A concave portion 231d is formed on the upper surface side of the sealing portion 231b, and guide grooves 231e and 231e extending toward the opening of the concave portion 231d are formed on inner surfaces of the concave portion 231d facing in the horizontal direction in the figure. Further, locking holes 231f and 231f are formed in the back of the guide grooves 231e and 231e, respectively. A fixing hole 231g is formed at the bottom of the recess 231d.

  In this embodiment, the one-way screw 237 is screwed into the fixing hole (not shown) of the sealing piece 211 provided on the side wall 201c of the lower case 201 through the fixing hole 231g from the concave portion 231d side of the sealing portion 231b. Accordingly, the sealing piece 231 of the upper case 203 and the sealing piece 211 of the lower case 201 are fixed, and the upper case 203 and the lower case 201 are integrated so as not to be opened. At this time, it is possible to reliably prevent the one-way screw 237 from being pulled out by injecting a fixing material such as the heat welding resin B into the recess 231d.

  In order to open the upper case 203 and the lower case 201 and take out the game control board 40, it is necessary to cut the connection piece 231a of the sealing piece 231 fixed to the sealing piece 211, but the connection piece 231a Is formed with a reinforcing piece 231c perpendicular to the connecting piece 231a, and it is necessary to cut the reinforcing piece 231c together. The upper case 203 and the lower case 201 are opened so that the game control board 40 cannot be taken out.

  In this embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 59 and 60 (b), the fixing member 255 attached to the mounting base 250 (slot machine body) from the concave portion 232d side of the sealing portion 232b through the fixing hole 232g. By screwing the one-way screw 237 into the fixing hole 256 of the upper case 203, the sealing piece 231 of the upper case 203 and the fixing member 255 are fixed, and the board case 200 cannot be removed from the slot machine body via the mounting base 250. Attached to. At this time, since the lower case 201 is sandwiched between the upper case 203 and the mounting base 250, the opening of the upper case 203 and the lower case 201 is also disabled. Further, the one-way screw 237 can be reliably prevented from being pulled out by injecting the heat welding resin B or the like into the recess 231d.

  In order to remove the substrate case 200 from the slot machine main body, it is necessary to cut the connection piece 232a of the sealing piece 232 fixed to the fixing member 255. The connection piece 232a includes a reinforcing piece perpendicular to the connection piece 232a. 232c is formed, and it is necessary to cut the reinforcing piece 232c together. Therefore, it is difficult to cut the connection piece 232a, and it is possible to easily cut the connection piece 232a and remove the board case 200 from the slot machine body. I can't do it.

  In the present embodiment, by further attaching a covering member 236 that covers the connection piece 231a and the connection piece 232a to the sealing piece 231 and the sealing piece 232, it becomes more difficult to cut the connection piece 231a and the connection piece 232a. It has become.

  As shown in FIGS. 59 and 60 (a), the covering member 236 includes a pair of hanging pieces 236b and 236b that hang down from the left and right sides on one end side of the base piece 236a. The connecting piece 232a is formed so as to be separated from the lateral width of the reinforcing piece 232c by approximately the same width. When the sealing piece 231 and the sealing piece 232 are mounted, the reinforcing piece 231c The reinforcing piece 232c is brought into contact with the reinforcing piece 232c.

  In addition, on the other end side of the base piece 236a, there are formed a fitting portion 236c that is fitted into the recesses 231d and 232d when the sealing piece 231 and the sealing piece 232 are attached. Side pieces 236d and 236d are formed, and locking claws 236e and 236e are formed on both front and rear sides of the fitting portion 236c, respectively.

  Next, how the covering member 236 is attached to the sealing piece 231 and the sealing piece 232 will be described. In addition, since the case where it mounts | wears with the sealing piece 231 and the case where it mounts | wears with the sealing piece 232 is the same, the example which mounts the coating | coated member 236 to the sealing piece 232 is demonstrated here.

  First, the hanging pieces 236b and 236b of the covering member 236 are arranged so as to straddle the connecting piece 232a of the sealing piece 232 fixed by the fixing member 255 and the one-way screw 327, as shown in FIG. The 236c is fitted into the recess 232d of the sealing piece 232 to which the 236c is fixed. At this time, as shown in FIGS. 60A and 60B, the side pieces 236d and 236d abut against the inner surface of the recess 232d, and the locking claws 236e and 236e are guided to the guide grooves 232e and 232e. By pressing, the locking claws 236e and 236e are engaged with the locking holes 231f and 231f, and the fitting portion 236c is detachably fitted to the recess 232d. At this time, as shown in FIGS. 60A and 60C, the connection piece 232a of the sealing piece 232 to which the covering member 236 is attached is covered by the base piece 236a, the drooping pieces 236b and 236b of the covering member 236, The connection piece 232a of the sealing piece 232 cannot be directly accessed, and the connection piece 232a cannot be cut unless the covering member 236 is removed.

  When the covering member 236 is attached, as shown in FIGS. 60B and 60C, the inner surface of the base piece 236a of the covering member 236 contacts the upper surface of the connection piece 232a, and the inner surfaces of the drooping pieces 236b and 236b are reinforced. When the fitting portion 236c is fitted into the recess 232d and the locking claws 236e and 236e are engaged with the locking holes 232f and 232f in this state, the contact portion 236c contacts the side surface of the piece 232c. Since the movement is restricted, it is impossible to remove the covering member 236 from the sealing piece 232.

  The same applies when the covering member 236 is attached to the sealing piece 231. The connecting piece 231a is covered by the base piece 236a and the hanging piece 236b of the covering member 236, and the connecting piece 231a of the sealing piece 231 cannot be directly accessed. Thus, unless the covering member 236 is removed, the connection piece 231a cannot be cut.

  When cutting the sealing piece 231 to open the upper case 203 and the lower case 201, or when cutting the sealing piece 232 and removing the substrate case 200 from the mounting base 250, the connecting piece 231a by the covering member 236 is used. It is necessary to release the covering state of the connection piece 232a. In order to release the covering state of the connecting piece 231a and the connecting piece 232a by the covering member 236, the base piece 236a and the fitting portion 236c are cut with a nipper or the like. Thereby, the base piece 236a and the fitting portion 236c are separated, and the connection piece 231a and the connection piece 232a are exposed by removing the base piece 236a and the hanging pieces 236b and 236b from the sealing piece 231 and the sealing piece 232. The connection piece 231a and the connection piece 232a are cut and the sealing piece 231 is cut to open the upper case 203 and the lower case 201, or the sealing piece 232 is cut and the board case 200 is attached to the mounting base. It becomes possible to remove from 250.

  Further, when the covering state of the connecting piece 231a and the connecting piece 232a by the covering member 236 is released, the fitting portion 236c remains in the concave portion 231d of the sealing piece 231 and the concave portion 232d of the sealing piece 232, Since it is difficult to completely remove the debris, it is possible to leave a trace after the covering state is released. Further, the fitting portion 236c remains in the concave portion 231d of the sealing piece 231 and the concave portion 232d of the sealing piece 232, and it is impossible to cover the corresponding portion again with the covering member 236. It can be prevented that the connection portion 231a of the stop piece 231 and the cut portion of the connection portion 232a of the sealing piece 232 are covered and the discovery of the possibility of fraud is delayed.

  Next, the detailed structure of the connector restricting member 650 will be described.

  61 is an exploded perspective view showing the mounting table 660 and the cover member 680 constituting the connector restricting member 650. FIG. 62 is a perspective view showing a state in which the cover member 680 is assembled to the mounting table 660. 63A is a cross-sectional view taken along the line GG in FIG. 62, and FIG. 63B is a cross-sectional view taken along the line H-H in FIG.

  As shown in FIGS. 61 and 62, the connector restricting member 650 includes a mounting table 660 on which the operation unit relay board 110 is mounted, and a cover member 680 that covers the mounting table 660 from above. After housing the operation unit relay board 110, the corresponding cable side connectors 611a, 612g, and 612q of the corresponding cables 600a, 601g, and 601q are connected to the board side connectors 621a, 622g, and 622q of the operation unit relay board 110, respectively. By attaching the cover member 680 to the case body 610, removal of the cable side connectors 611a, 612g, 612q from the board side connectors 621a, 622g, 621q is restricted.

  The mounting table 660 is made of a transparent synthetic resin and is formed in a substantially rectangular shape having a larger diameter than the operation unit relay substrate 110. As shown in FIG. 61, board-side connectors 621a, 622a to 622c, 622d to 622f, 622g, and 622q are mounted on the operation unit relay board 110, and both side surfaces on the long side of the mounting table 660, and the short side On one side of the side, when the operation unit relay board 110 is placed, board-side connectors 622a to 622c, 622d to 622f, and 622g whose insertion openings are open in the horizontal direction with respect to the mounting surface in the operation unit relay board 110. Each of the locking holes 661 having the locking holes 661b is provided via the connection piece 661a so as to protrude outward, avoiding the portion where 622q is located. On the inner peripheral surface of the locking hole 661b, a pair of locking claws 661c and 661c facing the center are formed at positions facing each other across the center.

  The cover member 680 is made of a transparent synthetic resin and is formed in substantially the same shape as the mounting table 660. On one long side, the cover member 680 is located at a position corresponding to the board-side connector 621a of the operation unit relay board 110. A cover portion 681 that bulges toward the front side at a position corresponding to the board-side connectors 622a to 622c of the operation portion relay board 110 on the other long side. Cover portions 689 that bulge toward the front are formed at positions corresponding to 622q, 622g, and 622d to 622f, respectively.

  On the upper surface 681a of the cover portion 681, a notch 681b for releasing the cable 600a connected to the board side connector 621a, which is narrower than the long side of the cable side connector 611a of the cable 600a, is formed on the outer side surface. Thereby, covering surfaces 681c and 681 are formed on both side ends of the upper surface 681a, respectively.

  The cover portion 688 has notches 682a for releasing the cables 601a and 601b connected to the board side connectors 622a to 622c, and the cover portion 689 has a cable 601q connected to the board side connector 622q. A notch 682b for releasing the cable, a notch 632c for releasing the cable 601g connected to the board side connector 622g, and a notch 682d for releasing the cables 601d to f connected to the board side connectors 622d to f are formed. Has been. In particular, the notches 682b and 682c for releasing the cables 601q and 601g connected to the board side connectors 622q and 622g are formed narrower than the length of the long side of the cable 601g, Covering pieces 683, 683, and 683 hanging from the portion 689 are provided, respectively.

  Further, on both side surfaces on the long side and one side surface on the short side of the cover member 680, the locking holes are projected so as to protrude outward at positions corresponding to the locking holes 661 of the mounting table 660. A locking cylinder 684 having substantially the same diameter as the inner peripheral surface of 661b is provided via a connection piece 684a. Lock holes 684a are formed on the outer peripheral surface of the lock cylinder 684 at locations corresponding to the pair of lock claws 661c provided on the inner periphery of the lock hole 661b. Can be combined.

  Next, the mounting state of the mounting table 660 and the cover member 680 will be described. First, as shown in FIG. 61, the operation unit relay board 110 is mounted on the mounting table 660, and board-side connectors 621a, 622a to 622c, 622d. Cable-side connectors 611a, 612a to 612c, 612d to 612f, 612g, and 612q respectively corresponding to ˜622f, 622g, and 622q are connected. After connecting these cable side connectors to the board side connector, the cover member 680 is attached to the mounting table 660.

  Specifically, the locking cylinder 634 of the cover member 680 is fitted into the locking hole 661 b of the corresponding locking hole 661 of the mounting table 660. Then, by pushing the locking cylinder 634 into the locking hole 661b, the locking claw 661c in the locking hole 661b is engaged with the locking hole 684a of the locking cylinder 684. Thereby, it becomes impossible to release the engagement between the locking claw 661c and the locking hole 684a from the outside, and as shown in FIG. 62, the mounting table 660 and the cover member 680 are connected to the locking hole. If the part 661 or the locking cylinder 634 is not broken, it is in a state where it is assembled so that it cannot be removed.

  When the mounting table 660 and the cover member 680 are assembled, as shown in FIG. 63A, the upper surfaces of both ends of the cable-side connector 611a connected to the board-side connector 621a of the operation unit relay board 110 are the cover members. The covering surfaces 681c and 681c of 680 are covered, the movement of the cable-side connector 611a in the pulling direction from the board-side connector 621a is restricted, and the removal of the cable-side connector 611a from the board-side connector 621a is restricted. ing.

  When the mounting table 660 and the cover member 680 are assembled, as shown in FIG. 63 (b), upper surfaces of both ends of the cable-side connector 612g connected to the board-side connector 622g of the operation unit relay board 110, and the operation unit relay. The upper surfaces of both ends of the cable-side connector 612q connected to the board-side connector 622q of the board 110 are covered with the covering pieces 683, 683, 683 of the cover member 680, and the cable-side connector 612g is removed from the board-side connector 622g. The movement and the movement of the cable side connector 612q in the direction from the board side connector 622q are restricted, and the removal of the cable side connector 612g from the board side connector 622g and the removal of the cable side connector 612q from the board side connector 622q are restricted. It has come to be.

  Next, the connection between the cable side connector 611a and the board side connector 621a, the connection between the cable side connector 612g and the board side connector 622g, and the situation when releasing the connection between the cable side connector 612q and the board side connector 622q will be described. .

  To release the connection between the cable side connector 611a and the board side connector 621a, the connection between the cable side connector 612g and the board side connector 622g, and the connection between the cable side connector 612q and the board side connector 622q, cover with a tool such as a nipper. The connecting piece 684a connecting the locking cylinder 684 of the member 680 is broken. As a result, the main body of the cover member 680 and the locking cylinder 684 are separated, and the cover member 680 can be removed from the mounting table 660. By removing the cover member 680 from the mounting table 660, the covering surfaces 681c, 681c The restriction on the movement of the cable side connector 611a in the unplugging direction is released, and the restriction on the movement of the cable side connector 612g in the unplugging direction and the movement of the cable side connector 612q in the unplugging direction by the covering pieces 683, 683, 683 is also released. Therefore, the connection between the cable side connector 611a and the board side connector 621a, the connection between the cable side connector 612g and the board side connector 622g, and the connection between the cable side connector 612q and the board side connector 622q can be released. .

  When the cover member 680 is removed from the mounting table 660, the main body of the cover member 680 and the locking cylinder 684 are broken. Once the cover member 680 is broken, the original state is not obtained, and the separated locking cylinder 684 is removed from the mounting table 660. Therefore, the cable side connector 611a and the board side connector 621a are connected, the cable side connector 612g and the board side connector 622g are connected, and the cable side connector 612q and the board side connector are connected. The trace which canceled the connection with 622q will remain.

  As described above, in the slot machine 1 of the present embodiment, the main control unit 41 transmits the reception buffer that stores the command received by the sub control unit 91 from the main control unit 41 to the sub control unit 91. A storage area is provided in which a larger number of commands can be stored than the command storage area of the normal command transmission buffer in which commands are stored. Thereby, in the case where an operation test board such as a command simulator is connected to the effect control board 90 to perform an operation test in order to check whether the sub-control unit 91 operates normally during development or before shipment. Even in the case where inspection commands are transmitted continuously, the number of inspection commands that can be transmitted at one time and the transmission interval are assumed to be a storage area of a normal command transmission buffer provided in the main control unit 41, that is, a normal game. The number of storage areas allocated in such a number that does not overflow is not limited according to the number of storage areas (16 commands in this embodiment), but the limit of the storage area of the receiving buffer (128 in this embodiment) Command) can be transmitted continuously, so that the efficiency of the operation test can be effectively increased.

  Further, in this embodiment, for each inspection command, a plurality of lighting parts, liquid crystal display 51, touch panel and other effect parts can be individually designated and an operation test can be performed. By transmitting an inspection command for designating each production component such as a certain electrical decoration component, liquid crystal display 51, and touch panel, it is possible to accurately inspect whether or not each production component operates normally.

  In the present embodiment, when an operation test is performed in the slot machine 1, it is possible to specify only one output port, a production component corresponding to the output port, and an operation mode thereof with one inspection command. Therefore, a storage area that can store a larger number of commands based on the number of output ports is provided in the storage area of the reception buffer, and operation tests of all the production parts are performed collectively. In this case, even when the inspection commands corresponding to the respective output ports are continuously transmitted, the reception buffer does not overflow, so that the operation test can be performed more efficiently.

  In this embodiment, it is possible to specify only one output port, a production component corresponding to the output port and its operation mode with one inspection command, but with one inspection command, It may be possible to specify only one performance component and its operation correspondence. In this case, by providing a storage area in the reception buffer that can store more commands than the number of performance components, When performing production component operation tests in a batch, even if inspection commands corresponding to each production component are sent continuously, the reception buffer does not overflow, so the operation test is more efficient. It can be performed.

  Further, when the CPU 91a receives an inspection command for designating an operation check of the touch panel and performs an operation check of the touch panel, the CPU 91a prohibits the command reception interrupt process until a touch operation is detected. Even if a new command is transmitted during this period, the new command is not received until the touch operation is detected and the operation check is completed. The processing based on it is not performed. For this reason, even when an inspection command is erroneously transmitted without waiting for the completion of the operation check of the touch panel, the operation check of the touch panel can be normally performed.

  The CPU 91a not only prohibits command reception interrupt processing but also stores it in the reception buffer until a touch operation is detected after receiving an inspection command designating a touch panel operation check. Even when the command has already been received and the received command is stored in the reception buffer, the touch operation is detected and the operation check is completed. Processing based on commands stored in the reception buffer is also not performed. For this reason, even when another inspection command is transmitted continuously with the inspection command designating the operation check of the touch panel, the operation check of the touch panel can be normally performed.

  In this embodiment, the touch panel is applied as the production operation means. However, production operation means other than the touch panel, such as buttons and dials, may be applied, and operation checks other than the production operation means other than the touch panel may be performed. Even in the case of performing the operation check even if the inspection command is erroneously transmitted without waiting for the completion of the operation check by prohibiting the reception of the command until the operation of the production operation means is detected in the same manner as described above. The inspection command can be normally performed, and the command stored in the reception buffer is not read out until the operation of the production operation means is detected, so that the inspection command specifying the operation check is continuously performed. Even when the inspection command is transmitted, the operation check can be normally performed.

  In this embodiment, the CPU 41a executes a command transmission process at a rate of once every four timer interrupt processes, that is, at an interval of 2.24 ms, and is stored in the normal command transmission buffer in one command transmission process. By transmitting only one of the commands and the door command stored in the door command transmission buffer, even when a plurality of commands are transmitted continuously, they are transmitted with an interval of at least 2.24 ms. Thus, the sub-control unit 91 side can reliably acquire these continuously transmitted commands.

  The CPU 41a sets the value of the delay counter at random when transmitting the command, and transmits the command when the delay counter value becomes 0, and the transmission timing of the command is a predetermined time. Since it changes randomly in the range (0 to 35.84 ms), the sub-control unit 91 side performs an effect that assists the eye based on the reception timing of the command transmitted from the main control unit 41. Can be prevented.

  In addition, since the command stored in the normal command transmission buffer is executed in the timer interrupt process (main) performed by interrupting the basic process, the process is not delayed due to the delay of the command.

  Even when a plurality of commands are continuously transmitted, these commands are stored in the normal command transmission buffer provided in the RAM 41c in the order of generation, and some exceptions (door command, power-on command, Each command is transmitted in the order in which it is generated, that is, the command should be originally transmitted, except for the initialization command). Therefore, the sub-control unit 91 side grasps the control state of the CPU 41a in the correct order. It is possible to prevent the player from feeling uncomfortable due to a difference in the order of the effects.

  When the CPU 41a detects any operation of the single BET switch 5, the MAX BET switch 6, the start switch 7, the stop switches 8L, 8C, 8R, and the checkout switch 10, these switches are invalidated in the progress of the game. Regardless of whether or not the switch is being operated, an operation detection command indicating that an operation of any one of these switches has been detected and the type of the switch that has been operated is transmitted. The operation detected by can be specified regardless of whether or not the operation has been effectively performed. Therefore, in order to perform a production operation, the game is normally advanced without installing a new detection means. For this reason, these operating means are disabled during the progress of the game, using the operating means that are mounted for the purpose of detection and are detected by the CPU 41a. Also it is possible to perform an operation for directing to, CPU 91a is capable of performing a performance based on operation of the operation means.

  In this embodiment, when the CPU 41a detects any one of the BET switch 5, the MAXBET switch 6, the start switch 7, the stop switches 8L, 8C, 8R, and the checkout switch 10, these switches are played. Regardless of whether the switch is disabled or not, an operation detection command indicating that one of these switches has been detected and the type of the switch that has been operated is sent. However, among the one-sheet BET switch 5, the MAXBET switch 6, the start switch 7, the stop switches 8L, 8C, and 8R, and the checkout switch 10, when an operation of a switch that is invalidated in the progress of the game is detected , An operation detection command indicating that an operation of any one of these switches has been detected and the type of the operated switch Even in this case, in order to perform an operation for production, an operation means that is originally installed for advancing the game and is detected by the CPU 41a without installing a new detection means. Even if these operation means are disabled in the progress of the game, it becomes possible to perform an operation for production, and the CPU 91a can perform the production based on the operation of these operation means. it can.

  The front door 2b needs to be opened in order to perform any illegal act on the parts inside the slot machine 1 such as the game control board 40. Therefore, such fraud can be effectively prevented and can be detected early even if fraud is made.

  Further, the CPU 41a monitors the detection state of the door opening detection switch 25 about every 100 ms, and when the detection state of the door opening detection switch 25 changes, it only transmits a door command indicating the detection state after the change. It is not determined whether the front door 2b is opened from the detection state of the door opening detection switch 25, and the CPU 91a of the sub-control unit 91 changes to the detection state of the door opening detection switch 25 indicated by the door command received from the CPU 41a. Based on the determination result, it is determined whether the front door 2b is opened or not, and the door opening notification is performed. For this reason, the CPU 41a determines whether or not the front door 2b is opened from the detection state of the door opening detection switch 25 (notifying chattering prevention of the door opening detection switch 25, etc.) when notifying the opening of the front door 2b. There is no need to do this, and the control load on the CPU 41a can be reduced.

  Even when the detection state of the door opening detection switch 25 has not changed, the CPU 41a transmits a door command indicating the detection state of the door opening detection switch 25 at that time when the CPU 41a is activated and when one game is over. Even if the CPU 91a misses the door command at the time of change, the detection state of the door opening detection switch 25 can be always acquired at the time of starting and at the end of one game. Even when the detection state of the door opening detection switch 25 does not change, it is possible to prevent the state in which the change in the detection state of the door opening detection switch 25 is not reflected in the door opening notification from continuing.

  Further, the CPU 41a, as a general rule, when the transmission of the door command is requested (when the door command transmission request 2 is set) in a state where the normal command is stored in the normal command transmission buffer, The door command stored in the door command transmission buffer is transmitted with priority over the command stored in the transmission buffer, and the monitoring interval of the door opening detection switch 25 and the transmission interval of the door command are transmitted. The error can be suppressed as much as possible.

  In the normal command transmission waiting state (during delay) stored in the normal command transmission buffer, the delayed normal command is given priority over the door command, and the delay time has already been reached. Even though the timing is started, the delay control is not complicated by interrupting the timing. Further, the power-on command and the initialization command are transmitted with priority over all commands including the door command, and the return of the CPU 91a is delayed by transmitting other commands first. There is no.

  In this embodiment, once the door command transmission request 2 for commanding the transmission of the door command is set once, the detection state of the door opening detection switch 25 changes until the door command based on the command is transmitted. The door command is not updated, and even when the detection state of the door open detection switch 25 changes while waiting for transmission of the power-on command or the initialization command, the door command is overwritten without being transmitted. Can be prevented.

  Also, in this embodiment, a door command transmission buffer is provided separately from the normal command transmission buffer, and transmission management becomes complicated when the door command is transmitted with priority over the normal command. There is no end.

  In this embodiment, the door command is stored in the transmission buffer in the timer interrupt process (main) that periodically interrupts and executes the basic process, whereas the normal command is transmitted in the basic process. When storing door commands and normal commands in the same transmission buffer, it is necessary to disable interrupts when storing normal commands in the transmission buffer. If a door command is stored while interrupting while being stored in the transmission buffer, the normal command being processed will be overwritten, and the door command will be partially overwritten after returning. In such a configuration, interrupts are prohibited every time a normal command is stored, causing blurring of reel rotation and medals to be paid out. However, as described above, the door command transmission buffer is provided separately from the normal command transmission buffer as described above. It is necessary to prohibit interrupts when storing normal commands, even if the normal command is stored in the transmission buffer in the basic processing, and stored in the transmission buffer in the timer interrupt processing (main) executed by interrupt. This eliminates the above problems.

  In this embodiment, the monitoring interval of the door opening detection switch 25 is the monitoring interval of the door opening detection switch 25 until the normal command stored in the normal command transmission buffer is transmitted after the door command is transmitted. Therefore, even when the detection state of the door open detection switch 25 is continuously changed, the next door command is transmitted after the door command is transmitted. In the meantime, at least one normal command stored in the normal command transmission buffer can be transmitted, so that the normal command transmission buffer does not overflow.

  In this embodiment, the touch panel controller 99 determines that the beam is defective when any of the beams from the light emitting devices 57a and 57b is blocked for 60 seconds continuously, and invalidates the corresponding beam coordinates. If the light receiving devices 57a and 57b and the light emitting devices 56a and 56b are damaged, a solid object is attached, or an object is placed, the defective beam only is invalidated. Since the touch operation can be detected by an effective beam, the touch panel can function normally even if a defective beam occurs, and the touch panel can be detected even though the touch operation can be detected by a normal beam. It can be prevented from becoming unusable.

  Even when the touch panel controller 99 determines that the beam is defective and invalidates the corresponding beam coordinates, if the shielding state from the light emitting devices 56a and 56b is released thereafter, the invalidated beam coordinates are used. The detection of the touch operation is enabled again, and the invalidation can be automatically canceled when the defective beam is restored.

  Further, the CPU 91a transmits a defective beam analysis request command every second, and when the report returned from the touch panel controller 99 indicates that there are two or more continuous beams that are shielded for 10 seconds or more, That is, when there is a possibility that some object is located on the touch panel, a notification that prompts the removal of the object is performed, so that a defective beam due to the presence of these objects can be detected and eliminated at an early stage.

  In addition, since notification is made to prompt the removal of an object at a stage (10 seconds) earlier than the time (60 seconds) until the beam coordinates associated with the defective beam are invalidated, before the beam coordinates are invalidated, It is possible to remove the cause of the defective beam.

  In the slot machine 1 of the present embodiment, as a result of the internal lottery, the table type stop control and the control type stop control according to the reel stop timing (first stop, second stop, or third stop) Therefore, it is not necessary to prepare a stop control table in advance for all the stop times of the reels as a result of all the internal lottery, so that the storage capacity of the stop control table can be reduced.

  Internal lottery results are lost, red cherry, big bonus (1), big bonus (1) + small role, blue cherry, big bonus (2), big bonus (2) + small role, white cherry, big bonus (3) In the case of big bonus (3) + small combination, stop control by the table method or the table + control method for all stop timings of the first stop, the second stop and the third stop, that is, a stop prepared in advance While the stop control using the control table is performed, if the result of the internal lottery is bell, replay (1), replay (2), big bonus (4), big bonus (5), the first stop Only the table method or the table + control method is used for stop control, and the remaining second and third stops are controlled by the control method. KazuSatoshi is doing a stop control that does not require a stop control table. In other words, when winning the bell, replay (1), replay (2), big bonus (4), big bonus (5), lose or red cherry, big bonus (1), big bonus (1) + small role, blue Stop control by the control method for more stop times than when winning the cherry, big bonus (2), big bonus (2) + small role, white cherry, big bonus (3), big bonus (3) + small role Going out, lost or red cherry, big bonus (1), big bonus (1) + small role, blue cherry, big bonus (2), big bonus (2) + small role, white cherry, big bonus (3 ), Big Bonus (3) + Small Bonus, Bell, Replay (1), Replay (2), Big Bonus (4), Big Bonus 5) Since the stop control by the table method or the table + control method is performed for the stop time relatively larger than the winning time, the display result derived to the reel can be varied, while the bell, replay (1), replay When (2), Big Bonus (4), Big Bonus (5) are won, Loss or Red Cherry, Big Bonus (1), Big Bonus (1) + Small Role, Blue Cherry, Big Bonus (2), Big Bonus (2) + small role, white cherry, big bonus (3), big bonus (3) + stop time is controlled by the control method for more stop times than when winning the small role, bell, replay (1), Replay (2), Big Bonus (4), Big Bonus (5) A paid capacity can be significantly reduced. In other words, the display results can be varied according to the nature of the result of the internal lottery, and the storage capacity of the sliding frame number data can be reduced.

  In this embodiment, the first stop is always controlled by the table method or the table + control method regardless of the result of the internal lottery. The same stop control method can be used, and the display results are not monotonous and necessary even when winning the bell, replay (1), replay (2), big bonus (4), and big bonus (5) It is possible to reduce the storage capacity of the sliding frame number data.

  In the present embodiment, red cherry, big bonus (1), big bonus (1) + small role, blue cherry, big bonus (2), big bonus (2) + small, which may be missed depending on the timing of the stop operation. When winning a winning combination, white cherry, big bonus (3), big bonus (3) + small role, stop control tables for all stopping times, that is, more stopping times than when winning a missing role Since the stop control is performed by the table + control method used, the winning combination is won, and the display result when the winning combination is lost can be diversified.

  In particular, because of the winning combination of the big bonuses (1) to (3) that can be expected to win many medals among the roles that cause the loss, the stop control is performed by the table + control method using the stop control table. It is possible to diversify the display results (so-called chance eyes and reach eyes) when these winning big bonuses (1) to (3) are missed. Further, in the present embodiment, stop control by the table method using the stop control table is performed even in the case of a loss in which none of the roles is won in addition to the winning of the big bonuses (1) to (3). Therefore, it is possible to diversify the display result in the case of losing, and as a result, the degree of freedom of design of the display result that can appear even when the big bonuses (1) to (3) are won or not is increased. That is, since the stop position in the case of losing can be limited by the stop control table, it is easy to adjust the stop position and the appearance ratio that are likely to win the big bonuses (1) to (3). .

  In addition, when winning the bell, replay (1), replay (2), big bonus (4), and big bonus (5) that are not missed, the display results when the big bonuses (1) to (3) are missed ( The relationship with the chance eyes) is weak. In other words, when the bell, replay (1), and replay (2) appear, we cannot expect much special role winning, and when the big bonus (4) and big bonus (5) appear, the special role wins. Therefore, it is less necessary to diversify the display results when replay (1), replay (2), big bonus (4), and big bonus (5) are won. For this reason, in the present embodiment, the second stop and the third stop reel are selected at the time of winning a combination that does not cause a miss such as replay (1), replay (2), big bonus (4), big bonus (5). In other words, because the stop control is performed by a control method that does not use the stop control table for a relatively large number of stop timings compared to the winning of the winning role, it is possible to effectively reduce the storage capacity of the stop control table It becomes. That is, the display results can be varied according to the nature of the result of the internal lottery, and the storage capacity of the stop control table can be reduced.

  In the present embodiment, stop control is always performed by the table method or the table + control method for the first stop. That is, in this case, stop control is always performed using the stop control table registered in advance, so that when the special role is won, the stop that does not stop from the stop control table selected when the special role is not won By selecting the stop control table in which the number of sliding frames to be registered is registered and performing the stop control of the first stop, the reach that is established when the display result is derived to the first stop reel (so-called one-certain) It is possible to easily design the control for deriving the eye).

  In addition, if the result of the internal lottery is red cherry, bell + red cherry, big bonus (1), big bonus (1) + small role, each red cherry and big bonus (1) will have a maximum of 4 frames. Since the stop control is performed using the common table creation data (1) in which the stop control table drawn into the winning line in the range is defined, the result of the internal lottery is red cherry, bell + red cherry, big bonus (1), big Bonus (1) + Display result derived in the case of a small role can be designed more easily than when the reel stop control is performed by the control method, and red cherry, bell + red cherry, big bonus (1) , Big Bonus (1) + Small Bonus won each time the reel is stopped according to the lottery result without preparing the data for table creation individually Since it is possible to perform control to, reel 2L, 2C, while diversify display result of 2R, it is possible to reduce the storage capacity of the table creation data.

  In this embodiment, when the result of the internal lottery is blue cherry, bell + blue cherry, big bonus (2), big bonus (2) + small role, white cherry, bell + white cherry, big bonus (3 ), Even if it is a big bonus (3) + small role, stop using the common table creation data (2) and the common table creation data (3) similar to the common table creation data (1) In these cases, the same effect as described above is obtained. In the following, the effects related to stop control in the case where the result of the internal lottery is red cherry, bell + red cherry, big bonus (1), big bonus (1) + small role will be described, and blue cherry, bell + Blue Cherry, Big Bonus (2), Big Bonus (2) + Stop Control for Case of Small Bonus, White Cherry, Bell + White Cherry, Big Bonus (3), Big Bonus (3) + Small Bonus Since the same configuration is adopted in the stop control for the case, the stop control for the case of blue cherry, bell + blue cherry, big bonus (2), big bonus (2) + small role, white cherry, bell The effect relating to the stop control in the case of + white cherry, big bonus (3), big bonus (3) + small combination is omitted.

  When the result of the internal lottery is red cherry, bell + red cherry, big bonus (1), big bonus (1) + small role, the number of sliding frames based on the common table creation data (1) is the stop operation position. For each stop operation position that stores the number of sliding tops that cannot be avoided for winning combinations other than the winning combination (abnormal winnings) or overlapping winnings after being stored in the virtual sliding top table every time, the stop prohibited position Since the number of sliding symbols at other stop operation positions is maintained and the number of sliding symbols at other stop operation positions is maintained, it becomes a stop position other than the stop prohibited position according to the result of the internal lottery. When the stop operation is performed at the stop operation position, the display result is the same, so even if only the red cherry is won and missed, the big bonus (1) is won and removed. Since the rate of crucible and the same display result and if is derived is high, it is possible to effectively increase the player's expectation for the big bonus (1) is elected.

  In particular, in this embodiment, as the number of sliding frames in the common table creation data (1), the stop operation position where the constituent symbols of the red cherry and the big bonus (1) cannot be drawn is a case of losing that occupies most of the usual cases. Since the number of sliding frames that stop chance chances that do not appear is determined in the case where no role is won, by performing the control as described above, the chance eyes are derived, The player's expectation that the big bonus (1) is won can be more effectively increased.

  Also, in this embodiment, a common table is created for the red cherries that win the prize and the special role that is advantageous to the player, such as a big bonus (1), only by stopping “Red Cherry” on the winning line of the left reel. Application data (1) is applied. In other words, if “Red 7” or “Red Cherry” does not stop on the winning line on the left reel at the time of winning the red cherry, the big bonus (1) is won as the number of sliding frames for the middle and right reels. The same number of sliding frames will be applied. In addition, even if “Red 7” stops on the winning line of the left reel at the time of winning the red cherry, the stop operation position where the big bonus (1) will be missed is the number of sliding frames of the middle reel and the right reel. As in the case where the big bonus (1) is won, the same number of sliding frames is applied. For this reason, if the cherry is won and missed, the same stop position will be stopped at a higher rate than when the big bonus (1) is missed, so the big bonus (1) is won. It is possible to increase the player's expectation for being more effective.

  In this embodiment, only the “red cherry” is stopped on the winning line of the left reel, and a common table is created for the red cherry to be won and a special role advantageous to the player such as a big bonus (1). Data (1) is applied, but common table creation data for the winning combination and the special combination depending on the combination of the display results of any two reels or all reels. In this case, data for creating a common table is applied to a combination with a lot of missing items (a combination in which the corresponding symbol is placed beyond the pullable range) and a special combination. Even in this case, the same stop position will be stopped at a higher rate when the special role is missed due to an increase in the proportion of missed specials. The player's expectation can be more effectively enhanced for.

  In this example, since the red cherry can be won at the same time as the special role, even if the red cherry wins and the red cherry wins and the chance is not derived, the special role Therefore, even in such a case, it is possible to increase the player's expectation that the special role has been won.

  In this embodiment, when the result of the internal lottery is red cherry, big bonus (1), big bonus (1) + small role, all reels are stopped (first stop, first bonus) Since the stop control table based on the common table creation data (1) is applied at 2 stop and 3rd stop), the result of the internal lottery is red cherry, big bonus (1), big bonus (1) + It is possible to easily design a display mode derived in the case of a small role, in particular, a display mode of chances derived only when these roles are won.

  In the present embodiment, when the result of the internal lottery is red cherry, bell + red cherry, big bonus (1), big bonus (1) + small role, The stop control table based on the common table creation data (1) is applied at the time of one stop, the second stop, and the third stop. At least the reel that stops first, that is, the first stop Even if the number of sliding frames based on the common table creation data is applied to the stop reel, the same effect as described above can be obtained. In other words, it is possible to easily design the appearance of the outcome that stops first, that is, the appearance that the player pays the most attention to.

  Further, in this embodiment, different stop control tables are applied when the big bonus (1) is won and when the player loses. For example, the first stop is performed both when the big bonus (1) is won and when the player loses. Common stop control table, that is, stop control table of common table creation data (1) even when it is lost only at the first stop (however, in this case, red cherry will win the left reel. May be used to perform stop control. In this way, when the display result is stopped on the first stop reel, the big bonus (1) is won from the stop position. Since it is not possible to determine whether or not the player is playing, the player's expectation can be maintained thereafter. Further, as described above, since the red cherry is won in the left reel, when the left reel is in the first stop, even if it is lost, the left reel is controlled by performing the stop control by the table + control method. Even if it becomes the 1st stop, it can prevent that red cherry won.

  In this embodiment, when stop control is performed by the table method, before the stop operation becomes effective, that is, before the stop operation is detected, the number of slide pieces registered in the stop control table is expanded to obtain a virtual slide piece. When the stop operation is detected, the virtual sliding piece table is referred to and the number of sliding pieces at the corresponding stopping operation position is acquired and the stop control is performed. Since it is not necessary to expand the stop control table and acquire the number of sliding frames after detection, it is possible to quickly perform control to stop the reel after the stop operation is detected. The time lag until the reel stops can be shortened as much as possible.

  Also, when stopping control is performed using the control method, before the stop operation becomes effective, the stop position corresponding to the winning combination is searched for each stop operation position, and the number of sliding frames based on the search result is virtually slipped. It is stored in the frame table, and when a stop operation is detected, the virtual slide frame table is referred to obtain the number of sliding frames at the corresponding stop operation position and stop control is performed. Since it is not necessary to search for a stop position according to the winning combination after the detection of the stop, it is possible to quickly control the reel after the stop operation is detected. The time lag until stopping can be shortened as much as possible.

  Further, in this embodiment, even when stop control is performed by the table + control method, the number of sliding symbols registered in the stop control table is expanded and stored in the virtual sliding top table before the stop operation becomes effective. In addition, the stop position is acquired for each number of sliding frames, the number of sliding frames in the virtual sliding frame table is updated based on the priority with the acquired stop position, and when the stop operation is detected, Referring to the sliding piece table, the number of sliding pieces at the corresponding stop operation position is acquired and the stop control is performed. After the stop operation is detected, the stop control table is expanded to obtain the number of sliding pieces. Since there is no need to compare the priority or priority, update the number of sliding frames, etc., it is possible to quickly control the reel to stop after the stop operation is detected. After detection, the reel can be as short as possible a time lag until it stops.

  In the present embodiment, the stop control method, the table method and the stop control table to be referred to when performing the stop control by the table + control method, the search order of the stop position when performing the stop control by the control method, the table + control method A control pattern for performing reel stop control, such as the order of determination of priority of stop position when performing stop control, is uniquely determined for the result of the internal lottery while all reels are rotating, These control patterns are uniquely selected according to the result of the internal lottery, and the stop control of the reels is performed according to the selected control pattern, and when any reel has already stopped, the internal lottery As a result, a control pattern uniquely defined for the stop position of the stopped reel is selected, and according to the selected control pattern If the reel stop status (and the stopped position of the stopped reel (display result)) are all the same as a result of the internal lottery, the same control is performed. Since reel stop control is performed based on the control pattern, a lottery (for example reel There is no need for further selection by control distribution lottery or the like, and the control when stopping the reels is not complicated.

  In this embodiment, when any of the reels is already stopped, the reels are determined according to the internal lottery result, the reel stop status and the stop position of the stopped reel. Stop control is performed, but when any reel is already stopped, the internal lottery result, the reel stop status, and the stop operation position of the stopped reel are uniquely determined. The reel stop control may be performed according to the control pattern, and in this way, the internal lottery result is the same, and the stopped position (stop symbol) of the stopped reel is the same. However, if the stop operation position of the stopped reels is different, different table creation data may be applied, so the display results of the reels are more diverse. It can be.

  In this case, the stop operation position of the reel that has been stopped is determined in a unit of a range where the 1/2 symbols change, that is, a unit less than the range where one symbol changes, and is uniquely determined for the stop operation position. Preferably, the reel stop control is performed according to the control pattern, that is, it is possible to select different control patterns for different number of steps within a range where one symbol fluctuates from the number of steps where a certain symbol is located at the reference position. In this way, even if the stop position of the stopped reel is the same, and the timing at which the stop operation is performed is within the range where one symbol fluctuates, the control pattern applied to other reels is changed. Therefore, the display results of each reel can be further diversified.

  Further, when any of the reels is already stopped, the reel stop control is performed according to a control pattern uniquely determined with respect to the internal lottery result, the reel stop status, and the stop operation position of the stopped reel. For example, in the case where no combination is won (losing), the same display result is obtained when a stop operation is performed within the range of the area number where the same stop position is determined on a specific reel. However, only when a stop operation is performed in the area of a specific area number among the area numbers where the same stop position is determined, the display result that constitutes the chance pattern as the control pattern of the other reel is displayed. Select table creation data that can be derived, and stop operation is performed in an area other than a specific area number among the area numbers where the same stop position is defined. If it, it is preferable to select the control pattern capable of deriving the display results that constitute a chance eyes as the control pattern for the other reel. As a result, even if the stop position of the reel at the time when the specific reel is stopped is the same, the stop operation position is different so that the chance is finally controlled so that it can be derived, and the control cannot be derived Therefore, it is possible to prevent the display result of the reels from becoming monotonous when none of the roles is won (losing).

  Further, when any of the reels is already stopped, the reel stop control is performed according to a control pattern uniquely determined with respect to the internal lottery result, the reel stop status, and the stop operation position of the stopped reel. In each case, each time the reels stop, whether the reel to be stopped is the left reel, the middle reel, or the right reel, the area number of the stop operation position of the corresponding reel, the area number of the stop position of the corresponding reel Are preferably transmitted to the sub-control unit 91, so that the CPU 91a of the sub-control unit 91 can detect only the stop position of the reel when the reel is stopped. Instead, it is possible to perform different effects depending on the stop operation position.

  In particular, when no combination is won in the normal gaming state (losing), the same display is displayed when a stop operation is performed within the range of the area number where the same stop position is determined on a specific reel. The result is derived, but only when the stop operation is performed in the area of the specific area number among the area numbers where the same stop position is determined, the display result that configures the chance pattern as the control pattern of the other reels As a control pattern for other reels, when a control pattern that can be derived is selected and a stop operation is performed in an area other than a specific area number among the area numbers where the same stop position is determined, When you select a control pattern that can be used to derive the display results that make up the chance, and you have won one of the special roles in the normal gaming state, Among the area numbers for which one stop position is determined, the display result that configures the chance pattern as the control pattern of other reels for more area numbers than when no combination is won in the normal gaming state When a control pattern that can be derived is selected, when the reel stop command is received, if the stop operation position satisfies the chance derivation condition, that is, the display result that constitutes the chance sight can be derived. If the control pattern is a stop operation position that is selected, a special role is won at a higher rate than if it is another stop operation position that does not satisfy the chance derivation condition but has the same stop position. Special effects (for example, unusual stop sounds, etc.) may be given to notify the possibility of the operation being performed. Since the special effect is performed at the time of stopping, there is a higher possibility that the chance chance is finally derived than when the special effect is not performed when the specific reel is stopped. It is possible to effectively raise the player's expectation for the derivation of the chance and the winning of the special role.

  In this embodiment, during the regular bonus, when a small role other than the bell wins, the bell is always won at the same time, and the control that draws the combination of the bells with the most payouts into the winning line is given priority. If any small combination is won during the bonus, the bell can be always won regardless of the operation timing of the stop switches 8L, 8C, 8R by the player. In other words, even if a role with a smaller number of payouts such as red cherries, blue cherries, and white cherries is elected than the bell in the regular bonus, more medals will be awarded than when the bell wins and red cherries, blue cherries, and white cherries win. Since red cherries, blue cherries, and white cherries have been won, the number of medals that can be earned during the regular bonus will not decrease.

  In this embodiment, the bell with the largest number of payouts in the regular bonus is simultaneously selected when a small role smaller than the number of payouts of the bells is won. Is not the most paid out small part, but if the largest number of medals are awarded during a regular bonus by stopping on multiple winning lines, such a small part will be paid out more than that. You may make it win at the same time as a small role with few.

  Also, in this embodiment, the bell which is the small payout with the largest payout number in all gaming states is simultaneously won when the small role with a smaller payout number is won in the regular bonus. If at least a small role with the highest number of payouts is selected at the same time when a small number with a smaller number of payouts is elected at the same time during the regular bonus, The number of medals that can be earned in a regular bonus is reduced. It does not have to be a small role with a large number of payouts.

  In the slot machine 1 of the present embodiment, after the end of the big bonus (1) (2), it is controlled so that the winning probability of the replay (2) that triggers the transition to RT (2) is increased to RT (1). Thus, the player's expectation to shift to RT (2) can be enhanced by being controlled by RT (1).

  In RT (2), the payout rate of medals per game is higher than that of RT (1), the number of predetermined games as the end condition is larger than RT (1), and more medals than RT (1). Therefore, by controlling to RT (1), it is possible to further increase the player's expectation to shift to RT (2).

  Also, RT (1) and RT (2) both have an expected increase rate of medals per game exceeding 1, and an increase in medals can be expected only by being controlled by RT (1). By shifting to 2), further increase in medals can be expected.

  In addition, RT (2) will be special if any special role is won after the start of RT (2) and before the specified number of games is reached, if the selected special role does not win. RT (2) will not end with the winning of and if the selected special combination is not awarded, it will be possible to continue control to RT (2) until the specified number of games is reached. Even if a special role is won in 2), if the selected special role is not won, RT (2) can be consumed until the specified number of games is reached, giving the player a sense of loss. There is no end.

  In addition, since the winning flag of the special role is carried over after the next game until the special role is won, after the RT (2) reaches the specified number of games, the special role won during that time is awarded. This makes it possible to increase the player's expectation for winning the special role at the end of RT (2).

  In addition, RT (2) ends when RT (2) starts, but before the specified number of games is reached, when a fallen combination (any cherry) wins, RT (2) After the start of the game, even if the falling combination is won, the player performs a stop operation at a timing outside the pulling-in range of the combination of falling combination, that is, the technical intervention of the player Since RT (2) can be continued by this, the interest associated with RT (2) can be enhanced. At this time, the operating procedure for avoiding winnings varies depending on the type of fallen combination, and there is no common avoidance procedure for all types of fallen combinations. Thus, it is determined whether or not RT (2) continues depending on whether or not it is hit, and the interest associated with RT (2) can be further enhanced.

  In addition, the red cherry, blue cherry, and white cherry that are falling down are three or fewer (three) medals that are necessary to set the maximum bet number (3) that can be set for one game. Since the winning is accompanied by payout of the slot machine 1, not only the player will not suffer a great disadvantage even if the fallen role is avoided, but the winning probability of red cherry, blue cherry and white cherry is the payout rate of the slot machine 1 Will not be greatly affected.

  Further, in this embodiment, the number of medals to be paid out with the winning of one (1) to (3) is one necessary for setting the minimum number of bets for one game. It is possible to hardly influence the payout rate of the slot machine 1.

  In this embodiment, three medals, which are the number of medals necessary for setting the maximum bet number (3) that can be set for one game, are associated with winning of red cherry, blue cherry, and white cherry. Although it is designed to be paid out to the player, it is preferable that the number is less, and the number of bets required for setting the number of bets in the minimum unit is two or more, and the payout rate of the slot machine 1 is more affected. Can be difficult to give.

  Also, if any special role is won in RT (2), even if one of the cherries wins, if one of the cherries wins if the selected special role is not won, Since RT (2) will not end until the specified number of games is reached, during this period, if any cherry wins, the winning cherries will be awarded to win the special role. Since more medals can be earned compared to, the number of medals that can be earned afterwards when compared to when not winning, if any special role is won during RT (2) Can be increased.

  In addition, red cherry, blue cherry, and white cherry that fall are roles that can be won at the same time as special roles, so even if you win any cherries after the start of RT (2), Since there is a possibility that the special role has been won, even in such a case, it is possible to effectively increase the player's expectation for the special role. Furthermore, if the special role is won at the same time, RT (2) will not end even if any cherry wins, and RT (2) will continue until the specified number of games is reached. Despite the winning of the cherry, the RT (2) continues, so that the winning of the special role can be indirectly notified.

  In this embodiment, in the state where no special combination is won in RT (2), when any of the cherries wins, and the number of falling combination notifications remains, the type of the selected cherries Since the falling role type notification is executed, the player can recognize the type of the winning cherry by the notified color when the falling role type notification is executed. As a result, it is possible to know the operation procedure for avoiding the winning of a cherry that may have been won, it is possible to continue RT (2), and the number of games that RT (2) continues is increased by the number of falling combination notifications. Since it can be varied, the interest associated with RT (2) can be further enhanced. In addition, the player does not always have to practice an operation procedure for avoiding a winning combination of a falling combination in RT (2), and an operating procedure for avoiding a winning combination of a falling combination is performed only when the falling combination type notification is executed. Since it only has to be performed, the burden on the player in RT (2) can be reduced.

  In addition, whether or not to give the number of falling combination notifications, that is, when any kind of cherries out of a plurality of types of cherries is won in the state where no special combination is won during RT (2) The big bonus (1) (2) is performed during the big bonus (1) (2) and the result is notified during the big bonus (1) (2). It is possible to enhance the inside interest.

  In addition, a lottery-notification lottery is executed at the opportunity corresponding to the BB effect mode selected by the player, and the probability corresponding to the BB effect mode is also applied as the winning probability at that time. The timing for determining whether or not to give the number of falls notifications depending on the BB performance mode and the expectation at that timing change, so that the player is actively participating in the game. be able to. Furthermore, since the notification that the winning combination of the falling combination notification is won is also made at an opportunity corresponding to the BB effect mode, the timing of the falling combination notification lottery and the notification timing thereof can be associated with each other.

  In addition, when winning the falling combination notification lottery, a notification number lottery is performed in which one of a plurality of different numbers is selected as the falling combination notification number, and the winning combination won in the notification number lottery Depending on the number of notifications, the number of times the fallen role type notification is executed when any cherry wins in the state where no special combination is won in RT (2), and as a result, RT (2) Since the number of games that can be expected to continue will also change, the interest associated with RT (2) can be further enhanced.

  The falling role notification lottery is performed for the big bonus (1) and the big bonus (2), and the big bonus (1) has a larger number of prescribed games of RT (1) to which the transition is made later, and is relatively Since the ratio of selecting a large number of falling combination notifications (3 times, 4 times) is high, the big bonus (1) can be expected to acquire more medals than the big bonus (2).

  As described above, in this embodiment, the number of continuing games of RT (1) thereafter and the number of times the falling role type notification is executed in RT (2) vary depending on the type of special role. Depending on the type, the increase or decrease of medals can be sharpened.

  In this embodiment, not only during the big bonuses (1) and (2), but also at RT (1) and RT (2), the falling combination notification lottery is executed at the time of a loss. (1) Since the number of falling combination notifications can be given even during (2), when the number of falling combination notifications disappears during RT (2), or during the big bonus (1) (2) Even if the number of times cannot be obtained, RT (2) can be expected to continue.

  Further, in this embodiment, when the winning combination lottery in the big bonus (1) (2) is won, the contents displayed on the liquid crystal display 51 at the end of the big bonus (1) (2). The player executes a mini-game that obtains a score by operating the touch panel according to the game, and when the touch panel is operated in the mini-game, the number of falling role notifications, that is, the falling While the number of falling role notifications that can avoid the end of RT (2) is given at the time of winning, the mini game is canceled when no touch panel operation is performed in the mini game or before the mini game ends In such a case, the number of falling combination notifications is not given. For this reason, the player tries to obtain the number of falling rolls that is advantageous when the game is advanced, and actively operates the touch panel. Thereby, the willingness for the player to operate a touch panel in a mini game can be heightened.

  In this embodiment, the mini game is illustrated as an effect accompanied by technical intervention such as operation of the touch panel. For example, the winning combination is notified by the operation of the touch panel, but the touch panel is not operated. In this case, a winning combination notification effect or the like in which the notification of the winning combination is not performed may be used.

  Also, in this embodiment, when the remaining number of games in RT (2) is 3, if the winning of special role is not informed at that time, it continues for 3 games until the end of RT (2). An effect is always executed to notify whether or not a special role is won in the final game of RT (2) or the next game of the final game, and at the end of RT (2), that is, special Since the continuous performance is executed at the timing when the winning of the winning combination is most expected, and notification of whether or not the special winning combination is won is performed, it is possible to effectively enhance the player's expectation for the winning of the special winning combination.

  In addition, when no winning combination is won in RT (2), that is, whether or not a continuous effect is executed in response to a loss that has a low appearance frequency in RT (2) and is likely to win a special role A continuous production lottery is performed to determine whether or not a continuous production lottery is won. When winning, the winning pattern is determined by the continuous effect lottery, the continuous effect based on the determined winning pattern is executed, and the winning of the special role is notified, so that the background of the display screen in the RT (2) effect The background selection lottery is selected to change the background of the display screen in the RT (2) effect to the background selected in the background selection lottery, and the background of the RT (2) effect in RT (2) It is possible to increase the player's expectation for the winning of the special role by reduction, it is possible to increase the interest associated with the RT (2) production effectively.

  Also, in the background selection lottery, the evening and night are selected at a higher rate when the big bonus (2) is won than when the big bonus (3) is won, and the big bonus (1) is selected. When winning, the evening and night are selected at a higher rate. For this reason, when the background is changed to evening or night, it is possible to expect the winning of the big bonus (1) which is more advantageous for the player. On the other hand, even when the big bonus (1) is won, the day is selected for 50% and the background may not be changed. Therefore, even if the background does not change, it can be expected that the big bonus (1) will be won. It has become.

  As described above, in the background selection lottery, the background is selected with a probability corresponding to the type of the special role won, and the type of the special role won according to the method of changing the background of the RT (2) effect is selected. Since it becomes possible to suggest, the interest accompanying RT (2) production can be improved more effectively.

  In this embodiment, the production mode (background) of the RT (2) production is changed on the border of the continuous production triggered by a loss that may have been won for the special role. You may make it change a production | presentation aspect on the boundary of the change production | presentation which shows the possibility that a production | presentation aspect changes, and also in this case, there is a possibility of winning simultaneously with a special combination during RT (2) When winning a prize, it is preferable to execute a change effect triggered by the chance that the chance of winning the special role is derived, and in this way, the special role may be won Since the change effect is executed only when a characteristic event occurs, it is possible to effectively increase the player's expectation for winning the special role by the change effect. Note that the same effect as described above can be obtained even if a change effect is executed when no winning combination is won.

  In addition, on the condition that the special role is elected during RT (2), an event that is unlikely to win the special role is triggered by an event that is unlikely to be won by the special role or that event alone. In order to change the RT (2) effect effect mode by performing the continuous effect or the aforementioned change effect, or to change the RT (2) effect effect mode without any continuous effect or change effect. Anyway, by doing so, it is possible to make the winning notification of the special role surprising.

  Also, in this embodiment, the RT (2) production direction changes on condition that the special role is won, but the special role is when the special role is won. The production mode of the RT (2) production may be changed with a higher probability than when it has not been won, and in this way, even if the production mode changes, the winning of the special role will not be confirmed. Interest can be maintained until RT (2) is completed.

  In the present embodiment, the replay notification effect indicating that either the replay or the special role is won is executed as the one-time effect described above in the normal gaming state, RT (1) and RT (2), and RT When replay (1) is won during (1) and RT (2), the replay notification effect is executed with a lower probability than when replay (1) is won in the normal gaming state. Therefore, even if the probability of replay (1) is increased by moving to RT (1) and RT (2), the frequency of replay notification effects will not be extremely increased along with that, and appropriate effects will be achieved. Balance can be maintained.

  In this embodiment, the replay notification effect is executed also at RT (1) and RT (2), but the replay notification effect is not executed at least at RT (1) and RT (2). Even in this case, the same effect as described above can be obtained.

  In the present embodiment, when the big bonus (4) or the big bonus (5) is won, the effect indicating the big bonus is not performed as when the big bonuses (1) to (3) are won. Until the end of the notification period after the transition to Big Bonus (4) or Big Bonus (5), the Big Bonus (4) or Big Bonus will be continued until the end of the notification period. (5) has been announced, and in fact, the big bonus (4) or big bonus (5) has been won and the game has already shifted to the big bonus (4) or big bonus (5). Even if you have a big bonus (4) or big bonus (5) suddenly, It is possible to impart surprising to trick users, it is possible to increase the interest caused by the transition to a big bonus (4) or big bonus (5) effectively.

  In addition, the combination of the big bonus (4) and the big bonus (5) is smaller than a conspicuous symbol such as “7”, and the number arranged on each reel is “bell” and “replay”. It is composed of two or more kinds of symbols, and it is difficult to understand that it is aligned with the winning line. For the roles other than the big bonus (4) and the big bonus (5), the reels 2L, 2C, Control is made so that the winning lines L1 to L4 are set across the symbols located on the straight line of 2R, while the big bonus (4) and the big bonus (5) are the upper stage in all reels. -The stop position is different between the middle and lower stages, and it is aligned with the winning lines L5 and L6 set across the symbols that are not on a straight line. Since it becomes more difficult to understand that the combination of S (4) and Big Bonus (5) is aligned with the winning line, it becomes difficult to determine that Big Bonus (4) or Big Bonus (5) has won, It is possible to impress that the big bonus (4) or big bonus (5) has suddenly started.

  In addition, the transition to the regular bonus at the same time as the transition to the big bonus (4) or the big bonus (5) greatly increases the probability of winning the bell, so when shifting to the big bonus (4) or the big bonus (5) Can be made to recognize that the bonus announcement production has been executed after the sign state (announcement period) that Bell frequently wins, so that he won the prize on his own with the frequent winning of Bell Even in this case, the player's expectation can be enhanced.

  In addition, when the small role is elected alone in a state other than the notice period and the special role is not elected, the first small role notification effect is executed at a higher rate than the second small role notification effect. On the other hand, when the small role is elected in the notification period, the second small role notification effect is executed at a higher rate than the first small role notification effect, and in the notification period, the notification period The second small role notification effect that is executed in a state where the special role is not elected in a state other than the above is executed at a high frequency, and accompanied by the second small role notification effect. It is possible to effectively increase the player's expectation during the notification period.

  The big bonus (4) and the big bonus (5) have different payout numbers as end conditions, that is, the amount of medals that can be acquired during the big bonus, and as described above, the big bonus (4) and the big bonus ( Even if the combination of 5) is aligned on the winning line, it is difficult for the player to understand. After the bonus notification, the same first bonus is applied to both the big bonus (4) and the big bonus (5) in the first bonus presentation period. Since the bonus effect is executed, it is difficult to determine whether or not the big bonus continues after the first bonus effect is completed, and the expectation that the big bonus will continue in the next game is difficult. Can be effectively increased.

  Also, if the big bonus continues, there is a possibility that continuation notification may be made at multiple timings during the period until the next game ends, and it is not known when it will be announced, so there is moderate tension It can be given, and the interest can be enhanced effectively, and the expectation to continue always can be maintained until the game ends.

  In this embodiment, in a state where the game sound effect is continuously output by the continuous effect or the bonus effect, when a certain time (30 seconds) elapses without the game progressing operation after the game ends, Control (silence control) is performed to lower the game sound effect that is being output at the volume (MAX), but the credit is adjusted even after a certain time (30 seconds) has elapsed since the game ended. In some cases, the control for lowering the game sound effect being output at normal volume (MAX) is performed without waiting for the elapse of a certain time (silence control), and before a certain time (30 seconds) elapses after the game ends. Even if a bet amount is set and a certain amount of time has elapsed since the end of the game, when the bet amount is settled and a standby command is sent, the normal volume (MAX ) Control to lower the game effect sound that is being output (silence control) is performed, and the player's willingness even before a certain time (30 seconds) has elapsed since the end of the previous game Since the volume of the continuous game sound effect can be lowered by this, even if the game is interrupted, the surrounding players are not disturbed.

  In addition, in the state where the game sound effect is continuously output by the continuous effect or the bonus effect, even if the predetermined time has passed after the game ends, if the bet number is set, the game sound effect is displayed. The control to mute is not performed, the player is willing to start the game, and the game sound effect is muted even though it must immediately return to the original volume There is nothing.

  In the slot machine 1 of the present embodiment, the rotation of the rotor 32a is rapidly braked by the two-phase excitation stop control by using the two-phase excitation stop control together with the two-phase excitation stop control. While being guided to the target stop angle position, and then obtaining a brake by exciting two brake phases at opposite positions across the stop phase of the target stop angle position by three-phase excitation stop control, Since the rotor 32a stops at the target stop angle position, the rotating rotor 32a can be stopped at the target stop angle position without vibrating. Furthermore, since the rotor 32a stops at the target stop angle position, the exact stop position of the rotor 32a is specified, so that the reel can be smoothly rotated at the start of rotation.

  Further, in this embodiment, when only the setting key switch 37 is turned on to start the setting change mode, the RAM 41c is initialized, but the stationary phase work is not initialized. Even in the gaming state after the setting change, data indicating the stop phase of the reel motors 32L, 32C, and 32R stored in the stop phase work is maintained. Therefore, even when the reel motors 32L, 32C, and 32R are rotated for the first time after the setting is changed, it is possible to specify these stop phases, and even in such a situation, the reels can be smoothly started to rotate. It is possible to prevent the reel from vibrating when the reel is rotated for the first time after the setting is changed, and it is possible to prevent the player from seeing that the setting has been changed.

  In addition, when the setting key switch 37 and the reset / setting switch 38 are both activated, the RAM 41c including the stop phase work can be initialized by shifting to the setting change mode. It is possible to prevent illegal programs and the like from staying resident by using the stop phase work assigned to store the excitation phase of the motor.

  In the slot machine 1 of this embodiment, after the game control is finished, it is determined whether or not the game is full based on the detection state of the full tank sensor 35a only once per game at the timing when the insertion of the medal is first detected. When it is determined that the tank is full, the progress of the game is disabled, and the full tank error state is controlled until a reset operation is performed.

  Also, in the next replay game in which the re-game player wins, the insertion of medals is not permitted until the game is over, so the insertion of medals is not detected effectively and Judgment of whether or not a full tank error has occurred is eliminated, and a full tank condition can be monitored efficiently and the control load required to determine the full tank condition is reduced. In addition, since the frequency of full tank errors can be reduced as much as possible, it is possible to make the player feel bothersome and to reduce the labor for the store clerk to eliminate the full tank state.

  In addition, since the full tank state is determined when the insertion of a medal is detected, in a replay game in which the insertion of a medal is prohibited, the determination as to whether the medal is full is inevitably omitted. In performing the control for omitting the determination of whether or not the replay game is full in the replay game, it is not particularly necessary to determine whether or not the game is a replay game.

  In addition, after the game control is finished, whether or not a full error has occurred at the timing when the insertion of medals is first detected in a state where the medals of the next game can be inserted, that is, at the timing when medals stored in the overflow tank 35 increase. Since the determination is performed, the full tank state can be determined at an efficient timing.

  In addition, after the game control is finished, when the insertion of the second medal or the third medal is detected in a state where the medal of the next game can be inserted, the bet number is set using credits. In some cases, an insufficient amount of bets may be set by inserting medals. In such a case, the game is determined to be full in the game even though the storage amount of the overflow tank 35 has increased. In this embodiment, after the game control is completed, the full tank state is detected at the timing when the insertion of the medal is first detected in the state where the medal of the next game can be inserted. Therefore, in a game in which the storage amount of the overflow tank 35 increases, it becomes possible to reliably detect the full tank state.

  Further, in this embodiment, even if the medal can be inserted after the game control is finished, the bet amount is set using the credit, and the game is started when the medal is not inserted and the game is started. The determination of whether or not the state is in a state is omitted, and in a game in which no medal is inserted and the storage amount of the overflow tank 35 does not increase, the determination of whether or not the full tank error has occurred is useless. It is possible to monitor the full tank condition efficiently without reducing the control load for determining the full tank condition and to reduce the frequency of full tank errors as much as possible. , It becomes possible to reduce the labor for the store clerk to eliminate the full state.

  In addition, since the full state is determined when the insertion of a medal is detected, the number of bets is set using credits, and it is inevitable when the game starts without a medal being inserted. The determination of whether or not the vehicle is full is omitted, and when the number of bets is set using credits and the game starts without a medal being inserted, it is determined whether or not the vehicle is full. In performing the control not to be performed, it is not particularly necessary to determine whether or not the credit is used.

  In this embodiment, after the game control is finished, it is determined whether or not the full tank flag is set at a timing before the next game medal can be inserted, and when the full tank flag is set, It is controlled to a full tank error state before the next game medal can be inserted. For this reason, for example, the reels 2L, 2C, and 2R are rotated once in a state where the reels 2L, 2C, and 2R are rotating by being controlled to a full tank error state from the start of the game to the end of the control of the game. The rotation state is stopped, and the full tank error state is controlled. Thereafter, when the full tank error state is canceled, the reels 2L, 2C, and 2R are rotated again, or the hopper motor 34b is driven to perform the medal payout operation. It is not necessary to perform complicated control such as stopping the medal payout operation once in a state of being in a state, controlling to a full tank error state, and then restarting the medal payout operation when the full tank error state is canceled. That is, it is not necessary to perform control such as interrupting the game control once and then restarting the game control, and the control related to the progress of the game can be prevented from becoming complicated.

  In the present embodiment, after the game control is finished, it is determined whether or not the full tank flag is set at a timing before the next game medal can be inserted. It is determined whether or not the full tank flag is set. If the full tank flag is set, the full tank error state may be controlled at a timing before the next game medal can be inserted. Even in this case, the same effect as described above can be obtained.

  In addition, even when the full tank state is determined after the game control is completed and the full tank flag is set, if the re-gamer has won a prize in the previous game and the next game is a replay game, the game is full. Since it is not controlled by the tan error state, the frequency of full tan errors can be further reduced, so that it is possible to make the player feel bothersome and reduce the labor for the store clerk to resolve the full tank state. It becomes.

  Further, in this embodiment, in the switch input determination process performed every 2.24 ms in the timer interrupt process, the detection signal output from the full tank sensor 35a only changes from the last off state to the on state, and a full error occurs. Therefore, it is not necessary to measure the duration time after changing from off to on, and the control related to the detection of the full tank error can be simplified.

  Further, in this embodiment, the determination as to whether or not the tank is full is made at the timing when the insertion of the medal is detected for the first time after the end of the game control, but whether or not the tank is full at least once per game. For example, as shown in the modification, after completion of the game control, it is determined whether or not the full game state is reached at the timing before the next game medal can be inserted. Alternatively, it may be determined whether or not the game is full when the game start operation is detected or when the game control ends. When determining whether or not the game is full at the end of the game control, if the re-gamer wins a prize in the game and the next game is a replay game, it is determined whether or not the game is full. It can be omitted.

  In the modified example, after the game control is finished, before the medal of the next game can be inserted, it is determined whether or not it is full based on the detection state of the full tank sensor 35a only once per game. When it is determined that the tank is full, the progress of the game is disabled, and a full tank error state is controlled until a reset operation is performed.

  Also, before determining whether or not the tank is full, it is determined whether or not the next game is a replay game, and if it is a replay game, the determination of whether or not it is full is omitted. The determination of whether or not a full tank error has occurred is not wasted, the full tank condition can be monitored efficiently, the control load for determining the full tank condition can be reduced, and the frequency of full tank errors can be reduced as much as possible. As a result, it is possible to make the player feel bothersome and to reduce the labor for the store clerk to solve the full state.

  Further, in the modification, when the bet number is set using credits and the game starts without inserting medals, the determination as to whether or not the game is full is omitted after the game control ends. In the case where no medal is inserted and the storage amount of the overflow tank 35 does not increase, the determination of whether or not a full tank error has occurred is not performed wastefully, and the full tank state can be efficiently obtained. The monitoring load can be reduced, and the control load required to determine the full tank status can be reduced, and the frequency of full tank errors can be reduced as much as possible. Can be reduced.

  In the modified example, after the game control is finished, it is determined whether or not the next game medal can be inserted, and it is determined whether or not the tank is full. After the game is over, the overflow tank 35 is determined. A full tank state can be determined before the number of medals increases. When the full tank state is determined, a full tank error state is set before the next game medal can be inserted, so that the progress of the game is disabled before the medal increases in the overflow tank 35, The amount of storage in the overflow tank 35 will not increase any more, and the full tank error state is controlled between the start of the game and the end of the control of the game, for example, the reels 2L, 2C, When the 2R is rotating, the reels 2L, 2C, and 2R are stopped once and controlled to a full tank error state, and then the reels 2L, 2C, and 2R are restarted when the full tank error state is released. Or when the medal payout operation is stopped by driving the hopper motor 34b, the medal payout operation is once stopped, and a full tank error state occurs. Controlling, when it is released subsequently fully Tan'era state, it is not necessary to perform complicated control such or to resume dispensing operation of medals. That is, it is not necessary to perform control such as interrupting the game control once and then restarting the game control, and the control related to the progress of the game can be prevented from becoming complicated. In addition, since the determination of the full tank state and the accompanying control of the full tank error state are performed almost simultaneously, there is no need to hold information indicating that the full tank state has been determined.

  In this embodiment, after the game control is finished, it is determined whether or not the next game medal can be inserted, and it is determined whether or not the tank is full. Even if it is determined whether or not, the full tank state can be determined after the game is over and before the medal is increased in the overflow tank 35.

  Also, in this case, when a full tank state is determined, the full tank error state may be controlled before proceeding to the next game. In this case, the game control is once interrupted and then the game It is not necessary to perform control such as resuming control of the game, and it is possible to prevent the control related to the progress of the game from becoming complicated. In addition, since the determination of the full tank state and the accompanying control of the full tank error state are performed almost simultaneously, there is no need to hold information indicating that the full tank state has been determined.

  In this embodiment, the medals inserted from the outside are first stored in the hopper tank 34a, and the overflowing medals are stored in the overflow tank 35 when the hopper tank 34a is full. Whether or not the full tank state of the tank 35 is detected by the full tank sensor 35a, and the full tank state is determined. May be provided, and the full tank state of the hopper tank 34a may be detected by the full tank sensor to determine the full tank state. In addition, a first full sensor that detects whether or not the amount stored in the hopper tank 34a is equal to or greater than a certain amount is provided. When the first full sensor detects that the hopper tank 34a is full, the flow path of the inserted medal is set. In addition to switching to the overflow tank 35 side, a second full tank sensor for detecting the full tank state of the overflow tank 35 is provided, and the full tank state is determined based on detection of one or both of the first full sensor and the second full sensor. It may be determined. For example, even when the second full sensor detects the full state, the medal stored in the hopper tank 34a may be paid out and the first full sensor may not detect the full state. By switching the medal flow path again to the hopper tank 34a side, medals can be stored until both tanks are full. Further, in such a case, even if only the second full sensor detects the full state, it is not determined that the full state is reached, and both the first full sensor and the second full sensor are full. When it is determined that the full tank state is detected, it is possible to further reduce the frequency at which the full tank state is determined.

  In the present embodiment, an external output signal output from the game control board 40 is output to the hall device. These external output signals include a door opening signal, a setting change signal, a closing error signal, and a dispensing error signal, but these door opening signal, setting changing signal, closing error signal, and dispensing error signal are signals that are frequently output. Therefore, it is not necessary to provide an external output terminal for each of these signals.

  Therefore, in the present embodiment, the external output signal output from the game control board 40 is output to the hall device via the external output board 1000, and among these external output signals, a door opening signal, a setting change signal, The input error signal and the payout error signal are converted into security signals, which are serial signals that can be individually identified, by the parallel / serial conversion circuit 1002 mounted on the external output board 1000 and output to the outside. Thus, it is possible to output the door opening signal, the setting change signal, the closing error signal, and the dispensing error signal from one terminal, and it is not necessary to provide more terminals than necessary.

  In addition, even if there is a spare signal line that is not currently used but may be used in the future, individual signals can be identified with a single terminal, including the signal output from the spare signal line. It is possible to output as much as possible, and a spare signal line terminal that is not used does not become an empty terminal.

  In this embodiment, the door opening signal, the setting change signal, the making error signal, and the paying error signal are serially identifiable by the parallel / serial conversion circuit 1002 mounted on the external output board 1000. It is converted to a security signal, which is a signal, and output to the outside. For example, any one of a door opening signal, a setting change signal, a closing error signal, and a paying error signal is output by an AND circuit or the like. In such a case, an error signal may be output to the outside through a single terminal. Even in this case, either an error has occurred in the external device, the door is open, or the setting is being changed. Therefore, it is possible to specify that the terminal is being generated, and it is not necessary to provide more terminals than necessary. In this case, since a plurality of signals can be output to the outside with one terminal without being converted into a serial signal, the manufacturing cost can be reduced.

  In the slot machine 1 of the present embodiment, the connector connection between the game control board 40 and the inserted medal sensor 31, that is, the connection between the board side connector 620a of the game control board 40 and the cable side connector 610a of the cable 600a, the cable 600a. The connection between the cable side connector 611a and the board side connector 621a of the operation unit relay board 110 and the connection between the board side connector 622g of the operation unit relay board 110 and the cable side connector 612g of the cable 601g are released. The connector restricting member 500a and the connector restricting member 650 are restricted. As a result, one of the connectors between the game control board 40 and the inserted medal sensor 31 is replaced with a connector such as an illegal driving tool and connected to the main control unit 41 of the game control board 40 for illegal actions relating to the progress of the game. For example, it is difficult to conduct illegal activities such as inputting / outputting various signals. For example, it is effective to conduct illegal sales such as providing a slot machine with a bonus winning condition by connecting a driving tool etc. Can be prevented.

  Further, the connector connection between the game control board 40 and the door opening detection switch 25, that is, the connection between the board side connector 620a of the game control board 40 and the cable side connector 610a of the cable 600a, and the operation with the cable side connector 611a of the cable 600a. For the connection between the board-side connector 621a of the part relay board 110 and the connection between the board-side connector 622q of the operation part relay board 110 and the cable-side connector 612q of the cable 601q, the connection between these connectors is released. It regulates by the regulating member 650. This makes it difficult to release the connection between any of the connectors between the game control board 40 and the door opening detection switch 25. It is possible to effectively prevent the door 2b from being opened.

  In order to release the connector connection between the game control board 40 and the inserted medal sensor 31 or the connector connection between the game control board 40 and the door opening detection switch 25, the sealing piece 232 of the board case 200, The connection piece 522a of the connector cover 520 and the connection piece 684a of the cover member 680 must be broken, so that the connector connection between the game control board 40 and the inserted medal sensor 31 or the game control board 40 and the door opening detection When even one connector connection with the switch 25 is released, the trace remains, and it is extremely difficult to erase the trace. Therefore, the notification that the illegal operation or the front door 2b is opened is given. Opening of the front door 2b in a state where it is not performed can be more effectively suppressed.

  Further, in this embodiment, there is only one relay board between the game control board 40 and the insertion medal sensor 31 and between the game control board 40 and the door opening detection switch 25, but it passes through a plurality of relay boards. In this case, it is preferable to restrict removal of all connector connections existing between them, and in this way, between the game control board 40 and the inserted medal sensor 31 or the game control board 40 and the door opening detection switch. Since it is difficult to release the connection of any of the connectors with the front door 25, the front door 2b can be more effectively opened in the state where the unauthorized sales or the notification that the front door 2b is opened is not issued. Can be prevented.

  Further, in this embodiment, the first electronic components 5, 6, 7, 8, 31, 33L, 33C, 33R, and 35 that input signals to the game control board 40 according to the progress of the game and the progress of the game. Of the second electronic components 32L, 32C, 32R, 34 for which signals are output from the game control board 40 in response to this, a connector restricting member is provided only for the connector connection between the inserted medal sensor 31 and the game control board 40. The release of connection between connectors is regulated. That is, the inserted medal sensor 31 which cannot advance the game without the signal (the bet number cannot be set and the game cannot be started unless the signal from the inserted medal sensor 31 is input) and the game control. The connector restricting member is provided only for the connector connection with the board 40 to restrict the release of the connection between the connectors, and the connection between the connectors is released between the other electronic components and the game control board 40 to drive the instrument. Even if it is replaced with a connector, it will be impossible to automatically advance the game automatically, so that it is possible to prevent fraud with the minimum restrictions, and to disconnect these connectors The number of parts can be reduced.

  In this embodiment, only the connector connection between the inserted medal sensor 31 and the game control board 40 is provided with a connector restricting member to restrict the connection between the connectors, but the start switch 7 and the game control board 40 are not connected. The same effect can be obtained even if a connector restricting member is provided only for connector connection between the connector and the release of the connection between the connectors is restricted. Further, if the reel is not configured to stop until the reel stop operation is performed after the start of the reel rotation as in the present embodiment, between the stop switch 8L, 8C, 8R and the game control board 40. The same effect can be obtained even if the connector restricting member is provided only for the connector connection to restrict the release of the connection between the connectors.

  In the present embodiment, a plurality of signal lines for connecting the main control unit 41 and a plurality of electronic components for inputting / outputting signals necessary for the progress of the game and the door opening detection switch 25 are connected to the game control board 40. Since it is connected to the operation unit relay board 110 with a single cable 600a, the connector connection between the board side connector 620a and the cable side connector 610a of the game control board 40, that is, the connection of only one connector is released. By restricting, it becomes possible to restrict the release of the connection between the plurality of signal lines, and it is not necessary to prepare a plurality of parts for restricting the release of the connector connection, and the number of these parts can be reduced.

  When a plurality of signal lines for connecting the main control unit 41 and a plurality of electronic components for inputting / outputting signals necessary for the progress of the game and the door opening detection switch 25 are connected via a plurality of cables. However, in order to regulate the release of these connector connections by arranging the board side connectors close to each other and restricting the release of the connection between the plurality of board side connectors and the plurality of cable side connectors with one component. It is not necessary to prepare a plurality of parts, and the number of these parts can be reduced.

  Further, in this embodiment, the connection between the cable side connector 611a of the cable 600a connecting the game control board 40 and the operation unit relay board 110 and the board side connector 621a of the operation part relay board 110 is released, and the operation unit relay board 110 is connected. The cable side connector 612g of the cable 601g that connects the inserted medal sensor 31 and the board side connector 622g of the operation unit relay board 110, and the cable 601q that connects the operation unit relay board 110 and the door opening detection switch 25. Since the release of the connection between the cable-side connector 612q and the board-side connector 622q of the operation unit relay board 110 is simultaneously restricted by one connector restricting member 650, a component for restricting the release of the plurality of connector connections There is no need to prepare multiple parts and the number of these parts can be reduced.

  In the present embodiment, the board side connector 620a of the game control board accommodated in the board case 200 and the cable side are attached by attaching the connector regulating member 500a including the attachment side member 510 and the connector cover 520 to the board case 200. The connector 610 a is restricted from being removed, and in this state, the board case 200 is attached to the attachment base 250 and the fixing member 255 and the sealing piece 232 are fixed to each other, whereby the connector restriction member 500 a is removed from the board case 200. Therefore, the sealing piece 232 of the board case 200 is broken to release the fixation between the board case 200 and the housing (mounting base 250), or the mounting side member 510 or the connector cover 520 is mounted. If not released, the board side connector 620a to the cable side connector 61 A state that can not be pulled out of a. In other words, the cable-side connector 610a cannot be removed without leaving a trace of the breakage of the sealing piece 232 or the breakage of the connection piece 522a, and an unauthorized instrument such as a driving instrument is connected without leaving a trace, Since it becomes impossible to disconnect the connector, it is possible to reliably detect that there is a possibility of fraud.

  Further, when the game control board 40 is replaced together with the board case 200 containing the game control board 40 due to a failure or the like, the sealing piece 232 is broken to fix the board case 200 and the housing (mounting base 250). If released, the connector regulating member 500a can be removed from the board case 200 and the cable side connector 610a can be removed from the board side connector 620a. Therefore, the connector regulating member 500a can be destroyed or the board case 200 can be destroyed. The cable-side connector 610a can be separated from the board-side connector 620a without opening.

  Further, the connector regulating member 500a is composed of the attachment side member 510 and the connector cover 520, and after the attachment side member 510 is attached to the board case 200, the cable side connector 610a is connected to the board side connector 620a, and the board is in that state. The cable-side connector 610a cannot be removed from the board-side connector 620a by being attached to the attachment-side member 510 so as to cover a part of the cable-side connector 620a from above. Is connected to the board-side connector 620a, and then the locking cylinder 522 of the connector cover 520 is fitted into the locking hole 513a of the locking hole 513 of the attachment-side member 510 located around the board-side connector 620a. The connector cover 52 is simply attached to the attachment side member 510. Part of the cable-side connector 610a is covered and the movement of the cable-side connector 610a in the unplugging direction is restricted, so that the assembling work is reduced when the removal of the cable-side connector 610a from the board-side connector 620a is restricted. it can.

  Further, even when the game control board 40 is housed in the board case 200, it is only necessary to connect the cable side connector 610a to the board side connector 620a as it is, and then attach the connector cover 520. In this case, the assembly work can be more effectively reduced when the removal of the cable-side connector 610a from the board-side connector 620a is restricted.

  Further, the connector cover 520 does not cover the entire connection portion between the cable-side connector 610a and the board-side connector 620a, but covers only a part of the cable-side connector 610a in the pulling direction side. Not only can the removal of the connector 610a with respect to the board-side connector 620a be surely restricted, but the amount of material required for manufacturing the connector cover 520 can be reduced.

  Further, since the connector cover 520 is attached to the attachment side member 510 with only one locking cylinder 522, the structure of the connector cover 520 and the attachment side member 510 can be simplified. A plurality of stop cylinders 522 may be provided, and a locking hole 513a may be provided at a corresponding location on the attachment side member 510, and the connector cover 520 may be attached to the attachment side member 510 at a plurality of locations. By doing so, the removal of the cable-side connector 610a from the board-side connector 620a can be more firmly regulated. Furthermore, in this case, it is preferable that the connector cover 520 is attached to the attachment side member 510 at a plurality of locations across the connection portion between the cable side connector 610a and the board side connector 620a. The removal and removal of the side connector 610a with respect to the board side connector 620a can be more firmly regulated.

  In addition, the connector cover 520 is attached to the attachment side member 510 with only one locking cylinder 522, but a rib that contacts the surface of the base piece 510a of the attachment side member 510 is provided on one side wall of the connector cover 520. Since 521b and 521b are formed and the movement of the connector cover 520 is restricted, the removal of the cable side connector 610a from the board side connector 620a can be reliably restricted.

  Further, inwardly extending locking pieces 511 and 511 are formed at both ends extending from the base piece 510a of the attachment side member 510, and the locking pieces 511 and 511 are elastically deformed outward. In this state, the attachment side member 510 is attached to the substrate case 200 by being assembled to the substrate case 200 and engaging with the locking grooves 514 and 514 formed on the back surface of the substrate case 200. Since the regulating member 500a can be attached to the board case 200 without using other members such as screws and pins, the number of components can be reduced.

  Further, when the attachment side member 510 constituting the connector restricting member 500 a is attached to the board case 200, the opposing surfaces of the attachment side member 510 of the base piece 510 a and the upper pieces 510 c, 510 c to the board case 200 are the steps in the upper case 203. The upper surface of the portion 203b and the bottom surface of the concave portion 203f are in contact with each other, so that it is possible to effectively prevent unauthorized parts and the like from being attached between the connector restricting member 500a and the surface of the board case 200.

  Further, since both the attachment side member 510 and the connector cover 520 constituting the connector restricting member 500a are made of a transparent synthetic resin material, the visibility in the board case 200 may be impaired by the connector restricting member 500a. Therefore, there is no problem in monitoring the game control board 40. Further, even if an unauthorized part is attached to the gap between the connector restricting member 500a and the board case 200, it can be easily found.

  In this embodiment, when the main control unit 41 is activated, the state before power interruption is restored, and when the special role is elected before power interruption, the CPU 41a transmits a power-on command indicating that the special role is elected. When the sub-control unit 91 receives a power-on command indicating that the special role is won, the sub-control unit 91 executes a notification effect indicating that the special role is won, and until the notification effect receives a prize determination command indicating that the special role is won. In other words, it is continuously executed until the winning special role is won.

  Further, the sub-control unit 91 produces the effect even if the backup is normal until it receives a power-on command or an initialization command indicating that the control state of the main control unit 41 has been initialized as will be described later. Without returning to the state, even if another command is received, the production is not controlled accordingly. For this reason, even if the command transmission lines of the main control unit 41 and the sub control unit 91 are disconnected at the time of startup and the main control unit 41 and the sub control unit 91 are connected thereafter, the sub control unit 91 can Since the initialization command is not received, the production control is not performed, and even if the command transmission line of the main control unit 41 and the sub control unit 91 is disconnected at the time of activation, the power-on command is issued on the sub control unit 91 side. It is impossible to avoid the reception of the special role and to avoid the execution of the announcement effect indicating that the special role is won. Thus, when the main control unit 41 is activated, it returns to the state before the power interruption, and from before the power interruption. When the special role is elected, the winning of the special role is always notified.

  On the other hand, it is necessary to turn off the power once to connect unauthorized tools such as driving tools (disconnecting the connector without turning off the power). With the above configuration, the connector is forcibly released. Even if the special tool is won by using a driving tool, it can be easily determined from the outside that the special role is won when the main control unit 41 is restarted. In addition, it is possible to effectively prevent illegal sales such as providing a slot machine set in a state in which a special role is won using a driving tool to a player at the start of business at a game shop or the like.

  In addition, the notice effect is continuously executed until a winning judgment command indicating the winning of the special role is received, that is, until the winning special role is won, so that the special role is won, that is, the winning flag of the special role is set. The notification effect will not stop until it is cleared, and it will not be possible to cancel the notification effect while maintaining the special role election by the amusement store. Unauthorized sales such as providing the slot machine 1 set to "" to a player at the start of business at a game shop can be further effectively prevented.

  Further, in this embodiment, when the main control unit 41 is activated, it returns to the state before the power interruption, and when the special role is elected before the power interruption, the CPU 41a indicates a power-on command indicating that the special role is elected. , And the sub-control unit 91 receives a power-on command indicating that the special role is won, so that the sub-control unit 91 controls the notice display effect indicating that the special role is won, the effect effect LED 52, This is executed by a production device such as the speakers 53 and 54, the reel LED 55, etc. Even if the special role is won illegally, when the main control unit 41 is restarted, the special role is won. The slot machine is set in a state where the special role is won using a driving tool and is provided to the player at the start of the game shop operation. Do It said was an illegal business can be more reliably prevented.

  In this embodiment, the release of the connector connection between the game control board 40 and the effect control board 90 is restricted by the connector restricting member. After the main control unit 41 is activated, the effect control board By connecting 90, it becomes difficult to craft such as not to notify the special role, so that illegal sales by an amusement store can be prevented more reliably. Further, the connector restricting member is configured to be able to restrict the removal of the cable side connector from the board side connector connected to each other, and the connection release restriction that makes the release impossible unless the release restricting part related to the connection with the connector is destroyed. When the state is formed and the connection release restriction state is released, the trace remains so that the release restriction part must be destroyed in order to release the connection between the connectors. Since it is extremely difficult to form the connection release restriction state again after releasing the connection, and it takes time and effort, it is possible to more effectively prevent the fraud.

  In the present embodiment, the electrical connection state between the game control board 40 and the effect control board 90 is monitored during a power failure, and the electrical connection state between the game control board 40 and the effect control board 90 is monitored. Is released, the game control board 40 has a disconnection monitoring IC 50 that stores a disconnection flag indicating that, and the CPU 41a requests the disconnection monitoring IC 50 to check the disconnection flag at the time of activation. When the disconnection flag is stored based on the reply from the accompanying disconnection monitoring IC 50 and the disconnection flag is stored, that is, the electrical connection state between the game control board 40 and the effect control board 90 is released. In such a case, it is determined that the disconnection is abnormal, and an error state due to the disconnection abnormality error is controlled to disable the progress of the game, and the CPU 41a is used in the RAM 41c area. Since all the areas except for the area are initialized and cannot be restored to the original state, after the main control unit 41 is activated, the special control board 90 is connected to prevent the special role from being notified. In this case, since the RAM 41c is initialized and cannot be restored to the original state, illegal sales by the amusement store can be prevented more reliably.

  In this embodiment, the special device winning is notified by the effect device controlled by the sub-control unit 91. However, when the main control unit 41 is activated, it returns to the state before the power interruption, and When the special role is elected before the interruption of power, the credit display 11, the game auxiliary display 12, and the payout display 13 directly controlled by the main control unit 41 may notify the special role. good. In addition, a notification LED for notifying the winning of the special role is provided as an electronic component that is directly controlled by the main control unit 41. When the main control unit 41 is activated, it returns to the state before the power interruption, and the special role is selected before the power interruption. In this case, the notification LED may be used to notify the winning of the special role.

  Further, in this embodiment, the connector restricting member is provided only for the connector connection between the electronic control component (inserted medal sensor 31) that inputs or outputs a signal to the game control board 40 and the game control board 40 as the game progresses. The use of unauthorized devices is also prevented by restricting the release of connections between the connectors, but when the main control unit 41 is activated, it returns to the state before the power interruption, and the special role is elected before the power interruption. In this case, it is possible to prevent the use of a driving tool regardless of whether or not a structure for restricting the insertion / removal between the connectors is used, so that the structure for restricting the insertion / removal between the connectors is not used. By doing so, it is not necessary to change the structure of parts in order to regulate the insertion and removal of connectors, and maintainability in the event of a failure, etc. It can be improved.

  In the present embodiment, the disconnection monitoring IC 50 also monitors the electrical connection state between the game control board 40 and the inserted medal sensor 31 at the time of a power failure, and the electrical connection between the game control board 40 and the inserted medal sensor 31. When the general connection state is released, the disconnection flag indicating that is stored, and the CPU 41a requests the disconnection monitoring IC 50 to confirm the disconnection flag at the time of activation, and the disconnection monitoring IC 50 receives a request for the disconnection flag. When the disconnection flag is stored based on the reply and the disconnection flag is stored, that is, when the electrical connection state between the game control board 40 and the inserted medal sensor 31 is released, the disconnection abnormality occurs. Control of the error state due to the disconnection abnormality error to disable the progress of the game and the CPU 41a in the area of the RAM 41c uses it. All regions except the region in the initializing, becomes impossible return to the original state.

  On the other hand, in order to connect an unauthorized device such as a driving device, it is necessary to insert / remove the connector, but even if a special device is selected by using the driving device, the connector must be replaced with a regular connector. Since the disconnection flag is stored in the disconnection monitoring IC 50 and the CPU 41a is activated, all the areas of the RAM 41c other than the area in use by the CPU 41a are initialized. It is possible to effectively prevent illegal sales such as providing a slot machine set in a state in which a special role is won using a driving tool to a player at the start of a game shop business.

  Further, the disconnection monitoring IC 50 monitors the electrical connection state between the game control board 40 and the inserted medal sensor 31 even when energized, and the electrical connection between the game control board 40 and the inserted medal sensor 31. When the state is released, the disconnection flag indicating that is stored, and the CPU 41a periodically checks the storage state of the disconnection flag in the timer interruption process even after the activation, and the disconnection flag is stored. In such a case, it is determined that the disconnection is abnormal, and an error state due to the disconnection abnormality error is controlled to disable the progress of the game, and all areas of the RAM 41c other than the area being used by the CPU 41a are initialized, Since it is impossible to return to the original state, the disconnection monitoring IC 50 can be used even when the connection of the connector is released to replace it with a normal connector without turning off the power. The disconnection flag is stored, and accordingly, an error state due to disconnection abnormality is controlled, and all areas of the RAM 41c other than the area in use by the CPU 41a are initialized. It is possible to more surely prevent illegal sales such as providing a slot machine set in a state where a winning combination is won to a player at the start of a game shop business.

  Also, in this embodiment, once controlled to an error state due to a disconnection abnormality error, the game progresses unless the setting change mode is entered and a setting value is newly selected and set based on the setting changing operation. The disabled state is not released. That is, not the setting value automatically set by the slot machine with the initialization of the RAM 41c, but the setting value selected and set based on the setting change operation (generally, the setting change operation is an employee of a game shop) Therefore, it is ensured that the game is played based on the setting value selected by the amusement shop side), so that the fairness of the game can be achieved.

  In this embodiment, when the CPU 41a determines that the disconnection is abnormal and controls the error state due to the disconnection abnormality error, all the areas of the RAM 41c other than the area in use by the CPU 41a are initialized. Although the configuration is such that the original state cannot be restored, the RAM 41c is not initialized in the error state due to the disconnection abnormality error, but after that, the RAM 41c is initialized (in this embodiment, the setting change mode is entered). A transition operation corresponds to this, but separately from this, an initialization switch for initializing the RAM 41c by being detected when the power is turned on may be provided, and the initialization operation of the RAM 41c by the initialization switch may be applied. ), The error state may be canceled and the game can be made possible. Even if the special device is illegally set using a special instrument, the disconnection flag is stored in the disconnection monitoring IC 50 and the CPU 41a is activated by releasing the connection of the connector in order to replace it with a regular connector. At this time, since the RAM 41c is initialized and the progress of the game is disabled until the RAM 41c is initialized, the slot machine set in the state where the special role is won using the driving tool is changed to the amusement store. It is possible to effectively prevent illegal sales such as providing to a player at the start of business.

  Further, in this embodiment, the connector restricting member is provided only for the connector connection between the electronic control component (inserted medal sensor 31) that inputs or outputs a signal to the game control board 40 and the game control board 40 as the game progresses. The use of unauthorized devices is also prevented by restricting the release of the connection between the connectors, but the state of electrical connection between the game control board 40 and the inserted medal sensor 31 is monitored, and the game control board When the electrical connection state between 40 and the inserted medal sensor 31 is released, a disconnection flag indicating the fact is stored, and the CPU 41a confirms the storage state of the disconnection flag at the start and after the start. If the disconnection flag is stored, it is determined that the disconnection is abnormal, and the error state due to the disconnection abnormality error is controlled to disable the progress of the game. Initialize all the areas of the M41c area except for the areas that are being used by the CPU 41a, or disable the progress of the game until the RAM 41c is initialized by performing an initialization operation, so that the connectors can be inserted and removed. Regardless of whether or not the structure is restricted, it is possible to prevent the use of a driving tool, so it is possible not to have a structure that restricts the insertion and removal of connectors. In addition to requiring a significant structural change in the parts to regulate, it is possible to improve maintainability in the event of a failure.

  In this embodiment, the disconnection monitoring IC 50 monitors the electrical connection state between the game control board 40 and the inserted medal sensor 31, but signals necessary for the progress of the game are input and output. Electronic components (for example, stop switch 8L, 8C, 8R, etc. in a configuration that does not stop the reel until the reel stop operation is performed after the start of reel rotation as in this embodiment). Even if it does, the effect similar to the above is acquired.

  Further, in the present embodiment, the disconnection monitoring IC 50 has an electrical connection between the game control board 40 and an electronic component (inserted medal sensor 31) that inputs or outputs a signal to the game control board 40 as the game progresses. And the game control board 40 between the electronic component (the input medal sensor 31) and the game control board 40 that inputs or outputs a signal to the game control board 40 according to the progress of the game. When the disconnection is determined, the RAM 41c is initialized to prevent unauthorized sales by the game store. However, as shown in FIG. 66, the backup power source of the main control unit 41 is connected to the game control board 40. To the game control board 40 and the operation part relay board 110, the operation part relay board 110, the operation part relay board 110 and the inserted medal. Via the cable 601g for wiring connection of the sensor 31 and further turned back by the inserted medal sensor 31, and returned to the game control board 40 again via the cable 601g, the operation part relay board 110, and the cable 600a, and the main control part 41 The connector may be connected between the game control board 40 and the inserted medal sensor 31 while the power supply to the slot machine 1 is cut off. Is released even at one location, the backup power supply line is disconnected, the data in the RAM 41c of the main control unit 41 cannot be retained, and is lost. In other words, when even one connection between the game control board 40 and the inserted medal sensor 31 is released, the backup data held in the RAM 41c of the main control unit 41 is lost. On the other hand, in order to connect an unauthorized device such as a driving device, it is necessary to insert / remove the connector, but even if a special device is selected by using the driving device, the connector must be replaced with a regular connector. Since the data in the RAM 41c is initialized by releasing the connection, the slot machine set in a state in which the special role is won using the driving tool is provided to the player at the start of the operation of the game shop. It is possible to prevent such illegal sales.

  Note that when the backup power is returned from the game control board 40 to the game control board 40 via the inserted medal sensor 31 and supplied to the main control unit 41, the connector connection therebetween is released. Although the data in the RAM 41c is lost, an electronic component (for example, the start switch 7 or the reel after the reel starts rotating as in the present embodiment) that inputs and outputs signals necessary for the progress of the game. The same effect as described above can be obtained even if the operation is performed via stop switches 8L, 8C, 8R, etc., which are not configured to stop the reel until the stop operation is performed.

  Capacitors and batteries that store backup power are mounted on electronic component mounting boards and relay boards (operation unit relay board 110, etc.) for these electronic parts, which are required to input and output signals necessary for the progress of the game. A backup power supply line from a capacitor or a battery mounted on the mounting board or the relay board is connected to the game control board through a cable together with a signal line of the electronic component and supplied to the main control unit 41. Even in this case, since the data in the RAM 41c is lost when the connector connection between the mounting board or the relay board and the game control board 40 is released, the same effect as described above is obtained. In addition, the game control board 40 can be backed up via a cable from a capacitor or battery mounted on the mounting board or relay board. Therefore, in order to continue supplying the backup power to the main control unit 41 when the cable is disconnected, it is necessary to short-circuit the backup power supply line across the boards. Since it becomes very difficult to release the connector connection in a state in which the backup power supply is continuously supplied, the connection of the driving tool can be effectively prevented.

  In this embodiment, in order to open the upper case 203 and the lower case 201 and take out the game control board 40, it is necessary to cut the connection piece 231a of the sealing piece 231 fixed to the sealing piece 211. By attaching the covering member 236 to the sealing piece 231 fixed to the sealing piece 211, the connecting piece 231a is covered with the base piece 236a, the hanging pieces 236b, 236b of the covering member 236, and the connecting piece of the sealing piece 231 is connected. If the cover member 236 is not removed, it is impossible to cut the connection piece 231a, the connection piece 231a is cut, and the upper case 203 and the lower case 201 are opened to play the game. Since a very difficult operation is required to take out the control board 40, the game control board 40 is replaced with an unauthorized board. It is possible to prevent a positive act effectively.

  Further, the connecting piece 231a is formed with a reinforcing piece 231c that is orthogonal to the connecting piece 231a, and the reinforcing piece 231c needs to be cut together, so that it is difficult to cut the connecting piece 231a, and the upper case 203 Since it requires a more difficult work to open the lower case 201 and take out the game control board 40, it is possible to more effectively prevent illegal acts such as replacing the game control board 40 with an unauthorized board. Can do.

  Further, when the upper case 203 and the lower case 201 are opened by cutting the sealing piece 231, it is necessary to release the covering state of the connection piece 231 a by the covering member 236, and the connection piece 231 a by the covering member 236 is released. When the covering state is released, the fitting portion 236c remains in the concave portion 231d of the sealing piece 231 and it is difficult to completely remove the debris, so that a trace of releasing the covering state may be left. Therefore, the covering state by the covering member 236 is released, and the possibility that the gaming control board 40 has been cheated can be detected at an early stage by opening the upper case 203 and the lower case 201. Further, since the fitting portion 236c remains in the concave portion 231d of the sealing piece 231 and it is impossible to cover the corresponding portion again by the covering member 236, the covering member 236 allows the connection portion 231a of the sealing piece 231 to be covered. It is possible to prevent the cut portion from being covered and delaying the discovery of the possibility of fraud.

  In this embodiment, in order to remove the substrate case 200 from the slot machine main body, it is necessary to cut the connection piece 232a of the sealing piece 232 fixed to the fixing member 255, but the covering member 236 is connected to the fixing member 255. By attaching to the fixed sealing piece 232, the connection piece 232a is covered by the base piece 236a, the hanging piece 236b, 236b of the covering member 236, and it becomes impossible to directly access the connection piece 232a of the sealing piece 232, If the covering member 236 is not removed, it is impossible to cut the connection piece 232a, and it will be very difficult to cut the connection piece 232a and remove the board case 200 from the slot machine body. Effectively prevent illegal acts such as replacing the gaming control board 40 with the board case 200 with an unauthorized board. Rukoto can.

  Further, the connecting piece 232a is formed with a reinforcing piece 232c perpendicular to the connecting piece 232a, and the reinforcing piece 232c needs to be cut together. Since a more difficult operation is required to remove the game machine from the slot machine main body, it is possible to more effectively prevent an illegal act such as exchanging the game control board 40 with an illegal board together with the board case 200.

  Further, when the sealing piece 232 is cut and the substrate case 200 is removed from the slot machine main body, it is necessary to release the covering state of the connecting piece 232a by the covering member 236, and the covering state of the connecting piece 232a by the covering member 236 Since the insertion portion 236c remains in the concave portion 232d of the sealing piece 232 and it is difficult to completely remove the debris, it is possible to leave a trace of releasing the covering state. Thus, it is possible to detect early the possibility that the covering state by the covering member 236 has been released, the substrate case 200 has been removed from the slot machine body, and the entire substrate case 200 has been replaced with an unauthorized one. Further, since the fitting portion 236c remains in the concave portion 232d of the sealing piece 232, and the corresponding portion cannot be covered again by the covering member 236, the covering member 236 prevents the connection portion 232a of the sealing piece 232 from being covered. It is possible to prevent the cut portion from being covered and delaying the discovery of the possibility of fraud.

  In this embodiment, the covering member 236 is attached to the sealing piece 231 fixed to the sealing piece 211 and the sealing piece 232 fixed to the fixing member 255, so that the connection piece 231 a of the sealing piece 231 is attached. Since both the connection pieces 232a of the sealing piece 232 are covered and it is more difficult to open the upper case 203 and the lower case 201, in this embodiment, the fixing member is used. By fixing 255 and the sealing piece 232, it becomes impossible to remove the substrate case 200 from the slot machine main body, and at the same time, the upper case 203 and the lower case 201 are also disabled from being opened. Even when the covering member 236 is attached only to the sealing piece 232 fixed to the member 255 and only the connection piece 232a of the sealing piece 232 is covered, the upper case 203 and the lower case 201 are attached to each other. To release, and the board case 200 can be difficult to remove from the slot machine main body can further reduce the number of the covering member 236 to be used.

  In this embodiment, when the CPU 91a of the sub-control unit 91 does not input the V blank interrupt signal from the graphic controller 1200 for a certain period, the CPU 91a completes the instruction corresponding to the instruction even though it is instructed to the graphic controller 1200. When the interrupt signal is not input for a certain period, the interruption interruption process (sub) for backing up the production state is executed, and the control state backed up in the interruption interruption process is restored by restarting. Then, with the restart of the CPU 91a, the graphic controller 1200 is initialized, and the operation of the graphic controller 1200 is resumed by executing again an instruction based on the control pattern executed before the restart to the graphic controller 1200. It is supposed to let you. Thereby, even if the graphic controller 1200 hangs up, it can be restored to the state before the hang-up. In addition, the display operation that has been halfway due to the hang-up can be resumed after recovery, and more appropriate recovery from an abnormal display state becomes possible.

  In this embodiment, the power interruption interrupt process (sub) executed at the time of power interruption is used as a process for restoring the control state at the time of restart, and the graphic controller 1200 is hung up. Therefore, it is not necessary to execute a dedicated process, so that it is possible to appropriately recover from an abnormal display state while preventing an increase in program capacity and a complicated process.

  Further, in this embodiment, when the display control circuit 92 hangs up, a restart flag is set in the RAM 91c before the power interruption interrupt process (sub) is executed, and the CPU 91a that is started up thereafter sets the restart flag. By determining the presence / absence, it is possible to distinguish whether the display control circuit 92 is restarted due to power-on or the display control circuit 92 is restarted. If it is determined that it is an activation, and if it is possible to return to the effect state before the restart, it is possible to return to the effect state before the restart without waiting for the reception of the initialization command or the power-on command. For this reason, although the CPU 91a is not activated by turning on the power but restarted by the hang-up of the display control circuit 92, the initialization command and the power-on command cannot be received, and the production is not performed. Can be prevented.

  In this embodiment, the CPU 41a transmits a command corresponding to the progress of the game to the effect control board 90, and the sub-control unit 91 mounted on the effect control board 90 receives the command transmitted from the game control board 40. Since the CPU 41a does not need to control the presentation only by sending a command, the processing load on the CPU 41a can be reduced and the presentation can be made various. .

  Further, a command transmission line for transmitting a command from the game control board 40 to the effect control board 90 is connected between the game control board 40 and the effect control board 90 via the effect relay board 80, and the game control board Since the production control board 90 is not directly connected to 40, it is possible to prevent an illegal signal from being input from the command transmission line to the CPU 41a from the outside and affecting the control of the game.

  Although the embodiments of the present invention have been described with reference to the drawings, the present invention is not limited to these embodiments, and modifications and additions within the scope of the present invention are included in the present invention. Needless to say.

  In the above embodiment, when stop control is performed by the table + control method, the number of sliding symbols developed from the stop control table is stored in the virtual sliding symbol table, the priority of the stop position based on the number of sliding symbols, and the sliding symbol. The priority of the stop position acquired by number is compared, and when the priority of the stop position acquired by the number of slide frames is higher, the number of sliding frames in the virtual sliding frame table is updated, When the priority of the stop position based on the number of sliding frames developed from the stop control table is compared with the priority of the stopping position acquired for each number of sliding frames, and the priority of the stopping position acquired for each number of sliding frames is higher The number of sliding frames is stored in the virtual sliding frame table. In other cases, the number of sliding frames developed from the stop control table may be stored in the virtual sliding frame table. .

  In the above-described embodiment, when determining the priority of the stop position, the priority is determined based on whether or not it is a stop-prohibited position and the type of combination that is aligned on the winning line, but the winning combination is aligned with which winning line. For example, in the stop control table, the number of sliding symbols is registered so that the winning combination is aligned with the lower winning line L2, and the winning combination is determined. If it is possible to align, the priority of the stop position where the winning combination is aligned with the rising winning line L4 is increased, and if the winning combination is possible, the lower winning line L2 is also displayed. The winning combination can also be arranged on the winning line L4 that rises to the right, but if it is missed (that is, if the stop operation is performed at a stop operation position where the number of sliding frames is not updated by the priority determination), the winning combination is Configure Pattern may only stops on the winning line L2, it is possible to limit the stopping position of the symbol constructing the winning combination. For this reason, by using a stop control table capable of appearing stop positions restricted only when the special combination is won, it is possible to stop the reach that cannot appear if the winning combination is missed.

  In the above embodiment, the stop operation is effective for the process of expanding the number of sliding symbols registered in the stop control table, the process of acquiring the stop position for each number of sliding frames, the process of comparing the priority of the stop position, and the like. The number of sliding frames is stored in the virtual sliding frame table in advance, and when a stop operation is detected, the virtual sliding frame table is referenced to obtain the number of sliding frames at the corresponding stop operation position. However, the virtual sliding piece table is not provided, and when the stopping operation is performed, the above processing is performed to acquire the number of sliding pieces corresponding to the timing of the stopping operation. Anyway.

  In the above embodiment, the number of sliding frames is applied as the derivation information. However, any number may be used as long as the stop position can be specified. It may be applied.

  In the embodiment, the stop control is performed by either the table method or the table + control method at least for the first stop regardless of the result of the internal lottery. The stop control may be performed by a control method for the stop time.

  Further, in the embodiment, depending on the result of the internal lottery, stop control by the table method or the table + control method is performed for all stop timings of the first stop, the second stop, and the third stop, or only the first stop is performed. Stop control is performed by the table method or the table + control method, and the remaining second stop and the third stop are performed by the control method. However, the table method or the stop method is used for any two stop times. Stop control by the table + control method may be performed, and stop control by the table method or the table + control method may be performed for the remaining one stop time.

  In the above embodiment, RT (1) (2) that can be expected to increase medals is applied, but it may not be possible to directly expect an increase in medals, and an increase in medals cannot be expected directly. However, there is some value (for example, a lottery opportunity such as a gaming state in which an increase in medals can be expected (notified gaming state (so-called AT) in which the type of winning combination is informed) or a high probability state of the lottery opportunity). It may be one that can be expected to indirectly increase medals by being awarded.

  In the above embodiment, the payout rate of medals per game exceeds 1 even in RT (1), but the expected increase rate of medals per game is 1 or less in RT (1), or Since the value of RT (2) can be relatively increased by doing in this way, the player's move to RT (2) is controlled by RT (1). Expectation can be further enhanced.

  In the above embodiment, when any special role is won after RT (1) starts, when Replay (2) wins and moves to RT (2), no special role is won, When Replay (2) reaches the specified number of games without winning a prize, RT (1) is terminated, but when any special role is won, Replay (2) wins and RT When shifting to (2), when a falling combination wins, no special combination is won, replay (2), when no falling combination wins the specified number of games RT (1) May be terminated, or when RT (1) is not provided with a specified number of games and RT (1) has started and one of the special roles is won, Replay (2) wins and RT End RT (1) when transitioning to (2) or when a faller wins a prize It may be allowed to.

  In the above embodiment, the transition to RT (1) is made after the end of the big bonuses (1) and (2). However, other triggers, for example, the transition to RT (1) after the end of the big bonus (3) are made. You may make it transfer, and you may make it transfer to RT (1) when the combination of the combination of RT (1) different from the transfer combination of RT (2) has been prepared.

  In the above embodiment, if any special combination wins after the start of RT (2) but before reaching the specified number of games, RT (2) is not terminated and any special combination wins. RT (2) is ended when any cherry, that is, when a falling role wins, or when the specified number of games is reached without winning a special role or a falling role. (2) The specified number of games may not be provided, and after RT (2) starts, RT (2) may be ended when any special combination wins or when a falling combination wins. In addition, after RT (2) is started without any falling combination, RT (2) is ended when any special combination wins or when the specified number of games is reached without winning any special combination You may make it let it.

  In the above embodiment, in the state where any special role is elected, RT (2) is not terminated even if a fallen role wins during RT (2). Regardless of whether or not is won, if RT falls (2), the RT (2) may be terminated if a winning combination is won.

  In the above-described embodiment, when a special combination and a fallen combination are won at the same time without any special combination being won in RT (2), RT (2) does not end even if the selected fallen combination wins a prize. However, RT (2) does not end even if a fallen role wins in a state where any special role is carried over in RT (2), and any special role in RT (2) However, RT (2) may be terminated when the special combination and the falling combination are won at the same time and the selected falling combination wins. In this case, RT (2) will end, but the falling combination wins, and even if RT (2) ends, the player's expectation that the special combination is elected will be raised. it can.

  In the embodiment, three types of combinations are applied as the falling combination, but it may be one or two types, or may be four or more types.

  In the above-described embodiment, all types of operational procedures that can be operated by the player are always assigned a winning procedure for any type of falling combination, and an operation for avoiding winning of any type of falling combination. The procedure always includes a winning procedure for at least one other fallen role so that there is no avoidance procedure common to all types of fallen roles. A configuration in which a part or all of the winning procedure is common may be used.

  Furthermore, an operation procedure that avoids winnings may be provided for all the falling combinations for all the operation procedures that can be operated by the player. In such a case, it is ensured by the technical intervention of the player. RT (2) can be continued up to the prescribed number of games. In this case, it is preferable to provide an operation procedure that can avoid both the special combination and the fallen combination. By doing so, both the special combination and the fallen combination can be avoided by a common operation procedure.

  In the above-described embodiment, the transition from the next game to the normal game state is made at the time when the falling combination wins at RT (2). For example, the number of games ( For example, when a special RT transition combination that ends in one game) is applied and the falling combination wins, the transition to the normal gaming state may be performed via the special RT.

  In the above embodiment, the winning probabilities of all types of falling combinations are the same probability, but different winning probabilities may be obtained depending on the types of falling combinations, and in this way, the winning probability is the highest in the normal gaming state. By performing a stop operation in the winning procedure for a high type of falling role, the payout rate of medals in the normal gaming state can be increased, and during RT (2), a procedure for avoiding a type of falling role with a high winning probability can be used. By performing the stop operation, it is possible to increase the probability of avoiding the end of RT (2). That is, since the difference in the player's advantage depends on whether or not the player performs technical intervention, the interest can be enhanced.

  In the above-described embodiment, the symbols constituting the falling combination are arranged beyond the drawing range, so that the winning of the falling combination can be avoided by stopping the reel at a timing outside the drawing range. For example, a different reel stop order for avoiding winnings is determined for a plurality of falling roles, and when one of the falling roles is elected, a winning determined according to the type of the falling role When the stop operation is performed in the order of stopping the reels in order to avoid the game, control is made so that the falling combination is lost, and the stop operation is performed in an order different from the stop order of the reels in order to avoid the winning In addition, the falling combination may be awarded, and in this way, it is possible to prevent the falling combination from winning by a relatively simple technical intervention. In this case, it is preferable that other small roles are elected at the same time as the fallen role, and when the fallen role is missed, the other small roles that are elected at the same time win the prize. Even if a fallen role is missed, a small role wins and a medal can be obtained.

  In the above embodiment, when the falling combination notification lottery is won, the falling combination notification number of times that the type of the falling combination can be identified when the falling combination is won at RT (2) is executed. Is selected from a plurality of different numbers of times, and when the falling role is won in RT (2), which is subsequently transferred, according to the number of falling role notifications won in the notification number lottery. The number of continued games of RT (1) is changed by changing the number of times that the role type notification is executed. For example, the probability that the falling role type notification is executed is selected from a plurality of different probabilities. The number of games that can be expected to continue RT (2) may be changed by executing a fallen role type notification based on the selected probability. Even in this case, the interest associated with RT (2) may be changed. The higher Rukoto can.

  In the above embodiment, when any special combination is won in RT (2) and the special combination is notified, either red cherry, blue cherry or white cherry is selected. The fall type combination notification is executed and these winning roles can be won. However, any special role is won in RT (2) and the special role is notified. In this state, when one of the cherries wins, only the falling combination winning notification may be performed, and then the falling combination type notification may be executed when any of the cherries wins. Therefore, after the special role is announced, the notification of the type of the falling role of the cherry is not always executed, but the type of cherry selected by the player matches the type of the cherry actually won first. Will be tumble role type notification is executed, the start trigger of fall role type notification, that is, to have a change in response to transition to a more favorable state.

  In the above embodiment, when notifying that any special role is won during RT (2), a background selection lottery for selecting the background of the display screen is performed, and the background of the display screen is selected as the background selection lottery. The background is changed to the background selected in step 1, but at least if the effect mode is changed, the same effect can be obtained. For example, the lighting mode of BGM, effect sound effect, LED, lamp, etc. May be changed.

  In the above embodiment, the production mode is changed with a probability corresponding to the type of the special role won, but the timing of changing the production mode with the probability according to the type of the special role won (at the start of the game) , 1st stop, 2nd stop, 3rd stop, winning a winning combination, etc.), and even in this case, the special that was won according to the timing of changing the production mode Since it becomes possible to suggest the kind of role, interest can be improved more effectively.

  In the above embodiment, even if a certain time (30 seconds) has elapsed since the end of the game, the number of bets before the certain time (30 seconds) elapses after the game ends when the credit settlement operation is performed. Is set, and even if a certain amount of time has elapsed since the game ended, when the betting amount is settled and a standby command is transmitted, the normal volume (MAX) is set without waiting for the certain amount of time to elapse. For example, in the case of playing a game using a game ball as described later, a control for lowering the game sound effect being output is performed. The operation of returning the game ball from the upper plate where the game ball supplied to the take-in device waits to the lower plate from which the game ball returned from the take-in device, etc. is discharged, inside the take-in device The remaining game balls in the lower plate When an operation to be rejected is made, even if a certain time (30 seconds) has not elapsed since the game ended, the game sound effect that is being output at normal volume (MAX) without waiting for the certain time to elapse Control (silence control) may be performed, and even in such a configuration, even if a certain time (30 seconds) has elapsed since the previous game ended, the player Since the volume of the continuous game sound effect can be reduced by the intention of the player, even if the game is interrupted, the surrounding players are not disturbed.

  In the above-described embodiment, the method of restricting connector removal by attaching the connector restricting members 500a and 500b to the board case 200 is the same as the cable 600a and the game control board 40 that connect the game control board 40 and the operation unit relay board 110. Although it is applied to the connector connection between the cable 600d for connecting the production relay board 80 and the game control board 40, it may be applied to other connector connections.

  In the above embodiment, a method for restricting the release of the connection between the connectors is described. For example, an electronic component that inputs and outputs signals necessary for the progress of the game, such as the inserted medal sensor 31 and the start switch 7, It is preferable to attach a covering member that is inaccessible from the outside to the connection part between the electronic component and the cable, and in this way, an electronic component that inputs and outputs signals necessary for the progress of the game It is possible to prevent an unauthorized device such as a driving device from being attached to the connection portion with the cable. In addition, it is preferable to adopt a structure in which a trace remains (such as a structure that cannot be removed unless a part of the covering member is destroyed) when the covering member that covers the connection portion between the electronic component and the cable is removed. By doing so, it becomes possible to leave a trace on which the illegal device is attached, and it is possible to grasp the possibility that there was an illegal act after the fact.

  In the above-described embodiment, the connector restriction members 500a and 500b are configured separately from the board case 200, and the board case 200 is removed from the mounting base 250, whereby the connector restriction members 500a and 500b are removed from the board case 200 and the connector is removed. For example, when the connector restriction members 500a and 500b are once attached to the board case 200, a part of the board case 200 or the connector restriction members 500a and 500b must be destroyed. For example, the connector restricting members 500a and 500b may be detached from the board case 200 so that the restriction on connector removal cannot be released.

  In the embodiment, the connector regulating members 500a and 500b are constituted by the attachment side member 510 and the connector cover 520, and after attaching the attachment side member 510 to the board case 200, the cable side connector is connected to the board side connector. In this state, by attaching the connector cover 520 to the attachment side member 510, the removal of the connector is restricted, but it is integrated from the beginning with the cable side connector connected to the board side connector. The connector restriction members 500a and 500b may be attached to the board case 200 to restrict the connector from being removed.

  In the above-described embodiment, the example in which the connector restricting members 500a and 500b are used as the method for restricting the release of the connection between the board-side connector and the cable-side connector of the board accommodated in the board case has been described. May be.

  In the above embodiment, the lower case 201 and the upper case 203 constituting the substrate case 200 are sealed and the substrate case 200 is fixed to the mounting base 250 using a one-way screw. You may perform using other members, such as using a locking pin.

  In the above-described embodiment, the sealing piece 231 of the upper case 203 and the sealing piece 211 of the lower case 201 are fixed, thereby disabling the opening of the upper case 203 and the lower case 201. And the fixing member 255 are fixed to each other so that the substrate case 200 cannot be removed from the slot machine body. That is, a sealing means for disabling the opening of the upper case 203 and the lower case 201 and a sealing means for disabling the removal of the substrate case 200 from the slot machine body are separately provided. However, for example, only the sealing piece 232 is provided, and the upper case 203 and the lower case 201 cannot be opened by fixing the sealing piece 232 and the fixing member 255, and the slot machine body of the substrate case 200 is provided. In other words, the upper case 203 and the lower case 201 are disabled from being opened by the common sealing means, and the substrate case 200 is disabled from being removed from the slot machine body. May be.

  In the above-described embodiment, the covering member 236 for separately covering the connection piece 231a of the sealing piece 231 and the connection piece 232a of the sealing piece 232 is applied, but at least the covering member is the connection piece of the sealing piece 231. 231a, the connecting piece 232a of the sealing piece 232, that is, the part where the upper case 203 and the lower case 201 can be opened or removed from the slot machine body by cutting, that is, the restriction is released. For example, a part to be destroyed may be covered, and for example, the connecting piece 231a of the sealing piece 232 and the connecting piece 232a of the sealing piece 232 may be covered by a covering member. The sealing piece 231 including the connection piece 231a and the entire sealing piece 232 including the connection piece 232a may be covered with a covering member. And, further, it may be configured to cover the entire board case 200 containing these sealing pieces by the covering member.

  Here, a modified example of the covering member will be described with reference to FIGS. 64 and 65A and 65B. 64 is a perspective view showing a modified example of the covering member, FIG. 65 (a) is an enlarged view of the main part of FIG. 64, and FIG. 65 (b) is a cross section taken along the line II of FIG. 65 (a). FIG.

  In this modification, as shown in FIG. 64, the sealing piece 231 and the sealing piece 232 are entirely covered by a covering member 238.

  As shown in FIG. 64, locking holes 203g and 203g are formed at both ends of the step 203a of the upper case 203. The attachment bases 250d and 250d are respectively formed with fixing portions 258 and 258 so as to protrude outward. Two fixing holes 258 a are formed in each of the fixing portions 258.

  The covering member has a short piece 238b extending from one end side of a base piece 238a having a length slightly shorter than the short side of the substrate case 200, and a long piece 238c extending from the other end side. Locking claws 238e and 238e are formed on both side ends of the short piece 238b so as to be in positions corresponding to the locking holes 203g and 203g of the upper case 203 when mounted on the board case 200 and the mounting base 250. Further, notches 238d and 238d that fit into the fixing portions 258 and 258 at the time of mounting are formed on both side ends of the long piece 238c, respectively, and locations corresponding to the fixing holes 258a provided in the fixing portions 258 and 258, respectively. A sealing piece 239 is provided to protrude outward.

  As shown in FIGS. 64 and 65 (a) (b), the sealing piece 239 includes a thin connection piece 239a and a sealing portion 239b connected to the long piece 238c of the covering member 238 via the connection piece 239a. It is composed of

  A concave portion 239d is formed on the upper surface side of the sealing portion 239b, and guide grooves 239e and 239e extending toward the opening of the concave portion 239d are formed on the inner surfaces of the concave portion 239d facing in the horizontal direction in the figure. Further, locking holes 239f and 239f are formed in the back of the guide grooves 239e and 239e, respectively. A fixing hole 239g is formed at the bottom of the recess 239d.

  Next, the mounting state of the covering member 238 will be described.

  First, as shown in FIG. 64, the notches 238d and 238d formed on the long piece 238b of the covering member 238 are fitted into the fixing portions 258 and 258 of the mounting base 250, respectively, and the locking claws 238e formed on the short piece 238b, 238e is engaged with the locking holes 203g and 203g of the upper case 203, respectively. In this state, the covering member 238 is movable in the front-rear direction in FIG. 65B, and the engagement between the locking claws 238e and 238e and the locking holes 203g and 203g can be released.

  Next, the one-way screw 237 is screwed into the fixing hole 258a of the fixing portion 258 from the concave portion 239d side of the sealing portion 239b through the fixing hole 239g, so that the sealing piece 239 of the covering member 238 and the fixing portion 258 are fixed. Then, the covering member 238 is attached to the attachment base 250 in a non-removable manner. In this state, the movement of the covering member 238 in the front-rear direction in FIG. 65B is restricted, and the engagement between the locking claws 238e and 238e and the locking holes 203g and 203g cannot be released. As shown in FIG. 65B, the sealing piece 231 and the sealing piece 232 are both covered with the base piece 238a, the short piece 238b, and the long piece 238c of the covering member 238, as shown in FIG. The connection piece 231a and the connection piece 232a of the sealing piece 232 cannot be directly accessed, and the connection piece 231a and the connection piece 232a cannot be cut unless the covering member 238 is removed.

  Further, the one-way screw 237 can be reliably prevented from being pulled out by injecting the heat welding resin B or the like into the recess 239d. Further, as shown in FIGS. 64 and 65 (a) and 65 (b), the covering member 236 used in the first embodiment is attached to the sealing piece 239 fixed to the fixing portion 258, so that the base of the covering member 238 is obtained. The connecting piece 239a is covered by the piece 236a and the hanging piece 236b, and the connecting piece 239a of the sealing piece 239 cannot be directly accessed. If the covering member 236 is not removed, the connecting piece 239a cannot be cut. Therefore, a difficult operation is required to release the covering state by the covering member 238.

  When cutting the sealing piece 231 to open the upper case 203 and the lower case 201, or when cutting the sealing piece 232 and removing the substrate case 200 from the mounting base 250, the sealing piece by the covering member 238 is used. 231, the covering state of the sealing piece 232 needs to be released. In order to release the covering state of the sealing piece 231 and the sealing piece 232 by the covering member 238, the connection piece 239a of the sealing piece 239 is cut with a nipper or the like. As a result, the sealing portion 239b of the sealing piece 239 is separated from the covering member 238, and the engagement between the locking claws 238e and 238e of the covering member 238 and the locking holes 203g and 203g can be released. The covering members 238 can be detached from the substrate case 200 and the mounting base 250 by releasing the engagement between the pawls 238e and 238e and the locking holes 203g and 203g.

  Further, when the covering member 238 is removed from the substrate case 200 and the mounting base 250, the sealing portion 239b of the sealing piece 239 fixed to the fixing portion 258 remains in the fixing portion 258, and the debris is removed. Since it becomes difficult to remove completely, the trace which canceled the covering state can be left.

  Thus, in the modification using the covering member 238, both the sealing piece 231 fixed to the sealing piece 211 and the sealing piece 232 fixed to the fixing member 255 are covered by one covering member 238. It becomes impossible to directly access the connection piece 231a of the sealing piece 231 and the connection piece 232a of the sealing piece 232, and the gaming control board 40 is replaced with an illegal board with a small number of members. It is possible to effectively prevent an illegal act such as replacing the substrate case 200 with an unauthorized substrate.

  In addition, even if the covering member 238 is once released from the covering state, the covering member 238 can be used for a plurality of times while leaving the trace, so that it is not necessary to prepare a new covering member each time the covering state is released. .

  Further, after the sealing piece 239 of the covering member 238 is fixed to the mounting base 258, the covering member 236 is attached to the fixed sealing piece 239, so that it becomes difficult to remove the covering member 238, and the substrate case 200 is attached to the slot machine. Since it is difficult to remove the main case 203 and the upper case 203 and the lower case 201 from each other, an illegal act such as exchanging the game control board 40 with an illegal board, and the game control board 40 together with the board case 200 as an illegal board. It is possible to more effectively prevent illegal acts such as exchange.

  In the above embodiment, a slot machine is applied as a gaming machine. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and may be applied to a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine that uses a gaming ball to play a game.

  Second Embodiment A slot machine to which the present invention is applied will be described. The configuration of the slot machine according to the present embodiment includes the same configuration as that of the first embodiment described above, and therefore, different points will be mainly described here.

  In the first embodiment, the gaming state is the normal gaming state, RT (1), RT (2), and regular bonus, whereas in this embodiment, the gaming state is the initial gaming state, RT (3), It consists of RT (4), RT (5), and regular bonus.

  The initial gaming state is a gaming state other than RT (3), RT (4), and RT (5), which will be described later, during the regular bonus. After the end, the process proceeds after the end of RT (4) and after the end of RT (5). The regular bonus is the same as in the first embodiment.

  In this embodiment, when the replay (1) or Bell wins in the initial gaming state (excluding the state where any special part is elected), the special part (only when the special part is not carried over) and Although the lottery probability of the small role is the same as the initial gaming state, the replay time (3) in which the lottery probability of the replay (2) is higher than the initial gaming state and the medal payout rate per game is less than 1. ) (RT (3)). While the gaming state is at RT (3), the flag during RT (3) is set in the RAM 41c. RT (3) is a specified number of games without winning any special role (in this embodiment, if RT (3) is transferred by replay (1) winning 200 games, RT transferred by bell winning (3) 100 games), or by winning any special role before reaching the specified number of games.

  In addition, when one of the red cherries, blue cherries, or white cherries wins in the initial game state (except when any special part is elected), the special part (only if the special part is not carried over) ) And the small lottery probability is the same as the initial game state, but the replay (1) lottery probability is higher than the initial game state, and the payout rate of medals per game exceeds one (1) 4) Control to (RT (4)). While the gaming state is at RT (4), the flag during RT (4) is set in the RAM 41c. RT (4) reaches the specified number of games (100 games in this embodiment) without winning any special role, or wins any special role before reaching the specified number of games. It comes to end with.

  RT (4) can be shifted only from the initial gaming state, and even if any of red cherry, blue cherry, and white cherry wins during RT (3), the transition is made to RT (4). Once it is controlled to RT (3), RT (3) ends and then RT (4) is reached until either Red Cherry, Blue Cherry, or White Cherry wins in the initial gaming state. There is no migration.

  Replay (2) in the initial gaming state (excluding the state where any special combination is won), RT (3), RT (4) (excluding the state where any special combination is winning) When winning a prize, the lottery probability of special roles (only when special roles are not carried over) and small roles are the same as the initial gaming state, but the lottery probability of replay (1) is higher than the initial gaming state And a replay time (5) (RT (5)) in which the payout rate of medals per game exceeds 1 is controlled. While the gaming state is at RT (5), the flag during RT (5) is set in the RAM 41c. The RT (5) continues until any special role is won, and ends when any special role is won.

  In the present embodiment, in the initial gaming state, RT (3), the medal payout rate is less than 1, so the medal is reduced. In RT (4) and RT (5), the medal payout rate is Since it exceeds 1, the number of medals will increase. In addition, the magnitude relationship between the payout rates of medals in each of these gaming states is RT (4)> RT (5)> RT (3)> initial gaming state.

  As described above, in this embodiment, the initial gaming state (excluding the state where any special combination is won), that is, after the end of the big bonus, after the setting change, after the end of RT (3) or RT (4) In the gaming state after the end, there is a possibility that both RT (3) in which an increase in medals cannot be expected and RT (4) in which an increase in medals can be expected. For this reason, once the transition from the initial gaming state to RT (4), there will be provided an opportunity to transition to RT (4) again even after RT (4) is completed, and the RT (4) is periodically controlled. It becomes possible to do. On the other hand, when transitioning from the initial gaming state to RT (3), there is no transition to RT (4) until the end of the RT (3), but when RT (3) ends, the initial gaming state is entered again. Even in such a case, an opportunity to shift to RT (4) periodically comes. In other words, the initial gaming state functions as a chance zone that may shift to RT (4) where an increase in medals can be expected, and even if such a chance zone shifts to RT (3), it shifts to RT (4). Even if you do, you will visit periodically.

  In addition, when one of red cherry, blue cherry, and white cherry wins in the initial game state, the game moves to RT (4) where an increase in medals can be expected. Because the stop operation cannot be performed simultaneously with the “Red Cherry”, “Blue Cherry”, and “White Cherry” symbols on the left reel, the red reel, blue cherry, or white cherry can be used in the initial gaming state. If you don't know the type, you wo n’t be able to win the winning cherries, and you wo n’t be able to win the winning cherries with a 1/3 chance. Yes, but you won't be able to move to RT (4) in this case because you missed the winning cherry with a probability of 2/3.

  As described above, in the slot machine 1 according to the present embodiment, when any special role is won after the start of RT (4) where an increase in medals can be expected and before reaching the prescribed number of games, RT (4) is terminated when any special role wins without ending RT (4), or when the specified number of games is reached without winning any special role, After RT (4) starts, even if any special role is won before reaching the specified number of games, if the selected special role does not win, RT (4) ends with the winning of the special role Without winning the winning special role, it is possible to continue to control RT (4) until the specified number of games is reached, so even if the special role is won in RT (4) If you don't win the winning special role, It is possible to digest the RT (4) until it reaches the number of the constant game, never would cause losses feeling to the player.

  In addition, since the winning flag of the special role is carried over after the next game until the special role is won, after the RT (4) reaches the specified number of games, the special role won during that time is won. Therefore, it is possible to increase the player's expectation for winning the special role at the end of RT (4).

  In the initial gaming state, there is a possibility that one of the red cherries, the blue cherries, and the white cherries wins, and there is a possibility of shifting to RT (4), which is advantageous for a player who can expect an increase in medals. 1) If any of the bells wins, an increase in medals cannot be expected, and there is a possibility of shifting to RT (3), which is disadvantageous for a player who does not shift to RT (4). When the replay (1) and the bell are won in the initial game state, the game moves to RT (3), which is disadvantageous for the player. However, when RT (3) is completed, the game is shifted to the initial game state again. For this reason, even in the case of transitioning to RT (3) without transitioning to RT (4) in the initial gaming state, the transition to the initial gaming state is performed again thereafter, so there is a possibility of transitioning to RT (4) periodically. The initial gaming state will come, and the player's expectation for RT (4) can be maintained.

  Also, in the initial gaming state, when any of red cherry, blue cherry, or white cherry is won, the operating procedure that matches the winning conditions of the winning cherry, that is, the pull-in range of the combination of red cherry, blue cherry, and white cherry Since the player can make a stop operation at the internal timing, that is, the player can make a transition to RT (4) by technical intervention of the player, the interest in the initial gaming state can be enhanced. At this time, the operation procedure as a winning condition varies depending on the type of cherry, and since there is no common winning procedure for all types of cherries, the player guesses which type of cherries was won, Whether or not to shift to RT (4) is determined depending on whether or not the game is won, and the interest in the initial gaming state can be further enhanced.

  In addition, even if replay (1) or bell wins in the initial gaming state and the transition to RT (3) where no increase in medals can be expected, an increase in medals can be expected in RT (3) and either RT (3) for which an increase in medals cannot be expected because the winning probability of Replay (2), which will continue to RT (5), which continues until the special role is won, is higher than the initial gaming state and RT (4) Even in the case of shifting to, it is possible to increase the player's expectation for shifting to RT (5).

  As described above, the second embodiment of the present invention has been described. However, the present invention is not limited to the second embodiment, and changes and additions within the scope of the present invention are included in the present invention. Needless to say. Further, the same or similar configuration as the first embodiment has the same effect as that described in the first embodiment. Further, the modified example illustrated for the first embodiment is also applicable to the second embodiment.

  In the second embodiment, the lottery probability of replay (2) is increased in RT (3). However, it is sufficient that at least the combined probability of replay (1) and replay (2) is increased. The lottery probability of 1) may be increased, or the lottery probability of both replay (1) and replay (2) may be increased. Furthermore, although the lottery probability of one type of replay decreases, even if the lottery probability of the other type of replay increases, the combined probability of replay (1) and replay (2) increases as a result. good.

  In the second embodiment, the lottery probability of replay (1) is increased in RT (4), but it is sufficient that at least the combined probability of replay (1) and replay (2) is increased. The lottery probability of 2) may be increased, or the lottery probabilities of both replay (1) and replay (2) may be increased. Furthermore, although the lottery probability of one type of replay decreases, even if the lottery probability of the other type of replay increases, the combined probability of replay (1) and replay (2) increases as a result. good.

  In the second embodiment, in the initial gaming state (excluding the state where any special combination is elected), RT (3), RT (4) (excluding the state where any special combination is elected) When the replay (2) wins, the control is made to RT (5). However, when the replay (2) wins only in one specific gaming state (for example, the initial gaming state), RT ( 5) may be controlled, and in this way, by controlling to a specific gaming state, it is possible to effectively enhance the player's expectation to move to RT (5). it can.

  A third embodiment of the slot machine to which the present invention is applied will be described. The configuration of the slot machine according to the present embodiment includes the same configuration as that of the first embodiment described above, and therefore, different points will be mainly described here.

  In the first embodiment, the gaming state is the normal gaming state, RT (1), RT (2), and the regular bonus. In this embodiment, the gaming state is the normal gaming state, the single bonus, RT, Consists of regular bonuses.

  In the present embodiment, single bonuses (1) to (3) are defined as special bonuses in addition to the big bonuses (1) to (5) of the first embodiment described above. As shown in FIG. 67, the single bonus (1) is awarded when the combination of “blue 7-replay-replay” is aligned on any winning line in the normal gaming state or the single bonus, and the single bonus (2). Is awarded when a combination of “White 7-Replay-Replay” is arranged on any winning line in the normal gaming state or the single bonus, and the single bonus (3) is either in the normal gaming state or the single bonus. When a combination of “Red 7-Replay-Replay” is arranged on the winning line, a winning is awarded.

  If any of the single bonuses (1) to (3) is won in the normal gaming state and the single bonus, the winning probability of the bell is slightly increased (the judgment value is increased by 1 as shown in FIG. 68). To do. While the gaming state is single bonus, a single bonus medium flag is set in the RAM 41c.

  In this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 67, in the normal gaming state and the single bonus, the single bonus (1) + red cherry, single bonus (2) + blue cherry, single bonus (3) + white cherry are internally drawn. Red cherries, blue cherries, white cherries, and single bonuses (1) to (3) are independently excluded from the internal lottery. In RT which shifts by winning any of the big bonuses (1) to (3), red cherry, blue cherry and white cherry are subject to internal lottery alone, and single bonuses (1) to (3 Special roles including) are not eligible for internal lottery.

  The winning probabilities of red cherry, blue cherry and white cherry (including the case of simultaneous winning with big bonus (1) to (3) and single bonus (1) to 3)) among the small roles are shown in FIG. As shown, the same is true in any of the normal gaming state, single bonus, and RT, and the winning probability of the bell is slightly higher in the single bonus than in the normal gaming state and RT.

  The single bonuses (1) to (3) are special roles. Unlike the big bonuses (1) to (3), the single bonuses (1) to (3) are valid only in the game in which the winning flag is won. Even if (3) is elected and cannot win, it will not be carried over to the next game.

  In the first embodiment described above, the red cherry, blue cherry, and white cherry were paid out at the time of winning one (three in order to match the three winning lines), whereas in this embodiment, the red cherry was used. , Blue cherry and white cherry are paid out at the time of winning 15 prizes.

  In this embodiment, when the single bonus (1) + red cherry is won, at the time of the first to third stops, the symbols constituting the combination of red cherries using the common data creation table (1) The combination of the big bonus (1) and the number of sliding symbols that draws the symbols constituting the number of sliding symbols that draws the chance to the maximum into any of the winning lines L1 to L4 within the range of 4 frames is stored in the virtual sliding frame table. After that, among the stop operation positions where the symbols constituting the red cherry are drawn into the winning lines L1 to L4, the number of sliding symbols at the stop operation position where the single bonus (1), which is a special role, can be drawn into the winning lines L1 to L4, red The number of sliding symbols at the stop operation position where the symbols constituting the cherry are not drawn into the winning lines L1 to L4, the single bonus (1) is set to the winning lines L1 to L4. Stop operation position that has been updated to the number of sliding frames to be entered and that stores the number of sliding frames that is a stop prohibition position that cannot avoid winnings (big bonus (1)) and duplicate winnings other than red cherry and single bonus (1) Is updated to the number of sliding symbols that become the stop positions other than the stop prohibition position. In addition, the number of sliding symbols at other stop operation positions is maintained. As a result, when the stop operation is performed, if the combination of the single bonus (1) can be stopped in the pay lines L1 to L4 within the drawing range of a maximum of 4 frames, the control is performed to stop them in alignment. If the combination of single bonus (1) cannot be drawn into the winning lines L1 to L4 with a drawing range of up to 4 frames, the combination of red cherries is aligned to the winning lines L1 to L4 with a drawing range of up to 4 frames. If it can be stopped, the control to stop them together is performed. That is, in such a case, priority is given to the control for aligning the single bonus (1), which is a special role, to the winning lines L1 to L4 over the red cherry, and the red cherry is only given when the single bonus (1) cannot be drawn. It is possible to win a prize. For this reason, the area numbers 1 to 7 of the left reel are the drawing ranges of “red cherry” that constitutes the red cherry, and among these, the area numbers that are the drawing range of “blue 7” that constitutes the single bonus (1) When operated at the timing of 5 to 7, “red cherry” is not drawn into the winning lines L1 to L4, but “blue 7” is drawn, and the winning of red cherry is restricted.

  When the single bonus (2) + blue cherry is won, at the time of the first to third stops, the symbols and the big bonus (2) constituting the combination of blue cherries using the common data creation table (2) ) And the number of sliding symbols that draws the maximum number of symbols constituting the number of sliding symbols that draws the chance in the winning line L1 to L4 within the range of 4 frames is stored in the virtual sliding frame table, then blue cherry Among the stop operation positions for drawing the symbols constituting the winning line L1 to L4, the number of sliding symbols at the stop operation position where the special bonus single bonus (2) can be drawn to the winning lines L1 to L4, and the symbols constituting the blue cherry The number of sliding symbols at the stop operation position that does not draw the winning line L1 to L4 into the winning line L1 to L4, the sliding coin that draws the single bonus (2) into the winning line L1 to L4 The stop operation position that is updated to a number and stores the number of sliding symbols that are the stop-prohibited position that cannot avoid the winnings (Big Bonus (2)) and double winnings other than Blue Cherry and Single Bonus (2) is stopped. It is updated to the number of sliding frames that become the stop position other than the prohibited position. In addition, the number of sliding symbols at other stop operation positions is maintained. Thereby, when the stop operation is performed, if the combination of the single bonus (2) can be stopped in the winning lines L1 to L4 within the drawing range of a maximum of 4 frames, the control is performed so as to stop them together. If the combination of single bonus (2) cannot be drawn into the winning lines L1 to L4 with a maximum draw range of 4 frames, the blue cherry combination is aligned to the winning lines L1 to L4 with a draw range of up to 4 frames. If it can be stopped, the control to stop them together is performed. That is, in such a case, priority is given to the control for aligning the single bonus (2), which is a special role, to the winning lines L1 to L4 over the blue cherry, and the blue cherry is only given when the single bonus (2) cannot be drawn. It is possible to win a prize. For this reason, the area numbers 0, 15 to 20 of the left reel are the drawing range of “blue cherry” constituting the blue cherry, and among these, the drawing range of “white 7” constituting the single bonus (2). When operated at the timing of the area numbers 0, 19, and 20, “Blue Cherry” is not drawn into the winning lines L1 to L4, but “White 7” is drawn, and the winning of Blue Cherry is restricted. It becomes.

  When the single bonus (3) + white cherry is won, at the time of the first to third stops, the symbols and big bonuses (3 that constitute the combination of white cherries using the common data creation table (3)) ) And the number of sliding symbols that draws the maximum number of symbols constituting the number of sliding symbols that draws the chance in the winning line L1 to L4 within the range of 4 frames is stored in the virtual sliding frame table, then white cherry Among the stop operation positions for drawing the symbols constituting the winning line L1 to L4, the number of sliding symbols at the stop operation position for drawing the single bonus (3), which is a special role, into the winning lines L1 to L4, the symbols constituting the white cherry The number of sliding symbols at the stop operation position that does not draw the winning line L1 to L4 into the winning line L1 to L4, the sliding coin that draws the single bonus (3) into the winning line L1 to L4 The stop operation position that is updated to the number and stores the number of sliding frames that are the stop prohibition position that cannot avoid the winning of a combination other than the white cherry and the single bonus (3) (big bonus (3)) or the double winning is stopped. It is updated to the number of sliding frames that become the stop position other than the prohibited position. In addition, the number of sliding symbols at other stop operation positions is maintained. As a result, when the stop operation is performed, if the combination of the single bonus (3) can be stopped in the winning lines L1 to L4 within the maximum four-frame drawing range, the control is performed so as to stop the same. If the combination of single bonus (3) cannot be drawn into the winning lines L1 to L4 with a drawing range of up to 4 frames, the combination of white cherries is aligned to the winning lines L1 to L4 with a drawing range of up to 4 frames. If it can be stopped, the control to stop them together is performed. That is, in such a case, priority is given to the control for aligning the single bonus (3), which is a special role, to the pay lines L1 to L4 over the white cherry, and the white cherry is only given when the single bonus (3) cannot be drawn. It is possible to win a prize. For this reason, the area numbers 8 to 14 of the left reel are the drawing ranges of “white cherry” constituting the white cherry, and among these, the area numbers that are the drawing range of “red 7” constituting the single bonus (3) When operated at a timing of 12 to 14, “white cherry” is not drawn into the pay lines L1 to L4, but “red 7” is drawn, and the winning of white cherry is restricted.

  As described above, in this embodiment, when any of the cherries is won in the normal gaming state or in the single bonus, the pull-in of the cherries is restricted by the single bonus that is won at the same time. In addition, since the single bonus (1) to (3) is applied with “replay” that is not missed as the constituent symbols of the middle reel and the right reel, the stop operation of the left reel is performed regardless of the stop order of the reels. Will be limited by the single bonus that is won at the same time. On the other hand, in RT, since a cherry is won by itself, the pulling in of the cherry is not restricted by winning a single bonus. In RT, one of the big bonuses (1) to (3) is always won, so the winning of the big bonus will limit the pull-in of cherry. By stopping the middle reel or the right reel before the left reel outside the drawing range of the constituent symbols of the big bonus, it is possible to prevent the cherry big from being limited by the winning big bonus.

  In the present embodiment, according to the lottery probability in FIG. 68, the payout rate of medals per game in the normal gaming state is 0.8580, the expected payout value per game (the average value of the number of payouts per game, that is, The winning probability of each combination x the total number of payouts for each combination) is about 2.5739, and the number of bets required to start the game in the normal gaming state is 3, so about 0.4261 each Although medals will decrease, red cherry, blue cherry, and white cherry cannot simultaneously aim for the symbols that make up these roles, and the actual appearance rate will be 1/3, so the normal gaming state The substantial payout rate of medals per game in the game is 0.6602, and the expected payout value per game is about 1.9807, and the number of medals decreases by about 1.0193.

  According to the lottery probability in FIG. 68, the payout rate of medals per game in the single bonus is 0.8583, and the expected payout value per game is about 2.5748, so that the game can be started in the single bonus. Since the required number of bets is 3, the number of medals will decrease by about 0.4252, but Red Cherry, Blue Cherry, and White Cherry cannot simultaneously aim for the symbols that make up these roles. Since the actual appearance rate is 1/3, the actual payout rate of medals per game in the normal gaming state is 0.6605, and the expected payout value per game is about 1.9816, The number of medals will decrease by 1.0184.

  In the normal gaming state and single bonus, red cherry, blue cherry, and white cherry are selected at the same time as any single bonus as described above, and withdrawal is limited by the selected single bonus. The appearance rate is further lowered, and the actual payout rate per game and the expected payout value per game are further lower than those described above.

  In this way, in the single bonus, the winning probability of the bell is slightly higher than in the normal gaming state, so the single bonus has both the medal payout rate per game and the expected payout value per game both in the normal gaming state. Higher and more advantageous to the player, but the difference is slight.

  In addition, the actual expected payout value in the single bonus is about 1.9816, whereas the payout number to be paid out when any of the cherries wins is 15 as described above. If any of the single bonuses (1) to (3) is won at the same time as one of the cherries in the normal gaming state and the single bonus, more medals can be obtained by winning the selected cherry. it can.

  In this embodiment, when any of the big bonuses (1) to (3) is won in the normal gaming state, the lottery probability of the small role is the same as in the normal gaming state, but the replay (1) and the replay (2) ) Is controlled to a replay time (RT) in which the synthetic probability is higher than the normal gaming state. While the gaming state is at RT, the RT flag is set in the RAM 41c. The RT ends when the winning big bonus is won.

  According to the lottery probability of FIG. 68, the payout rate of medals per game in RT is 1.5283, and since it exceeds 1, an increase in medals can be expected, but red cherry, blue cherry, and white cherry The symbols that make up the combination cannot be aimed at the same time, and the actual appearance rate is 1/3. Considering this, the actual payout rate per game in RT is 0.9917, that is, less than 1. The medal will decrease.

  When any of the big bonuses (1) to (3) wins, the CPU 91a of the sub-control unit 91 of the present embodiment notifies the type of the big bonus that has been won and also notifies the type of cherry that notifies the type of cherry. A game number distribution lottery is performed in which the number of games to be controlled during the assist time is selected from 0, 50, and 100.

  In the game number distribution lottery, the number of games is selected at different selection rates depending on the type of the big bonus that has been won. Specifically, when the big bonus (1) is won, 100 games are selected at a rate of 100%, and when the big bonus (2) is won, the game is 100 more than when the big bonus (3) is won. The ratio of selecting games and 50 games is high, and when the big bonus (3) is won, the ratio of selecting the 0 game is higher than when the big bonus (2) is won. That is, when the big bonus (1) is won, 100 games are confirmed, and when the big bonus (2) is won, a larger number of games can be selected than when the big bonus (3) is won. High nature.

  Then, the CPU 91a sets the number of games selected in the game number distribution lottery in the RAM 91c, and controls the assist time until the number of games is consumed, during which one of red cherry, blue cherry, and white cherry is selected. When is won, a cherry type notification for informing the type is executed.

  As with the fall type combination notification in Example 1, the cherry type notification is a color indicating that the red cherry was elected, the blue cherry was elected, and the white cherry was elected (the red cherry was elected) To indicate the type of the winning cherry by notifying red, blue if the blue cherry is winning, and blue if the white cherry is winning) However, it is sufficient that the player can recognize the type of the selected cherry, and the type of the selected cherry itself, or the combination of symbols, the symbols that differ depending on the type of cherry, images that suggest these types of cherries, etc. A notification may be made by displaying on the liquid crystal display 51, or a notification may be made by lighting a corresponding LED, outputting a corresponding sound, or the like. Furthermore, a symbol that is an index of a symbol that differs depending on the type of cherry (such as a symbol that is located near the symbol of the cherry and that stands out from the symbol of the cherry), an image that suggests the symbol, etc. Anyway.

  In addition, in particular, when the winning cherries are limited by the type of the big bonus that has been won, in addition to the notification of the cherry type, an operating procedure for avoiding the symbols of the big bonus that has been won by the middle reel or the right reel ( For example, when the big bonus (1) is won, the procedure for performing the first stop operation aiming at the blue 7 of the right reel, when the big bonus (2) or the big bonus (3) is won Is a procedure for performing a stop operation for the first time on the right reel of red 7), that is, a procedure for preventing the winning cherry pull-in from being restricted.

  In this embodiment, the number of games is applied as the assist time end condition. However, the assist time end condition can be selected in various ways. For example, the winning of the winning special role, the number of games and the cherry type Number of notifications to be executed, number of cherry wins to reach a specified number, winning or winning a specific role, winning or winning a specific role to reach a specified number, winning a final lottery, etc. Is applicable. Further, the end condition may be changed during the assist time. Further, it may be determined by lottery whether or not to end the assist time for each prescribed number of games, and the lottery is won by winning the lottery.

  In this embodiment, as described above, the “red cherry” symbol, “blue cherry” symbol, and “white cherry” symbol of the left reel constituting red cherry, blue cherry, and white cherry are intentionally stopped on the winning line. Therefore, even if red cherries, blue cherries, and white cherries are elected, it is impossible to deliberately win these red cherries, blue cherries, and white cherries. Although it is possible to win with a probability of 1/3, it will be missed with a probability of 2/3.

  On the other hand, in assist time, when one of red cherry, blue cherry, or white cherry is elected, the cherry type notification is executed, so that the player can select red cherry, blue cherry according to the notified color. It is possible to recognize which kind of cherry is won among the white cherries, and the red reel, blue cherries, and white cherries that make up the left cherry “red cherries”, “blue cherries” and “white” It is possible to specify the stop operation position where the “cherry” symbol stops on the winning line, and it is possible to win all the winning cherries.

  In the present embodiment, as described above, the substantial payout rate of medals per game at RT is less than 1, and the number of medals will decrease, but the red cherry won by being controlled by the assist time, Since all blue cherries and white cherries can be won, the payout rate of medals per game in this case exceeds 1.

  For this reason, when one of the big bonuses is won and controlled by RT, the medal will increase while the assist time is controlled. It is possible to win more medals if you continue. On the other hand, after the assist time is over, medals will decrease and big bonus lotteries will not be drawn, so it is advantageous for players to win the winning big bonus and finish RT .

  As described above, in the slot machine according to the present embodiment, when any of the big bonuses (1) to (3) is won, the RT is controlled until the winning big bonus is won. An increase in medals can be expected on condition that all red cherries, blue cherries and white cherries are awarded. That is, when one of the big bonuses (1) to (3) is won, the RT is controlled to be advantageous to the player, and the RT does not continue from the big bonus, but the flow from RT to the big bonus Since the game state advantageous to the player continues, it is possible to increase the player's expectation step by step until the big bonus is controlled.

  In addition, RT can be expected to increase medals on the condition that all red cherries, blue cherries and white cherries won as mentioned above, but all red cherries, blue cherries and white cherries won In order to win a prize, the left reel must be stopped at the timing of the drawing range of the “cherry” symbol of the color according to the type of the selected cherry, and the red cherry, blue cherry, and white cherry are configured. Since the “Red Cherry”, “Blue Cherry” and “White Cherry” designs of the left reel cannot be intentionally stopped on the winning line, if you do not know the type of the winning cherry, It is not possible to win a prize, and an increase in medals cannot be expected just by moving to RT.

  Therefore, in this embodiment, when the big bonuses (1) to (3) are won, not only the transition to RT is performed, but a lottery for lottery of games is performed and any cherry is selected during the number of won games. Is selected, the cherry type notification that indicates the type of the selected cherry is executed at the assist time. Therefore, the winning operation is performed by aiming the color cherry notified by the cherry type notification to the left reel. It is possible to win all the cherries that have been awarded. However, even though the type of cherry won by assist time will be informed, an increase in medals is not expected if the stop operation cannot be performed accordingly, and the player will be the first to perform technical intervention for the player. Since an advantageous gaming state can be achieved, the interest of the game can be improved.

  In addition, RT continues until one of the big bonuses (1) to (3) is won and then the won big bonus is won, but the cherry type notification is executed only during the assist time. After the assist time is over, cherry type notification is not executed even at RT, and technical intervention by the player is virtually impossible, so an increase in medals cannot be expected. After the end, it is possible to prompt the player to win the winning big bonus.

  Also, in this embodiment, when red cherries, blue cherries, and white cherries are won in the normal gaming state and single bonus, that is, when any cherries that cannot be reliably won even if won are won. If a single bonus that transfers only one game to a single bonus with a higher medal payout rate than the normal gaming state is won at the same time, but one of the cherries won can not be won and won a medal However, since the single bonus is won and the profit from the single bonus can be obtained, it is possible to reduce the loss of the player caused by the spilling of the cherry.

  In addition, although the single bonus has a higher medal payout rate than in the normal gaming state, the expected payout value is lower than the number of medals obtained by winning a cherry. If the player guesses the type of cherry and then wins the cherry, he will win more medals than if he missed the cherry and won a single bonus, so the guessed cherry was right and won. The interest of the player at the time can be further enhanced.

  In this embodiment, in the normal gaming state and the single bonus, any cherry and any single bonus are always won at the same time, and any cherry or any single bonus is not won independently. In addition to the case where one of the cherries and one of the single bonuses are always won at the same time, one of the cherries or one of the single bonuses may be won alone.

  Also, in this embodiment, one of the cherries and one of the single bonuses was won at the same time, and the stop operation was performed at a timing at which both the winning cherries and the winning single bonus components could be drawn. In this case, the single bonus component is controlled to be drawn in preference to the cherry component, and any big bonus is won and carried over, that is, during RT, the single bonus is internal. Not eligible for lottery. For this reason, when one of the cherries wins in the normal gaming state, the winning of the winning cherries in the normal gaming state, that is, the medal payout rate, is restricted by the single bonus that is won at the same time. The medal payout rate in RT can be relatively increased without lowering the pull-in of cherries won by the single bonus. On the other hand, in RT, it is possible to win a winning cherry without performing a stop operation in the troublesome procedure of avoiding a single bonus.

  As described above, the third embodiment of the present invention has been described. However, the present invention is not limited to the third embodiment, and modifications and additions within the scope of the present invention are included in the present invention. Needless to say. Further, the same or similar configuration as in the first or second embodiment has the same effect as that described in the first or second embodiment. Further, the modified example illustrated for the first embodiment or the second embodiment can also be applied to the third embodiment.

It is a front view of the slot machine of the Example to which this invention was applied. It is an internal structure figure of a slot machine. It is a figure which shows the symbol arrangement | sequence of a reel. It is a block diagram which shows the structure of a slot machine. It is the schematic which shows the wiring connection state of the game control board and the electronic component for games connected to this game control board. It is a circuit diagram which shows the structure of the periphery of disconnection monitoring IC in a game control board. (A) is a block diagram which shows the structure of an external output board | substrate, (b) is a figure which shows the structure of the data format of a security signal. (A) is a figure which shows an example of a security signal, (b) (c) is a figure which shows the transmission condition of a security signal. It is a figure which shows a winning combination table. It is a figure which shows the example of the value of the random number for internal lottery in each game state, the judgment value number of each combination, and the relationship with a winning combination. It is a figure which shows the example of the value of the random number for internal lottery in each game state, the judgment value number of each combination, and the relationship with a winning combination. It is a figure which shows the example of the value of the random number for internal lottery in a regular bonus, the number of judgment values of each combination, and the winning combination. It is a figure which shows the structure of a reel motor. (A) is a timing chart which shows the control method at the time of starting of a reel motor, (b) is a timing chart which shows the control method at the time of rotation of a reel motor and a stop. It is a figure which shows the stop control applied by the stop time as a result of an internal lottery. It is a figure which shows the procedure of the stop control by a table system. It is a figure which shows the procedure of the stop control by a control system. It is a figure which shows the procedure of the stop control by a table + control system. (A) is a figure which shows the comparison order of the priority of the stop position according to the number of sliding frames, (b) is a figure which shows the relationship of the priority of a stop position. It is a figure which shows the structure of a virtual sliding top table. It is a figure which shows an example of the update state of an example of a common stop control table, and the virtual sliding top table at the time of performing stop control by a table + control system. (A) is a timing chart which shows the control condition of a full tank error, (b) is a timing chart which shows the detection condition of a full tank sensor. It is a timing chart which shows the control situation of a full tank error. It is a timing chart which shows the modification of the control situation of a full tank error. It is a timing chart which shows the modification of the control situation of a full tank error. It is a timing chart which shows the modification of the control situation of a full tank error. (A) is a figure which shows the selection rate of the frequency | count of falling combination alert | reporting, (b) is a figure which shows the characteristic according to BB production mode. It is a figure which shows the background selection rate in RT (2) effect. It is a figure which shows the outline | summary of the bonus production performed when a big bonus (4) or a big bonus (5) wins. It is a timing chart which shows the relationship between volume adjustment and the progress of a game. It is a timing chart which shows the relationship between volume adjustment and the progress of a game. It is a flowchart which shows the control content of the starting process which CPU of a main control part performs at the time of starting. It is a flowchart which shows the control content of the error process performed when CPU of a main control part generate | occur | produces an error. It is a flowchart which shows the control content of the setting change process which CPU of a main control part performs in a starting process. It is a flowchart which shows the control content of the game process which CPU of a main control part performs after a starting process. It is a flowchart which shows the control content of the BET process which CPU of a main control part performs after a starting process. It is a flowchart which shows the control content of the BET process which CPU of a main control part performs after a starting process. It is a flowchart which shows the control content of the internal lottery process which CPU of a main control part performs in a game process. It is a flowchart which shows the control content of the reel rotation process which CPU of a main control part performs in a game process. It is a flowchart which shows the control content of the sliding frame number setting process which CPU of a main control part performs in a reel rotation process. It is a flowchart which shows the control content of the sliding frame number update process which CPU of a main control part performs in a sliding frame number setting process. It is a flowchart which shows the control content of the stop position search process which CPU of a main control part performs in a sliding frame number setting process. It is a flowchart which shows the control content of RT process which CPU of a main control part performs in the process at the time of a game end. It is a flowchart which shows the control content of the timer interruption process (main) which CPU of a main control part performs regularly. It is a flowchart which shows the control content of the timer interruption process (main) which CPU of a main control part performs regularly. It is a flowchart which shows the control content of the stop switch process which CPU of a main control part performs in a timer interruption process (main). It is a flowchart which shows the control content of the door monitoring process which CPU of a main control part performs in a timer interruption process (main). It is a flowchart which shows the control content of the command transmission process which CPU of a main control part performs in a timer interruption process (main). It is a flowchart which shows the control content of the interruption interruption process (main) performed when CPU of a main control part inputs a voltage drop signal from an interruption detection circuit. It is a flowchart which shows the control content of the starting process (sub) which CPU of a sub control part performs at the time of starting. It is a flowchart which shows the control content of the timer interruption process (sub) which CPU of a sub control part performs regularly. It is a disassembled perspective view which shows the attachment base for attaching a board | substrate case and a board | substrate case to the housing | casing which makes the main body of a slot machine, and a connector control member. It is a disassembled perspective view which shows the attachment base for attaching a board | substrate case and a board | substrate case to the housing | casing which makes the main body of a slot machine, and a connector control member. It is a perspective view which shows the state which assembled | attached the substrate case to the attachment base. It is a principal part expansion perspective view of the attachment side member and connector cap which comprise a connector control member. (A) is AA sectional drawing of FIG. 55, (b) (c) is BB sectional drawing of FIG. It is a perspective view which shows the state which assembled | attached the board | substrate case to the attachment base, and also attached the connector cap with respect to the attachment side member. (A) is CC sectional drawing of FIG. 57, (b) is DD sectional drawing of FIG. It is a perspective view which shows the attachment condition of the coating | coated member which coat | covers the sealing piece which seals a substrate case to an attachment base. 59A is an enlarged view of a main part of FIG. 59, FIG. 59B is an EE sectional view of FIG. 59A, and FIG. It is a disassembled perspective view which shows the mounting base and cover member which comprise a connector control member. It is a perspective view which shows the state which assembled | attached the cover member with respect to the mounting base. (A) is GG sectional drawing of FIG. 62, (b) is HH sectional drawing of FIG. It is a perspective view which shows the modification of a coating | coated member. (A) is the principal part enlarged view of FIG. 64, (b) is II sectional drawing of Fig.65 (a). It is a circuit diagram which shows the modification of the structure around the power supply of the main control part in a game control board. It is a figure which shows the combination and combination of a combination used as the lottery object of Example 3. FIG. It is a figure which respectively shows the example of the relationship between the value of the random number for internal lottery in each game state of Example 3, the number of judgment values of each combination, and a winning combination.

Explanation of symbols

1 Slot Machine 2L, 2C, 2R Reel 25 Door Opening Detection Switch 32L, 32C, 32R Reel Motor 34 Hopper Unit 35 Overflow Tank 35a Full Tank Sensor 41 Main Control Unit 41a CPU
41b ROM
41c RAM
56a, 56b Light emitting device 57a, 57b Light receiving device 91 Sub control unit 91a CPU
91b ROM
91c RAM
99 Touch panel controller

Claims (8)

The game can be started by setting a predetermined number of bets for one game using the gaming value, and fluctuates by rotating a reel on which a plurality of types of symbols that can be distinguished from each other are rotated. A slot machine in which one game is completed by deriving a display result to a displayable variable display device, and a winning can be generated according to the display result of the variable display device,
A game control means for controlling the game and transmitting control information based on the control of the game;
Multiple types of production means;
Production control means for controlling production by the plurality of types of production means based on the received control information;
Operation means for performance provided separately from the game operation means operated when the player performs an operation related to the progress of the game,
With
The game control means includes
Control information generating means for generating the control information;
Game control information storage means having a plurality of storage areas capable of storing control information generated by the control information generation means;
Control information transmitting means for transmitting control information stored in the game control information storage means to the effect control means;
Including
The production control means includes
When the control information for the test of the operation means for the effect is received, the operation means inspection means for the effect for executing the inspection of the operation detection state of the operation means for the effect,
After receiving the test control information of the production operation means, the in-inspection control prohibition means for inhibiting the control based on the reception of new control information until the operation of the production operation means is detected;
Production control information storage means having a plurality of storage areas capable of storing the received control information;
Effect execution control means for reading out the control information stored in the effect control information storage means in the order in which they are stored, and performing control for executing the effect according to the read control information;
Including
The presentation control information storage means, more than the storage area having said gaming control information storage unit, and have a lot of storage space than the number of kinds of the presentation unit,
The slot machine is
A stepping motor for rotating the reel by exciting in a predetermined order with respect to a plurality of excitation phases arranged so as to surround a rotor incorporating a permanent magnet;
The game control means includes
Drive control means for performing drive control to excite the excitation phase of the stepping motor in the predetermined order;
A memory for storing data to be read and written by the microcomputer constituting the game control means including data indicating a stop phase which is an excitation phase excited by the stepping motor when the reel is stopped. Data storage means having an area and capable of holding data stored in the storage area even when power supply to the slot machine is stopped,
A setting value that is set by selecting any setting value from a plurality of types of setting values with different ratios for determining whether or not winning is permitted based on an operation of a predetermined setting operation means. Setting means;
Stored data determination means for determining whether or not the data stored in the data storage means is normal;
Disabling means for disabling the progress of the game when the stored data determination means determines that the data stored in the data storage means is not normal;
In a state where the progress of the game is disabled by the disabling means, the progress of the game is performed on the condition that the setting value is newly set by the setting value setting means based on the operation of the setting operation means. The disabling means for canceling the disabled state and allowing the game to proceed,
A setting time initialization means for initializing data stored in the data storage means as a new setting value is set based on an operation of the predetermined setting operation means;
Including
The data storage means stores, in the storage area, data indicating a stop phase that is an excitation phase excited by the stepping motor when the reel stops.
The setting initialization means initializes data excluding at least data indicating the stop phase of the stepping motor among data stored in the data storage means, and does not initialize data indicating the stop phase,
The drive control means is based on data indicating the stop phase of the stepping motor stored in the data storage means when the data storage means is initialized by the setting time initialization means. A slot machine that controls driving of the stepping motor. A predetermined first frame;
A second frame that is openable and closable with respect to the first frame;
An open / close state detection means for detecting an open / close state of the second frame;
With
The game control means includes
Basic processing execution means for performing basic processing for proceeding in stages;
Interrupt processing execution means for interrupting the basic processing and performing interrupt processing at predetermined time intervals;
Control information generating means for generating the control information;
Control information storage means for storing control information generated by the control information generation means;
Control information transmission means for transmitting control information stored in the control information storage means to the effect control means;
Open / closed state detection monitoring means for monitoring the detection state of the open / closed state detection means;
Including
The control information generating means
Game control information generating means for generating game control information according to the progress of the game as control information in the basic processing;
When the opening / closing state detection monitoring unit detects a change in the detection state of the opening / closing state detection unit, an opening / closing state that generates opening / closing state detection information indicating the detection state of the opening / closing state detection unit after the change is generated as the control information Detection information generating means;
Including
The control information storage means includes
Game control information storage means capable of storing a plurality of the game control information;
Open / closed state detection information storing means for storing the open / closed state detection information;
Separately
The control information transmitting means includes
While transmitting the control information stored in the control information storage means in the interruption process to the effect control means,
Even when a plurality of control information is stored in the control information storage means, only one control information is transmitted in one interrupt process without transmitting a plurality of control information in one interrupt process. And
When the opening / closing state detection information is stored in the opening / closing state detection information storage unit, the opening / closing state detection information is given priority regardless of whether or not the game control information is stored in the game control information storage unit. If the opening / closing state detection information is not stored in the opening / closing state detection information storage means and the game control information is stored in the game control information storage means, Send the game control information generated at the earliest stage,
The production control means includes
An opening determination means for determining whether or not the second frame is open based on a detection state of the opening / closing state detection means indicated by the opening / closing state detection information received from the game control means;
An opening notifying means for notifying the opening of the second frame when the opening determining means determines that the second frame is open;
The slot machine according to claim 1, comprising: Special gaming state control means for controlling the gaming state to a special gaming state advantageous to the player until a predetermined ending condition is satisfied when a predetermined special transition condition is satisfied;
Production selection means for selecting the type of production executed in the special gaming state in accordance with an instruction from the player;
A selection effect execution means for executing an effect of the type selected by the effect selection means when being controlled in the special gaming state;
Whether or not a lottery with different winning conditions is performed according to the type of the effect selected by the effect selection means when the special gaming state is controlled, and whether or not a predetermined condition is satisfied based on the result of the lottery Condition establishment determination means for determining whether or not
Whether or not to control the gaming state to a specific gaming state advantageous to a player different from the special gaming state after the special gaming state is ended when it is determined that the condition is established by the condition establishment judging means. A specific gaming state determination means to determine;
Specific game state notifying means for notifying a player that the specific game state is controlled when it is determined by the specific game state determining means to be controlled to the specific game state;
Specific game state control means for controlling the game state to the specific game state after the special game state is ended when it is determined by the specific game state determination means to control to the specific game state;
With
The specific game state informing means, in a manner that depends on the type of effect selected by the effect selection means, to claim 1 or 2, characterized in that notification to the effect that controlling the gaming state to the specific game state The described slot machine . The production operation means includes a touch panel that detects an operation within a predetermined area based on detection states of a plurality of sensors, and identifies the operated position.
The production control means includes an abnormal sensor invalidating means for invalidating detection of a sensor whose detection time exceeds a predetermined time when the detection time of any one of the plurality of sensors exceeds a predetermined time. the slot machine according to any one of claims 1 to 3, characterized in that it comprises. The production control means includes
An operation effect executing means for executing an operation effect whose contents change according to the operation of the effect operation means;
When the operation means for the effect is operated in the operation effect, the advantageous effect that is advantageous when the game is advanced is more advantageous than when the operation means for the effect is not operated in the operation effect. Production execution means;
The slot machine according to any one of claims 1 to 4, characterized in that it comprises a. The game control means includes
Game value storage means for storing a player-owned game value;
Bet number setting means for setting a bet number using at least the game value stored in the game value storage means;
Game value return control means for performing game value return control for returning the game value stored in the game value storage means in response to an operation of a predetermined game value return operation means;
Including
The production execution control means includes:
Sound output control means for performing control to continuously output a continuous game sound effect over one game based on establishment of a predetermined condition;
In a state where the sound output control means outputs a continuous game sound effect at a normal volume, after the game is over, when a predetermined time elapses without setting the number of bets, the slot machine Volume reduction control means for performing control to lower the volume of the output sound effect,
Including
When the game value return control is executed by the game value return control means in a state where the sound output control means is outputting a continuous game sound effect at the normal volume, the volume reduction control means also, the slot machine according to any one of claims 1 to 5, wherein the performing control to lower the volume of the sound effect output from the slot machine. The game control means includes
Bet number storage means for storing the set bet number;
Bet number return control means for performing bet number return control for returning a gaming value corresponding to the bet number stored in the bet number storage means in response to an operation of a predetermined bet number return operation means;
Including
The production execution control means includes:
Sound output control means for performing control to continuously output a continuous game sound effect over one game based on establishment of a predetermined condition;
In a state where the sound output control means outputs a continuous game sound effect at a normal volume, after the game is over, when a predetermined time elapses without setting the number of bets, the slot machine Volume reduction control means for performing control to lower the volume of the output sound effect,
Including
The volume reduction control means is also configured when the betting number return control is executed by the betting number return control means in a state where the sound output control means outputs a continuous game sound effect at the normal volume. the slot machine according to any one of claims 1 to 6, wherein the performing control to lower the volume of the sound effect output from the slot machine. A game control board equipped with the game control means;
A gaming electronic component including at least one of a first electronic component that outputs a signal related to the progress of the game and a second electronic component that receives a signal related to the progress of the game;
Wiring for electrically connecting the gaming electronic component and the game control board provided between the gaming electronic component and the gaming control board so as to be detachable by connection between connectors;
A relay board that is connected between the wiring and the connector and relays input / output of signals between the gaming electronic component and the gaming control board,
A connection release restriction state in which the connection between the connectors on the wiring between the gaming electronic component and the game control board cannot be released unless the release restriction part related to the connection between the connectors is destroyed. Electronic component connection release regulating means to be formed;
With
The electronic component connection release regulating means is
A first electronic component connection release restricting means for disabling connection between the connectors of the wiring between the game control board and the relay board;
Second electronic component connection release restricting means for disabling connection between the connectors of the wiring between the relay board and the gaming electronic component;
The slot machine according to any one of claims 1 to 7, characterized in that it comprises a.

Images